MASTER 


NO.  93-81201-2 


MICROFILMED  1993 
COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES/NEW  YORK 


as  part  of  the 
"Foundations  of  Western  Civilization  Preservation  Project" 


Funded  by  the 
NATIONAL  ENDOWMENT  FOR  THE  HUMANITIES 


Reproductions  may  not  be  made  without  permission  from 

Columbia  University  Library 


COPYRIGHT  STATEMErW 


The  copyright  law  of  the  United  States  -  Title  17,  United 
States  Code  -  concerns  the  making  of  photocopies  or 
other  reproductions  of  copyrighted  material. 


Under  certain  conditions  specified  in  the  law,  libraries  and 
archives  are  authorized  to  furnish  a  photocopy  or  other 
reproduction.  One  of  these  specified  conditions  is  that  the 
photocopy  or  other  reproduction  is  not  to  be  *'used  for  any 
purpose  other  than  private  study,  scholarship,  or 
research.'*  If  a  user  makes  a  request  for,  or  later  uses,  a 
photocopy  or  reproduction  for  purposes  in  excess  of  "fair 
use,"  that  user  may  be  liable  for  copyright  infringement. 


This  institution  reserves  the  right  to  refuse  to  accept  a 
copy  order  if,  in  its  judgement,  fulfillment  of  the  order 
would  involve  violation  of  the  copyright  law. 


AUTHOR: 


JENNINGS, 
GOULD 


TITLE: 

EARTH 


THE 


PLACE: 


NEW  YORK 


DATE: 


COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES 
PRESERVATION  DEPARTMENT 


Master  Negative  # 


^126) 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC  MICROFORM  TARHRT 


Original  Material  as  Filmed  -  Existing  Bibliographic  Record 


*1213 

!l 


I 


Restrictions  on  Use: 


ta4b*£a 


Jennings,  Abraham  Gould,  1821- 

The  earth  and  the  world.  How  formed  ?  A  layman's  con- 
tribution to  the  religious  thought  of  the  times,  by  Abraham  G. 
Jennings.  New  York,.  Chicago  letcj  Fleming  H.  Revell  com- 
pany (*1900j 

290  p.    I8i- 


1  nible  find  science.     2.  RellRlon  nnd  science— 1900-  \^%C  8.  Creation. 
4.  Nebular  hynothesls.   5.  Geolocrv.         i.  TifiA  ' 


Library  of  Congress 


BS650.J4 
ir41f2j 


2-25924  Revised 


218      \ 


TECHNICAL  MICROFORM  DATA 


FILM     SIZE:^3S;^t2i^_^       _^  REDUCTION     RATIO:^ 

IMA^E  PLACEMENT:    lA  (I^  IB    IIB 

DATE     FILMED:^3^^^?3 INITIALS,.  v^/^^S-___ 

HLMEDBY:    RESEARCH  PUBLICATIONS.  INC  WOODDRIDGE.  CT 


//^. 


^i». 


•v5. 


■■ni 


Association  for  Information  and  image  Management 

1100  Wayne  Avenue.  Suite  1100 
Silver  Spring,  Maryland  20910 

301/587-8202 


Centimeter 


niMiiiiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 


WT 


5        6 

4 


7        8        9       10       11       12       13      14       15   mm 

lllllllllllllllillllllMlllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll 


m 


fi 


II  I  I  I  I  I 


TTT 


I   i   I  1  I   I   I 


T 


Inches 


1.0 

1  LS, 

I& 

mtia.u 

1" 

22 

I.I 

2.0 
1.8 

1.6 

1.25 

1.4 

MRNUFflCTURED  TO  RUM  STflNDfiRDS 
BY  RPPLIED  IMAGE.    INC. 


<i^ 


^ 


Wj 


THE  EARM:-^m);;Tii::M*|« 


r  I 


in  nl       !       I       I     ■ 


ABRAHmCi*IE^ 


if        lit  !!<■ 


!:i:«ii:iiiii!''j!!B         !!   i  :ii 
mMl\'^\M  i'         hi 


Mr 
i     I 


MMiMl     M  I     W       !     i 


:     !!ii 


IM        !i       1   j 
Im   l!   M-,    i  Ml 


Hi         I         i 


Mil  I  ! MMJilin 


■■"■Mv:Mi*Wji  Hi-  !■  ■ 

l:HfriMi   1;  ]     ]        .H|       I 
'T'I'M    ''    M  I    ii    Ifl!'" 

i!M!'M     I     !  !ii!!  11:' 


!  :! 


H   ;■;■:!■; 'l-tH 


$W  iipi  ill 

1:|(      liir     til    (      ! 


ii    t; 


is  j"  ill 
:f;i;i';iil! 


nirmmmm-mi:]  mm 


iiili !  i 


I        I   I      ■ 
i    1   I   I     i 


'I  !ii  ijll!        I 

riil  I  iii! 


iklliiiliiJBII 


Hriiiii:!-  'ilHiii  ni 


I!|i  |i!  ! 


mim^ 


iM  i    M     '    M   ■ 

I  ;^  I   Ml  H     f 


-  JUhH 


M    MiMIMj 
M   Ii  i   I  111 


iiiiiiiM!, 


ai3 


3T^ 


itt  tti«  ©its  of  li^cw  ^orfe 


GIVEN    BY 


Auithor. 


■Ill 


M 


The  Earth  and  the  World— How  Formed  ? 


^1 


1^ 


J    ,  ^      t       i 


»  *  . 

>>  »  . 

»  1  > 

k  I  1 


>  t'         V  I  fr  t    J  a  , 


A  Layman's  Contribution  to  the 
Religious  Thought  of  the  Times 


BY 


ABRAHAM  G.  JENNINGS 


%tt 


ftwn 

LJki:^ 

k,Jt 

i  •      •  * 

>  •     I    ) 

D  9       9     3) 

'  »     •  .» 


•  *  J 

»  »  )  . 


The  Earth  and  the  World 
How  Formed? 


New  York  Chicago  Toronto 

Fleming  H.  Revell  Company 

Publishers  of  Evangelical  Literature 


•  «   t     • 


•    t 
,  I'  t 


I 
t       I 


t  *  I'  #  #    f 
i  I     1. 

»  t        i  • 
c 

«  ,1  *  I 


7 


Preface 


Copyright,  1900 

by 

FLEMING  H.  REVELL  COMPANY 


22 
in 


The  examination  of  the  prevalent  theories  re- 
lating to  the  formation  of  our  solar  system  in 
particular,  and  other  systems  in  general,  may 
seem,  to  many  persons,  to  be  a  matter  of  no 
practical  importance,  and  hardly  deserving  of 
one's  time  and  consideration.  This  would  be 
true  v^ere  it  merely  a  matter  of  some  speculative 
theory,  in  w^hich  no  principle  of  truth  was  in- 
volved, nor  the  peace  and  welfare  of  any  mortal 
being  thereby  endangered. 

The  question,  however,  is  one  of  more  than 
ordinary  interest.  Its  importance  is  supreme,  as 
it  involves  the  truth  of  the  Scriptures,  which  af- 
firm that  God  is  the  Creator  of  the  Heavens 
and  the  Earth.  This  God  Himself  distinctly 
claims  in  His  Word,  which  records,  also,  definite 
statements  concerning  the  creation  of  the  world 
that  are  either  inconsistent  with,  or  directly  op- 
posed to,  the  "Nebular  Hypothesis." 

In  the  creation  or  formation  of  the  Heavenly 
bodies,  the  "Nebular  Hypothesis,"  in  its  concep- 
tion, operates  independently  of  any  Creator.  It 
does  not  require  any  divine  architect  to  design, 
create,  establish  and  uphold  the  world  and  the 
universe,  as  we  know  it  to  exist.    It  discards 


2S8376 


Preface 


God  altogether,  or  removes  Him  so  far  away, 
that  His  handiwork  is  not  seen,  known,  or  ac- 
knowledged. 

These  are  some  of  the  reasons  that  have  de- 
cided the  writer  to  publish  the  result  of  his  ex- 
amination of  this  subject  matter,  and  his  convic- 
tions concerning  it,  and  what  he  believes  to  be 
some  of  the  facts  relating  to  the  creation  of  the 
world,  in  the  hope  it  may  lead  abler  writers  to 
examine  the  subject  thoroughly,  that  all  the  great 
facts  relating  to  God's  creation  may  be  learned, 
and  finally  be  made  known  for  the  good  of 
mankind. 

A.  G.  J. 

Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  February ^  igoo. 


Contents 


PAGE 


THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS 

The  "  Nebular  Hypothesis." — Examination  of  its  validity. 
— The  Hypothesis  of  La  Place  described. — Evidence 
which  its  Inventor  or  Defenders  should  produce. — 
Immensity  of  the  Nebula  when  the  planet  Neptune 
was  born. — Formation  of  the  so-called  Rings  improba- 
ble. — How  was  a  rotary  motion  given  to  the  Nebula  ? 
— How  did  the  great  ring  of  matter  first  thrown  ofiF, 
get  free  from  its  Nebula  ? 15 

II 

THE  NEBULAR   HYPOTHESIS  AND  THE  PLANETS 

A  Mystery  concerning  Uranus. — Delivery  of  the  planet 
Saturn. — Difficult  riddles  to  be  solved. — Jupiter  thrown 
off. — Facts  relating  to  Jupiter  disprove  the  existence 
of  the  Nebula. — Mars  bom. — So  small ;  What  is  the 
matter  ? — The  Earth  thrown  off. — Special  examination 
deferred. — After  the  earth,  Venus. — Mercury  born. — 
Its  specific  gravity  the  greatest,  when  it  ought  to  be 
the  least. — The  Sun. — Its  great  contraction. — Lord 
Salisbury  discredits  the  Hypothesis 30 

III 

THE  NEBULAR   HYPOTHESIS  AND  THE  EARTH 

The  Ring  that  formed  our  earth  considered. — How  did  it 
get  rid  of  the  imprisoned  Nebula  ? — The  internal  con- 
dition of  the  Nebula  when  the  ring  was  thrown  off. — 
Professor  Dana  quoted. — The  Nebula  not  dependent  on 

7 


Q 

o 


Contents 


PAOB 


any  supervising  power  or  agency.— Can  God  be 
charged  with  folly? — The  Nebular  theory  grounded 
on  assumptions.— It  partakes  of  the  spirit  of  the  age 
in  which  it  was  formulated 43 

IV 

THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS  AND  THE  ASTRONOMERS 
Brief  review  of  the  opinion  of  some  noted  Astronomers.— 
Views  of  Copernicus — Galileo.— Kepler.— Sir  Isaac 
Newton.— The  Law  of  Gravitation.— Sir  William 
Herschel — Sir  John  Herschel— Le  Verrier  and  Galle. 
— ^The  Right  of  Independent  Judgment. — Fallacious 

arguments.— Rev.  E.  F.  Burr  quoted The  Hypothe- 

lis  an  atheistical  theory 50 


THE  NEBULAE  HYPOTHESIS  AND  THE  SCIENTISTS 

The  wisdom  and  power  of  God  revealed  in  His  works.— St. 
Paul's  views  on  this  point — Our  limited  knowledge. 
—Modem  discoveries. — Improved  instruments  and 
appliances. — Some  facts  relating  to  the  formation  of 

the    earth.— Theories    that    are    improbable ^The 

•cience  of  Geology.— Is  our  earth  burning  at  the 
centre? — Flammarion  quoted. — Goodwin's  "Essays 
and  Reviews."- Campbell's  "Story  of  Creation."— 
Dana,  on  "  Archaean  Time  " 56 

VI 

THE  ATOMIC  AGE  OF  CREATION 

How  was  the  earth  formed  ?— What  elements  compose  its 
material?— The  Atomic  Age  of  creation. — Design 
manifested  in  the  creation  of  the  "  simple  elements." 
—The  special  laws  governing  water.— Innumerable 
results  from  the  varied  combinations  of  the  simple  ele- 
ments.— The  "  atomic  elements,"  and  the  laws  which 
control   them. — Professor  Balfour  Stewart's  view.^ 


Contents 


PAOl 

"  Order  is  Heaven's  first  law." — Action  of  Electricity 
and  Magnetism. — Varying  elements  in  the  Sun  and 
the  Earth 68 

VII 

A  REVIEW  OF  THE  MOSAIC  RECORD 

How  was  our  earth  formed  ?  A  review  of  the  Mosaic 
record. — The  "  six  days  of  creation." — ^The  creation  of 
"the    geological    earth." — Creation    of   the    earth's 

"crust." — First   chapter  of  Genesis  examined Dr. 

Adam  Clark  quoted. — The  forward  movement  of  crea- 
tion.— The  beginning  of  life. — When  did  God  create 
man  ? — The  "  Mistakes  of  Moses  "  examined. — A 
challenge  to  Unbelievers 87 

VIII 

OTHER  SCRIPTURAL  STATEMENTS 

Where  may  we  look  for  information  relative  to  God's  crea- 
tive work  ? — The  Book  of  Nature. — The  Book  of  Re- 
vealed Truth. — Design  everywhere  apparent  on  the 
earth. — Testimony  of  the  Psalms. — What  Isaiah  be- 
lieved.— Jeremiah  quoted. — The  plain  statements  of 
Jesus. — St.  Paul's  views. — The  laying  of  the  founda- 
tions of  the  earth. — General  Scriptual  teachings  .   .    .  m 

IX 

THE  TESTIMONY  OF  THE  BOOK  OF  JOB 

The  Book  of  Job  contains  the  Bible's  most  explicit  teach- 
ings concerning  the  foundation  of  the  earth.— At  what 
period  did  Job  live  ? — Scripture  evidence  that  Job  was 
a  real  character. — Where  was  the  land  of  Uz  ? — Who 
wrote  the  Book  of  Job  ? — Who  introduced  it  to  the 
patriarchal  church  ? — Melchizedec  King  of  Salem. — 
Melchizedec  and  Abraham. — Did  Abraham  possess 
the  Book  of  Job  ? — Esau  settled  in  the  land  of  Uz,  and 
called  it  Edom. — Jobab  of  Joktan. — Jobab  of  Esau. — 
Job's  faith  exceeds  even  his  patience 117 


lO 


Contents 


PAOB 


THE   PROCESSES   EMPLOYED  IN  THE  FORMATION 
OF  THE  EARTH 

What  processes  did  God  employ  in  building  our  earth  ? — 
Did  the  Comets  deliver  the  necessary  material? — 
Their  peculiar  fitness  for  such  service. — The  earth's 
orderly  strata. — "  Special  Acts  "  and  "  General  Laws  " 

considered. — The  definite  importance  of  our  earth 

The  laying  of  earth's  foundations  an  august  ceremony. 
—The  service  of  the  angels. — The  probable  process 
of  the  building  of  the  earth. — The  time  consumed  in 
the  work. — The  Creator's  definite  purpose  in  creating 
our  earth 136 

XI 

THE  AQUEOUS  AGE 

Importance  of  the  kw  of  affinity.— Relative  proportion  of 
land  and  water  on  the  earth's  surface.— The  definite  char- 
acter of  the  atomic  elements. — The  element  Electricity 
considered. — Electricity's  brother  Magnetism. — When 
and  how  was  water  introduced  on  the  earth  ? — Some 
of  its  important  effects  and  results. — How  were  the 
mountains  raised  ? — Illustration  of  the  mode  of  pro- 
cedure.— Changes  wrought  by  the  first  introduction  of 
water. — Leading  features  of  "  the  aqueous  age." — Ap- 
pearance of  our  earth  at  the  close  of  this  period   .    .    .153 

XII 

THE  MODIFYING  INFLUENCES  OF  THE  MOON 

The  preparation  of  the  earth  for  its  next  change. — How 
was  it  done  ? — The  moon  described.— The  power  of 
water  in  motion. — The  power  of  the  Moon  employed 

to  modify  the  face  of  the  earth Was  the  moon's  orbit 

ever  changed  ?— Evidences  of  the  action  of  moving 
water  on  the  earth's  surface. — How  the  moon  moves 

•  the  waters. — Much  of  the  work  credited  to  the  glaciers, 
was  done  by  moving  waters. — Proofs  of  this. — The 
orbit  of  the  moon  enlarged— Results  of  this  change.  .  177 


Contents 


11 


XIII 


PAOB 


THE  CARBONIFEROUS  AGE 

Arrival  of  the  Carboniferous  Age — The  dawn  of  life.— 
Forms  of  life  then  introduced,  not  meant  to  be  perma- 
nent.— These  forms  of  life  differed  widely  from  those 
of  to-day. — The  evidence  gathered  from  the  phos- 
phates.— During  this  age  the  earth  did  not  rotate  on 
its  axis. — The  formation  of  coal. — How  and  when 
were  the  glaciers  formed  ? — The  coal  beds  of  Ohio, 
Pennsylvania,  and  West  Virginia. — The  counteraction 
of  the  Moon  and  the  glaciers. — ^John  Muir's  theory. — 
Professor  Dana  on  the  coal  fields  of  Illinois. — The  ac- 
tion of  the  moon  in  the  formation  of  coal. — During  the 
carboniferous  age  both  vegetable  and  animal  life  were 
abundant      185 

XIV 

THE  MODIFICATION  OF  THE  EARTH'S  SURFACE 

Additional  proof  that  the  earth's  surface  was  modified  by 
the  action  of  moving  water. — The  geological  structure 
of  Ohio. — Boulders  from  Canada  found  in  Ohio. — The 

r 

formation  of  the  conglomerate  rocks. — The  power 
of  the  moon  further  discussed. — The  earth  in  a  state  of 
comparative  rest. — The  change  of  the  moon's  orbit. — 
The  renewal  of  the  earth's  motion 204 

XV 

THE  ACTION  OF  WATER  FURTHER  CONSIDERED 

A  survey  of  all  sections  of  the  United  States  exhibits  the 
effects  of  moving  waters  in  the  past. — The  work  of  the 
Moon  reviewed. — The  limitation  of  the  ocean  sur- 
faces.— The  utility  and  value  of  the  continents,  islands, 
rivers  and  seas. — Why  the  unequal  diameter  of  the 
earth  at  the  poles  and  the  equator  ? — Camille  Flam- 
marion's  view. — The  Author's  view. — A  simple  experi- 
ment.— The  theory  of  La  Place  proves  too  much. — The 


12 


Contents 


PAOS 


planet  Jupiter  considered.— The  equalization  of  the 

temperature  of  air  and  water The  movement  of  the 

ocean  currents. — Effects  on  climate. — The  voice  of 
Scripture 210 

XVI 

CHEMICAL  CHANGES  IN  EARTH'S  MATERIAL 

Evidence  of  great  chemical  changes  in  Earth's  material. 

Letter  of  Mr.  demons,  of  the  Glades,  Georgia.— Local 
evidence  of  the  great  age  of  the  Glades.— Wonderful 
variety  of  rocks  and  minerals  there  found.— Electricity ; 
its  nature,  power  and  effects.— How  electricity  does  its 
work — Its  energizing  power — Electricity  and  temper- 
ature— Its  rapid  movement.— Electricity  and  Earth- 
quakes.—Electricity  and  the  Volcanoes.— Nature's  safe- 
guards.— Nature's  restorative  forces. — Lessons  from 
the  Charleston  Earthquake  of  1886.— An  incident  in 
the  older  New  York.— Electricity  everywhere  present,  224 

XVII 

THE  GREAT  DELUGE 

The  great  deluge.— Proof  of  the  fact.— Brief  account  of 
it. — Discoveries  of  Pere  Scheil. — Dr.  John  Brown 
quoted — Interesting  Inferences. — The  moon  and  the 
deluge. — Scriptural  statements. — The  Genevan  Ver- 
sion.—The  Bishop's  Bible.— The  world  before  the 
flood. — The  sons  of  the  giants. — Arts  and  trades  before 
the  flood. — The  population  of  the  antediluvian  world. 
— ^Vessels  and  commerce. — The  building  of  the  Ark. — 
The  new  world  and  the  new  race  of  men 245 

XVIII 

THE    SUN 

The  Sun.— A  brief  description.— The  sun  a  perfect  globe. 
— Revelations  of  the  spectroscope.- Sun  spots.— Its 

spots  determine  the  period  of   its  revolution Sir 

Robert  Ball  quoted.— Probable  procedure  of  the  ma- 
terial elements  in  the  sun.— The  sun  an  independent 


Contents 


13 


PAGE 


self-sustaining  body. — M.  Flammarion's  opinion  of  the 
sun. — The  sun  surrounded  by  a  vacuum,  not  by  an 
atmosphere. — Why  does  the  sun  turn  on  its  axis  ? — 
The  office  and  work  of  electro-magnetism. — Statement 
of  the  plan  of  procedure. — Electro-magnetic  currents 
in  the  planets. — The  movements  of  the  planets  about 
the  sun. — The  sun's  force  of  gravity. — Its  influence  on 
the  planets. — The  sun  an  immense  '*  Driving-Pulley." 
— The  evidence  of  Design  in  the  sun 263 

XIX 

THE  PLANET  MARS 

Interesting  items  relating  to  the  planet  Mars. — Nearest  to 
our  earth. — Does  Mars  wear  an  ice-cap  ? — Electrical 
phenomenon  at  the  poles  of  the  planet. — The  satellites 
of  Mars. — Professor  Hall's  discoveries. — The  planet  a 
powerful  "  dynamo." — Its  peculiar  movements. — Mars 
and  the  moon 285 

XX 

CONCLUDING    REFLECTIONS 

A  Reminiscence. — Early  reading  and  study. — ^Theory  of  a 
"Central  Sun." — The  theory  discarded. — The  uni- 
versality of  gravitation Pamphlet  of  the  author  on 

"  The  Mosaic  Record."— A  series  of  "  Thats."— At- 
traction and  Repulsion. — ^These  forces  control  the 
solar  system. — God  works  in  secret. — Opinion  of  Rev. 
Dr.  Burr  on  the  Scriptural  points  raised.— Conclusion.  289 


-    '  1 


»      §    »  » 

,)  J  J      »   •       i 


f>       • '.       •      U       '' 


The  Earth  and  the  World— How  Formed  ? 


THE  NEBULAR   HYPOTHESIS 

1.  r^^  Hypothesis  Examined.— In  our  attempt 
to  disprove  the  ''Nebular  Hypothesis"  of  the 
formation  of  our  solar  system,  we  could  support 
our  position  by  presenting  many  proofs  drawn 
from  the  Scriptures  of  the  Old  and  New  Testa- 
ments, which  would  be  accepted  by  millions  of 
intelligent  men  and  women,  as  contradicting  that 
hypothesis;  yet  we  do  not  intend  to  offer  any 
such  evidence,  being  well  aware  that  it  would 
not  be  accepted  by  most  scientists,  as  well  as  by 
many  others,  as  furnishing  sufficient  proof  of  the 
truth  of  any  statements  thus  made.  We  shall 
therefore  aim  to  maintain  our  assertion  of  the 
baseless  fabric  of  the  "  Nebular  Hypothesis"  by 
reasonable  evidences,  resting  on  their  own  in- 
trinsic truth  and  merits,  independent  of  what 
may  be  termed  the  "revealed  truth  of  the 
Scriptures." 

2.  Laplace's  **  Nebular  Hypothesis"  De- 
scribed,—The  question  before  us  is,  what  is  the 
prevailing  theory  now  held  and  taught  by  scien- 
tists, and  accepted  by  many  intelligent  minds, 
including  religious  teachers,  as  facts  relating  to 

15 


t 
til 


•  ■  •     •    I 
«       •  t 

i        1  <• 


•'^6':":'.  The  Karth  and  the  World 


•    -  • 


•  ■ 


..the  (jreation  or  formation  of  our  solar  system  in 
y^ihtrdi'dnd  our  world  in  particular?  In  reply, 
we  state  that  the  *'  Nebular  Hypothesis  "  of  the 
formation  of  our  solar  system,— the  sun,  together 
with  all  the  planets  and  celestial  bodies  belong- 
ing to  it— is  the  favorite  theory;  and  it  appears 
to  be  the  only  one  accepted  or  advanced  by  the 
scientific  and  literary  world,  as  being  true. 

Laplace,  a  celebrated  astronomer  and  mathe- 
matician, has  the  credit  of  being  the  father  of,  or 
at  least,  the  principal  defender  of,  this  Hypothe- 
sis. A  publication  used  in  one  of  our  leading 
colleges,  states  Laplace's  Hypothesis  thus :  — 

'*He  supposed  that  in  ages  past,  the  matter 
now  forming  the  sun  and  planets,  was  in  the 
form  of  a  nebula.  That  the  nebula  was  a  cloud 
of  intensely  heated  gas.  That,  under  the  action 
of  its  own  gravitation,  it  assumed  a  globular 
form,  with  a  rotation  around  an  axis.  That 
hence,  the  mass  flattened  at  the  poles,  and,  be- 
cause of  centrifugal  force,  rings  of  nebulous 
matter  would  be  abandoned  at  the  equator,  like 
the  rings  of  Saturn.  That,  in  time,  this  ring 
would  break,  and  the  matter  collect  into  a  single 
globe.  That  this  planet  would  revolve,  and  in 
turn,  abandon  rings  which  would,  in  turn,  break. 
That  by  the  condensation  of  matter  by  force  of 
gravity,  and  by  the  great  velocity  of  this  revolving 
body  and  friction  of  its  materials,  great  heat  and 
light  would  be  generated,  producing  a  consum- 
ing fire,  which  would  continue  until  the  revolving 
body  was  consumed,  or  became  a  burned  out 


The  Nebular  Hypothesis 


17 


cinder."  This  is  a  brief  but  plain  statement  of 
the  "  Nebular  Hypothesis." 

There  has  been  published  in  France,  within  a 
few  years,  a  work  on  astronomy,  under  the  title 
of  "Popular  Astronomy,"  edited  by  Camille 
Flammarion,  an  astronomer  of  high  repute.  The 
work  has  not  only  met  the  approval  of  the  French 
savants,  but  also  that  of  the  French  Government, 
who  have  had  the  book  placed  in  their  schools  as 
a  standard  work. 

The  work  has  been  translated  into  English  by 
J.  Ellard  Gore,  F.  R.  A.  S.,  etc.,  who  is  himself  an 
author  of  astronomical  works.  It  has  been  re- 
published in  the  United  States  by  D.  Appleton  & 
Co.  As  the  book  gives  the  prevailing  and  popu- 
lar theory  of  the  formation  of  the  solar  system,  as 
mapped  out  by  Laplace,  we  shall  quote  from  it  as 
a  fair  exponent  of  the  prevailing  ideas  now  taught. 

We  quote,  then,  from  that  book  (**  Popular 
Astronomy  ")  as  follows:  '*  Well,  the  most  prob- 
able hypothesis,  the  most  scientific  theory,  is  that 
which  represents  the  sun  as  a  condensed  nebula. 
This  carries  us  back  to  an  unknown  epoch,  when 
this  nebula  occupied  the  present  place  of  the  solar 
system,  and  even  more;  an  immense  lens-shaped 
mass  of  gas  turning  slowly  on  itself,  and  having 
its  exterior  circumference  in  the  zone  which 
makes  the  orbit  of  Neptune,  or  further  still,  for 
Neptune  does  not  form  the  true  limit  of  the  sys- 
tem. Let  us  imagine  then,  an  immense  gaseous 
mass  placed  in  space.  Attraction  is  a  force  in- 
herent in  every  atom  of  matter.    The  denser  por- 


i8 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


lion  of  this  mass  will  insensibly  attract  toward  it 
the  other  parts,  and  in  the  slow  fall  of  the  more 
distant  molecules  toward  this  more  attractive  re- 
gion, a  general  motion  is  produced,  incompletely 
directed  toward  this  centre,  and  soon  involving 
the  whole  mass  in  the  same  motion  of  rotation." 

To  continue  IT-* 'The  laws  of  mechanics  show 
that,  as  this  gaseous  mass  condenses  and  shrinks, 
the  motion  of  the  rotation  of  the  nebula  is  accel- 
erated. In  turning,  it  becomes  flattened  at  the 
poles,  and  gradually  takes  the  form  of  an  im- 
mense lens-shaped  mass  of  gas.  It  has  begun  to 
turn  so  quickly  as  to  develop,  at  the  exterior  cir- 
cumference, a  centrifugal  force  superior  to  the 
general  attraction  of  the  mass,  as  when  we  whirl 
a  sling;  the  inevitable  consequence  of  this  excess 
is  a  rupture  of  the  equilibrium,  which  detaches  an 
external  ring.  This  gaseous  ring  will  continue  to 
rotate  in  the  same  time  and  with  the  same  veloc- 
ity; but  the  nebulous  mother  will  be  henceforth 
detached,  and  will  continue  to  undergo  progress- 
ive condensation  and  acceleration  of  motion. 
The  same  feat  will  be  reproduced  as  often  as  the 
velocity  of  rotation  surpasses  that  by  which  the 
centrifugal  force  remains  inferior  to  the  attrac- 
tion. It  may  have  happened  also,  that  secondary 
centres  of  condensation  would  be  formed  even 
in  the  interior  of  the  nebula." 

Continuing  the  quotation  from  "Popular  As- 
tronomy": The  most  distant  known  planet, 
Neptune,  would  be  detached  from  the  nebula  at 
the  epoch  when  this  nebula  extended  as  far  as 


The  Nebular  Hypothesis 


19 


the  planet,  out  to  nearly  3,000,000,000  of  miles; 
and  would  turn  in  a  slow  revolution,  requiring  a 
period  of  165  years  for  its  accomplishment. 

*'The  original  ring  could  not  remain  in  the 
state  of  a  ring  unless  it  was  perfectly  homogene- 
ous and  regular;  it  is,  so  to  say,  unrealizable,  and 
it  did  not  delay  in  condensing  itself  into  a  sphere. 
Successively,  Uranus,  Saturn,  Jupiter,  Mars,  and, 
the  army  of  small  planets,  would  thus  be  de- 
tached or  found  in  the  interior  of  this  same  neb- 
ula. Afterward  came  the  earth,  of  which  the 
birth  goes  back  to  the  epoch  when  the  sun  had 
arrived  at  the  earth's  present  position.  Venus 
and  Mercury  would  be  born  later.  Will  the  sun 
give  birth  to  a  new  world  ?  This  is  not  prob- 
able. For  this  purpose,  it  would  be  necessary 
that  its  rotation  should  be  enormously  acceler- 
ated: it  should  be  219  times  more  rapid.  That 
is,  the  sun  would  have  to  rotate  on  its  axis  in 
three  hours,  instead  of  in  twenty-five  days." 

The  Rev.  Dr.  Campbell,  in  his  **  Story  of  the 
Creation,"  writes  (page  40)  that  ''Laplace 
wrought  out  a  theory  known  as  the  '  Nebular 
Hypothesis,'  and  according  to  this  story,  all  the 
planets,  asteroids,  satellites,  suns,  and  moons  of 
the  great  group  to  which  we  belong,  and  which 
is  best  observed  in  the  '  Milky  Way,'  once  con- 
stituted such  a  nebula  as  we  sometimes  see  in 
the  far-oflf  sky." 

The  doctrine  is,  then,  that  all  these  stars  and 
systems  once  existed  as  a  thin,  impalpable  haze, 
filling  all  the  immense  spaces  now  intervening; 


10 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


that  somehow  this  nebula  was  set  whirling;  that 
in  process  of  whirling,  it  broke  up  into  frag- 
ments, and  that  these  fragments,  still  whirling, 
still  further  condensed,  and  eventually  consoli- 
dated into  the  world  and  systems  which  we  now 
behold. 

It  is  admitted  by  astronomers  that  the  nebula 
now  visible  in  the  heavens  does  not  belong  to 
our  solar  system :  that  it  is  as  far  ofif  as  the  near- 
est fixed  star,  and  even  further;  that  the  distance 
to  the  nearest  star  has  not  been  satisfactorily  de- 
termined, and,  at  the  best,  can  only  be  approxi- 
mately guessed  at,  for  it  is  stated  as  a  fact,  *'  that 
among  all  the  stars  in  the  sky,  there  is  not  one 
which  shows  a  parallax  of  one  second,  that  is, 
annual  motion  of  two  seconds,  which  is  suf- 
ficient as  a  basis  for  calculation  of  its  distance." 
This  being  so,  we  cannot  speculate  with  any 
certainty  regarding  the  nature  or  character  of  the 
nebulae  visible  in  the  far-off  heavens. 

^.  Evidence  Which  its  Inventor  or  Defenders 
Should  Produce,— lo  go  from  declared  effect  up 
to  cause,  it  belongs  to  the  inventor  of  the  hy- 
pothesis to  show  probable  cause,  or  origin  of  this 
tremendous  gaseous  mass;  and  how  it  was  accu- 
mulated in  one  complete  body.  This  information, 
neither  the  inventor  nor  its  advocates  have  given. 
Nor  have  they  stated  the  simple  elements  incorpo- 
rated in  this  wonderful  body.  If  this  nebula,  as 
claimed,  was  the  parent  of  the  sun,  and  of  all  the 
planets,  satellites,  and  other  bodies  belonging  to 
our  solar  system,  then,  at  its  beginning,  it  must 


The  Nebular  Hypothesis  21 

have  contained  in  itself  all  the  simple  elements 
known,  as  well  as  those  that  are  unknown,  that  ex- 
ist in  all  the  bodies  forming  our  solar  system.  If  all 
the  elements  were  not  in  the  nebula  at  the  begin- 
ning, how  were  they  afterward  added  to  or  gotten 
into  it,  so  as  to  form  important  component  parts 
of  the  body  ?  Think  of  all  the  known  elements 
in  our  earth,  to  say  nothing  of  the  sun,  and  other 
celestial  bodies.  Where  did  they  come  from, 
and  how  were  they  produced  ?  Was  there  any 
process  by  which  they  were  spontaneously  gen- 
erated in  the  nebula  itself  ?  If  all  the  simple  ele- 
ments found  in  our  earth,  or  known  to  be  in  our 
solar  system,  were  in  the  nebulous  mass  at  the 
beginning,  in  what  condition  did  they  exist? 
Was  each  element  separate  and  distinct  from  all 
other  elements,  or  were  they  all  mixed  indis- 
criminately, a  regular  conglomeration  of  all  things 
in  the  universe  ? 

It  is  understood  as  being  accepted  by  the  in- 
ventor, that  this  immense  nebula  forming  our 
solar  system,  was,  at  the  beginning,  previous  to 
its  giving  birth  to  the  first  planet,  in  a  state  of 
rest.  And  the  theory  also  is,  that  motion  was 
given  to  the  mass,  by  the  condensation  of  its 
gases,  and  the  attraction  of  its  molecules  toward 
the  centre,  which  would  tend,  as  claimed,  to  give 
the  vast  body  a  rotary  motion ;  and  also,  that  this 
internal  circulatory  movement  of  the  molecules 
would,  in  consequence  of  the  friction,  produce 
heat;  and,  the  more  rapid  the  movement  of  the 
gaseous  particles,   the  faster  would   the  great 


III 


22 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


nebula  turn  on  its  centre,  until  its  centrifugal 
force  was  greater  than  its  centripetal  force.  At 
this  period,  and  in  that  case,  this  immense  body 
would  commence  to  throw  off  from  its  surface, 
particles  of  gaseous  matter,  which,  according  to 
the  theory,  would  collect  together,  and  form  a 
ring  around  the  parent  body  of  gaseous  material ; 
and  the  new  ring  thus  formed,  would  have  the 
same  motions  as  the  main  body  from  which  it 
was  thrown,  and  revolve  about  it  in  the  same 
period  of  time. 

It  was  expected  that,  in  due  time,  this  ring 
would,  and,  in  fact,  did,  according  to  the  theory, 
break  up,  and  get  together  again  in  a  compact 
body,  one  great  globe;  which,  it  is  claimed,  was 
actually  the  case  with  the  planet  Neptune,  the 
one  farthest  from  the  sun,  the  firstborn  in  our 
system,  though  the  last  that  has  been  discovered. 

4  Immensity  of  the  Nebula  When  the  Star 
Neptune  was  Born, — It  is  claimed  by  the  inventor 
of  the  hypothesis  that  this  nebula,  the  mother  of 
our  solar  system,  must  necessarily  have  been  in 
its  diameter  and  circumference,  at  least  equal  to 
the  orbit  of  the  planet  farthest  from  the  sun, 
which  is  now  known  to  be  Neptune.  As  the 
distance  of  that  planet  from  the  sun  has  been 
ascertained  to  be  2,750,000,000  miles,  therefore 
it  follows  that  the  circumference  of  this  vast  neb- 
ula would  be  about  16,500,000,000  miles,  which 
dimension  is  far  beyond  the  comprehension  of 
mortal  man. 

From  the  records  of  facts  in  astronomy,  we 


The  Nebular  Hypothesis  23 

learn  that  the  planet  Neptune  completes  its  orbit 
about  the  sun  in  165  years.  Now  this  nebula, 
according  to  the  theory,  turns  on  its  own  centre 
in  the  same  time,  that  is,  once  in  165  years;  in 
the  doing  of  which,  its  equatorial  circumference 
passes  through  space  at  the  rate  of  over  11,000 
miles  per  hour. 

One  important,  in  fact,  necessary,  part  of  the 
hypothesis  is,  that  there  is  a  ring  formed  from 
the  material  of  the  nebula  which  is  thrown  off 
from  its  circumference  by  the  rapid  revolution  of 
the  great  body.    This  ring  is,   in  some  way, 
eventually  collected  together  and  formed  into  a 
solid  globe,  like  our  earth,  and  the  other  planets 
of  our  system.    It  may  be  well  to  consider  here 
the  inherent  or  material  composition  of  the  great 
nebula,  claimed  to  be  the  parent  of  our  solar  sys- 
tem.   If  it  was  of  a  gaseous  nature,  and  mainly 
of  hydrogen  gas,  as  affirmed,  we  would  remark 
that  it  is  the  nature  of  all  the  gases  to  expand, 
and  not  to  contract;  to  resist  pressure,  condensa- 
tion and  liquifaction,  even   under   tremendous 
pressure.    Hydrogen  gas,  when  confined  in  the 
balloon,  bursts  the  strong  canvas,  when  outside 
pressure  is  withdrawn.    The  gases  forming  the 
nebula  are  supposed  to  possess  the  same  nature 
and  characteristics  they  are  known  to  possess  on 
this  earth.    It  is  not  their  nature  to  condense, 
like  steam  of  water;  especially  if  they  are  in  a 
heated  condition,  as  they  are  said  to  have  been. 
It  is  true  that  while  some  of  the  gases  have  afiRn- 
ity  for  others,  and  under  certain  conditions  and 


24 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


f: 


1, 


proportions,  form  combinations  with  each  other, 
others  repel  and  refuse  union  with  any.  The 
gases,  as  a  rule,  all  resist  pressure.  No  force  of 
gravity  can  compel  those  light,  volatile,  elastic 
materials  to  contract,  condense,  and  settle  down 
to  the  centre  of  the  great  mass,  unless  there  is  an 
intense  degree  of  cold;  and  that  is  opposed  to 
the  hypothesis.  Rather,  on  the  contrary,  it  would 
seem  that  a  strong  covering  like  an  immense  rub- 
ber-bag would  be  required,  to  keep  the  gaseous 
elements  from  expanding  and  spreading  over  the 
universe. 

Besides,  in  the  various  combinations  of  these 
different  elements  many  dangerous  explosive 
compounds  would  necessarily  be  formed;  and 
the  great  nebula,  being  without  any  controlling 
head,  or  intelligent  governing  power,  would  be 
subject  to  many  a  destructive  catastrophe.  Some 
combinations  of  the  gases  or  elements  on  a  large 
scale  would  scatter  the  nebula  in  all  directions, 
and  might  even  shake  the  universe. 

As  the  movements  of  the  great  nebula,  internal 
as  well  as  external,  depend  on  chance,  and  are 
not  results  of  wise  design,  some  such  accident 
as  named  would  be  sure  to  have  happened  long 
before  it  was  time  for  our  earth  to  be  born.  Es- 
pecially would  this  be  likely  to  occur,  as  a  con- 
suming fire  was  one  of  the  elements  that,  ac- 
cording to  the  theory,  would  prevail  in  the 
interior  of  the  mass. 

5.     Formation    of  the   So-called   Rings    Im- 
probable,—\X  is  well  known  that  a  fast  revolving 


The  Nebular  Hypothesis  I5 

body  will  throw  off  from  its  surface,  anything 
that  is  loose  or  unsecured  to  it, — as  water  from  a 
wheel,  or  sparks  from  a  fire-wheel;  but  when 
thrown  off  or  parted  with,  by  the  revolving  body, 
they  cannot  be  gathered  together  again  unless 
there  is  some  substantial  outer  circle  that  will 
stop  the  flying  particles  in  their  progress,  and 
collect  the  same.  So  this  parent  nebula,  in  its 
rapid  motion  on  its  axis,  is  supposed  to  throw 
off  its  gaseous  material  to  form  a  planet,  or  burn- 
ing star.  How  is  the  so-called  ring,  that  is 
finally  to  resolve  into  a  solid  globe  like  the 
planets,  to  be  formed  ?  What  is  there  to  prevent 
the  material  which  is  thrown  off  from  the  main 
body  from  flying  off  in  all  directions  into  un- 
limited space  ?  The  centrifugal  force  that  was 
sufficient  to  throw  the  particles  of  matter  from 
the  main  body  would  certainly  impel  these  atoms 
to  move  forward  into  a  vacuum,  which  could 
present  no  resistance  to  their  continued  progress. 
Therefore,  according  to  natural  law,  it  would  be 
impossible  to  form  the  nebulous  rings,  as 
affirmed. 

According  to  the  law  of  force  of  gravity,  it 
seems  that  the  particles  of  matter  thrown  off 
from  the  main  body,  ought,  as  soon  as  they  had 
lost  the  impetus  given  them  by  the  rotating  body, 
to  have  returned  to  it,  as  a  cannon  ball  returns  to 
the  earth  after  having  been  shot  from  the  cannon ; 
or  as  the  eruptive  material  of  the  volcano,  thrown 
high  into  the  air,  falls  again  to  the  earth's  surface. 

Was  it  the  understanding  of  the  inventor  of 


f 


26 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


The  Nebular  Hypothesis 


27 


i- 


ii\ 


the  hypothesis  that  there  was  a  sort  of  general  or 
natural  assent  of  all  the  particles  thrown  off  from 
the  revolving  body,  to  proceed  from  it  only  cer- 
tain millions  of  miles,  and  then  stop,  and  wait 
for  a  further  accession  to  their  ranks  from  the 
parent  body  before  attempting  any  other  pro- 
cedure ? 

6.  How  was  a  Rotary  Motion  Given  to  the 
Great  Nebula  ?— The  question  is,  how  was  mo- 
tion given  to  it,  or  how  did  it  get  started  on  its 
career?  Remember  it  was  5,500,000,000  miles 
in  diameter;  16,500,000,000,  in  circumference;  of 
gaseous  material,  highly  attenuated,  as  affirmed; 
for  stars  can  be  seen  through  the  nebulae  in  the 
heavens.  How  did  this  immense  body  get 
started  ?  It  could  not  start  itself,  for  matter  lies 
inert.  Its  internal  motion,  if  it  had  any,  was  as 
likely  to  move  it  in  one  direction  as  another.  It 
is  not  to  be  supposed  that,  in  the  unlimited  space, 
there  would  be  any  breezes  that  would  blow  it 
over. 

One  author,  who  wrote  a  book  on  astronomy, 
(name  not  remembered)  and  who  favored  the 
"Nebular  Hypothesis,"  held  that  the  most  diffi- 
cult thing  to  account  for,  was,  how  motion  was 
given  to  the  great  nebula.  Well  he  might;  for 
it  is  a  mystery  how  it  was  started.  The  great 
gaseous  body,  not  having  any  tangible  point, 
must  have  been  too  thin  for  even  the  angels  to 
turn  over,  even  if  they  had  long  levers  and  a 
substantial  fulcrum  on  which  to  work  them.  If 
the  innumerable  host  had  all  got  on  one  side, 


that  would  not  have  turned  it  over,  for  being 
spiritual  beings,  they  are  supposed  to  be  without 
weight. 

Besides  the  external  motion  of  the  nebula,  on  its 
own  centre,  it  is  claimed,  and  it  is  a  part  of  the 
theory  of  the  inventor  of  the  hypothesis,  that 
there  is  an  internal  motion  of  its  molecules  or 
particles  of  matter,  which  forms  an  important 
and  necessary  link  in  proof  of  the  hypothesis. 
That  by  the  force  of  gravity,  inherent  in  every 
atom  of  matter,  the  molecules  of  the  great  body 
would  be  attracted  toward  the  centre,  and  this 
would  cause  an  internal  and  ever-increasing  cir- 
culation, as  well  as  direct  motion  of  the  mole- 
cules or  atoms,  the  constant  friction  of  which, 
with  each  other,  would  create  heat,— an  increas- 
ing degree  of  heat,— until  there  was  a  flame,  a 
consuming  fire,  a  burning  star  or  sun,  as  all  the 
planets  were  once,  as  affirmed  by  the  defenders 
of  the  hypothesis. 

Now  supposing  there  was  such  a  nebula,  the 
mother  of  planets,  we  do  not  perceive  under  what 
rule  there  would,  or  could,  be  any  such  motion 
of  its  atoms  as  claimed — a  movement  of  the 
atoms  circulating  among  each  other  like  a  swarm 
of  flies,  causing  friction,  heat,  etc. 

If  the  molecules  were  subject  to  the  force  of 
gravitation,  they  would  gradually  sink  toward  the 
centre,  as  fine  sand,  when  scattered  on  the 
water,  would  sink  to  the  bottom.  If  the  nebula 
was  in  any  way  similar  to  a  large  vat  of  new 
beer,   where  all  the  elements  were  vigorously 


20 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


working   to    change    their  identity,   we  might 
say,  there  was  cause  for  internal  commotion. 

The  rotation  of  the  nebula  on  its  axis  is  given 
as  a  reason  why  there  would  be  an  internal 
movement  of  its  particles  in  respect  to  each 
other.  Our  earth,  in  its  daily  revolution,  moves 
at  the  equator,  1,000  miles  per  hour,  yet  no  one 
perceives  it,  for  all  things  move  harmoniously 
with  it.  The  air,  water,  and  all  things  are  quiet 
in  respect  to  each  other,  and  are  in  no  way  dis- 
turbed by  the  rapid  rotation  of  the  earth;  and 
this  would  be  the  natural  rule  that  would  govern 
the  nebula. 

7.  How  did  the  Great  Ring  of  Matter  first 
Thrown  off,  get  Free  from  its  Nebuta  ?— There  is 
another  difficulty  connected  with  this  great  ring 
or  belt  formed  about  the  main  body,  that  is  too 
important  to  be  passed  over  without  being  ex- 
plained; and  that  is,  how  did  this  immense  ring 
of  matter  finally  get  separated  and  become  en- 
tirely disconnected  from  the  parent  body?  It 
will  be  remembered  that  this  body  was  over 
5,000,000,000  miles  in  diameter,  and  the  ring 
thrown  off,  therefore,  would  be  16,000,000,000 
miles  in  circumference,  more  than  1,000,000,000 
miles  wide;  depth  or  thickness  not  estimated. 

Now  for  the  ring  to  let  out,  or  get  rid  of,  the 
parent  body,  it  would  have  to  make  an  opening 
at  least  5,000,000,000  miles  for  the  parent  body 
to  squeeze  through;  but  during  the  process  of 
such  an  operation,  the  ring  would  certainly  lose 
its  bearings,  be  attracted  beyond  its  power  to  re- 


The  Nebular  Hypothesis  29 

sist,  and  again  join  the  parent  body;  unless,  on 
account  of  the  exigency  of  the  situation,  the  law  of 
gravitation  should  be  suspended  for  the  time  being. 

If  the  ring  should  separate  and  go  into  many 
pieces,  as  has  been  suggested,  the  question  then 
would  be,  how  would  they  get  together  again 
and  form  one  homogeneous  body  ?  The  great 
parent  nebulous  body,  complete  in  itself,  would 
have  a  thousand  times  more  power  to  attract  the 
pieces  of  the  ring  again  to  itself,  than  the  frag- 
ments of  the  ring  scattered  1,000,000,000  miles 
apart  would  have  to  get  together  and  form  one 
compact  body. 

It  has  been  suggested  that  the  great  nebulous 
ring  might  rise  up,  or  drop  down  5,000,000,000 
miles,  and  thus  let  out  the  parent  body.  But 
the  objection  to  that  proceeding  is,  it  would  throw 
either  the  ring  or  the  main  body  1,000,000,000 
miles  out  of  the  plane  of  the  orbit  of  all  the 
planets,  including  the  planet  Neptune.  This 
would  be  contrary  to  the  astronomical  laws 
known  to  govern  our  system. 

We  confess  we  are  unable  to  solve  the  dilemma. 
But  there  is  the  planet  Neptune  in  the  heavens, 
where  it  has  been  shining  on  forages;  and  the 
evolutionists  can  point  to  it  in  confidence,  as  an 
indubitable  fact  that  speaks  for  itself,  that  the 
planet  ring  was  finally  extricated  from  all  its 
difficulties,  and  became  the  solid  globe  and  star 
it  is  known  to  be;  but  how  all  this  was  accom- 
plished are  matters  apparently  of  no  consequence 
to  them. 


I 


;i 


THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS  A/4D  THE  PLANETS 

S.  The  Mystery  Concerning  Uranus. — After 
the  birth  of  Neptune,  the  nebulous  mass  seems 
to  have  shrunk  in  all  directions,  and  at  the  same 
time,  its  rotation  on  its  axis,  according  to  the 
theory,  was  greatly  increased.  After  another  age 
had  passed,  how  long  no  one  can  tell  or  surmise, 
the  nebula  had  thrown  off  a  great  mass  of  its 
material  substance,  which  was  duly  formed  into 
another  ring  about  the  nebulbus  body;  and  this 
new  ring,  in  due  time,  and  in  some  manner  not 
known,  was  resolved  into  a  separate  burning  star, 
and  finally  cooled  down  and  became  the  solid 
globe  now  known  as  the  planet  Uranus,  the  second 
star  born  into  our  solar  system,  as  far  as  is  known. 

This  planet,  Uranus,  according  to  astronomical 
records,  is  1,782,000,000  miles  distant  from  the 
sun,  which  is  about  1,000,000,000  miles  less  than 
the  planet  Neptune. 

One  naturally  asks,  why  did  the  great  nebula 
delay  so  long  before  forming  another  ring,  more 
than  ten  times  the  distance  of  our  earth  from  the 
sun?  Did  it  rotate  faster  or  slower?  Did  it 
grow  hotter  or  colder?  Its  shrinkage  in  its 
diameter  was  at  least  2,000,000,000  miles,  and, 
for  that  great  shrinkage,  it  ought  to  have  thrown 
off  a  vast  amount  of  its  gaseous  materials.    What 

30 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Planets     31 

has  become  of  it?  Astronomers  and  observers 
of  the  heavens,  aided  by  the  best  instruments 
man  has  been  able  to  produce,  after  careful 
search,  are  unable  to  find  in  the  heavens,  in  the 
1,000,000,000  miles  between  Uranus  and  Nep- 
tune, any  other  body. 

p.    Delivery  of  the  Planet  Saturn.    Riddles  to 
be  Solved,— The  next  star  or  planet  our  nebula 
has  the  credit  of  adding  or  introducing  into  our 
solar   system,  is   the    unique  and  well-known 
planet  Saturn.    This  planet  was  known  to  the 
ancients,  while  Uranus  and  Neptune  were  not. 
Saturn  is  some  900,000,000  miles  nearer  the  sun 
than  Uranus,  and  the  same  inquiries  arise  as  were 
made  in  reference  to  Uranus;  namely,  why  did 
the  parent  nebula  delay  so  long,  and  why  permit 
900,000,000  miles  of  space  to  intervene  before 
forming  another  ring,  that  was  to  be  resolved 
into  a  burning  star  and,  in  due  time,  a  planet 
world.    Will   the   defenders  of   the   ''Nebular 
Hypothesis  "  please  explain  ?    Saturn  is  the  won- 
der of  our  solar  system ;  it  is  unlike  any  of  the 
other  bodies  in  it,  and  so  far  as  is  known,  any  in 
the  universe. 

Saturn  is  larger  than  Neptune  and  Uranus 
joined  together,  though  its  density  is  much  less. 
Its  specific  gravity  being  the  least  of  any  one  of 
the  bodies  belonging  to  our  solar  system.  Its 
gravity  is  eight  times  less  than  our  earth,  and  less 
than  three-fourths  that  of  water. 

The  lack  of  density  in  this  planet  is  a  very 
singular  element,  if  it  was  evolved  from  the  same 


r,' 


32 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


>i 


nebula  supposed  to  be  the  parent  of  all  the  other 
bodies  in  our  solar  system.  According  to  the 
law  of  force  that  rules  in  revolving  bodies,  the 
heaviest  parts  of  the  material,  if  at  liberty  to 
change  position,  gravitate  toward  the  outer  edge 
of  the  revolving  body.  Therefore  this  nebula 
ought  to  have  thrown  off  its  heaviest  material 
first,  and  not  last,  as  in  the  case  of  the  planet 
Mercury,  which,  in  specific  gravity,  is  sixteen 
times  heavier  than  Saturn;  for  Mercury,  accord- 
ing to  astronomical  records,  is  as  **  heavy  as 
lead."  Of  all  the  bodies  in  our  solar  system  no 
two  agree  in  density,  and  all  differ  in  very  many 
particulars,  which  is  both  surprising  and  difficult 
to  account  for,  if,  according  to  this  theory,  they 
were  all  evolved  from  the  same  material  body. 
We  should  no  more  expect  this  than  we  would 
expect  that,  from  the  same  fountain,  would  issue 
forth,  both  sweet  and  bitter  waters.  Our  nebula, 
not  being  under  the  control  of  any  governing 
power,  is  certainly  very  erratic  in  its  movements. 
The  peculiar  distinction  of  the  planet  Saturn, 
which  gives  it  an  eminence  above  all  other 
bodies  in  the  heavens,  is  the  great  rings,  separate 
and  distinct,  that  surround  the  main  body  and 
give  to  it  its  unique  and  peculiar  appearance.  We 
do  not  know  whether  the  defenders  of  the 
**  Nebular  Hypothesis  "  ever  attempted  to  show 
how  such  a  peculiar  body  could  be  formed  by 
their  theory.  We  cannot  conceive,  ourselves, 
how  it  might  be  accomplished.  Yet  the  planet 
Saturn  seems  to  be  in  fault,  innocently  however, 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Planets     33 

for  suggesting  to  the  inventor  of  the  hypothesis, 
the  idea  of  great  rings  forming  the  bodies  in  the 
solar  system.  Aside  from  the  ' '  Nebular  Hypoth- 
esis," no  one  on  the  earth  knows  for  what  use 
or  purpose  the  Almighty  designed  and  created 
that  particular  planet.  Evidently  no  such  work 
is  done  on  it  as  man  performs  on  this  globe  of 
ours.  It  is  a  sort  of  central  body,  about  half  way 
between  the  boundaries  of  the  system  and  the 
sun.  It  may  be  a  rendezvous  for  the  angels:  an 
*'  angelic  observatory  "  for  the  use  of  the  angels  in 
charge  of  our  solar  system. 

/o.  Next  Great  Jupiter  Thrown  Off.  Facts 
Relating  to  Jupiter  Disprove  the  Existence  of  the 
Nebula.— The  next  body  in  our  solar  system  after 
Saturn,  is  the  planet  Jupiter,  which  according  to 
the  hypothesis,  is  the  fourth  one  thrown  off  by 
the  great  nebula  in  the  form  of  a  ring  of  nebulous 
matter,  and  which  afterward  gathered  itself  to- 
gether, in  some  way,  and  made  the  glorious 
Jupiter,  the  prince  of  planets,  the  pride  of  our 
solar  system. 

The  diameter  of  Jupiter  is  88,000  miles,  and,  in 
mass,  it  is  larger  than  all  the  other  planets  and 
satellites  put  together;  while,  in  many  respects, 
is  unlike  any  one  of  them.  Jupiter  is  distant 
from  Saturn  only  about  400,000,000  miles,  while 
the  preceding  planets  were  separated  in  space 
1,000,000,000  miles  from  each  other.  What  is 
surprising  in  the  matter  is,  that  the  great  nebula 
should,  in  the  space  of  400,000.000  miles  deliver 
itself  of  a  body  much  larger  than  the  three  pre- 


't'f^ 


34 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


:i\ 


l:!l 


ceding  planets  massed  together,  in  the  formation 
of  which,  the  nebula  had  decreased  about  4,000,- 
000,000  miles.  It  is  impossible  to  account  for 
these  contradictory  results. 

The  density  of  Jupiter,  while  it  is  greater  than 
that  of  Saturn,  is  only  one-fourth  that  of  our 
earth.  The  incFmation  of  its  equator  toward  its 
orbit  is  less  than  that  of  any  of  the  other  planets ; 
in  fact,  it  is  so  small  that  it  has  no  summer  nor 
winter,  nor  any  of  the  seasons  that  we  experience. 
The  rotation  of  Jupiter  on  its  axis  is  very  rapid, 
rotating  once  in  less  than  ten  hours.  While  our 
earth,  at  the  equator,  passes  through  space  at  the 
rate  of  1,000  miles  per  hour,  and  the  sun,  at  its 
equator,  about  4,300  miles  per  hour,  the  planet 
Jupiter,  at  its  equator,  moves  with  a  velocity  of 
27,000  miles  per  hour;  while  the  same  planet, 
in  revolving  about  the  sun,  passes  through  space 
only  about  22,000  miles  per  hour. 

How  are  we  to  account  for,  or  reconcile,  all 
these  dissimilar  and  contradictory  results  in  every 
direction,  of  all  the  bodies  in  our  system,  if  they 
all  proceeded  from  one  mother  nebula }  Is  not 
the  inference  as  plain  as  day,  that  all  the  bodies 
in  our  solar  system  were  separately  designed, 
formed,  or  created,  and  that  to  each  was  given  its 
own  distinctive  characteristics  and  movements, 
independent  of  all  others.  If  the  great  nebulous 
body,  at  the  beginning  of  our  solar  system,  while 
turning  on  its  axis  once  in  165  years,  as  affirmed, 
and  moving  at  its  circumference,  at  the  rate  of 
M,ooo  miles  per  hour,  was  able  to  throw  off  the 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Planets     35 

ring  that  finally,  in  some  way,  formed  the  planet 
Neptune,  then  why  ought  not  Jupiter,  going  at 
Its  circumference,  at  the  rate  of  27,000  miles  per 
hour,  or  nearly  two  and  a  half  times  as  fast,  to  be 
throwing  off  material  at  a  rapid  rate  ?  Especially 
ought  that  planet  to  do  it,  if  done  in  the  first  in- 
stance; for  the  force  of  gravity  on  Jupiter  would 
be  less  than  it  was  on  the  nebulous  body  before 
It  had  parted  with  any  of  its  planet-building  ma- 
leriai. 

The  polar  diameter  of  a  number  of  the  planets 
IS  less  than  their  equatorial  diameter.    They  are 
what  IS  called  "flattened  at  the  poles."    In  this 
respect,  Jupiter  is  more  marked  than  any  of  the 
other  planets.    The  inventor  and  advocates  of 
the  "  Nebular  Hypothesis  "  confidently  claim  this 
feature  as  a  sure  evidence  of  the  truth  of  their 
theory.     We  hold  that  this  item  or  feature  rela- 
tive to  some  of  the  bodies  in  our  solar  system  is 
the  result  of  careful  design  on  the  part  of  the 
Creator,  to  accomplish  a  certain  purpose,  which 
truth,   later  on,    we  expect  to  establish  to  the 
satisfaction  of  all  reasonable  minds. 

The  great  nebulous  body  that,  at  the  beginning 
of  Its  career,  was  about  5.600,000,000  miles  in 

TT'T'^  '■"'""'*  *"  about  960,000,000  miles 
after  the  deliverance  of  Jupiter. 

J'A    ^V   ^°''"-    ^   ^'««^'-     ^ft'^t  «   the 
Matter?— The  next  planet  to  be  born,  or  thrown 

off  from  this  nebulous  mass,  either  in  a  body  by 

Itself,  or  in  the  form  of  a  ring,-for  the  Hypothesis 

allows  either,— was  the  planet  Mars,  the  smallest 


II 


36 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


III' 


in  the  system  except  Mercury.  Mars  is  about 
340,cxx),ooo  miles  nearer  the  centre  of  the  body, 
— our  now  existing  sun — than  is  the  planet 
Jupiter.  Every  one  must  notice  the  vast  differ- 
ence in  the  size  of  the  two  planets;  Jupiter,  im- 
mensely large,  Mars,  exceedingly  small.  What 
could  have  been  the  matter  with  the  great  nebula  ? 
Was  it  completely  exhausted  after  the  deliver- 
ance of  the  mighty  Jupiter? 

The  density  of  Mars  is  three  times  greater  than 
that  of  Jupiter,  and  so  far  as  any  of  its  character- 
istics are  known,  it  does  not  appear  to  have  a 
single  element  agreeing  with  the  great  planet. 
Between  Mars  and  Jupiter  there  are  a  great  many 
small  bodies,  now  estimated  at  several  hundred 
in  number,  revolving  about  the  sun,  called  the 
Asteroids,  and  which,  according  to  the  theory  of 
some  astronomers,  were  once  united  in  one 
body,  from  which  they  were  disrupted,  and  the 
several  parts  scattered  as  they  are  now  known  to 
be.  If  the  whole  number  were  united  in  one 
mass,  it  would  hardly  equal  Mars  in  size.  Ac- 
cording to  the  theory,  these  asteroids,  or  small 
remnants  of  a  planet,  must  be  considered  as  hav- 
ing been  thrown  off  from  the  nebula,  either  as 
one  body,  or  separately,  and  at  different  periods, 
as  they  were  found  to  be  in  the  heavens. 

12.  The  Earth  Thrown  Off,  Special  Exami- 
nation Deferred. — The  planet  next  after  Mars,  to 
be  introduced  into  our  solar  system  by  the  great 
nebula,  according  to  the  Hypothesis,  was  our 
own  Earth,  concerning  which  we  know  a  vast 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Planets     37 

deal  more  than  we  do  of  any  of  the  other 
heavenly  bodies.  Of  the  elements  above  our 
heads,  and  beneath  our  feet,  that  go  to  make  up 
this  world  of  ours,  we  have  particular  and  posi- 
tive knowledge;  and  in  this  respect  we  are 
favored  over  the  other  bodies  in  our  system. 

Our  earth  is  distant  about  92,000,000  miles 
from  the  sun,  being  about  50,000,000  miles  nearer 
to  it  than  the  orbit  of  Mars.     Between  us  and  the 
sun,   are  the  planets  Venus  and  Mercury,  the 
former  about  25,000,000,  and  the  latter  about  56,- 
000,000  miles  distant  from  us  in  their  orbits. 
Our   earth    is    about  8,000  miles  in  diameter, 
rotates  on  its  axis  in  twenty-four  hours,  and  re- 
volves about  the  sun  in  365  days.     The  density, 
or  specific  gravity  of  our  earth  is  greater  than  that 
of  any  other  body  in  our  system,  except  the 
planet  Mecury. 

In  examining  the  ''Nebular  Hypothesis,"  to- 
gether with  the  conditions  known  to  exist  in  our 
earth,  and  testing  the  truth  of  the  theory  by  the 
facts  of  the  case,  there  is  much  to  be  considered. 
We  will  therefore  leave,  for  the  present,  the 
further  consideration  of  the  earth's  conditions, 
and  proceed  to  note  the  conditions  of  the  remain- 
ing bodies  belonging  to  our  solar  system. 

13.  After  the  Earth,  t^enus.'-The  next  body 
to  which  the  great  nebula  gave  birth,  and  which 
followed  the  earth  in  its  introduction  into  our 
system,  was  the  planet  Venus,  so  well  known  by 
all  observers  of  the  skies  as  the  beautiful  morn- 
ing and  evening  star.     Venus  is  a  little  less  in 


i 


i 


\. 


1 


1 


38 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


ill 


density  than  our  earth,  revolving  about  the  sun  in 
22^  days,  and  rotating  on  its  axis  in  a  httle  less 
than  twenty-four  hours,  as  now  seems  to  be 
ascertained.  Some  competent  observers  have  of 
late,  declared  that  Venus  does  not  rotate  at  all  on 
its  axis,  but  always  presents  the  same  side  to  the 
sun.  The  inclination  of  its  equator  to  its  orbit 
has  not  been  determined. 

14.  Mercury,  the  Last  and  Smallest  of  the 
Planets  Born.  Its  Specific  Gravity  the  Greatest 
when  it  Ought  to  be  the  Least.— The  next  and  last 
planet  to  be  delivered  to  the  solar  system  by  the 
great  nebula,  was  the  smallest  of  all  the  known 
planets.  Mercury.  It  is  only  about  3,000  miles  in 
diameter,  but  its  density  is  more  than  twice  that 
of  any  of  the  other  bodies  in  our  system.  It  is 
heavier  than  lead.  Who  knows  but  that  gold 
may  be  one  of  its  principal  ingredients,  and  that 
it  may  be  the  "golden  planet."  Just  as  gold  is 
hard  to  get  or  find,  so  it  is  difficult  for  observers 
to  find  the  planet  Mercury  in  the  heavens. 

According  to  the  law  of  motion  in  rotating 
bodies,  if  the  rapidity  of  the  revolution  is  suffi- 
cient to  overcome  the  gravity  of  the  material,  the 
heaviest  materials  will  move  toward  the  outer 
circumference,  and  then,  by  the  power  of  centrif- 
ugal force,  be  thrown  off  from  it;  just  the  same 
as  when  a  large,  strong  and  heavy  fly-wheel,  re- 
volving rapidly,  bursts  or  breaks,  and  sends  the 
pieces  of  its  rim  flying  and  crashing  through  the 
building.  Now,  Mercury  ought  to  have  been 
delivered  by  the  great  nebula  ages  before  our 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Planets     39 

earth  was  born.  Perhaps  the  advocates  of  the 
"Nebular  Hypothesis "  can  explain  why  the  law 
governing  centrifugal  force  was  then  inoperative, 
and  furnish  certain  other  particulars  that  seem 
inexplicable. 

75.     Last  of  ^11  the  Sun.    Its  Great  Contrac- 
tion from  70,000,000  Miles  Diameter  to  Less  than 
j900, 000. —After  the  birth  of  the  planet  Mercury, 
the  great  body  of  nebulous  matter  supposed  then 
to  be  70,000,000  miles  in  diameter,  and  over  200,- 
000,000  miles  in  circumference,  rotating  on  its 
axis  at  a  rapid  rate,  all  aglow  with  fire,  did  not, 
as  far  as  it  has  been  ascertained,  ever  throw  off 
another  body,  but  began  to  condense  in  every 
direction,  until  it  shrank  to  the  present  size  of 
our  sun,  its  diameter  being  about  860,000  miles, 
which  is  much  less  than  one-hundred-and-twen- 
tieth  part  of  the  size  of  the  nebula  after  Mercury 
was  born. 

Professor  Flammarion,  author  of  the  "Popular 
Astronomy,"  (page  72),  writes,  "Well,  the  most 
probable  hypothesis,  the  most  scientific  theory, 
is  that  which  represents  the  sun  as  a  condensed 
nebula."    After  so  great  a  condensation  of  the 
material  of  the  great  nebula,  we  would  naturally 
expect  the  sun,  a  body  of  860,000  miles  in  diam- 
eter, having  been  reduced  from  70,000,000  miles 
in  diameter  to  less  than   1,000,000,  to  be  very 
dense;  and  that  its  specific  gravity  would  be 
greater  than  that  of  any  of  the  other  bodies  in 
our  system.     But  how  is  it  ?    So  far  from  having 
great  density,  it  has  less  than  any  of  the  bodies 


40  The  Earth  and  the  World 


H' 


I 


il 


i 

mi 

(3 


in  the  system.  Its  specific  gravity,  as  recorded, 
is  only  one-fourth  that  of  water.  It  is  only  one- 
fiftieth  that  of  Mercury,  the  last  planet  thrown 
off  by  the  nebula.  Will  the  defenders  of  the 
'*  Nebular  Hypothesis  "  explain  why  these  things 
are  so,  or  account  for  facts  so  contrary  and  in- 
consistent with  their  theory  ? 

Another  item  relating  to  the  sun,  is  its  com- 
paratively slow  rotary  movement;  while,  accord- 
ing to  the  theory,  it  ought  to  go  very  fast.  At 
its  equatorial  diameter,  it  moves  through  space 
about  4,000  miles  per  hour,  while  Jupiter  and 
Saturn  move  about  25,000  miles  per  hour.  In 
their  orbits  about  the  sun,  all  the  planets  move 
much  faster;  Mercury,  the  last  planet  thrown  off, 
passes  through  space  about  2,500,000  miles  per 
day,  or  100,000  miles  per  hour,  twenty-five  times 
faster  than  the  sun. 

The  inventor  of  the  Hypothesis  has  claimed  all 
along  that  the  flattening  at  the  poles  of  most  of 
the  bodies  in  the  solar  system,  or  the  fact  that 
the  polar  diameter  was  less  than  the  equatorial 
diameter,  was  one  evidence  of  the  truth  of  the 
theory.  Now  we  do  not  think  they  can  truth- 
fully deny  that  if  there  is  any  one  body  in  the 
solar  system  that  ought,  according  to  the  Hypoth- 
esis, to  have  its  poles  greatly  flattened,  that  body 
must  be  the  sun.  But  here  their  theory  utterly 
fails  them.  The  equatorial  and  polar  diameters 
of  the  sun  are  equal.  It  is  the  most  perfect  globe 
in  the  system.  As  is  well  known,  the  poles  of 
our  earth  are  flattened.     When  we  examine  the 


I 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Planets     41 

matter  further,  we  expect  to  be  able  to  show  that 
there  was  an  accurate  design  to  meet  a  positive 
necessity  for,  or  rather,  a  great  and  good  pur- 
o?the*eartV^''^"'  by.  this  flattening  of  the  poles 

*■».?",?"?•  ^u^  ""^'^  ^"'^  «'°''y  of  our  solar  sys- 
tem, the  light  and  life  of  all  the  heavenly  bodies 
composing  it.  "the  bright  orb  of  day."  is  the 
source  of  innumerable  blessings  to  the  earth  and 
all  that  live  on  it.  and,  doubtless,  to  all  the  planets 
■n  our  system,  for  without  it,  all  would  be  en- 
veloped in  deep  darkness  and  in  cold,  icy  death 
I  he  sun  dispenses  to  our  earth,  and  to  all  the 
bodies  in  our  system,  all  needed  light,  heat,  the 
invigorating  powers  of  electricity  and  magnet- 
ism, and  other  benign  influences  not  yet  fully 
ascertained;  besides  imparting  motion  to.  and 
controlling  the  movements  of,  all  the  heavenly 
bodies  with  which  we  are  acquainted 

in  IM'''  '"":i ""''  "'"'**''  ^^°^^'  «>■«  manifested, 
n  a  thousand  ways,  infinite  power,  wise  design 

and  goodness  beyond  expression;  and  the  iL 

that  that  great  and  glorious  body,  which  has 

tail  end  of  an  incongruous,  haphazard  nebula,  is 
preposterous  and  absurd  beyond  degree. 

i6.  Lord  Salisbury s  Statement  of  Facts  Dis- 
credtttngthe  -  Nebular  Hypothesis/- As  an  out- 
side support  of  our  argument,  we  quote  the  fol- 
^wing  statement  taken  from  an  English  paper, 
which  IS  worthy  of  attention.  At  the  sixty-fourth 
annual  meeting  of  the  British  Association  for  the 


-i''1 


4i 


The  Hiarth  and  the  World 


i   it 


advancement  of  science,  the  President,  Lord  Salis- 
bury, also  Chancellor  of  the  University  of  Oxford, 
made  the  opening  address.  Quoting  from  one 
of  the  London  daily  papers:  '*Lord  Salisbury, 
among  other  items,  said,  'Conspicuous  among 
the  scientific  enigmas  which  still  defy  solution,  is 
that  regarding  the  nature  and  origin  of  the  chem- 
ical elements.  Of  these,  sixty-five  are  known  to 
us,  but  only  one-third  of  them  seem  needed  to 
form  the  substance  of  this  planet.  Another  third 
are  useful,  but  somewhat  rare;  while  the  remain- 
ing third  are  curiosities.  Upon  what  law  or  prin- 
ciple this  seeming  random  collection  of  dissimilar 
materials  was  brought  together,  the  chemist  is  as 
yet  unable  to  reply." 

"Attention  was  directed  to  the  fact  that  nitro- 
gen and  oxygen  are  absent  from  the  spectrum  of 
the  sun,  although  these  two  elements  constitute 
the  largest  portion  of  the  solid,  liquid  and  aerial 
components  of  the  earth.  Bearing  this  in  mind. 
Lord  Salisbury  propounded  to  physicists,  the  fol- 
lowing conundrum :  If  the  earth  is  a  detached 
bit,  whirled  off  the  mass  of  the  sun,  how  comes 
it  that,  in  leaving  him,  we  cleaned  him  out  so 
completely  of  his  nitrogen  and  oxygen  that  not  a 
trace  of  these  gases  remains  to  be  discovered, 
even  by  the  sensitive  vision  of  the  spectroscope  ? 
Other  riddles  were  touched  upon  by  the  President 
of  the  British  Association." 

The  facts  here  stated  by  Lord  Salisbury  are 
alone  sufficient  to  prove  the  "Nebular  Hypothe- 
sis "  to  be  but  "a  dream  of  a  whirling  brain." 


Ill 


THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS  AND  THE  EARTH 

77.  The  Ring  that  Formed  Our  Earth  Con- 
sidered.—In  our  examination  of  the  Hypothesis 
in  the  consecutive  order  in  which  the  several 
bodies  are  supposed  to  have  been  introduced  into 
our  system,  we  deferred  the  particular  investiga- 
tion of  the  truth  of  the  theory,  as  far  as  it  relates 
to  our  earth,  until  we  had  briefly  considered  all 
the  bodies  included  in  the  solar  system. 

We  would  now  direct  attention  to  the  great 
ring  thrown  off  by  the  nebula  from  which  our 
earth  was  formed.  It  is  understood  that  our 
earth  absorbed  and  stowed  away  all  the  contents 
of  that  great  ring  of  nebulous  matter,  leaving 
nothing  to  float  away  or  be  circulating  through 
space,  for  otherwise  that  would  militate  against 
the  theory. 

This  immense  ring,  the  first  step  from  the 
nebula  in  tjie  formation  of  the  earth,  its  step- 
mother, as  it  might  be  called,  representing  as  it 
does,  the  circumference  of  the  earth's  orbit,  must 
have  been  about  600,000,000  miles  in  circumfer- 
ence, also  many  millions  of  miles  thick  and  broad 
or  wide.  Its  size  is  beyond  our  comprehension. 
This  immense  ring  of  nebulous  matter,  according 
to  many  present-day  writers  on  astronomy,  in 

43 


SA 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


I' I 


I 


the  course  of  time,  became  so  condensed  and 
contracted  that  it  finally  resolved  itself  into  one 
globe,  forming  our  solid  and  compact  earth. 
How  this  feat  was  accomplished,  we  cannot 
imagine.  Will  the  advocates  of  the  Hypothesis 
please  give  us  the  "modus  operandi"  of  the 
transformation  ? 

After  the  ring  was  thrown  off  by  centrifugal 
force,  generated  by  the  rapid  rotation  of  the 
nebula  on  its  axis,  the  first  thing  for  it  to  do  was 
to  get  rid  of  the  nebula  imprisoned  within  its 
circle,  or  for  the  nebula  to  free  itself  from  the 
ring.    We  do  not  know  how  it  was  done,  but 
there  are  two  ways  in  which  it  might  have  been 
done,  certain  laws  being  suspended.     One  would 
be  for  the  nebula  either  to  rise  up  or  fall  below 
the  ring  some  30,000,000  or  40,000,000  miles; 
the  other  way  would  be  for  the  ring  to  break  in 
pieces  and  scatter,  or  make  an  opening  and  let  the 
parent  nebula  out;  in  which  case,  the  aperture 
would  have  to  be  at  least  70,000,000  miles  wide. 
But  both  these  ways  are  beset  with  difficulties. 
The  great  nebula,  revolving  rapidly,  would,  by 
its  motion,  be  unable  to  rise  or  fall  below  the 
ring,  and  if  it  were  possible  for  it  to  get  rid  of 
the  ring  in  that  way,  it  would  find  itself  many 
millions  of  miles  out,  away  from  the  plane  of 
the  orbit  that  is  now  known  to  be  the  same  for 
the  sun  and  all  the  planets.    But  if  the  ring  sepa- 
rated and  went  to  pieces,  they  would  lose  their 
power,  and  the  pieces,  by  the  law  of  gravity, 
would  fall  back  into  the  great  nebula.     We  leave 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  the  Earth    45 

these  and  many  other  enigmas  for  the  defenders 
of  the  Hypothesis  to  solve. 

One  mysterious  thing  about  this  great  ring  of 
nebulous  matter  that  was  over  500,000,000  miles 
in  circumference,  the  parent  of  our  earth,  is,  how 
under  the  sun  (or  over  the  sun,  as  this  ring  en- 
closing it  must  have  been)  did  it  get  its  long,  ana- 
conda shape  together,  and  finally  form  one 
orderly,  well-built,  solid  earth,  of  only  8,000 
miles  in  diameter.  It  belongs  to  the  advocates 
of  the  *' Nebular  Hypothesis"  to  state  some 
plausible  way  in  which  it  might  have  been  ac- 
complished. 

18,     The  Internal  Condition  of  the  Nebula 
When  the  Ring  Forming  the  Earth  was  Thrown 
Off.— It  will  be  well  to  consider  next,  the  internal 
condition  of  the  nebula  at  the  time  it  was  sup- 
posed to  have  thrown  off  the  material  from  which 
our  earth  was  formed.     The  gaseous  substance 
of  the  nebula  was  not  supposed  to  be  in  any 
condition  of  order,  separated,  classified  or  strati- 
fied, for  the  inventor  was  not  able  to  originate 
any  scheme  or  plan,  by  which  the  heterogeneous 
mass  of  incongruous  elements  could  be  made  to 
assume  any  order  or  place.     Besides  this,  it  is  to 
be  remembered  that  it  is  an  important  part  of  the 
Hypothesis  that  the  molecules  of  the  nebula,  by 
reason  of  their  rapid  rotation,  and  the  friction 
caused  by  their  internal  movements,  converted 
the  nebula  into  a  heated  and  incandescent  state, 
so  that  the  rings,  as  they  were  formed,  were 
thrown  off  in  a  burning  condition;  and  in  this 


n 


46 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


state  of  fusion,  we  ask,  how  would  it  be  possi- 
ble for  the  material  elements  to  be  delivered  in 
any  orderly  state  and  place,  and  be  preserved  in 
an  orderly  strata,  as  now  found  to  be  in  our 
earth  ? 

The  geologist  knows  all  the  various  strata  of 
earths,  clays,  layers  of  rock,  etc. ;  and  that  they 
are  arranged  and  classified  in  the  general  order, 
as  found  over  the  world.  The  late  Professor 
Dana  states  that  "stratified  rocks  are  almost  of 
universal  distribution." 

No  such  general  orderly  arrangement  of  the 
various  strata  of  rocks,  earth,  veins  and  deposits 
of  minerals,  of  phosphates,  or  the  carboniferous 
age  of  coal,  as  now  exist,  and  as  the  earth's 
records  show,  could  have  resulted  from  any 
nebular  action  according  to  the  Hypothesis. 
There  are  also  many  other  items  which  might  be 
named,  that  cannot  be  explained  or  accounted  for 
by  the  world-forming  process  of  the  Hypothesis, 
proving  that  it  cannot  be  sustained  by  sound  rea- 
soning, and  has  no  foundation  in  fact. 

While  we  admit  that  the  earth,  on  its  surface 
and  for  some  miles  below,  bears  evidence  of  fire 
or  great  heat;  that  there  are  igneous  rocks  and 
minerals  that  have  been  in  a  molten  condition, 
and  show  that  there  was  once  a  period  when  ex- 
treme heat  prevailed  extensively ;  it  was  more  or 
less  local  in  its  effects,  and  does  not  show  that 
universal  and  destructive  combustion  predomi- 
nated. Before  we  have  finished,  we  expect  to 
explain  this  matter  satisfactorily,  and  show  ade- 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  the  Earth    47 

quate  cause  for  the  great  heat,  and  how  it  was 
generated,  together  with  some  other  important 
phenomena  in  God's  creative  work. 

19'     The  Nebula  According  to  Laplace,  not 
Dependent  on  Any  Supervising  Power  or  Agency 
—According  to  the  -  Nebular  Hypothesis '"  of  the 
formation  of  the  solar  system,  that  system  is  not 
dependent  on  any  supervising  agency  or  power 
to  form,  guide,  or  control  its  outcome,  or  any  of 
the  effects  or  results  of  the  vast  body  of  matter 
supposed  to  have  been  in  motion;  but  is  entirely 
independent  of  any  all-wise,  almighty,  and  su- 
preme controlling  power.    The  inventor  of  the 
Hypothesis  does  not  acknowledge  anything  as 
being  the  work  of  a  great  Creator. 

No  truly  reasonable  man  would  ever  adopt  such 
a  conglomerate,   uncertain  and  haphazard  pro- 
cedure of  making  a  world,  or  system  of  worlds- 
then  how  much  less  would  the  Almighty  do,  or 
allow  It  to  be  done.     He  cannot  be  charged  with 
folly.     We  would  be  ashamed  to  write,  or  even 
think  that  the  great  Creator  would  adopt  such  a 
crude,   uncertain,    unreasonable    and    disorderly 
procedure  in  producing  a  solar  system  or  a  uni- 
verse.    He  is  ever  wise  in  counsel,  perfect  in  all 
His  ways,  and  no  creature  can  add  utility,  beauty 
or  glory  to  His  works. 

This  *'  Nebular  Hypothesis"  of  the  French  as- 
tronomer Laplace  and  others,  that  has  been  so 
freely  accepted  as  true  by  many,  particularly  in 
this  generation,  does  not  seem  to  have  been 
critically  examined  in  its  various  aspects,  or  to 


48 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


11 

I 


I 
^  I 

IF 


have  had  its  assumption  of  facts  tested  and  dem- 
onstrated, as  most  facts  in  science  and  nature 
have  been.  While  Laplace  cannot  be  ranked  as 
a  discoverer,  like  many  other  astronomers,  he 
was  evidently  a  great  mathematician,  and  a 
plausible  writer.  By  his  mathematical  talents, 
he  solved  problems  and  demonstrated  the  truth 
of  the  theories  of  other  astronomers.  His  mathe- 
matical works  have  a  high  reputation ;  though  it 
is  stated  that  he  did  not  always  give  credit  due 
to  other  writers.  The  Emperor  Napoleon,  be- 
lieving in  his  ability,  appointed  him  Minister  of 
the  Interior,  but  afterward  dismissed  him  as  being 
incompetent  for  that  work;  as  lacking  practical 
sense  and  executive  ability.  Laplace  lived  in  an 
age  when  infidelity  and  atheism  prevailed  in 
France,  and  the  populace  seemed  to  consider  it  a 
crime  to  acknowledge  the  existence  of  a  God. 
They  would  not  give  the  Divine  Being  credit  for 
His  creative  works  nor  for  the  wise  and  benefi- 
cent laws  of  nature  which  He  had  established. 
To  this  day,  the  spirit  of  infidelity  prevails  in 
France,  especially  among  the  scientific  classes. 
The  ** Popular  Astronomy"  of  Flammarion, 
adopted  in  the  schools  of  France,  and  so  exten- 
sively consulted,  does  not,  so  far  as  we  can  learn, 
give  the  Creator  any  credit  for  anything  seen  in 
the  universe. 

The  "Nebular  Hypothesis  "  of  Laplace  natur- 
ally partakes  of  the  spirit  and  sentiments  prevail- 
ing in  his  age.  It  seems  like  a  studied  effort  to 
produce  a  plausible  scheme  or  plan  of  accounting 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  the  Earth    49 

for  the  formation  of  the  heavenly  bodies,  by  ma- 
terial forces,  without  the  designing  aid  or  inter- 
position of  a  Divine  Creator,  or  any  superior 
power  whatever.  The  proper  denomination  of 
his  theory,  therefore,  would  seem  to  be,  "La- 
place's theory  of  the  spontaneous  generation  of 
planet  worlds  and  burning  stars." 


• 


I 


IV 


THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS  AND  THE   ASTRONOMERS 

20.  Brief  Review  of  the  Opinions  of  Some 
Noted  Astronomers. — We  honor  the  astronomers 
for  their  achievements,  for  the  icnowledge  they 
have  gained  by  their  patient  perseverance  in  the 
various  branches  of  the  science,  for  the  important 
facts  they  have  ascertained  and  demonstrated  of 
the  position,  size,  and  various  movements  of  the 
heavenly  bodies,  and  the  laws  that  govern  them. 
We  are  astonished  at  the  difficult,  yet  accurate 
calculations  they  have  made,  and  are  making,  of 
the  eclipses,  transits,  and  other  movements  of 
the  sun,  planets  and  satellites  of  our  system,  all 
of  which  attest  their  knowledge,  ability,  and  pa- 
tient and  persevering  toil. 

Among  the  most  noted  of  the  astronomers  of 
modern  times  is  Copernicus,  author  of  the  sys- 
tem of  astronomy  known  by  his  name,  and 
which  was  first  published  to  the  world  about 
1 540.  His  system  is  now,  with  some  modifica- 
tions, universally  accepted  as  being  true.  At 
first  it  was  slow  in  being  received,  because  its 
truth  was  not  apparent  to  our  senses,  and  was 
not  considered  orthodox,  as  it  appeared  to  be 
opposed  to  the  statements  of  the  Scriptures,  that 
the  sun  rises  and  sets  and  moves  around  the 

50 


Hi 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Astronomers   51 

earth     The  Scriptural  rule,  it  would  seem  to  be 
m  astronomical  and  physical  matters,  is  to  stS 

ea"rfd  fo^ ^""1  *''^"'  "  ^'^^^  commonVa^! 
peared  to  be,  without  explanations. 

emaJdarnhf "'"  K  ^''"?'  '^'  '"^^"t°^'  "^^th- 
thTsSn ^I''°'°P''''"  ^f  ^^tronomer,  born  in 
w!t.m  ".  ""^"'■^'  ^'^"P*^^  the  Copernican 
ful  oTn.  r  '"^'"^'""^'l  its  futh  against  power- 
ful opposition,  even  at  the  expense,  for  a  while 

hi     r^r '  ""'■"y-     G^«'^°  i^  credited  S 
being  the  discoverer  of  the  satellites  of  Jupker 

"edited  :fb'"'"'"V'^'^  "°^^'"-*^'  -"  So 
ter    he  tl?""^  the  inventor  of  the  thermome- 

Srument"''''^'  "'  °*'"  '"'P^"^"^  --^'^c 

dis'^ovire/  r'*  "'^^.'^^'"^tician  and  astronomer, 
discovered  the  wonderful  and  exact  laws  tha 
govern  the  planets  in  all  their  motions  about  the 
sun     He  was  the  author  of  an  elaborate  and 
pro  ound   work  on  the  laws  that  govern  the 

Laws'''".n7  '"''V'''"-  "^"^^^  as ''Keplers 
Laws    ,  and  was  also  the  inventor  of  logarithms 

Kepler  expressed  the  opinion  that  the  sun  was 
well  ^t?  ''  *"'  '"''''°"  °f  «"  the  planets  as 

cTv  red  th/T"  "' "^'*  '"'^  ""'''■    '^'^her  dis- 
covered the  diminution  of  gravity  toward  the 

equator;  and  Humboldt  discovered  the  '^decrease 

of  the  intensity  of  the  earth's  magnetic  foS 

from  the  poles  to  the  equator." 

To  Sir  Isaac  Newton,  the  great  philosopher  as 

tronomer  and  mathematician,  the  world    s'  n- 

debted  for  much  of  the  knowledge  it  possesses 


52 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


and  the  progress  it  has  made  during  the  last  two 
centuries,  in  the  science  of  astronomy  and  the 
laws  that  control  the  heavenly  bodies.  The  law 
of  gravitation  which  Newton  discovered,  estab- 
lished, and  utilized,  has  solved  many  difficult 
questions  that  heretofore  had  been  unsolved  by 
many  intelligent  thinkers.  His  theory  of  gravi- 
tation, as  stated,  was  that  "iivery  particle  of 
matter  in  the  universe  is  attracted  by,  or  gravi- 
tates to  every  other  particle  of  matter,  with  a 
force  inversely  proportioned  to  the  square  of  the 
distance."  Newton  was  the  author  of  the  theory 
of  light:  "That  light  was  composed  of  material 
particles  of  inconceivable  minuteness,  emitted  by 
luminous  bodies,  in  all  directions."  By  others, 
the  undulating  theory  is  maintained,  which,  at 
this  day,  seems  to  be  the  prevailing  one.  New- 
ton discovered  that  **  light  was  not  homogeneous, 
but  consisted  of  rays  of  different  refrangibility, 
as  proved  and  separated  by  the  prism."  New- 
ton expressed  the  opinion  ''that  the  motion  of 
the  sun  and  planets  could  not  be  produced  by 
any  natural  cause  alone,  but  were  impressed  by 
an  agent  or  divine  power."  He  was  a  firm  be- 
liever in  the  truths  of  revealed  religion. 

Sir  William  Herschel.  born  in  1738.  discovered, 
in  1784,  the  planet  Uranus.  Sir  William,  with 
his  son  Sir  John  Herschel,  were  both  enthusiastic 
and  persevering  astronomers.  With  their  large 
and  effective  instruments,  they,  in  their  day, 
made  many  important  discoveries,  such  as  the  sat- 
ellites of  Saturn,  and  also  those  of  Uranus.    They 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Astronomers    53 

measured  and  ascertained  the  rotation  of  some 
of  the  planets  and  their  satellites;  the  motions  of 
the  double  stars,  and  made  many  other  impor- 
tant discoveries.  The  world  is  indebted  to  the 
Herschels,  father  and  son,  for  much  of  the  knowl- 
edge it  possesses  of  the  celestial  bodies.  They 
both  accepted  the  truth  of  revealed  religion. 

By  the  singular  and  accurate  calculations  of  Le 
Verrier,  a  French  astronomer  and  mathematician, 
he  was  able  to  point  out  to  Galle,  an  astronomer 
of  Berlin,  the  probable  location  of  an  undiscov- 
ered new  planet,  which,  when  sought  for,  was 
found  without  difficulty  where  it  had  been  lo- 
cated by  Le  Verrier.  The  new  planet  is  known 
as  Neptune,  the  farthest  in  our  solar  system  from 
the  sun.  Truly  this  was  a  great  triumph  for  the 
mathematicians. 

21,     The  Right  of  Independent  Judgment— But 
when  astronomers  or  scientists  leave  the  region 
of  ascertained  facts,  and,  entering  the  field  of 
speculation,  propose  and  seek  to  establish  theories 
inconsistent  with  certain  known  facts  and  natural 
laws,  we  have  the  right  to  use  our  reason  and 
judgment,  and  inquire  into  the  truth  of  their 
theoretical  statements,  especially  when  they  can- 
not be  reconciled  to  the  present  known  state  and 
condition  of  the  world,  the  sun,  and  other  bodies 
in  our  system ;  and  more  especially  when  they 
militate  against  the  commonly  received  fact  that 
there  is  a  God  who  is  not  only  the  Creator  of  the 
world,  our  solar  system,  and  the  great  universe, 
but  who  is  also  the  author  of  the  laws  that  gov- 


54 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


i 


era  it  and  all  that  is  therein;  and  that  every- 
where, and  in  all  things,  the  great  Creator  has 
manifested,  as  far  as  can  be  ascertained,  a  wise 
purpose  and  a  perfect  design  in  all  His  works. 

The  truth  about  the  ''Nebular  Hypothesis" 
that,  in  this  day,  is  apparently  well  received  by 
many  scientists  and  some  professed  astronomers, 
is  that  it  is  not  maintained  by  sound  reasons  nor 
by  ascertained  facts,  but  by  speculative  and  falla- 
cious arguments,  as  has  been  proved;  and,  being 
a  theory  pernicious  and  atheistical  in  its  tenden- 
cies, we  have  felt  constrained  to  show  that  it  has 
no  substantial  evidence  for  its  support;  that  it  is 
not  sustained  by  any  natural  law  or  any  definite 
and  ascertained  fact;  but  that,  in  truth,  the  whole 
hypothesis,  from  beginning  to  end,  is  derogatory 
to  the  Creator,  and  is  altogether  illusive,  and  un- 
worthy of  the  credence  or  the  attention  it  has 
received. 

That  well-known  and  popular  writer,  E.  F. 
Burr,  D.  D.,  LL.  D.,  author  of  the  astronomical 
works,  "Ecce  Coelum,"  "Stars  of  God,"  and 
other  noted  books,  in  expressing  an  opinion  of 
the  "Nebular  Hypothesis "  says,  in  the  "Stars 
of  God,"  (page  79),  "The  objections  to  this 
supposed  history  of  the  solar  system  are  of  two 
sorts.  First  are  ascertained  facts  within  the 
system  itself  "  (which  Dr.  Burr  proceeds  to  name, 
and  then  states)  "These  and  many  more  such 
difficult  facts  make  one  sort  of  objection.  An- 
other sort  is  of  a  still  graver  character,  viz:  that 
the  Hypothesis,  if  true,  sets  aside  the  argument 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Astronomers   55 

of  design  in  the  works  of  Nature,  for  the  being 
of  a  God.    Stated  plainly  in  one  form,  it  teaches 
that  Nature  is  a  natural  growth  from  the  hum- 
blest beginning;  that  worlds  and  their  organic 
forms  have  slowly  come  up  from  exceedingly  sim-  ' 
pie  things  by  purely  natural  causation.     Such,  at 
least,  is  the  understanding  of  the  Hypothesis  by 
its  leading  advocates.     This  is  the  understanding 
to  the  establishment  of  which  all  their  efforts  are 
directed.    They  insist  on  a  natural  genetic  con- 
nection between  any  two  consecutive  variations 
in  that  long  series  of  small  variations,  by  which 
things  are  supposed  to  have  crept  up  from  the 
simplest  structures,  or  from  elementary  atoms,  to 
their  present  state. 

"  But  whatever  be  the  force  that  actually  con- 
ducts Nature  slowly  upward  along  the  succession 
of  minute  steps,  whether  it  be  natural  or  super- 
natural, if  these  steps  are  such  and  so  minute  that 
mere  natural  forces  can  easily  take  them,  then 
proof  of  a  God  must  come  from  some  other 
quarter  than  from  what  we  have  been  used  to 
call  His  works." 

This  plain  statement  of  Dr.  Burr  substantiates 
the  opinion  maintained,  that  the  "  Nebular  Hy- 
pothesis "  is  purely  an  atheistical  theory. 


THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS  AND  THE  SCIENTISTS 

22.  The  Wisdom  and  Power  of  the  Creator 
Made  Known  in  All  His  Works.— \n  our  attempt 
to  show  the  fallacy  of  Laplace's  whirligig  theory 
of  the  solar  system,  it  may  be  said  that  it  de- 
volves on  us,  to  replace  that  popular  hypothesis  by 
some  other  theory  or  plan  of  procedure  that  will 
be  more  worthy  of  credence,  more  in  accordance 
with  natural  laws,  and  which  will  account  for 
the  formation  of  our  world  by  evidence  that  will 
command  the  assent  of  reasonable  minds. 

It  is  easier,  we  know,  to  undermine,  pull  down 
and  destroy,  than  to  plan,  build  up  and  establish ; 
to  object,  and  deny  the  truth  of  theories  and 
propositions,  than  to  make  new  ones  and  main- 
tain them.  Yet  in  this  examination  of  God's 
creative  work,  we  hope  to  be  able  to  point  out  a 
way  in  which  it  was  accomplished  that  will  not 
only  be  worthy  of  consideration,  but  of  the  ac- 
ceptance of  candid  and  intelligent  minds. 

In  an  effort  to  trace  briefly  a  few  of  the  lines  of 
the  creative  work  that  we  both  see  and  know, 
the  writer  would  not  attempt  to  account  for  any- 
thing that  has  been  done,  or  is  now  existing, 
aside  from,  or  independent  of,  the  wisdom  and 
power  of  the  Almighty.     Though  it  may  not  be 

S6 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Scientists     57 

the  fashion  in  these  days,  to  give  the  great  Crea- 
tor the  credit  of  His  wonderful  works,  and  the 
wisdom  and  power  He  has  everywhere  and  in 
everything  displayed,  yet  it  would  not  do  for  the 
writer,  who  believes  in  the  living  God  as  the 
Creator  of  the  universe,  to  fail  to  acknowledge 
both  Him  and  His  works,  that  speak  for  them- 
selves and  are  ever  declaring  His  glory.  Nor  will 
it  do  for  the  writer  to  deny  or  neglect  the  testi- 
mony of  the  Scriptures,  verified  as  they  are  by  a 
world  of  facts,  and  the  testimony  of  the  best 
men  and  women  who  ever  lived. 

We  hold  it  to  be  a  great  and  important  truth, 
that  the  God  of  the  Bible,  the  Divine  Author  of 
the  Scriptures  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  is 
the  Creator  of  the  universe  in  which  we  exist- 
and  that  He,  by  His  infinite  wisdom  and  power' 
upholds  and  maintains  the  same;  also,  that  this 
Almighty  God  has  designed  and  made  all  things 
in  the  universe,  and  has  given  to  the  things  He 
has  made  the  definite  nature  and  specific  charac- 
ter which  each  may  possess,  whether  particular 
or  general;  and  that  He  has  also  ordained  all  the 
laws  and  influences  of  every  nature  and  kind  that 
govern,  or  in  any  wise  control,  the  things  He  has 
made,  be  they  material  or  immaterial;  also,  that 
this  living  God  is  the  author  and  source  of  all 
life,  of  every  kind  and  degree,  vegetable,  animal 
or  spiritual,  with  all  their  variations  and  limita- 
tions which  are  now  beyond  the  comprehension 
of  the  mind  of  finite  man. 
In  order  to  apprehend  more  clearly  God  s  way 


58 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


I 

J 


of  working  out  His  plans,  in  developing  His 
creative  works  so  manifest  in  the  universe,  it  will 
be  well  to  inquire  somewhat  into  His  divine  na- 
ture, as  He  has  made  it  known  to  us  in  His  Word, 
in  His  glorious  works,  and  also,  by  His  provi- 
dential dealings  with  man  in  all  ages,  well  known 
to  students  of  the  history  of  the  world. 

St.  Paul,  in  addressing  the  Athenians  (Acts 
xvii.),  reminded  them  that  they  ought  not  to 
think  that  the  **  God  who  made  the  world  and  all 
things  therein,  is  like  unto  gold  and  silver,  or 
stone,  graven  by  art  or  the  device  of  man."  So, 
on  the  other  hand,  while  admitting  the  existence 
of  a  God,  a  spiritual  Being,  infinite  in  His  wis- 
dom and  power,  the  Creator  of  the  universe  in 
which  we  live;  it  is  not  reasonable  to  conceive  of 
Him  as  a  being  who  would  limit  Himself  in  the 
exercise  of  His  will  in  action  by  any  general  or 
universal  law  which  He  may  or  might  have 
ordained,  or  that  His  acts,  decrees,  or  operations, 
known  and  unknown,  must  be  entirely  in  ac- 
cordance with  some  general  laws  which  we,  with 
our  limited  knowledge  of  them,  conceive,  will 
not  admit  of  change  or  suspension.  God  is  too 
wise  a  Being  to  allow  the  universe  in  any  re- 
spect to  outgrow  His  power  and  control,  or 
to  limit  Himself  in  anything  it  is  right  for  Him 
to  do. 

In  view  of  our  limited  knowledge  of  the  va- 
rious elements  and  forces  found  in  Nature,  and 
the  laws  that  govern  them,  which  knowledge 
has  vastly  increased  in  this  nineteenth  century,  is 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Scientists     59 

it  not  presumption  on  our  part,  for  us  to  decide 
what  the  Almighty  can  or  cannot  do,  with  any 
element  or  thing  in  Nature;  or  what  process  He 
may  adopt,  without  contradicting  Himself,  or 
subverting  any  of  His  laws  ?  Neither  ought  we 
to  conceive  of  the  Almighty  as  a  Being  so  far  re- 
moved from  all  terrestrial  concerns,  and  so  preoc-^ 
cupied  with  the  infinite  and  important  affairs  of 
His  great  universe,  that  he  does  not  concern  Him- 
self with  the  details  of  His  creative  work,  nor  the 
individual  interest  and  affairs  of  the  creatures  He 
has  made  to  dwell  on  the  earth.  We  ought 
rather  to  have  a  true  conception  of  God,  as  He 
has  plainly  made  Himself  known  to  us,  if  we 
would  rightly  consider  His  creative  work  so  far 
as  it  is  known  in  the  world  and  in  the  uni- 
verse. 

A  true  conception  of  some  of  the  attributes  of 
God  we  gather  not  only  from  His  revealed  Word, 
but  also  from  His  providential  dealings  with  man, 
as  individuals  and  nations,  as  recorded  in  the 
history  of  the  race. 

The  Almighty,  by  His  Word,  works  and  acts, 
has  revealed  Himself  to  us,  as  a  Personal  Being, 
who  not  only  creates  and  controls  the  infinite  by 
the  great  things  that  are  visible  in  the  universe, 
but  also  as  a  Being  who  directs  in  the  minutest 
details  of  the  material  things  He  has  made,  and 
also  the  nature  and  character  of  the  infinite 
variety  of  living  organisms  and  creatures  that 
exist  on  the  earth,  providing  for  the  subsistence 
of   the   smallest  and  least  important,   as   well 


6o 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


il 


as  for  the  more  noble  and  valuable  of  His  crea- 
tions. 

The  wonderful  and  glorious  works  of  the 
Creator,  and  the  apparent  design  of  their  crea- 
tion, are  known,  or  may  be  ascertained,  by  all 
students  and  careful  observers  of  Nature.  Intel- 
ligent thinking  men  are  now  at  work  in  every  de- 
partment of  knowledge  or  science,  and  are  from 
time  to  time  discovering  important  secrets  of  Na- 
ture for  the  benefit  of  the  world,  that  were  here- 
tofore hidden  from  the  knowledge  of  man. 

The  astronomer,  with  his  telescope,  the  mineral- 
ogist, the  chemist,  the  naturalist,  the  botanist, 
and  others  in  every  branch  of  science,  by  the  aid 
of  new  and  improved  instruments  and  appliances, 
can,  as  they  are  doing,  discover,  bring  to  light, 
and  apply  to  use,  new  facts  and  wonders  found 
in  Nature;  every  new  discovery  being  but  a 
stepping-stone  to  others,  perhaps  greater  and 
more  important.  This  continual  advancement  in 
knowledge  is  ever  making  more  evident  the  wis- 
dom, power  and  goodness  of  the  great  Creator. 

With  these  few  preliminary  remarks,  made  in 
order  to  better  explain  our  position,  and  state  the 
ground  on  which  we  stand,  we  would  note. 
First:  In  respect  to  the  creation  of  the  earth,  the 
sun,  planets  and  stars,  as  seen  in  the  heavens  day 
and  night,  that  one  is  impressed  by  the  magnifi- 
cent display  of  power.  And  when  we  note  that 
all  the  celestial  bodies  are  apparently  revolving 
about  our  earth,  that  the  number  of  these  stars, 
as  well  as  their  distance  from  us  are  beyond  our 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Scientists     6i 

comprehension,  and  also,  when  we  learn  and 
consider  how  rapid,  yet  quiet,  precise  and  orderly 
they  are  in  all  their  movements,  each  having  its 
own  pathway  through  space,  never  coming  in 
collision  one  with  another,  though  the  law  of 
gravitation  would  naturally  draw  them  together, 
we  are  compelled  involuntarily  to  admit  the  wis- 
dom and  power  of  the  Being  who  created  the 
heavenly  bodies  and  ordained  the  absolute  laws 
which  govern  this  universe  of  suns  and  countless 
millions  of  other  bodies  that  exist  and  move 
within  it. 

So  far  as  astronomers  have  been  able  to  ascertain 
by  observation,  aided  by  their  instruments,  all  the 
known  bodies  in  our  solar  system  are  found  to 
be  regular  in  form  and  general  appearance,  and, 
though  differing  in  size,  they  have,  so  to  speak, 
an  orderly  make-up;  and  cannot,  in  any  respect,' 
be  said  to  be  a  mass  of  material  thrown  together 
in  a  haphazard  and  promiscuous  manner.  They 
are  found  also,  to  be  governed  by  the  same  uni- 
form and  perfect  laws. 

2j,  Some  Facts  Relating  to  the  Formation  of 
the  Earth.  Also  Theories  That  are  Improbable.— 
When  we  come  to  examine  the  geological  forma- 
tion of  our  earth,  of  which  we  possess  a  more 
complete  knowledge  than  we  have  of  the  other 
celestial  bodies,  we  find  that  it  bears  every  evi- 
dence of  being  an  orderly  structure,  built  up 
layer  upon  layer.  These  strata  of  rocks,  the 
upper  differing  in  some  respects  from  the  lower, 
appear  to  encircle  our  globe  everywhere  in  the 


I 


62 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


same  order.  The  upper  strata  is  built  on  the 
lower,  like  the  layers  of  brick  or  stone  in  a  large 
building.  These  layers  are  added  to,  or  built  up, 
and  not  grown  up,  or  thrown  out  from  the  centre 
of  the  earth  by  some  centrifugal  force,  as  some 
would  have  us  believe;  for  which  assertion  they 
can  produce  no  evidence  in  proof. 

The  science  of  geology  professes,  in  part,  to 
ascertain  and  note  the  different  strata  of  the 
earth's  formation,  which  are  known  or  believed 
to  be  the  primary,  secondary,  and  other  rock  for- 
mations; and  in  this  branch  of  knowledge  many 
important  facts  have  been  accumulated.  Also  it 
is  a  part  of  the  science  to  ascertain  the  various 
disturbances  and  changes  that  have  evidently 
taken  place  in  the  outer  surface  of  the  earth,  and 
the  probable  causes  of  the  same. 

This  science  rests,  as  it  should  do,  upon  ascer- 
tained facts.  But  in  some  matters,  or  items, 
there  have  been  interwoven  causes  for  evident 
results  that  are  based  on  speculative  theory,  and 
not  on  ascertained  truth. 

The  popular  theory,  held  by  many  scientists 
and  others,  is  that  our  earth  was  once  a  burning 
mass;  and  that  while  it  is  now  burned  out  or 
extinguished  on  its  surface,  it  is  still  burning  in 
its  interior;  and,  toward  its  centre,  it  is  even  now 
in  a  molten  condition. 

This  theory  of  the  condition  of  the  earth  is 
taught  or  accepted  by  many  writers  on  the  sub- 
ject, and  seems  to  be  the  prevailing  one  in  this 
age.    It  is  also  in  harmony  with  Laplace's  *'  Neb- 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Scientists     63 

ular  Hypothesis,"  and  is  supported  by  its  advo- 
cates. 

What  this  theory  is,  as  it  relates  to  our  earth, 
will  be  better  understood  by  extracts  from  some 
of  the  works  of  its  authors  and  defenders.    Quot- 
ing  from   ''Popular   Astronomy,"  by    Camille 
Flammarion,  of  France,  that  work  states:  ''  There 
was  a  time  when  none  of  the  species  now  living, 
existed  on  the  surface  of  the  globe.     There  was 
a  time  when  life  itself  did  not  exist,  in  any  form 
whatever.      Even  the  figure    of   the   terrestrial 
globe,  its  flattening  at  the  poles,  the  arrangement 
of  the  lands,  the  mineral  nature  of  the  lower 
primitive  strata,  the  volcanoes  which  still  smoke 
and  throw  out  their  fiery  lavas,  earthquakes,  the 
regular  increase,  of  temperature  as  we  descend 
into  the  interior  of  the  globe,— all  these  facts 
agree  in  proving  that  in  primitive  times  the  earth 
was  uninhabitable  and  uninhabited,  and  that  it 
was  first  in  the  condition  of  the  sun,  hot,  lumi- 
nous and  incandescent." 

The  author  goes  on  to  state  the  cause  of  this 
condition  of  the  earth,  and  his  view  of  Laplace's 
"Nebular  Hypothesis"  as  follows:  "Well,  the 
most  probable  hypothesis,   the  most   scientific 
theory,  is  that  which  represents  the  sun  as  a  con- 
densed nebula.    This  carries  us  back  to  an  un- 
known epoch,  when  this  nebula  occupied  the 
present  place  of  the  solar  system,  and  even  more, 
an  immense  lense-shaped  mass  of  gas,  turning 
slowly  on  itself,  and  having  its  exterior  circum- 
ference in  the  zone  which  marks  the  orbit  of 


64 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


Neptune."  The  author  then  proceeds  to  state 
the  process  by  which  one  planet  after  another 
was  formed  from  or  thrown  off  from  the  nebula, 
which  we  have  before  stated  in  our  examination 
of  that  hypothesis,  and  which  it  is  not  necessary 
here  to  repeat. 

The  author  proceeds  to  state:  ''Afterward 
came  the  earth,  of  which  the  birth  goes  back  to 
the  epoch  when  the  sun  had  arrived  at  the  earth's 
present  position.  Venus  and  Mercury  would  be 
born  later.  .  .  .  Will  the  sun  give  birth  to 
another  world  ?  This  is  not  probable.  For  this 
purpose,  it  would  be  necessary  that  its  rotation 
should  be  enormously  accelerated.  It  should  be 
219  times  more  rapid."  (That  is,  the  sun,  at  its 
surface,  now  passing  through  space,  at  the  rate 
of  104,800  miles  in  one  day,  would,  according  to 
the  author's  theory,  have  to  revolve  at  the  rate  of 
7,621,200  miles  in  one  day.) 

Quoting  again  from  the  same  author:  *'Thus 
the  world  was  formed  by  the  slow  condensation 
of  a  gaseous  ring  detached  from  the  sun.  From 
a  gaseous  condition  it  became  liquid,  then  solid, ' 
and  doubtless,  it  continues  to  cool  and  contract 
even  now.  But  its  mass  increases  from  age  to 
age  by  the  meteoric  stone  and  shooting  stars 
which  continually  fall  upon  it, — more  than  100,- 
000,000,000  per  annum."  If  that  is  so,  it  is  a 
wonder  we  are  able  to  preserve  our  eyesight. 

In  the  absence  of  some  plausible  theory  ac- 
counting for  the  formation  of  the  earth  and  our 
solar  system,  it  would  seem  that  certain  Chris- 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Scientists     65 

tian  philosophers  have  been  inclined  to  accept,  in 
a  greater  or  less  degree,  Laplace's  hypothesis  of 
the  formation  of  the  solar  system,  independent 
of  the  aid  or  intervention  of  any  Divine  Being. 

Mr.  Goodwin,  in  his  "Essays  and  Reviews," 
says:  "The  first  clear  view  which  we  obtain  of 
the  eariy  condition  of  the  earth,  presents  to  us  a 
ball  of  molten  fluid,  with  intense  heat,  spinning 
on  its  axis  and  revolving  round  the  sun.     How 
long  it  may  have  continued  in  this  state  is  beyond 
calculation  or  surmise.     It  can  only  be  believed 
that  a  prolonged  period,  beginning  and  ending  we 
know  not  where,  elapsed  before  the  surface  be- 
came cooled  and  hardened  and  capable  of  sus- 
taining organized  existences.     The  water  which 
now  envelopes  a  large  portion  of  the  face  of  the 
globe,  must  for  ages  have  existed  only  in  the 
shape  of  steam,  floating  above  and  enveloping 
the  planet  in  a  thick  curtain  of  mist." 

The  Rev.  Dr.  Campbell,  in  his  "Story  of  Cre- 
ation" (p.  45)  writes:  "This  world  was  once  a 
globe  of  liquid  fire.  It  remains  so  yet  indeed. 
As  to  its  principal  bulk,  it  is  the  same  molten 
mass  as  in  the  times  referred  to.  It  is  like  a  deep 
lake  frozen  over;  and  we  build  our  cities  on  the 
ice  crust,  as  it  were.  This,  however,  makes  the 
earth  but  a  shell,  (p.  43.)  There  are  places  on 
the  globe,  no  doubt,  where  the  earth's  crust  may 
be  100  miles  thick." 

Note  that  such  a  condition  of  things,  or  of  the 
elements,  is  incredible.  It  simply  would  be  im- 
possible to  maintain  such  an  extreme  degree  of 


66 


I 
1 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


heat  without  a  constant  supply  of  oxygen  and 
other  combustible  matter.  Heat  requires  con- 
sumption of  material.  What  material  is  being 
consumed  in  the  centre  of  the  earth  ?  Besides, 
heat  is  a  most  active,  expanding  and  forcible  ele- 
ment, ever  asserting  itself;  and  it  would  be  sim- 
ply impossible  to  confine  it  in  this  earth,  which 
is  a  mass  of  disintegrated  material. 

When  the  earth  was  in  its  supposed  condition, 
the  intense  heat  generated  would  not  only  have 
turned  all  of  the  supposed  water  on  the  earth  into 
an  intensely  heated  steam,  but  that  extreme 
degree  of  heat  would  also  have  turned  many 
other  elements,  including  metals,  into  steam, 
which,  when  the  earth  cooled  down,  according 
to  the  theory,  would  have  appeared  with  the 
water  on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  deposited  like 
a  coat  of  snow,  hail,  or  mail,  covering  the  whole 
surface  of  the  earth.  Under  such  a  condition  of 
the  elements,  it  would  have  been  impossible  to 
have  had  metals  and  other  items  deposited  in  dis- 
tinct veins  and  beds,  as  they  now  exist. 

The  learned  Dr.  Dana,  in  his  "Manual  of 
Geology"  (p.  146),  in  the  article  on  "Archaean 
Time,"  writes:  "  There  must  have  been  a  first 
era  after  that  of  the  original  nebula,  if  such  there 
was,  in  which  the  earth  was  a  globe  of  molten 
rock,  like  the  sun  in  brightness  and  nature, 
enveloped  in  an  atmosphere  containing  the  dis- 
sociated elements  of  the  future  waters,  and  what- 
ever else  the  heat  of  the  surface  could  throw  into 
a  state  of  vapor.    A  second  era,  in  which  cooling 


Nebular  Hypothesis  and  Scientists     67 

went  forward,  until  the  exterior  became  solid 
from  cooling,  and  probably  as  a  crust  over  liquid 
interior;  and  still,  in  the  second  place,  the  vapors 
of  the  atmosphere  were  mostly  condensed,  and 
an  envelope  of  waters,  nearly,  or  quite  universal, 
was  made." 


VI 


THE  ATOMIC  AGE  OF  CREATION 

24.  How  Was  the  Earth  Formed  ?  and  What 
Are  the  Simple  Elements  Composing  the  Material 
Earth  ? — The  question  in  which  we  are  inter- 
ested, and  that  remains  to  be  solved,  is  how,  or 
by  what  means,  was  the  earth,— this  planet  on 
which  we  dwell, — formed  or  created? 

In  an  attempt  to  arrive  at  a  solution  of  the 
problem,  there  are  two  questions  that  must  be 
answered.  The  first  is:  '*What  are  the  ele- 
ments, or  at  least  the  principal  ones,  known  to 
constitute  the  material  substance  of  the  earth  and 
the  world?"  The  second  is:  "What  is  the 
general  nature  or  character  of  these  elementary 
substances;  how  made  or  created;  and  how  and 
why  their  varied  combinations  ?  " 

As  we  examine  the  surface  of  the  earth  in  all 
its  parts  and  places,  we  discover  an  endless 
variety  of  material  things,  differing  widely,  in 
many  respects,  from  each  other.  As  we  dig 
down  into  the  bowels  of  the  earth,  we  find  new 
varieties  and  classes  of  materials.  As  we  search 
and  examine  the  atmosphere,  the  elements  above 
us,  and  the  water  below  us,  the  contents  of  the 
rivers,  seas  and  oceans,  we  find  a  still  greater 
variety  of  objects  that  attract  our  attention  and 

68 


The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation        69 

command  our  admiration;  things  animate  and 
inanimate,  too  innumerable  for  the  mind  of  mor- 
tal man  to  grasp,  or  his  reason  to  comprehend. 

The  beauty  and  grace  of  many  things,  the 
fragrance,  richness  and  value  of  others,  the 
varied  characteristics,  qualities  and  uses  of  thou- 
sands of  items  that  might  be  named,  fairly 
astonishes  one  at  the  magnificence  of  nature's 
display:  things  material  and  things  immaterial, 
too  ponderous  to  be  moved,  too  light  for  the 
analyst  to  weigh,  or  too  fragrant  for  the  chemist 
to  compound.  But,  when  we  consider  and  in- 
vestigate, we  are  surprised  to  learn  from  the 
analyst,  the  chemist,  the  microscopist  and  others, 
the  absolute  fact,  that  these  tens  of  thousands 
and  more,  of  material  things,  are  all  composed  of 
a  few  simple  elements,  some  sixty  or  seventy  in 
all;  and  that  by  leaving  out  the  metallic  elements, 
a  man's  fingers  would  represent  the  number  of 
the  simple  elements  composing  the  greater  part 
of  the  material  globe. 

The  simple  elements,  oxygen,  hydrogen,  nitro- 
gen, carbon,  and  a  few  others,  constitute,  as  far 
as  is  known,  a  great  part  of  the  material  earth. 
These  facts  are  wonderful,  and,  being  beyond  the 
common  observation  of  man,  they  are  hard  to  be 
realized,  or  even  believed. 

Many  facts  unknown  to  the  ancients,  have  been 
discovered  by  the  genius  and  perseverance  of 
modern  scholars  and  investigators,  aided  by  the 
appliances  and  inventions  of  this  progressive  age. 
The  opinion  has  been  expressed  by  some  scientist, 


70 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


that  by  a  more  thorough  examination,  aided  by 
more  perfect  instruments  and  appliances,  the 
number  of  the  simple  elements  may,  and  will 
eventually  be  reduced.  The  few  and  simple 
elementary  materials  forming  the  main  sub- 
stance of  our  planet,  appear,  as  far  as  has  been 
discovered,  to  enter  largely  into  the  composition 
of  the  other  bodies  in  our  solar  system. 

Considering  these  facts,  that  have  been  demon- 
strated time  and  again,  we  begin  to  realize  in 
some  measure,  how  few  and  simple,  compara- 
tively, are  the  elements  that  do,  or  may,  enter 
into  the  material  composition  of  the  mighty 
universe. 

25.  The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation,  Design 
and  Wisdom  Manifested  in  the  Creation  of  the 
Simple  £/^i«^w/5.— Contemplating  also  these  lead- 
ing facts,  do  they  not  bear  intrinsic  evidence  that 
among  the  first  creative  acts  of  the  Almighty, 
were  those  of  creating  the  particular  and  dis- 
tinctive atoms,  forming,  with  their  combinations, 
the  simple  elements  that  constitute  our  world 
and  solar  system,  and  probably  in  part,  the  uni- 
verse itself.  We  reason,  therefore,  that  there 
must  first  have  been  in  the  creative  periods  of  the 
Almighty,  an  age  that  might  properly  be  called 
the  **  Atomic  Age  of  Creation."  Ages,  long  ages 
ago,  so  many  that  we  do  not  care  to  think  of  it, 
for  it  staggers  one;  He  who  knows  the  end  from 
the  beginning—the  far-seeing,  all-wise  God — 
created  the  simple  atomic  elements  with  their 
varied  attributes  and  qualities.     From  what  the 


The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation        7^ 

analyst,  chemist,  microscopist  and  others,  with 
their  improved  instruments,  have  discovered  and 
recorded,  it  is  evident  that  the  molecules  or  atoms 
of  matter  have  each  a  distinct  nature  and  charac- 
ter, differing  in  some  respects  from  other  classes 
or  orders  of  atoms,  so  that  from  their  combina- 
tions with  atoms  or  materials  of  dissimilar  natures 
or  characters,  there  are  found  to  be  resultant 
materials  of  such  a  marked  character  that  their 
distinctive  natures  are  evident  to  the  eye  or  the 
senses  of  man. 

The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation  included  the  par- 
ticular endowment  of  properties  and  qualities  to 
some  certain  atomic  elements,  but  not  to  others. 
Hence  one  atomic  element  has  an  affinity  for 
some  one  other  element,  and  a  seeming  aversion 
for  other  elements.  It  included  such  properties 
as  that  of  the  magnet  which  attracts  iron,  but  has 
no  apparent  influence  on  gold  or  silver.  In  like 
manner  the  elementary  force  of  electricity  finds 
a  good  conductor  in  one  element,  but  refuses  to 
be  carried  along  by  others;  while  gravity  is  made 
inherent  to  material  substances,  and,  in  a  measure, 
controls  them.  It  also  included  thousands  of 
other  similar  items  and  conditions,  all  of  which 
must  have  been  determined  upon  by  the  Creator 
from  the  very  beginning  of  His  creative  work. 

These  and  many  other  facts  make  it  plain  that 
in  the  beginning,  or  in  the  "  Atomic  Age  of  Crea- 
tion," there  must  have  been  manifested,  on  the 
part  of  the  Creator,  a  wise  design  for  every  par- 
ticular class  of  atoms,  giving  to  each  new  ele- 


1 


i 


Pi 


72 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


I 


ment,  its  particular  character  and  attribute;  fol- 
lowed by  a  perfect  execution  of  His  plan,  com- 
prehending from  the  beginning,  the  results  of  all 
future  combinations  with  any  one  or  any  num- 
ber of.  other  classes  of  atoms,  whatever  they 
might  be,  and  then  and  there,  fixing  and  deter- 
mining the  law  of  their  nature,  and  the  limit  and 
scope  of  their  influence  and  power. 

The  atomic  elements,  then  created,  entered  not 
only  into  our  solar  system,  but  into  the  universe. 
For  example,  consider  a  few  of  the  gaseous  ele- 
ments, as  oxygen,  hydrogen,  nitrogen,  carbon, 
etc.;  elements  all  differing  from  each  other  in 
their  atomic  character  and  nature,  and  in  the  size 
and  weight  of  their  cells.  Their  effect  on  our 
senses  in  their  separate,  uncombined  state,  is 
more  or  less  deleterious  to  life,  each  having  a 
greater  or  lesser  effect  on  all  animate  and  inani- 
mate bodies,  beneficially  or  otherwise.  Let  the 
elements  having  a  mutual  affinity  for  each  other, 
as  oxygen  and  hydrogen  be  combined,  and  the  re- 
sults are  truly  marvellous.  Take  two  volumes  of 
hydrogen  and  one  of  oxygen,  or  by  weight,  two 
parts  of  hydrogen  and  sixteen  of  oxygen  com- 
bined, and  lo,  we  have  that  wonderful,  that 
divine  element,  water;  without  which  the  earth, 
the  world,  would  be  a  dreary  waste,  destitute  of 
life. 

It  is  well  also  to  consider  the  composition,  na- 
ture and  value  of  that  elastic  element,  the  atmos- 
phere, that  encircles  our  globe,  composed  as  it  is, 
of  about  seventy-nine  volumes  of  nitrogen  and 


The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation        73 

twenty-one  of  oxygen.  It  is  the  element  in 
which  we  all  live,  that  supports  all  life;  and,  like 
water,  without  it,  vegetable,  as  well  as  animal 
life  would  cease.  Even  the  fish  in  the  sea  depend 
upon  the  air  contained  in  the  waters  for  their 
continued  existence.  Besides  these  necessary  re- 
quirements for  the  air  we  breathe,  there  are  other 
innumerable  important  uses  and  benefits  which 
the  world  could  not  do  without,  derived  from 
the  atmosphere  that  envelops  the  earth,  which 
are  known  to  all  intelligent  minds,  but  which  are 
never  fully  realized. 

Let  the  intelligent  man  consider  carefully  the 
simple  elements,  oxygen,  hydrogen,  nitrogen  (as 
well  as  others)  in  their  separate  gaseous  state,  or 
in  their  original  atomic  condition,  and  weigh  in 
his  mind  the  distinct  properties  and  capacities 
given  to  each  individually,  and  the  results  and 
effects  planned  or  designed  for  these  elements  by 
their  Creator,  in  their  several  combinations,  ac- 
cording to  the  limits  and  proportions  He  has 
marked  out,  and  then  put  the  question:  Can  any 
reasonable  mind  hold  for  a  moment,  that  these 
several  elements,  together  with  their  combina- 
tions, producing  such  wonderful  and  splendid 
results,  proceeded  from  any  chance,  and  not 
from  wise  design  ?  The  nature  of  each,  with 
their  resultant  effects,  how  distinct,  precise  and 
accurate  are  they  beyond  our  comprehension. 

26,  Wisdom  of  the  Creator  in  the  Special 
Laws  with  Which  He  has  Endowed  Water. — We 
refer  again  to  water,  that  divine  element,  won- 


't 
.1,1 


74 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


derful  in  its  nature,  its  properties,  its  attributes, 
its  power  and  influence,  the  place  it  fills,  and  the 
work  it  performs;  the  world  and  all  nature  ever 
depending  upon  it  and  craving  for  it.  If  water 
were  not  so  free  and  abundant,  gold  could  not 
be  exchanged  for  it.  It  is  a  prime  necessity ;  it 
is  priceless.  There  is  no  other  such  element  in 
the  world,  and  probably  there  is  none  such,  or 
none  to  excel  it,  in  the  wide  universe.  The  Al- 
mighty, when  He  created  it,  and  endowed  the 
world  with  this  gift,  knew  from  the  beginning 
what  it  was  to  be,  what  He  had  designed  it  to 
do,  and  the  purpose  it  was  to  serve  in  this  world 
which  He  was  preparing  as  the  abode  of  man. 

When  God  gave  this  element  to  the  world,  in 
order  to  make  it  perfect,  to  do  its  work  and  ful- 
fill its  course  at  all  times  and  under  all  conditions. 
He  ordained  for  it  special  laws  to  control  and 
govern  it  under  all  circumstances :  laws  not 
common  to  other  fluids. 

Some  of  the  properties  of  water  and  the  laws 
that  govern  it,  we  will  now  mention.  This 
water  (H3O)  composed  of  two  parts  of  hydrogen 
and  one  of  oxygen,  is  the  life  of  the  world,  for 
without  it  the  world  would  be  dead.  As  we 
are  constituted,  it  is  evident  that  without  water, 
there  could  be  neither  animal  nor  vegetable  life. 
Without  it  seed  would  not  germinate,  and  all 
vegetation  must  perish.  It  would  be  hard  to 
tell,  even  in  the  mineral  or  material  world,  what 
the  condition  of  things  would  be  if  water  had 
not  been  created,  for  this  element  has  entered   • 


The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation        75 

into  the  composition  of  thousands  of  material 
things.  Countless  millions  of  mankind,  the  good 
and  the  evil,  are  and  have  been  thankful  for  the 
gift  and  the  daily  use  of  this  life-giving  fluid. 
All  nature,  animate  and  inanimate,  rejoices  in  the 
unceasing  blessings  that,  in  water,  flow  to  them. 

The  following  are  some  of  its  properties :— It  is 
an  almost  universal  dissolvent;  it  enters  into  the 
composition  of  a  vast  number  of  materials;  it  is 
irrepressible;  it  keeps  its  size  and  volume  under 
great  pressure ;  a  gallon  of  water  three  miles  down 
at  the  bottom  of  the  ocean  occupies  as  much  space 
as  at  the  top,  and  contains  there  the  proportion  of 
the  air  required  for  the  sustenance  and  preserva- 
tion of  the  creatures  that  live  in  the  sea. 

Water  immediately  finds  its  level.  It  moves 
without  -  friction ;  creatures  and  vessels  pass 
through  it  without  resistance,  so  far  as  friction 
is  concerned.  Its  buoyancy  (at  60°  Farenheit)  is 
always  the  same.  The  specific  gravity  of  water 
as  (1)  is  the  measure  of  the  specific  gravity  of  all 

materials. 

Water,  when  its  temperature  is  raised  to  212° 
Farenheit,  goes  off  in  the  form  of  steam,  by  which 
action  its  volume  is  increased  1,600  fold.  As  it 
returns  at  a  lower  temperature  to  its  normal  state, 
it  steadily  shrinks  in  volume  until  it  reaches  40° 
Farenheit,  when,  in  subjection  to  an  extraordi- 
nary law  of  its  nature,  it  ceases  to  contract  and 
begins  to  expand,  as  it  decreases  in  its  tempera- 
ture, until  it  reaches  32°  Farenheit,  when  it  ceases 
to  be  a  fluid  and  becomes  a  solid  known  as  ice. 


'li 


ll 


If 


76 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


floating  on  the  surface  of  the  water.  As  the  cold 
increases  or  the  temperature  of  the  ice  decreases, 
it  still  continues  slowly  to  expand. 

This  fact  is  well  known  to  all  common  ob- 
servers. This  special  law  that  governs  water  is 
an  unusual  one  in  the  history  of  those  natural  laws 
that  control  the  elements  of  the  earth.  Were  it 
not  for  this  provision  ordained  for  it,  the  waters 
of  the  earth  would  sink  to  the  bottom  of  ponds, 
rivers,  lakes  and  seas  as  fast  as  they  were  frozen, 
and  being  there  below  the  melting  influence  of 
the  sun,  would  receive  continual  additions  of  ice 
or  frozen  material  until  all  became  one  solid  mass. 
One  result  of  this  would  be  the  destruction  of  all 
that  lived  and  moved  in  the  waters.  The  glaciers 
themselves,  that  now  float  in  the  oceans,  would 
go  to  the  bottom.  The  rivers,  seas  and  oceans 
would,  in  time,  cease  to  be  navigable;  and  the 
earth  itself  would  be  made  uninhabitable. 

From  the  statement  of  these  facts  and  their 
consideration,  is  it  not  evident  that  there  was  an 
intelligent  design,  and  a  wise  and  beneficent  pur- 
pose in  this  natural  law  which  ordains  that  water, 
at  a  certain  fixed  temperature  should  cease  to 
contract,  and,  as  it  afterward  decreased  from 
that  point,  in  temperature,  either  as  water  or  in 
the  condition  of  ice,  it  should  expand  and,  as  ice, 
be  made  to  float  on  the  surface,  rather  than  sink 
to  the  bottom. 

There  are  other  important  laws  governing  this 
element  of  water  in  its  various  conditions,  such 
as  its  latent  and  also  its  specific  heat. 


The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation        77 

Professor  Balfour  Stewart,  in  his  "Primer 
Physics,"  published  by  D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  has, 
in  a  clear  and  concise  manner,  stated  facts  on 
these  items,  some  of  which  we  here  quote: — 
'•Thus  we  see  that  ice  requires  latent  heat  to 
bring  it  into  water,  while  water  again  requires 
latent  heat  to  bring  it  into  steam.  Now  we  can 
measure  how  much  heat  it  will  take  to  bring  a 
pound  of  ice  at  ^2""  Farenheit  to  a  pound  of  water 
at  the  same  temperature,  and  we  find  it  will  take 
as  much  heat  to  do  this  as  it  would  to  raise 
seventy-nine  pounds  of  water  one  degree  in  tem- 
perature, and  this  is  what  we  mean,  when  we 
say  that  the  latent  heat  of  water  is  equal  to 
seventy-nine  degrees.  In  a  similar  manner  it  has 
been  found  that  the  latent  heat  of  steam  is  537, 
that  is  to  say:— it  will  take  as  much  heat  to 
change  a  pound  of  water  at  212°  Farenheit  into 
steam  of  the  same  temperature,  as  it  would  to 
raise  537  pounds  of  water  one  degree  in  tem- 
perature." 

It  thus  takes  a  good  deal  of  heat  to  melt  ice, 
and  it  therefore  takes  a  good  deal  of  time  to  do 
so.  Indeed,  it  is  much  better  that  this  is  the 
case,  for  what  would  happen  if  ice,  at  the  melt- 
ing point,  were  to  change  into  water  at  once 
when  heated  ever  so  little.  It  would  render  un- 
inhabitable a  large  part  of  the  globe,  for  the  ice 
of  the  mountains  would,  on  some  fine  spring 
day,  be  at  once  liquified,  and  the  water  would 
rush  down  in  such  overwhelming  torrents 
as    to   sweep  everything  before    it,   and  large 


yS 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


tracts  of  low-lying  land  would  be  buried  under 
water. 

In  like  manner,  it  is  much  better  for  us  that  it 
takes  a  large  amount  of  heat  to  convert  water  at 
the  boiling  point  into  steam:  for,  suppose  that 
water  at  this  point  were  at  once  converted  into 
steam  by  heating  it  ever  so  little,  there  would  be 
an  explosion  in  every  teakettle  and  in  every 
boiler,  while  a  steam  engine  would  be  an  utter 
impossibility. 

The  particular  and  specific  limitations  placed 
on  water,  as  here  mentioned,  by  the  especial  dis- 
pensation of  the  Creator,  manifest  beneficent  de- 
sign, and  prove  His  wisdom  and  power  to  give 
to  an  element  just  such  attributes  and  qualities  as 
He  desired  it  should  possess. 

In  reference  to  specific  heat.  Professor  Balfour 
Stewart  also  writes :—"  Some  bodies  require  a 
greater  amount  of  heat  than  others  in  order  to 
raise  their  temperature  one  degree.  The  quantity 
of  heat  required  to  raise  a  pound  of  weight  of 
any  substance  one  degree  is  called  its  specific 
heat;  that  is  to  say,  it  requires  more  heat  to  raise 
a  pound  of  water  one  degree  than  it  does  to  raise 
almost  any  other  substance.  The  heat  required 
to  raise  a  pound  of  water  one  degree  will  raise 
through  one  degree  nine  pounds  of  iron,  eleven 
pounds  of  zinc,  and  no  less  than  thirty  pounds 
of  mercury  or  gold." 

Some  of  these  facts  relating  to  the  natural  laws 
that  govern  water,  as  given  by  Professor  Stewart, 
are  not  realized  nor  as  commonly  known  and 


The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation        79 

understood  as  that  law  which  governs  the  ex- 
pansion of  water  at  the  temperature  of  forty 
degrees  and  less.  They  are,  in  and  of  them- 
selves, of  vast  importance.  In  respect  to  water. 
Suppose,  for  instance,  that  it  received  heat,  be- 
came warm  and  hot  as  readily  as  other  elements 
do,  the  sun  would  soon  greatly  raise  the  tem- 
perature of  all  bodies  of  water  exposed  to  its 
heat,— rivers,  lakes,  and  seas,  especially  in  south- 
ern latitudes,  would  be  brought  almost  if  not 
quite  to  a  boiling  temperature,  and  as  nearly 
three-fourths  of  the  surface  of  the  earth  is  cov- 
ered with  water,  the  increased  heat  on  the  whole 
earth  would  be  unbearable.  The  increased  evap- 
oration that  would  also  ensue  would  envelope 
the  earth  in  an  atmosphere  of  fog.  But  it  is  use- 
less to  state  what  might  happen. 

One  reason  why  we  have  called  attention  to 
this  particular  element,  water,  has  been  to  prove 
that  there  is  in  this  element  indisputable  evidence 
that  God  adopts  adequate  measures  to  accomplish 
His  ends;  that  He  can  do  or  stop  doing;  make 
restrictions  or  put  a  limit  on  some  things,  saying 
"thus  far  shalt  thou  go  and  no  farther,"  when 
it  is  His  will  or  purpose  so  to  do. 

The  nature  and  history  of  water,  as  known  to 
man,  is  sufficient  evidence  alone,  of  the  being, 
wisdom,  power  and  goodness  of  the  Almighty 
God.  Water  is  no  machine-made  element,  the 
product  of  some  general  law;  neither  is  it  the 
product  of  evolution.  The  Evolutionists,  under 
their  theory  or  plan  of  procedure,  cannot  devise 


8o 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


a   way  by  which  it  could  be  formed  or  con- 
trolled. 

The  elements,  oxygen  and  hydrogen,  in  other 
combinations,   and  under  other  circumstances, 
are  not  controlled,  as  far  as  is  known,  by  any 
such  laws  as  those  that  govern  the  element  water. 
In  considering  the  atomic  elements  found  in  the 
world,  we  learn  that  each  class  of  atoms  has  its 
own  peculiar  nature,  its  own  special  and  dis- 
tinctive qualities,  and  its  affmity  for,  or  power  to 
combine  more  or  less  limited,  with  one  or  more 
of  the  other  atomic  classes;  that  for  each  sepa- 
rate class  of  atoms  there  is  some  law  of  affinity 
controlling   them    in    respect   to   other  atomic 
classes,  sometimes  stronger  for  one  than  for  an- 
other, leaving  one  for  another,  and  thus  resulting 
in  a  great  variety  of  what  might  be  called  natural 
combinations. 

The  primary  laws  controlling  all  classes  of 
elementary  atoms  ordained  by  the  Creator,  are 
unknown  to  us,  and  beyond  our  comprehension. 
The  men  of  science  have  ascertained  many  facts 
and  results,  but  the  why  and  the  wherefore  of 
all  combinations,  and  their  extent,  under  differ- 
ent conditions,  including  the  crystallization  of 
elementary  atoms,  is  known  only  to  Him. 

The  pure  and  simple  elementary  atomic  ma- 
terials that  form  the  substantial  body  of  this 
earth,  are  few  in  number,  as  before  stated.  Of 
the  non-metallic,  the  most  important  are  oxygen, 
hydrogen,  nitrogen,  carbon,  chlorides,  and  a  few 
others. 


The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation        8i 

27,  Innumerable  Results  from  the  Varied 
Combinations  of  the  Simple  Elements.— ks  the 
few  letters  of  the  alphabets  of  all  written  lan- 
guage form  the  words  that  make  up  and  fill  the 
tens  of  millions  of  books  in  the  world;  and  as 
the  few  vowel  sounds  represent  the  sounds 
found  in  the  syllables  of  all  languages  that  make 
up  the  multitudes  of  the  world's  books,  that  ex- 
press, define  and  make  known  all  things  and  all 
events  for  all  times;  and  as  the  few  musical  notes 
and  tones,  employed  in  the  music  of  all  songs, 
be  they  notes  of  praise,  joy,  sorrow,  or  other- 
wise—all governed,  as  they  are,  by  the  laws  that 
God  has  made  for  them— these  notes,  compara- 
tively few,  are  all  that  are  known  or  sounded  in 
the  music  of  the  world ;  so,  in  like  manner,  do 
the  few  simple  elements  that  we  have  before 
named,  form  and  constitute  the  vital  and  impor- 
tant parts  of  our  material  world,  and  probably,  so 
far  as  we  have  knowledge,  of  the  other  worlds 

also. 

It  is  not  always  the  great  things  that  are  the 
most  wonderful;  for  often  the  small  things  com- 
mand our  admiration  more  than  do  the  great, 
like  the  atomic  elements,  with  their  defined  and 
specific  nature  and  their  peculiar  combinations. 
The  great  things  in  nature  are  but  the  accumu- 
lation of  the  small. 

28.  In  the  Creation  of  the  Atomic  Elements 
and  the  Laws  That  Control  Them  ;  the  Wisdom, 
Power  and  Order  of  the  Almighty  are  Mani- 
fested,'-^^  have    mentioned    particularly    the 


82 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


simple  elements,  oxygen,  hydrogen  and  nitrogen, 
that  we  might  consider  and  realize,  in  some 
measure,  how  singularly  characteristic,  how  per- 
fect in  adaptation,  how  comprehensive  in  appli- 
cation, and  how  beneficial  beyond  measure,  in 
results,  are  some  of  the  atomic  elements  created 
by  the  Almighty.  How  precise,  well  defined 
and  wonderful  they  are  in  their  effects  and  re- 
sults, both  separately,  and  in  their  several  well- 
known  combinations.  How  valuable  are  these 
simple  elements  to  the  earth,  the  world,  and  all 
therein.  Without  these  elements,  there  could  be 
no  life,  animal  or  vegetable.  The  world  would 
be  lifeless  and  barren  as  the  moon  is  believed  to 
be. 

It  ought  to  be  evident  to  all  considerate  minds, 
that  these  elements  were  wisely  designed  and 
created,  or  caused  to  exist  for  special  purposes; 
and  that  special  laws  were  made  to  control  them 
in  all  their  operations,  at  all  periods  and  under 
all  contingencies. 

The  ability  and  wisdom  of  an  architect,  de- 
signing and  erecting  a  great  building,  is  weighed 
and  measured  by  his  work.  His  reputation  rises 
or  falls,  as  those  who  are  able  to  discern,  observe 
the  merits  of  the  structure  in  all  its  parts,  or  note 
its  defects  from  its  foundation  to  its  topmost 
stone.  In  the  design,  plan  and  construction  of 
the  edifice,  they  would  note  whether  or  not  there 
was  a  wise  and  orderly  arrangement  of  the 
several  floors,  halls,  rooms  and  apartments,  all 
adapted  for  the  use  and  purpose  for  which  the 


The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation        83 

building  was  erected.  If  they  found  there  was 
utility,  order,  and  beauty  of  design,  perfection  in 
execution,  and  every  want  provided  for,  they 
would  unhesitatingly  declare  it  to  be  the  work  of 
a  wise  master-builder. 

In  the  construction  of  this  world,  no  fault  can 
be  discerned  nor  pointed  out.  It  is  complete  in 
all  its  appointments.  There  is  an  orderly  ar- 
rangement of  all  things  in  the  world,  and  a  wise 
adjustment  of  the  materials  and  all  the  elements 
in  respect  to  weight,  quantity  and  other  items. 
The  laws  that  control  internal  matters  and  gov- 
ern external  affairs  are  exact  and  perfect.  St. 
Paul  writes,  *'For  every  house  is  builded  by 
some  one,  but  He  that  built  all  things  is  God." 
He  is  the  great  architect  of  the  universe;  and  the 
earth  and  the  heavens  daily  declare  His  orderly, 
perfect,  and  glorious  work.  He  is  the  God  of 
order  and  not  of  confusion.  The  universe  itself 
is  a  sublime  evidence  of  the  fact  that  order  is  the 
foundation  principle  of  His  government.  Order 
allied  to  *' holiness  becometh  thine  house,  oh 
Lord." 

Pope  writes,  "Order  is  Heaven's  first  law." 
This,  it  would  seem,  must  necessarily  be  true. 
But  before  order  can  be  secured  and  maintained, 
there  are,  and  must  be,  certain  conditions  inher- 
ent or  belonging  to  the  persons,  things,  or  ele- 
ments in  question,  to  cause  them  to  become  and 
to  abide  orderly  in  their  true  place  and  condition. 
There  must  be  some  distinctive  nature,  attribute, 
character,   quality  or  affinity,  or  they  must  be 


If^ 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


made  subject  to  some  influence  of  a  positive  or 
negative  character,  that  may  or  will  operate  to 
incline,  direct,  or  compel  the  thing  to  take  its 
proper  direction  or  natural  place,  like  the  well- 
trained  soldiers  of  a  regiment  who  will,  on  the 
order  being  given,  immediately  take  their  true 
place  in  the  ranks.  But  let  the  order  be  given  to 
untrained  men,  and  it  would  take  them  a  long 
time  to  find  the  place  where  they  belonged.  This 
homely  illustration  shows  how  apparent  it  is  that 
there  must  be  some  definite  character,  attribute, 
or  elective  affinity,  chemical,  electric  or  magnetic 
influence  possessed  by  the  person,  thing,  atom, 
or  element,  before  it  would  move,  or  be  moved, 
and  take  definitely  its  proper  place  in  respect  to 
its  surroundings. 

Some  elements  are  quite  peculiar  in  their  char- 
acter, conduct,  influence  or  power.  For  instance, 
while  the  electric  current  passes  through  all 
metallic  bodies,  and  finds  good  conductors  of  its 
energy  in  or  through  many  other  things,  there  is 
that  other  element,  magnetism,  which,  while  in 
some  respects  it  appears  to  be  of  the  same  na- 
ture, yet  is  quite  limited  in  its  influence  and 
power,  acting  only  on  iron  and  steel,  and  a  few 
other  metals.  While  magnetic  currents  are  in- 
tercepted by  thin  plates  of  iron  or  steel,  as  light 
is  by  any  opaque  substance,  these  magnetic  cur- 
rents pass  through  gold,  silver,  copper,  and  other 
substances,  without  hinderance,  as  light  does 
through  clear  glass.  Why  is  this  ?  Why  should 
this  element  in  these  particulars  be  so  limited  and 


n 


The  Atomic  Age  of  Creation        85 

specific,  and  be  made  also  subject  to  electric  cur- 
rents passing  through  the  earth  ?  These  electric 
currents  are  not  adapted  to,  nor  can  they  be  made 
to  take  the  place  of,  the  Mariner's  Compass,  nor 
control  the  magnetic  needle  that  God  has  pro- 
vided to  guide  man  in  his  travels  over  the  earth 
and  sea. 

The  force  of  gravitation,  which  has  a  certain 
control  over  all  material  bodies  possessing  weight, 
is  a  condition  or  power  bestowed  on  matter  by 
the  Creator. 

From  all  that  we  are  able  to  learn  or  discover, 
there  is  not  found  in  the  wide  world,  a  person, 
element,  or  material  thing,  to  which  God  has  not 
ordained  or  affixed  some  distinctive  nature,  char- 
acter, quality,  attribute,  or  made  subject  to  some 
law,  affinity  or  influence,  positive  or  negative  in 
its  character. 

This  rule  or  law  relates  to  spirits,  to  the  spirit- 
ual and  moral  qualities  of  beings  subject  to 
spiritual  influences,  as  well  as  to  all  material  ele- 
ments, imponderable  as  well  as  ponderable. 
Spiritual  natures  have  their  affinities,  their  likes 
and  dislikes  that  rule  them.  Bad  as  this  world 
is,  Judas  the  traitor  found  it  too  good  for  him, 
and  so  hastened  to  hang  himself,  ''that  he  might 
go  to  his  own  place,"  as  St.  Peter  has  said. 

In  endeavoring  to  ascertain  what  may  be 
learned  relating  to  the  formation  of  the  earth — 
the  creation  of  the  world— it  seemed  necessary  to 
note  first  some  of  the  material  elements  used  in 
the    great  work;    their    nature,   character,   and 


86 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


III 


III 


adaptability  for  the  work  required ;  and  how  these 
atomic  materials  were  at  the  time  carefully  and 
precisely  prepared  for  the  particular  place  and 
service  they  were  to  fill,  as  it  is  recorded  of  the 
Temple  of  Solomon,  '*  built  of  stone,  made  ready 
before  it  was  brought  hither." 

The  material  elements  of  the  world,  at  least 
those  on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  are  seen  and 
generally  known.  But  as  St.  Paul  writes,  "The 
things  which  are  seen,  were  not  made  of  things 
which  do  appear." 

We  have  no  means  of  ascertaining  how  far  the 
same  atomic  elements  of  our  earth  enter  into  the 
material  substance  of  the  sun  and  other  members 
of  our  solar  system.  It  is  known,  however,  that 
the  sun  possesses  elements  foreign  to  our  world ; 
their  nature  and  attributes  being  unknown  to  us. 


VII 

A  REVIEW  OF  THE  MOSAIC  RECORD 

29.  The  Question  How  was  Our  Earth 
Formed?  A  Review  of ' the  Mosaic  Record.— 
The  important  question  that  remains  to  be  solved 
is,  how  was  our  earth  formed  or  created  ?  Are 
there  any  means  of  ascertaining  on  what  plan,  or 
by  what  process,  and  what  were  the  agencies 
employed  to  bring  about  the  grand  result— the 
formation  of  this  world  to  which  we  cling  ? 

When  we  go  outside  of  the  material  earth 
itself,  seeking  evidence  of  its  creation  or  the  proc- 
ess of  its  formation,  most  persons,  in  civilized 
countries  at  least,  turn  to  the  Bible,— the  Scrip- 
tures of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments— expect- 
ing that  book  to  impart  the  necessary  information 
and  give  the  facts  concerning  the  creation  of  the 
earth.  At  least  they  expect  the  record  of  "the 
six  days'  work  of  creation,"  as  it  is  called,  con- 
tained in  the  first  chapter  of  Genesis,  will,  as  at 
first  it  seems  to  do,  tell  them  what  they  desire  to 
know. 

That  record  has  been  examined,  investigated 
and  studied,  probably,  more  than  any  other  por- 
tion of  the  Scriptures.  Men  have  reasoned,  dis- 
puted, and  quarrelled  over  it,  time  and  again. 
They  have  puzzled  their  brains  over  its  several 

87 


m 


ii 


il I 

•i 


88 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


statements,  some  declaring  that  they  mean  one 
thing,  and  others,  another  thing.     The  record  has 
seemed  harder  for  theologians  to  explain,  than 
for  mathematicians  to  square  the  circle.     In  this 
generation,  many  men,  professed  believers  in  the 
truths  of  the  Bible,  have  given  the  matter  up  in 
despair,  not  desiring  to  talk  or  even  think  about 
the  question.     As  some  people  judge  a  book  by 
its  covers,  so  many  have  judged  the  Bible  by  its 
first  chapter,  and  because  of  this  opening  diffi- 
culty have  condemned  the  v^hole  book;   while 
Moses,  the  inspired  man  of  God,   has  lost,  it 
would  seem,  his  reputation,  and  fallen  from  the 
high  place  he  once  had  among  the  saints.     In 
time,  we  believe,  he  will  be  restored  to  his  old 
place,  and  then  it  will  be  freely  admitted  by  in- 
telligent men  that  Moses  has  not  blundered  or 
made  grievous  mistakes,  but  that  his  critics  have, 
by  their  failure  to  comprehend  the  scope  of  the 
truths  he  recorded,  and  by  their  assuming  (with- 
out reason)  that  Moses'  record  of  the  "six  days' 
work  "  included  the  whole  of  creation,  when,  in 
fact,  it  was  only  a  very  small  part;  and  that  part 
confined  to  things  on  the  immediate  surface  of 
the  earth. 

In  respect  to  the  Mosaic  record  of  the  **six 
days'  work  of  creation,"  it  has  been,  for  thou- 
sands of  years,  the  prevailing  opinion  of  readers 
of  the  Scriptures  that  Moses'  description  of  that 
six  days'  work  included  not  only  the  vegetable 
and  animal  life  created  and  now  known  to  exist 
on  the  earth,  but  also  the  material  earth  itself,  in- 


V 


"ill 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record     89 

eluding  all  its  simple,  primary  elements,  with  all 
their  geological  formations. 

For  several  generations,  the  best  thinkers  and 
writers  interested  in  the  matter,  have  made  great 
and  constant  efforts  to  reconcile  the  Mosaic 
record  with  the  known  facts  relating  to  the 
geological  formation  of  the  earth,  and  the  periods 
of  time  involved;  and  have  advanced  various 
speculative  theories,  and  made  all  sorts  of  expla- 
nations, some  of  them  absurd,  and  none  giving 
satisfaction  to,  or  meeting  with  the  full  assent  of, 
intelligent  minds.  The  natural  effect  of  all  this 
has  been  to  create  a  spirit  of  unbelief  in  the  truth 
of  the  record  and,  in  many  persons,  a  loss  of 
faith  in  the  Bible  itself. 

The  writer,  believing  that  the  Scriptures  of  the 
Old  and  New  Testaments  were  written  by  men 
who  were  inspired  of  God,  and  that  the  facts, 
principles,  and  statements  therein  contained,  were 
and  are  true,  although  the  exact  words  cannot 
now  be  verified,  because  the  original  language  in 
which  they  were  written  is  not  now  spoken  nor 
definitely  known ;  and  because  the  many  thou- 
sands of  transcribers  of  the  records,  from  the 
days  of  Moses  to  the  present  time,  were  mortal 
men,  whose  work  none  will  guarantee  to  be  free 
from  error. 

Nevertheless,  the  writer  has  accepted  these  state- 
ments of  the  Scriptures  as  truth  because,  in  the  af- 
fairs of  life,  in  the  history  of  man,  and  in  many 
ways,  he  has  believed  not  only  by  what  he  has 
seen,  but  has  tested  for  himself  the  truth  of  the 


90 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


Scriptures  a  thousand  times,  and  has  ever  found 
their  statements  reliable  and  true  in  all  matters 
where  his  reason,  knowledge  and  judgment  were 
competent  to  decide.  Not  only  so,  but  the  verity 
of  the  Scriptures  is  confirmed  day  by  day  by  mil- 
lions of  men  and  women  whose  judgment  is 
worthy  of  all  acceptance. 

Therefore,  so  far  as  the  Mosaic  record  of  crea- 
tion was  concerned,  the  writer  believed  it  stated 
the  truth,  though  it  seemed  to  be  a  hidden 
mystery.  For  thirty  years  or  more  he  wondered 
at,  and  sometimes  felt  like  complaining  because 
Moses  had  not  given  at  least  a  few  words  of  ex- 
planation in  his  record. 

Some  twenty-five  years  ago  the  writer,  on  re- 
viewing the  text,  and  considering  the  matter 
again,  came  to  the  conclusion  that  the  Mosaic  de- 
scription of  the  "  six  days'  work  "  had  nothing  at 
all  to  do  with  the  creation  or  geological  forma- 
tion of  the  earth,  but  was  only  his  description 
of  the  events  that  daily  took  place  in  their  regular 
order,  and  in  the  order  in  which  an  intelligent 
observer  would  have  credited  their  first  appear- 
ances, had  he  been  on  the  spot,  and  in  a  suitable 
place  to  do  so. 

The  more  we  have  investigated  the  matter,  and 
that  in  every  point  of  view,  the  stronger  are  our 
convictions  that  the  Mosaic  record  was  not  in- 
tended to  give  even  a  hint  of  any  of  the  particulars 
of  the  creation  of  the  heavens  and  the  earth, — 
save  that  it  was  all  the  work  of  God  in  ages 
long  past. 


m 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record     9^ 

As  the  Mosaic  record  itself  may  not  be  familiar 
to  most  readers,  it  may  be  well  just  here  to  re- 
view it  as  given  in  the  revised  version  of  the 
Bible. 

First  chapter  of  Genesis,  first  verse:— "In  the 
beginning  God  created  the  heavens  and  the 
earth."  Comment:— It  will  not  be  denied  that 
creation  was  a  work,  and  not  an  act.  The  most 
obvious  rendering,  therefore,  according  to  the 
fact,  would  be,  "  From  the  beginning  God  began 
to  create  the  heavens  and  the  earth." 

Second  verse:—"  And  the  earth  was  waste  and 
void."  "And  the  earth  was  waste."  Com- 
ment:—At  that  particular  time  the  earth  was 
"waste,"  which  we  understand  to  mean  that  it 
was  lying  unoccupied,  unused,  like  a  great  farm 
all  ready  for  use,  and  the  ground  prepared  for  the 
seed;  though  it  had  for  years  remained  unculti- 
vated. 

The  record  states,— "The  earth  was  void." 
That  implies  that  the  earth,  whatever  may  have 
been  its  previous  condition,  was  at  that  time 
empty,  unused,  bereft,  destitute  of  all  life,  either 
vegetable  or  animal. 

The  record  further  states:— "And  darkness 
was  on  the  face  of  the  deep.  And  the  Spirit  of 
God  moved,  ('or  was  brooding,'  marginal 
notes,)  upon  the  face  of  the  waters."  Comment: 
—This  condition  of  darkness,  that  then  enveloped 
the  earth,  was  evidently  that  state  referred  to  by 
the  Almighty  in  His  address  to  Job,  (see  Job, 
chapter  xxxviii.),   saying,    "When  1  made  the 


gi 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


i 


cloud  the  garment  thereof,  and  thick  darkness  a 
swaddling-band  for  it."  This  fact  and  state- 
ment we  will  have  occasion  to  refer  to  and  ex- 
plain later,  then  proving  that  it  was  a  necessary 
proceeding  in  God's  process  of  completing  the 
world  and  preparing  it  for  the  present  orders  of 
vegetable  and  animal  life,  and  for  being  a  perfect 
habitation  for  man. 

It  is  next  recorded  in  Genesis.  **And  God 
said,  Let  there  be  light:  and  there  was  light." 
By  which  we  understand  that  outside  of  the 
earth,  beyond  the  cloud  of  darkness,  there  had 
been  shining  for  ages,  the  light  of  our  sun, 
which  light,  by  the  command  of  God,  now 
pierced  through  and  dissipated  the  thick  darkness 
and  lighted  up  the  face  of  the  earth. 

It  is  recorded  that  the  "Spirit  of  God  moved 
upon  the  face  of  the  waters,"— above  the  waters, 
in  the  fluid  or  atmospheric  elements  which  were 
under  control  and  power  of  the  Spirit,  so  that 
when  God  said,  "Let  there  be  light,"  then  by 
some  electrical  force,  instantaneous  action,  chem- 
ical affinity,  or  other  process  known  to  God,  the 
fog  or  cloud  of  vapor  was  so  dispersed  or  clari- 
fied, that  the  light  broke  through  and  appeared 
on  the  earth's  surface,  though  its  real  source, 
the  sun,  was  at  the  time  unknown  and  hidden 
from  the  view  of  any  observer  on  the  earth.  It 
is  further  recorded  that  God  pronounced  the  light 
good,  but  this  does  not  state  or  imply  that  it  was 
extensive  or  all-pervading. 

It  is  recorded  further  "And  God  divided  the 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record     93 


light  from  the  darkness,"— that  is.  made  a  dis- 
tinction between  the  light  and  the  darkness— 
"and  God  called  the  light  Day,  and  the  darkness 
He  called  Night.  And  the  evening  and  the  morn- 
ing were  the  first  day."  This  account  is  very 
simple,  and  the  meaning  plain.  The  work  of 
one  day  only  is  described.  The  beginning  and 
end  of  its  two  divisions  are  so  definitely  named 
that  there  ought  not  to  be  any  doubt  about  the 
length  of  the  days  of  creation  named  in  Genesis. 

It  is  recorded  in  the  sixth  verse:— "And  God 
said,  Let  there  be  a  firmament  in  the  midst  of 
the  waters,  and  let  it  divide  the  waters  from 
the  waters."  Seventh  verse:— "And  God  made 
the  firmament,  and  divided  the  waters  which  were 
under  the  firmament  from  the  waters  which  were 
above  the  firmament:  and  it  was  so."  Eighth 
verse:— "And  God  called  the  firmament  Heaven. 
And  the  evening  and  the  morning  were  the  second 
day." 

The  Hebrew  word  called  "firmament"  in  the 
old  translations  and  editions  of  the  Bible,  is  now, 
in  the  new  version,  translated  "expanse,"  and  it 
is  admitted  by  learned  Hebrew  scholars  that  the 
word  expanse  expresses  the  true  meaning  of  the 
original  word,  and  that  rendering  is  now  gen- 
erally accepted.  • 

The  important  and  radical  changes  in  the 
atmosphere  enveloping  the  earth,  which  were 
commenced  on  the  first  day,  were  continued 
through  the  second.  The  darkness  that  covered 
the  earth  at  that  time  was  evidently  referred  to 


4 


94 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


by  the  Almighty  in  His  address  to  Job,  referred 
to  above.  The  encircling  band  of  darkness, 
whatever  may  have  been  its  constituent  ele- 
ments, was  now  broken;  this  cloud  was  now 
separated,  scattered  and  dissipated  by  the  Spirit 
of  God,  as  by  a  mighty  wind. 

It  is  recorded  that  on  the  second  day,  ' '  God 
made  the  firmament,  and  divided  the  waters 
which  were  under  the  firmament  from  the  waters 
which  were  above  the  firmament ;  and  it  was  so. 
And  God  called  the  firmament  Heaven:  and  the 
evening  and  the  morning  were  the  second  day." 
Calling  the  firmament  "heaven"  was  teaching 
men  to  look  upward  to  heaven  and  to  God  who 
is  the  author  and  source  of  all  heavenly  bless- 
ings. 

God  made  the  ''expanse."  Modern  scholars 
give  proof  that  the  latter  word  expresses  the 
true  meaning  of  the  original;  and  it  also  agrees 
with  the  facts  of  the  case,  while  the  word 
'•firmament"  does  not,  for  that  word  conveys 
the  idea  of  solidity,  firmness,  in  the  sky  above 
us,  as  it  was  thought  to  be  by  the  ancient 
Hebrews.  Dr.  Adam  Clark,  in  his  commentary, 
in  giving  the  correct  meaning  of  the  word,  says: 
"The  Hebrew  word  *Rakia'  means  to  spread 
out,  as  the  curtains  of  a  tent  or  pavilion,  and 
simply  signifies  an  expanse  or  space;  conse- 
quently, that  circumambient  space  or  expansion 
separating  the  clouds  which  are  in  the  higher 
regions  of  it,  from  the  seas,  etc.,  which  are 
below  it." 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record     95 

"And  God  said,  Let  there  be  a  firmament  in 
the  midst  of  the  waters,  and  let  it  divide  the 
waters  from  the  waters.  And  God  made  the 
firmament,  and  divided  the  waters  which  were 
under  the  firmament  from  the  waters  which  were 
above  the  firmament:  and  it  was  so."    Genesis 

i.  6,  7. 

Adopting  the  view  that  the  constituent  ele- 
ments of  the  air  had  long  before  been  prepared, 
measured,  equalized,  and  brought  together,  and 
that  the  atmosphere  was  now  purified  or  free 
from  all  deleterious  gases;  the  scope  of  the  work 
recorded  as  being  performed  by  the  Creator  on  the 
second  day,  appears  to  have  been  the  increasing 
and  extending  or  expanding  of  the  atmosphere  far 
above  the  earth  which  it  encircled,  and  bestow- 
ing upon  it  the  many  peculiar  qualities  which  it 
possesses,— the  appearance  of  the  blue,  ethereal 
sky ;  its  power  of  transmitting  light  or  heat,  and 
refracting  the  same;  its  capacity  to  absorb  water 
and  hold  in  suspense  clouds  of  vapor,  and  its 
facility  for  distributing  and  discharging  the  same 
over  the  earth;  also,  its  power  of  sustaining  the 
life  of  everything  that  breathes,  and  all  that 
grows,  besides  other  innumerable  uses  which 
may  not  be  apprehended. 

The  spectator  recording  the  events,  would 
observe  the  clouds  during  the  second  day  rise 
toward  heaven  and  extend  all  around  him,  so  that 
the  field  of  vision  above  and  in  every  direction 
was  greatly  expanded  and  enlarged.  The  vapor 
or  waters  in  the  clouds  above,  were  seen  to  be 


96 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


divided  or  separated  from  the  waters  below  the 
expanse  of  vision. 

The  firmament  or  expanse  witnessed  by  the 
observer  and  recorded,  was  what  we  should  call 
our  sky ;  the  apparent  arch  or  vault  of  heaven ; 
the  region  of  clouds,  winds  and  rain;  the  part  of 
the  earth's  atmosphere  in  which  meteorological 
phenomena  take  place;  our  sky,  the  immense 
expanse  encircling  the  earth  wherein  is  formed 
the  gentle  dew,  the  drops  of  rain,  the  zephyr 
breezes,  the  stormy  winds  and  gales;  the  flash- 
ing lightning  and  the  pealing  thunder,  clarifying 
and  purifying  the  atmosphere;  the  sunshine  and 
cloud-shadows;  the  dark  days  and  the  bright 
ones;  and  many  other  items  might  be  named,  all 
bearing  results  beneficial  to  vegetable  and  animal 
life.  We  could  not  exist,  constituted  as  we  are, 
without  the  protecting  influence  of  the  expanse, 
—the  so-called  firmament— the  sky,  our  atmos- 
pheric surrounding. 

Continuing  the  record,  ninth  verse:— ''And 
God  said,  Let  the  waters  under  the  heaven  be 
gathered  together  unto  one  place,  and  let  the  dry 
land  appear:  and  it  was  so.  And  God  called  the 
dry  land  Earth;  and  the  gathering  together  of  the 
waters  called  He  Seas;  and  God  saw  that  it  was 
good.  And  God  said,  Let  the  earth  bring  forth 
grass,  the  herb  yielding  seed,  and  the  fruit-tree 
yielding  fruit  after  his  kind,  whose  seed  is  in 
itself  upon  the  earth :  and  it  was  so.  And  the 
earth  brought  forth  grass,  and  the  herb  yielding 
seed  after  his  kind,  and  the  tree  yielding  fruit. 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record     97 

whose  seed  was  in  itself,  after  his  kind:  and  God 
saw  that  it  was  good.  And  the  evening  and  the 
morning  were  the  third  day." 

It  is  worthy  of  particular  notice  that  the  work 
recorded  to  have  been  done  on  the  first  and  sec- 
ond days,  and  on  the  first  part  of  the  third  day 
of  creation,  was  mainly  atmospherical  changes 
of  various  natures,  kinds  and  degrees,  including 
the  dissipation  of  the  thick  cloud  of  darkness 
that  for  a  long  period  had  enveloped  the  geolog- 
ically completed  earth,  until,  by  the  command  of 
God,  the  light  passed  through  and  lighted  up  the 
surface  of  the  earth,  though  the  clouds,  as  yet, 
had  not  entirely  disappeared. 

The  spectator,  on  the  morning  of  the  third  day, 
in  viewing  the  landscape  before  and  around  him, 
would  have  beheld  not  only  the  dry  land, — the 
earth, — but  various  streams  and  bodies  of  water, 
some  large  ones,  called  seas.  He  would  have 
noticed  in  the  morning  of  the  third  day,  that  the 
earth  was  unoccupied,  waste,  empty,  and  void 
of  life  and  beauty  of  every  kind  and  description. 
But,  before  the  day  had  closed,  a  great  change 
had  come  over  the  scene.  The  desolate  and 
barren  earth  had  given  place  to  our  decorated 
world,  clothed  in  living  green,  stocked  with  food, 
and  adorned  with  fruits  and  flowers,  the  beauty 
and  fragrance  of  which  declare  the  goodness, 
wisdom  and  power  of  the  Creator. 

To  continue  the  record;  verse  fourteen: — ''And 
God  said,  Let  there  be  lights  in  the  firmament  of 
heaven  to  divide  the  day  from  the  night:  and  let 


98 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


them  be  for  signs  and  seasons,  and  for  days  and 
years:  And  let  them  be  for  lights  in  the  firma- 
ment of  heaven  to  give  light  upon  the  earth :  and 
it  was  so.  And  God  made  two  great  lights :  the 
greater  light  to  rule  the  day,  and  the  lesser  light 
to  rule  the  night."  "He  made  the  stars  also. 
And  God  set  them  in  the  firmament  of  the  heaven 
to  give  light  upon  the  earth,  and  to  rule  over  the 
day  and  the  night,  and  to  divide  the  light  from 
the  darkness:  and  God  saw  that  it  was  good. 
And  the  evening  and  the   morning  were  the 

fourth  day." 

Note:  The  words  "He  made,"  are  not  in  the 
original,  but  have  been  put  in  by  the  translators, 
it  should  read,  "  the  stars  also  to  rule  the  night." 

Here  we  learn  that  it  was  not  until  the  fourth 
day  of  creation  that  the  spectator  records  the  first 
appearance  of  the  sun  and  moon  and  other  heav- 
enly bodies.  "Why  did  God  wait  until  the 
fourth  day  before  He  made  the  sun,"  is  a  ques- 
tion which  has  troubled  many  a  mind,  and  as  it 
has  been  so  hard  to  explain  that  many  have  stum- 
bled and  doubted  and  lost  faith  in  the  truth  of 
the  record.  God  on  the  first  day  commanded 
the  light  to  shine  and  the  light  broke  through  the 
clouds  of  darkness  and  lighted  up  the  earth  be- 
neath. We  believe,  in  fact  it  is  evident,  that  our 
sun  was  then  and  had  been  for  ages,  the  only 
source  of  light  for  our  world.  Why  did  it  not 
show  itself  in  its  brightness  to  the  spectator  on 
the  first,  second  and  third  days  of  creation? 
Some  think  it  impossible  for  it  not  to  have  done 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record     99 

so,  but  we  know  that  even  now,  in  this  latitude, 
it  is  common  experience  to  have  a  day,  or  even 
consecutive  days,  when  there  is  no  sun,  or  visi- 
ble appearance  of  the  sun ;  and  yet  there  is  suffi- 
cient daylight  for  all  work. 

On  the  morning  of  the  fourth  day,  the  specta- 
tor, as  he  looked  toward  the  east,  beheld  the 
bright  orb  of  day  in  its  glory  and  strength  rising 
above  the  horizon.  The  sun,  which  had  been 
hidden  from  the  earth  for  a  long  period  of  time 
by  the  cloud-garment  that  God  had  put  about  it, 
on  this  the  fourth  day,  shows  His  smiling  face 
on  the  now  decorated  world,  causing  it  to 
brighten  up  and  rejoice  at  His  presence. 

The  sun,  the  appointed  ruler  of  the  day,  had 
his  important  and  necessary  work  to  do  for  the 
well-being  of  the  earth  and  all  upon  it;  and  the 
work,  assigned  to  him  for  all  time,  he  now  be- 
gins, by  shedding  forth  his  effulgent  rays  of 
light,  and  his  warm  and  life-giving  influences,  on 
the  newly  created  world  of  vegetation;  warming 
into  life  and  imparting  strength,  vigor,  increase 
and  growth  to  the  countless  varieties  of  grasses, 
herbs,  plants  and  trees  which  God  had  created 
the  day  before. 

As  the  spectator  saw  the  bright  light,  felt  the 
burning  heat  and  drying  influence  of  the  sun,  he 
would  have  seen  that  the  tender  grasses  and 
plants  were  in  danger  of  being  scorched,  and 
then  he  would  have  realized  that  it  was  well  the 
sun  delayed  his  appearance  until  after  the  tender 
plants  had  been  created  in  the  ground  and  had 


100         The  Earth  and  the  World 

been  given  time  to  take  root  in  the  earth.  Jesus 
Christ,  in  the  parable  of  the  sower,  says,  "The 
seed  sprang  up  because  it  had  no  deepness  of 
earth,  and  when  the  sun  was  up,  it  was  scorched, 
and   because   they   had   no    root,    it  withered 

away." 

The  appearance  of  the  sun  on  the  fourth  day 
was  timely  and  good.  It  was  then  beneficial  to 
the  newly-created  vegetable  kingdom.  Its  light, 
heat  and  electrical  influence,  gave  life,  color, 
strength  and  vigor  to  the  new  world  of  vegeta- 
tion. The  law  of  growth,  sustenance  and  in- 
crease in  the  vegetable  kingdom  was  the  same 
then  as  now.  God  at  all  times  has  regard  to  His 
laws,  whether  great  or  small. 

There  are  sufficient  reasons  here  why  the  sun 
did  not  appear  on  the  first  day  or  earlier  in  the 
week.  If  it  had  been  recorded  as  appearing  on 
the  first  day,  a  stumbling-stone  would  have  been 
moved  out  of  the  way  of  some,  but  the  Almighty 
would  have  had  to  perform  miracles  or  to  make 
other  provisions  to  protect  the  new  kingdom  of 
vegetation  from  the  effect  of  the  sun's  heat. 

It  ought  not  to  be  supposed  that  the  appear- 
ance of  the  sun  on  the  fourth  day  was  the  first 
time  he  had  shown  his  face,  lighted,  warmed 
and  invigorated  with  life  this  world  of  ours. 
This  earth  shows,  in  the  long  ages  in  which  it 
was  gradually  being  formed  or  built  up,  espe- 
cially in  the  carboniferous  period,  that  the  sun 
had  already  performed  a  great,  varied  and  im- 
portant service,  which  is  not  only  manifest,  but 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record    loi 

which  we  know  to  have  been  beneficial  in  effects 
beyond  calculation. 

On  this  fourth  day,  the  atmosphere  being  clari- 
fied, the  clouds  dissipated,  and  while  the  even- 
ing shades  began  to  appear,  the  moon,  appointed 
to  rule  over  the  night,  now  for  the  first  time 
showed  her  mild  face  to  the  spectator;  and,  as 
he  looked  above  and  around  him,  he  beheld  a 
countless  number  of  stars,  all  new  to  him,  and 
in  his  sight,  they  appeared  to  be,  and  are  recorded 
as,  new  creations. 

The  record  of  the  day  closes:  "And  the  even- 
ing and  the  morning  were  the  fourth  day."  It  is 
worthy  of  note  that,  so  far,  on  one  day  only  does 
there  appear  to  have  been  anything  new  created, 
and  that  was  the  world  of  vegetation  on  the  third 
day. 

On  the  first  and  second  days  atmospherical 
changes  are  recorded.  On  the  fourth  day  the 
clouds  are  dissolved  or  driven  away,  so  that  the 
celestial  bodies,  which  had  been  hidden  from 
view,  are  now  for  the  first  time  made  manifest; 
and  during  the  fourth  day  all  vegetation  and 
food-supplies  were  made  ready  and  sufficient  to 
satisfy  the  wants  of  all  the  living  creatures  which 
were  to  be  created  on  the  fifth  and  sixth  days. 

To  continue  the  record;  verse  twenty: — ''And 
God  said.  Let  the  waters  bring  forth  abundantly, 
the  moving  creature  that  hath  life,  and  let  the 
fowls  fly  above  the  earth  in  the  open  firmament  of 
heaven.  And  God  created  the  great  sea-mon- 
sters,  and  every  living  creature    that  moveth, 


J 


102         The  Earth  and  the  World 

which  the  waters  brought  forth  abundantly  after 
their  kinds,  and  every  winged  fowl  after  its  kind : 
and  God  saw  that  it  was  good.  And  God  blessed 
them,  saying,  Be  fruitful  and  multiply  and  fill  the 
waters  in  the  seas,  and  let  the  fowl  multiply  in 
the  earth.  And  the  evening  and  the  morning 
were  the  fifth  day." 

Thus  on  the  fifth  day,  according  to  the  Mosaic 
record,  fishes  were  created,  together  with  all  liv- 
ing organisms  that  inhabit  the  waters;  followed 
by  every  winged  fowl  after  its  kind,  birds  of 
graceful  form  and  movement  and  of  beautiful 
plumage,  each  with  its  note  of  praise.  God 
blessed  these  living  creatures,  saying,  "  Be  fruit- 
ful and  multiply,  and  fill  the  waters  in  the  seas, 
and  let  the  fowl  multiply  in  the  earth,"  promis- 
ing thus,  by  implication,  that  pure  air  and  water 
and  food,  necessary  for  their  life  and  well-being, 
would  be  daily  provided  for  them.  That  the  air 
on  the  fifth  day  was  in  a  pure  state,  adapted  for 
the  healthy  growth  of  plants,  and  suitable  for  all 
living  creatures  to  breathe,  ought  not  to  be  ques- 
tioned, and  also  that  the  waters,  in  many  respects 
the  most  wonderful  of  all  the  elements,  were 
pure  and  perfectly  adapted  to  the  well-being  of 
all  kinds  of  fish  and  living  creatures  made  to  live 
in  them,  and  also  that  they  were  eminently  fit  for 
all  animal  life  and  orders  of  living  creatures  to 
use  in  satisfying  the  longing  of  their  natures. 
That,  without  water,  life  would  be  impossible, 
must  also  have  been  evident. 
The  earth  itself  bears  ample  testimony  that  its 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record    103 

great  waters  must  for  ages  have  performed  an 
important  part  in  preparing  the  earth  to  be  a  suit- 
able habitation  for  man  and  all  the  living  crea- 
tures who  were  to  occupy  it.  The  waters,  in  do- 
ing their  work,  must  have  been  impregnated  with 
noxious  gases  and  mixed  with  metallic  solutions 
and  other  foreign  matter  which  required  ages  to 
precipitate,  separate,  purify,  and  make  fit  for  the 
innumerable  uses  designed  in  their  creation. 
This  long  period  of  purification  was  completed 
before  the  beginning  of  the  six  days  of  creation, 
and  probably  was  the  period  when  the  earth  was 
covered  by  the  thick  cloud  of  darkness  as  partic- 
ularly mentioned  in  the  thirty-eighth  chapter  of 
the  book  of  Job. 

Genesis  i.  24.  "And  God  said.  Let  the  earth 
bring  forth  the  living  creature  after  its  kind;  and 
it  was  so.  And  God  made  the  beast  of  the  earth 
after  its  kind,  and  the  cattle  after  their  kind,  and 
everything  that  creepeth  upon  the  ground  after 
its  kind:  and  God  saw  that  it  was  good." 

On  the  sixth  day,  as  stated,  God  created  the 
more  important  orders  of  beings,  all  the  useful 
and  noble  animals  now  subject  to  man's  use,  and 
all  others  in  their  distinct  orders  and  varieties  of 
species,  each  perfect  of  its  kind,  and  adapted  to 
fulfill  the  end  designed  in  its  creation. 

The  Creator,  having  finished  the  work  of 
clothing  the  earth  with  vegetation  and  providing 
food  for  the  many  orders  of  animal  life  created 
by  Him  on  the  fifth  and  sixth  days,  was  now 
prepared  to  create  man,  the  highest  order  of  all 


104         The  Earth  and  the  World 

beings  on  the  earth — man,  whom,  from  the 
foundation  of  the  world,  He  had  designed  to  oc- 
cupy, possess  and  control  all. 

The  divine  record  of  man's  creation  is  as  fol- 
lows: Genesis  i.  26-31.     **  And  God  said,  Let  us 
make  man  in  our  image,  after  our  likeness,  and 
let  him  have  dominion  over  the  fish  of  the  sea 
and  over  the  fowl  of  the  air,  and  over  the  cattle, 
and  over  all  the  earth,  and  over  every  creeping 
thing  that  creepeth   upon  the  earth.     So  God 
created  man  in  His  own  image,  in  the  image  of 
God  created  He  him ;  male  and  female  created  He 
them.     And  God  blessed  them,  and  God  said 
unto  them,  Be  fruitful  and  multiply,  and  replenish 
the  earth  and  subdue  it;  and  have  dominion  over 
the  fish  of  the  sea,  and  over  the  fowl  of  the  air, 
and  over  every  living  thing  that  moveth  upon  the 
earth."     "And  God  said,  Behold,  I  have  given 
you  every  herb  bearing  seed  which  is  upon  the 
face  of  all  the  earth,  and  every  tree  in  the  which 
is  the  fruit  of  a  tree  yielding  seed,  to  you  it  shall 
be  for  meat.     And  to  every  beast  of  the  earth, 
and  to  every  fowl  of  the  air,  and  to  everything 
that  creepeth  upon  the  earth,  wherein  there  is 
life,  I  have  given  every  green  herb  for  meat;  and 
it  was  so.     And  God  saw  everything  that  He  had 
made,  and  behold,  it  was  very  good.     And  the 
evening  and  the  morning  were  the  sixth  day."  In 
Genesis  ii.  7,  we  have   this  further   statement: 
'*  And  the  Lord  God  formed  man  of  the  dust  of 
the  ground,  and  breathed  into  his  nostrils  the 
breath  of  life,  and  man  became  a  living  soul." 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record    105 

Here  we  have  a  simple  and  clear  statement  of 
the  creation  of  man ;  that  his  body  was  formed 
from  the  dust  of  the  earth,  that  God  breathed 
into  his  nostrils  the  breath  of  life,  and  that  man 
became  a  living  soul. 

JO.  iVhen  Did  God  Create  Man,  or  When 
Did  Man  Begin  to  Live  on  the  Earth  ?— A  very 
important  question  now  arises;  namely.  When 
did  God  create  man  ?  or,  when  did  man  begin  to 
live  on  the  earth  ?  We  reply,  nearly,  or  about, 
6,000  years  ago,  according  to  the  chronol- 
ogy of  events,  from  the  creation  of  man  to  the 
present  time,  as  ascertained  by  men  learned  and 
qualified  for  the  work,  and  whose  statements 
are  and  have  been  accepted  as  true  by  those 
learned  in  all  the  facts  of  history,  and  which 
statements  have  never  been  disproved. 

That  man  was  the  last  of  living  creatures  cre- 
ated, is  universally  admitted.  Also,  that  he  is  of 
recent  origin,  and  that  '*  traces  of  his  origin  do 
not  reach  back  to  more  that  5,000  or  7,000  years 
ago."  Many  and  strenuous  efforts  have  been 
made  at  different  times  to  disprove  this  leading 
fact,  but  they  have  all  utterly  failed. 

J?/.  Enquiry  into  the  So-called  '*  Mistakes  of 
Moses,"  A  Challenge  to  Unbelievers,— \n  his 
record  of  the  creation,  Moses  is  charged  with 
numerous  mistakes  and  blunders;  not  only  in  re- 
spect to  the  time  occupied  in  the  creative  work, 
but  also  in  the  order  and  extent  of  the  work  said 
to  have  been  created.  The  question  therefore 
naturally  arises,  what  does  the  record  of  the  ere- 


io6         The  Earth  and  the  World 

ative  work  comprehend  ?— What  does  it  em- 
brace, and  what  does  it  exclude  ? 

The  work  done  on  the  first  and  second  days 
appears  to  be  merely  atmospherical  changes. 
The  air,  the  atmosphere,  that  all-important  ele- 
ment which  surrounds  the  earth,  composed  as  it 
is,  of  the  two  elementary  gases,  oxygen  and  ni- 
trogen, is  not  mentioned  at  all  as  being  then  cre- 
ated, for  in  fact,  it  was,  and  must  have  been, 
created  long  ages  before. 

The  atmospherical  changes  of  the  first  and 
second  days  were  continued  to  the  third  and 
fourth  days,  during  which  the  beclouded  atmos- 
phere was  further  clarified,  its  foggy  appearance 
was  dissipated,  and  the  clouds,  then  as  now,  in 
a  natural  way,  assumed  a  more  definite  shape 
and  appearance,  and  the  water-bearing  clouds 
appeared  separate  and  distinct  in  the  expanse 
above,  from  the  bodies  of  water  below,  when 
the  dry  land  appeared.  But,  to  the  spectator,  it 
seemed  as  if  the  water  were  then  and  there 
gathered  in  their  several  places,  though,  in  fact, 
they  had  been  abiding  in  their  watery  beds  for  a 
long  period. 

It  is  recorded  that  God  called  the  dry  land 
"earth,"  and  the  gathering  together  of  the  wa- 
ters He  called  "seas."  But  there  is  no  record 
made  that  God  then  created  the  dry  land,  or  the 
"earth,"  "the  waters  "  or  the  "seas." 

In  his  record,  what  does  Moses  have  to  say 
about  the  geological  formation  of  the  earth,  or 
what  details  does  he  give  of  the  formation  of 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record    107 

the  earth,  or  the  building  of  the  world  from  its 
foundation  ? — simply  nothing.  This  work,  here 
named,  was  more  important  and  ten  thousand 
times  greater  than  what  he  did  mention. 

As  there  has  been  for  a  long  time,  especially 
during  this  century,  such  a  variety  of  opinions 
expressed  and  published  relative  to  the  truth  of 
the  Mosaic  record  of  creation,  it  seemed  neces- 
sary, before  proceeding  further,  to  clear  the  way, 
and  show  wherein  the  truth  of  the  record  lies. 
This,  in  the  previous  pages,  we  have  endeavored 
to  do.  But  when  we  state  that  the  creative 
work  recorded  to  have  been  done,  was  done  in 
the  time  of  six  ordinary  days  of  twenty-four 
hours  each,  the  common  expressions  are  "Non- 
sense! Absurd!  Impossible!  etc.,  etc."  "If  you 
believe  and  maintain  that  as  a  fact,  that  alone," 
many  will  say,  "  is  sufficient  to  condemn  all  your 
statements,  and  to  make  it  manifest  that  they  are 
not  worthy  the  consideration  of  sensible  men." 

Therefore,  on  the  question  whether  the  work 
of  creation  was  accomplished  in  six  ordinary 
days,  as  recorded,  or  in  six  ages  or  long  periods 
of  time,  as  many  maintain,  we  ask  the  attention 
of  all  to  the  following  propositions. 

First: — That  the  date  or  period  of  time  when 
those  events  took  place,  or  rather,  when  man 
was  created  and  began  to  live  on  the  earth,  was 
about  6,000  years  ago,  is  a  fact  conceded  by  the 
ablest  chronologers  of  the  day,  and  has  not  yet 
been  disproved  by  any  ascertained  fact. 

Second :— That  the  present  solid  framework  or 


io8         The  Earth  and  the  World 

crust  of  the  earth  must  have  existed  for  many 
ages,  practically,  as  it  is  not  known  to  be,  is  ad- 
mitted by  experienced  geologists— that  is,  vari- 
ous formations  of  rock,  veins  of  ore,  deposits 
of  metal,  beds  of  coal,  day  and  sand,  and  bodies 
of  water;  and  also  that  the  arrangement  of  the 
continents,  many  of  the  islands,  the  ranges  of 
mountains,  the  valleys  and  plains,  ocean  beds, 
seas,  lakes  and  channels  cut  by  rivers  cut  out  of  the 
earth  as  they  now  exist,  give  evidence  of  great 
age,  running  into  hundreds  of  thousands,  or  mil- 
lions of  years,  as  geologists  claim,  and  the  truth 
of  which  can  be  demonstrated  by  many  sure 
proofs. 

Therefore,  it  follows  as  an  established  truth, 
that  when  man  was  created,  about  6,000  years 
ago,  this  earth  was  then  practically  in  its  geolog- 
ical formation  complete,  and  lacked  only  the  an- 
imal and  vegetable  life  which  was  at  that  time 
created  upon  it. 

Third:— That  whereas  the  earth,  this  solid 
globe  of  ours,  gives  evidence  of  great  age  in 
every  quarter  of  it ;  and  that  portions  of  it  are 
manifestly  older  than  other  parts,  as  geologists 
affirm;  and  that,  in  building  up  and  furnishing 
this  globe  with  its  variety  of  materials,  there 
were  many  important  and  varied  processes  of 
operation,  occupying  long  periods  of  time; 
Moses,  the  inspired  writer  of  the  six  days'  work 
of  creation,  has  said  nothing,  nor  has  he  in  any 
way  attempted  to  describe,  define  or  explain,  any 
of  the  circumstances  connected  with  the  con- 


A  Review  of  the  Mosaic  Record    109 

struction  of  the  earth,  or  to  hint  at  the  period  of 
time  occupied  in  its  formation. 

Can  any  one,  therefore,  with  reason,  or  in  jus- 
tice, connect  Moses  or  his  narrative  with  the 
work  of  creating  the  material  earth,  or  involve 
him  in  any  of  the  prevailing  world-building  plans 
in  which  he  has  had  no  part  ? 

Fourth:— As  the  inspired  writer  of  the  first 
chapter  of  Genesis,  in  his  narrative  of  events, 
definitely  names  each  day,  its  beginning  and  end, 
and  states  what  was  done,  or  appeared  to  have 
been  done  each  day,  as  it  is  all  plainly  recorded, 
is  it  according  to  truth  or  reason  to  impeach  his 
testimony,  by  asserting,  without  proof,  that  the 
solar  days  he  has  so  definitely  named,  are  to  be 
construed  to  mean  long  and  indefinite  periods  of 
time? 

Fifth:— On  examination  of  the  events  recorded 
in  the  first  chapter  of  Genesis,  it  will  be  found 
that  the  only  things  named  by  the  writer  as  be- 
ing created  on  this  earth,  are  the  several  classes 
of  vegetation,  and  the  various  orders  of  animal 
life  or  moving  creatures  that  live  in  the  air,  in  the 
water,  or  on  the  land. 

Now,  therefore,  is  there  any  work  here  re- 
corded as  having  been  done,  or  anything  created 
on  the  earth,  that  in  any  way  seems  improbable 
for  the  Creator  to  have  done  or  performed  in  the 
six  solar  days  as  described  ? 

Sixth: — If  these  things  are  as  stated,  and  they 
cannot  be  disproved,  ought  not  the  Mosaic  record 
to  be  considered  literally  true,  especially  in  re- 


w 


no         The  Earth  and  the  World 

spect  to  the  six  ordinary  days  as  named  in  the 
narrative  ? 

Accepting  the  above  exposition  of  the  record, 
there  need  be  no  conflict  between  the  scientist 
and  the  theologian,  for  it  leaves  the  geologist  free 
to  create  or  frame  the  world  in  respect  to  process 
and  time  as  he  may  find  facts  to  justify  him. 

Now  in  reference  to  the  so-called  numerous 
"mistakes"  and  ** blunders"  affirmed  to  have 
been  made  by  Moses  in  his  record  of  the  creative 
work  as  contained  in  Genesis,  we  wish  to  state 
plainly,  in  his  defence,  that  Moses  does  not 
record  or  represent  that  God  in  the  six  days  created 
the  present  solid  framework,  or  so-called  crust 
of  the  earth,  or  the  earth  itself,  its  mountains  and 
foundation  rocks,  its  beds  of  ore,  veins  and  de- 
posits of  metals,  clays,  sand,  and  its  various 
strata  of  coal,  of  mineral  oil,  the  water,  the  air, 
or  any  of  the  gaseous  elements,  as  oxygen, 
hydrogen,  nitrogen,  carbon,  etc. 

Once  for  all  then,  we  wish  to  state  and  chal- 
lenge any  or  all  unbelievers  or  doubters  of  the 
record,  learned  or  unlearned,  to  clearly  disprove 
the  above  statement,  which,  if  they  do,  then  he 
or  they  may  call  on  us  for  the  sum  of  one  thou- 
sand dollars  ($i,ooo),  which  we  will  pay,  provided 
he  or  they  agree  to  pay  the  same  amount,  if  they 
fail  to  disprove  the  said  statements;  which  sum, 
if  and  when  paid,  shall  be  given  to  some  chari- 
table organization  in  the  City  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 


vin 


OTHER   SCRIPTURAL  STATEMENTS 

J2.     Where  are  We  to  Look  for  Information 
Relating  to  God's  Creative  Work  on  the  Earth  ? 
—If  we  are  not  to  look  to  the  Mosaic  Record  of 
the  six  days'  work  of  creation,  for  some  definite 
information  relative  to  God's  creative  work  in  the 
making  of  our  earth,  then  where  shall  we  obtain 
the  knowledge  we  so  much  desire,  and  which  is 
so  important  for  us  to  possess,  in  order  that  we 
may  know  the  truth  and  find  the  facts  that  will 
inform  our  minds  and  guide  our  judgment  to  a 
true  conclusion  of  the  whole  matter?    To  this 
end  our  efforts  are  devoted  with  the  hope  that 
we,  as  well  as  others,  may  ascertain  and  accept 
such  views  of  the  matter  as  are  found  to  be 
based  on  the  truth.    The  question  cannot  be 
solved  nor  settled  on  any  mere  theory  of  the 
matter.    There    must    be    facts,    supported   by 
sound  reasons,  as  a  basis  of  accepted  conclusions. 

There  are  two  sources  of  information  from 
which  we  may  obtain  knowledge  to  assist  us  in 
our  inquiry.  One  is  the  book  of  nature— the 
earth  itself— full  of  known  facts,  bearing  evi- 
dence of  its  part  in  its  history.  This  book  is 
open  for  our  investigation. 

The  other  source  of  information  that  presents 

III 


ll 


112         The  Earth  and  the  World 

itself  to  us  is  the  Bible,  God's  book  of  revealed 
truth.  Statements  of  facts  relating  to  God's 
creative  work  are  scattered  here  and  there 
throughout  this  book,  which  are  worthy  of  our 
consideration;  for  they  bear  intrinsic  evidence  of 
their  truth. 

The  earth  is  here;  that  we  know;  for  we  live 
upon  its  surface;  this  world,  where  the  human 
race  has  had  its  dwelling-place  and  its  recorded 
history  for  about  6,000  years.  That  this  earth, 
so  wisely  designed,  so  wonderful  and  per- 
fect in  all  its  appointments,  had  a  predetermined 
and  definite  beginning,  ought  to  be  evident  to  all 
considerate  and  reasoning  minds.  While  it  is 
impossible,  as  stated  in  the  Scriptures,  for  man 
to  search  out  and  determine  the  foundations  of 
the  earth,  yet  they  also  declare  plainly  that  the 
earth  had  a  beginning,  that  it  was  established 
and  "hath  a  foundation  that  cannot  be  moved," 
and  remains  in  its  place  in  our  solar  system. 

It  may  be  well  to  quote,  as  we  now  do,  pas- 
sages from  the  Bible  stating  some  of  the  facts 
and  doctrines  therein  maintained. 

Ps.  xc.  2.— "Before  the  mountains  were 
brought  forth,  or  ever  Thou  hadst  formed  the 
earth  and  the  world,  even  from  everlasting  to 
everlasting  Thou  art  God." 

Ps.  cii.  25.— "Of  old  hast  Thou  laid  the  foun- 
dation of  the  earth ;  and  the  heavens  are  the  work 
of  Thine  hands." 

Ps.  civ.  5.— "Who  laid  the  foundations  of  the 
earth,  that  it  should  not  be  moved  forever." 


Other  Scriptural  Statements        113 

Prov.  viii.  29.--  Then  He  (the  Lord)  appointed 
the  foundations  of  the  earth." 

Is.  xlviii.  13.— -Mine  hand  also  hath  laid  th^ 
foundations  of  the  earth,  and  the  palm  of  My 
right  hand  hath  spanned  the  heavens." 

Is.  li.  13.— *'The  Lord  thy  Maker  hath 
stretched  forth  the  heavens  and  laid  the  foun- 
dations of  the  earth." 

Matt.  xiii.  34,  35.— -These  things  spake  Jesus, 
that  It  might  be  fulfilled  which  was  spoken  by 
the  prophets,  saying,  I  will  open  My  mouth  in 
parables;  I  will  utter  things  which  have  been 
kept  secret  from  the  foundation  of  the  world." 

Besides  the  above,  there  are  many  other  pas- 
sages from  the  Scriptures,  testifying  that  the 
creation  of  the  world  was  the  work  of  God,  and 
that  there  was  a  definite  time  when  He  began  the 
work  and  laid  the  foundation  of  the  earth. 

On  these  points  the  Bible  speaks  with  no  un- 
certam  sound.     Christ  Himself,  it  will  be  noticed 
refers  to  the  foundation  of  the  worid  as  a  par- 
ticular  point   of   time   known   in   the  eternal 
ages. 

We  give  a  few  more  passages  of  Scripture 
bearing  on  the  question. 

Prov.  iii.  19.-- The  Lord  by  wisdom  hath 
formed  the  earth ;  by  understanding  hath  He  es- 
tablished the  heavens." 

Ps.  cxix.  90.—*'  Thou  hast  established  the  earth 
and  it  abideth." 

Is.  xlv.  12.— "1  have  made  the  earth  and  created 
man  upon  it;  I,  even  My  hands,  have  stretched 


? 


114         The  Earth  and  the  World 

out  the  heavens,  and  all  their  hosts  have  I  com- 
manded." 

Is.  xlv.  i8.— *'For  thus  saith  the  Lord  that 
created  the  heavens;  God  Himself  that  formed 
the  earth  and  made  it,  He  hath  established  it; 
He  created  it  not  in  vain,  He  formed  it  to  be 
inhabited:  I  am  the  Lord  and  there  is  none 
else." 

Jer.  X.  ia-12.— **  But  the  Lord  is  the  true  God, 
He  is  the  living  God,  and  the  everlasting  King. 
He  hath  made  the  earth  by  His  power.  He  hath 
established  the  world  by  His  wisdom,  and  hath 
stretched  out  the  heavens  by  His  discretion." 

Jer.  xxvii.  5.— "Thus  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts, 
the  God  of  Israel,  I  have  made  the  earth,  the  m?n 
and  the  beast  that  are  upon  the  ground,  by  My 
great  power  and  by  My  outstretched  arm,  and 
have  given  it  unto  whom  it  seemed  meet  unto 
Me." 

St.  Paul  writes,  in  Hebrews  iii.  4,  "For  every 
house  is  builded  by  some  man ;  but  He  that  built 
all  things  is  God." 

These  statements  taken  from  the  Scriptures, 
believed  by  millions  to  be  inspired  from  on  high, 
give  to  God  the  full  power  and  glory  of  creating 
the  world,  the  universe,  and  all  therein.  They  do 
not  divide  the  wisdom,  power  and  glory  of  the 
work  with  any  other  being;  nor  do  they  in  any 
manner  give  credit,  directly  or  indirectly,  for 
what  we  behold  in  the  world  and  the  universe 
to  any  natural  law,  principle  or  force  in  nature. 
God  alone  is  supreme;  infinite  in  His  wisdom 


Other  Scriptural  Statements        115 

!lrrn\'^'  '°"'''  ^^  ^"  ^h^"^^  ^"d  the 
author  of  all  laws. 

The  earth  is  declared  to  have  had  a  beginning 
with  foundations  in  the  depths  below,  that  can- 
not be  scanned  or  "searched  out  beneath"  by 
man.  This  world  of  ours  bears  abundant  testi- 
mony that  it  was  not  made  by  chance,  or  formed 
by  operation  of  laws  and  forces  uncontrolled  by 
intelligent  mind  and  will.  But  the  times,  ways, 
and  means  employed  by  God  in  making  the 
world  as  It  exists,  have  not  been  revealed  and 
are  as  yet  hidden  from  the  knowledge  of  men. 

33-  Comparatively  at  what  Age  was  the  Foun- 
dation of  the  Earth  Laid  ?-lht  question,  how- 
ever, naturally  arises,  at  what  age  or  period  in 
God  s  creative  work  were  the  foundations  of  the 
earth  laid  ?  Although  the  question  may  not  be 
an  important  one.  it  is  interesting,  at  least,  to 
have  even  a  comparative  idea  of  the  vast  period 
in  which  the  work  was  done. 

While  reviewing  the  statements  of  the  first 
chapter  of  Genesis,  we  claimed  that  the  first  sen- 
tence, VIZ,   "  In  the  beginning  God  created  the 
heavens  and  the  earth,"  should  be,  as  it  was  no 
doubt  first  written  in  strict  conformity  to  the 
tacts   "From  the  beginning  God  began  to  create 
the  heavens  and  the  earth."  this  being  the  exact 
truth.    As  now  recorded  in  Genesis,  "in"  here 
implies  an  act,  and  not  a  great  work  extending 
over  ages.     Besides,  as  now  recorded,  it  implies 
also  that  the  earth  was  created  at  the  same  time 
as  the  heavens,  as  some  seem  to  have  the  impres- 


'11 


"6         The  Earth  and  the  World 

sion,  both  events  being  named  in  the  same  sen- 
tence, without  distinction,  as  if  it  read,  "In  the 
beginning  God  created  the  man  and  the  woman." 

The  Scripture  quotations  which  follow  make  it 
manifest  that  God  began  the  work  of  creating 
the  heavens  long  ages  before  the  foundation  of 
the  world. 

In  Psalm  xc,  verse  2,  Moses,  the  man  of  God, 
writes,— "  Before  the  mountains  were  brought 
forth,  or  ever  Thou  hadst  formed  the  earth  and 
the  world,  even  from  everlasting  to  everlasting, 
Thou  art  God." 

St  Paul  writes  of  things  that  God  had  "or- 
dained before  the  worid  began,"  and  in  writing 
of  Christ,  Colossiansi.  17,  declares,  "And  He  is 
before  all  things,  and  by  Him  all  things  consist." 

2  Tim.  i.  9.—"  And  grace  which  was  given  us 
in  Christ  Jesus  before  the  worid  began." 

Titus  i.  2.—"  In  the  hope  of  eternal  life,  which 
God  that  cannot  lie,  promised  before  the  worid 
began." 

Christ  Himself,  in  His  mediatorial  address,  de- 
clares the  fact  that  the  heavens  were  created  long 
before  the  foundation  of  the  worid  was  laid. 

John  xvii.  5.—'*  And  now,  O  Father,  glorify 
Thou  me  with  Thine  own  self  with  the  glory 
which  I  had  with  Thee  before  the  worid  was." 

John  xvii.  24.— "For  Thou  lovedst  me  before 
the  foundation  of  the  world." 


rx 

THE  TESTIMONY  OF  THE  BOOK  OF  JOB 

34'     The  Book  of  Job  Contains  the  Scriptures' 
Most  Explicit  Declaration  of  the  Foundation  of 
the  Earth,— The   passages  of  Scripture  which 
make  the  most  positive  and  explicit  declarations 
concerning  the  foundation  of  the  earth,  the  par- 
ticular circumstances  and  the  formal  ceremonies 
attending  that  important  event,  are  found  in  the 
book  of  Job;  especially  in  the  first  part  of  the 
thirty-eighth  chapter,  which  records  a  part  of  the 
address  of  the  Lord  Jehovah  made  directly  to  the 
Patriarch  Job.    The  first  seven  verses  of  the  thirty- 
eighth  chapter  we  quote  as  follows : 

I.— "Then  the  Lord  answered  Job  out  of  the 
whiriwind  and  said," 

2.— "Who  is  this  that  darkeneth  counsel  by 
words  without  knowledge  ?  " 

3.— "Gird  up  now  thy  loins  like  a  man;  for  I 
will  demand  of  thee,  and  answer  thou  Me." 

4.— ''Where  wast  thou  when  I  laid  the  foun- 
dations of  the  earth  ?  declare,  if  thou  hast  under- 
standing." 

5.— "Who  determined  the  measure  thereof,  if 
thou  knowest  ?  or  who  stretched  the  line  upon 
it?"  ^ 

6.—"  Whereupon  are  the  foundations  thereof 
fastened  ?  or  who  laid  the  corner-stone  thereof;" 

117 


ii8         The  Earth  and  the  World 

7. — "When  the  morning  stars  sang  together, 
and  all  the  sons  of  God  shouted  for  joy  ?  " 

We  have  here  a  statement  of  transactions  and 
work  performed,  found  nowhere  else  in  the 
Scriptures;  and  we  consider  what  is  here  re- 
corded to  be  of  great  importance  in  determining 
the  truth  of  the  questions  involved;  and  as  we 
rest  some  of  our  conclusions  on  these  words,  we 
intend  to  explain  them  at  some  length. 

As  the  book  of  Job  has  of  late  years  been  much 
criticised  and  disparaged,  and  its  venerable  age 
denied,  some  asserting  that  it  was  written  after 
the  death  of  Moses,  and  others  denying  its  verity, 
and  holding  that  Job  himself  was  a  fictitious  per- 
sonage; we  have,  for  these  and  other  reasons, 
decided  to  show  by  evidence,  at  some  length, 
why  the  absolute  truth  of  the  book  should  be 
accepted.  Job  himself  credited  as  a  real  person, 
and  full  credence  given  to  the  statement  of  facts 
recorded  in  the  book. 

Before  the  Christian  era,  so  far  as  is  known, 
there  is  no  evidence  that  the  book  of  Job  was  in 
any  way  disallowed  or  discredited  by  the  ancient 
Hebrew  prophets,  or  the  believing  people  of 
Israel.  The  book  was  accepted  as  being  inspired, 
and  was  numbered  with  the  other  books  of 
Scripture.  All  down  through  the  Christian  era 
the  book  of  Job  has  been  accepted  as  inspired, 
and  Job  himself  held  to  be  a  real  character,  as 
represented  by  the  learned  writers  and  investi- 
gators of  Scripture  truth  and  facts.  This  has 
been  the  opinion,  by  common  consent  of  Chris- 


The  Testimony  of  the  Book  of  Job  119 

tians,  since  the  days  of  the  Apostles;  but  because 
the  Bible  does  not  clearly  state  Job's  lineage,  the 
date  of  his  birth,  or  the  era  in  which  he  flour- 
ished, critics  are  inclined  to  throw  doubt  upon 
it,  to  discredit  it  as  truth,  and  to  deny  the  facts 
narrated  in  the  book. 

The  Bible  is  the  only  book  from  which  we  can 
gather  facts  concerning  the  events  that  occurred 
during  the  first  2,500  years  of  the  history  of  the 
human  race  on  the  earth.  But  that  book  gives 
us  only  a  few  of  the  leading  facts,  such  as  were 
necessary  to  enable  man  to  take  his  bearings,  and 
learn  where  he  was  on  the  great  sea  of  time;  and 
thus  study  his  condition  and  the  prospects  that 
lie  in  the  ages  before  him. 

The  Bible  records  little  or  nothing  to  gratify 
curiosity.    There  are  thousands  of  items,  con- 
cerning persons  and  events,  of  which  we  would 
like  to  know  more,  even  down  to  the  period 
when  Christ  and  His  Apostles  were  on  the  earth. 
Such  items,  if  recorded,  were  not  recorded  to  be 
preserved  and  come  down  to  us  intact,  as  God 
has  preserved  many  special  truths,  as  contained 
in  the  Scriptures  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments. 
From  the  Book  of  Kings  we  learn  that  special 
care  was  taken  to  preserve  the  history  of  the 
times,  etc.    It  is  recorded  in  a  number  of  places, 
"The  deeds  and  acts,  first  and  last,  are  written 
in  the  books  of  the  Kings  of  Judah  and  Israel." 
This  is  written  of  a  number  of  kings.    Of  Solo- 
mon it  is  written  in  i  Kings,  eleventh  chapter, 
"And  the  rest  of  the  acts  of  Solomon,  and  all 


)    ( 


"o         The  Earth  and  the  World 

that  he  did,  and  his  wisdom,  are  they  not  written 
in  the  book  of  the  acts  of  Solomon."  These 
records  are  lost  to  the  world,  together  with  more 
than  one-half  of  the  3,000  proverbs  he  uttered; 
and  of  his  ''1,000  songs  "only  a  few  remain; 
and  only  a  faint  trace  of  Solomon's  description 
of  the  nature  and  character  of  the  vegetable  and 
animal  kingdoms  of  the  earth  now  remains  to  us. 
Solomon  sent  ships  to  Ophir  and  Tarshish,  which, 
after  three  years,  returned  laden  with  gold  and 
other  rich  stores.  Many,  in  these  days,  would 
like  to  know  the  locality  of  those  places,  now 
lost  to  the  world. 

The  world,  in  this  age,  even  the  intelligent  por- 
tion of  it,  knows  comparatively  little  of  the  his- 
tory of  the  past  generations  that  have  lived  on 
the  earth.  Therefore,  the  fact  that  we  know  so 
little  of  the  history  of  Job,  forms  no  real  reason 
why  we  should  reject  the  truth  of  the  record 
concerning  him. 

J5.  At  What  Period  in  the  History  of  Man 
Did  Job  Live  ?—Jht  old  writers  on  Scripture  his- 
tory express  the  opinion  that  the  book  of  Job  is 
the  most  ancient  piece  of  writing  in  the  world. 
This  book  is  singularly  unique  in  its  style,  char- 
acter, interest  and  matter;  and  also  in  its  impor- 
tance. Those  familiar  with  it  admit  there  is  none 
like  it  in  the  world. 

There  are  many  commentators  on  the  Old 
Testament  Scriptures  who  express  the  opinion 
that  the  Patriarch  Job,  living  in  Uz,  was  a  con- 
temporary of  Abraham,  living  in  Canaan;  and 


The  Testimony  of  the  Book  of  Job  121 

that  the  book  containing  the  history  of  Job's 
trials  and  his  controversy  with  his  friends,  was 
either  written  or  found  by  Moses  during  his  forty 
years  of  exile  in  Midian,  and  was  by  him  deliv- 
ered to  the  people  of  Israel  while  in  the  wilder- 
ness. 

There  are  several  good  reasons  for  not  accept- 
ing this  opinion  as  being  based  on  any  fact  or 
sound  reason,  so  far  as  Moses'  first  finding  and 
bringing  it  to  light  is  concerned.  The  book  of 
Job  was  well  known  to  Abraham,  Isaac  and 
Jacob,  during  their  lives,  and  they  must  have  had 
copies  of  the  same. 

The  old  writers  on  Scripture  history,  almost 
without  exception,  place  the  day  of  the  Patriarch 
Job  or  the  period  in  which  he  lived  and  had  his 
trial,  long  before  that  of  the  Patriarch  Abraham. 
The  learned  Dr.  Townsend  who.  in  the  early  part 
of  the  nmeteenth  century,  published,  in  London, 

the  Old  and  New  Testament  Scriptures  "  were 
arranged  in  their  historical  and  chronological 
order  places  the  book  of  Job  immediately  after 

of  about  2, 130  years  before  Christ 

The  following  are  some  of  the  reasons  given 
by  Dr.  Townsend  for  placing  the  history  of  Job 

Ws  work.^  ^      ''  ^^'"^  "^^  ^""'^  ""''^''^"^  ^'^^ 

;'The  trial  of  Job  is  placed  before  the  life  of 

Abraham,  on  the  authority  of  Dr.  Hales.    Job 

himself,  or  one  of  his  contemporaries,  is  gener- 


I 


iia         The  Earth  and  the  World 

ally  supposed  to  have  been  the  author  of  this 
book.     Dr.  Hales'  arguments  are  as  follows: 

*'  The  silence  of  this  book  respecting  the  Exo- 
dus, the  passage  of  the  Red  Sea,  the  promulga- 
tion of  the  law,  etc.,  etc.,  which  took  place  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  country  of  Job,  and  which 
were  so  apposite  to  his  debate  on  the  ways  of 
Providence,  seems  to  prove  that  it  was  written 
prior  to  those  events. 

**lts  silence  respecting  the  destruction  of 
Sodom  and  Gomorrah  shows  that  it  was  written 
before  that  event. 

"The  longevity  of  Job  places  him  among  the 
patriarchs  which  long  preceded  Abraham.  He 
survived  his  trial  140  years,  and  is  supposed  to 
have  attained  to  that  age  before  his  trial  began. 

"The  manners  and  customs  are  exclusively 
those  of  pure  and  ancient  patriarchism.  He  was 
the  priest  in  his  own  family,  and  the  institution 
of  an  established  priesthood  does  not  appear  to 
have  taken  place  till  the  days  of  Abraham. 

"The  very  ancient  custom  of  prostration,  as  a 
mark  of  respect,  does  not  even  appear  to  have 
been  known  in  Arabia  in  the  time  of  Job.  Job 
was  one  of  *the  greatest  men  in  the  east,' yet 
we  do  not  find  this  adoration  paid  to  him."  See 
the  marks  of  respect  shown  to  Job,  recorded  in 
chapter  xxix. 

"The  most  ancient  kind  of  idolatry  seems  to 
have  been  Zabianism,  which  in  the  time  of  Job 
was  regarded  with  abhorrence,  as  a  novelty  de- 
serving judicial  punishment."    (Job  xxxi.  26.) 


The  Testimony  of  the  Book  of  Job  123 

"  Such  are  the  arguments  of  the  venerable  Dr. 
Hales,  which  have  induced  me  to  place  the  history 
of  the  life  of  Job  before  that  of  Abraham.    With 
Dr.  Hales,  therefore,  I  have  placed  the  life  of  Job 
before  that  of  Abraham,  and  have  supposed  him 
to  have  lived  about  the  year  2130  b.  c.    The 
postdiluvian  patriarchs  who  lived  the  same  num- 
ber of  years,  were  contemporary  with  each  other. 
Job  is  said  to  have  lived  280  years ;  and  it  is  sup- 
posed that  his  life  was  prolonged  on  account  of 
his  piety  and  sufferings.     If  we  allow  fifty  years 
for  this  unusual  term,  his  age  will  be  found  to  be 
the  same  length  as  that  of  Serug,  the  great- 
grandfather of  Abraham,  who  flourished  about 
this  time." 

Besides  the  above.  Dr.  Townsend  names,  at 
some  length,  other  reasons  for  placing  Job's  day 
before  that  of  Abraham,  which  it  is  not  necessary 
to  insert  here,  for  the  reasons  already  stated  are 
conclusive  and  sufficient. 

36.  Scripture  Evidence  That  Job  Was  a  Real 
Character,— But  there  are  some  doubters  who 
ask,  what  evidence  have  we  that  such  a  man  as 
Job  ever  lived  at  all.  Outside  of  the  Scriptures 
we  have  none,  and  outside  of  the  book  itself.  Job 
is  referred  to,  particularly,  only  twice.  But  those 
references  are,  or  ought  to  be,  sufficient  to  satisfy 
all  doubters  who  have  faith  at  all  in  the  verity  of 
the  Scriptures.  The  Apostle  James,  in  his  Epis- 
tle, refers  to  him  thus:—"  Ye  have  heard  of  the 
patience  of  Job;"  and  sets  him  forth  as  an  ex- 
ample for  all   believers.    But  the  clearest  and 


'f 


IH         The  Earth  and  the  World 

strongest  testimony  the  Scriptures  give  us  out- 
side of  the  book  itself,  is  found  recorded  in  the 
book  of  Ezekiel,  nineteenth  chapter.  The  verses 
which  refer  to  Job  we  here  quote: — 

Verse  12.— "The  word  of  the  Lord  came  unto 
me,  saying,"  13.— *'Son  of  Man,  when  the  land 
sinneth  against  Me  by  trespassing  grievously, 
then  will  I  stretch  out  Mine  hand  upon  it,  and 
will  break  the  staff  of  the  bread  thereof,  and  will 
send  famine  upon  it,  and  will  cut  off  man  and 
beast  from  it." 

14.—"  Though  these  three  men,  Noah,  Daniel 
and  Job,  were  in  it,  they  should  deliver  but  their 
own  souls  by  their  righteousness,  saith  the  Lord 
God." 

16. — "Though  these  three  men  were  in  it,  as  1 
live,  saith  the  Lord,  they  should  deliver  neither 
sons  nor  daughters;  they  only  should  be  deliv- 
ered, but  the  land  shall  be  desolate." 

18. — "Though  these  three  men  were  in  it,  as  I 
live,  saith  the  Lord  God,  they  shall  deliver  neither 
sons  nor  daughters,  but  they  only  shall  be  deliv- 
ered themselves." 

20.— "Though  Noah,  Daniel  and  Job  were  in 
it,  as  I  live,  saith  the  Lord  God,  they  shall  deliver 
neither  son  nor  daughter,  they  shall  but  deliver 
their  own  souls  by  their  righteousness." 

21. — "  For  thus  saith  the  Lord  God :  how  much 
more  when  I  send  my  four  judgments  upon 
Jerusalem,  the  sword  and  the  famine  and  the 
noisome  beast  and  the  pestilence,  to  cut  off  from 
it  man  and  beast." 


The  Testimony  ofthe  Book  of  Job  125 

Now  bear  in  mind,  it  was  not  the  prophet 
Ezekiel  that  made  these  several  declarations,  but 
the  Lord  God";  and  He  does  it  not  only  once 
but  four  different  times,  the  first  and  last  naming 
separately,  Noah,  Daniel  and  Job;  and  the  second 
and  third    times  saying,    -though  these  three 
men.      Can  anything  be  more  definite  that  the 
three  men  named  once  lived  on  the  earth  and 
can  any  statement  be  more  sure  and  positive 
than,  "as  I  live,  saith  the  Lord  God"?    These 
statements  not  only  mention  Job,  his  existence 
and  his  cause,  but  also  the  Patriarch  Noah    his 
faith,  and,  by  implication,  the  ark  in  which  he 
was  saved  from  the  deluge. 

What  will  the  doubters  and  higher  critics  do 
with  this  evidence  ?  Will  they  want  to  take  the 
book  of  Ezekiel  out  of  the  sacred  canon,  or  ap. 
peal  to  some  one  higher  than  the  Almighty  ? 

The  evidence  that  Job  was  a  real  character,  and 
his  book  inspired,  is  made  conclusive  beyond 
controversy.  It  is  interesting  to  learn  if  possible 
who  Job  was,  and  where  was  the  land  of  Uz  in 
which  he  lived. 

After  much  investigation  and  thought  the 
writer  came  to  the  conclusion,  more  than  forty 
years  ago,  that  Job  was  no  other  than  Jobab,  the 
thirteenth  son  of  Joktan,  who  was  the  son  of 
Eber,  who  was  the  great-grandson  of  Shem. 
Eber  had  two  sons,  Peleg  and  Joktan.  Abraham 
and  the  Israelites  were  the  descendants  of  Eber 
through  the  line  of  Peleg.  Jobab  was  the  fifth 
generation  from  Shem,  Abraham  was  the  ninth 


I* 


I 


II 


126         The  Earth  and  the  World 

Jobab.  or  Job,  lived  and  had  the  trial  of  his 
faith  and  patience  about  2, 100  years  before  Christ. 
He,  Jobab,  was  the  first  or  original  '*thirteener" 
on  record.  The  man  Job,  considered  unfortu- 
nate, ''poor  Job,"  was,  in  the  end,  neither  poor 
nor  unfortunate.  It  is  written  in  Job  xlii.  10, 
*'  Then  there  came  unto  him  all  his  brethren  and 
all  his  sisters,  etc.,  etc.,  and  gave  him  money 
and  an  earring  of  gold."  *'  All  his  brethren :  "— 
this  is  an  evidence  that  Job  was  none  other  than 
Jobab,  who  had  twelve  brothers. 

Within  a  few  years  we  found  an  old  edition 
of  the  Bible,  in  which  the  book  of  "Job"  was 
printed  as  the  book  of  "Jobab,"  but  have  lost 
the  memorandum  stating  when  and  where  pub- 
lished. 

Further  proof  that  Job  was  Jobab,  we  gather 
from  Stackhouse's  "  History  of  the  Bible,"  in 
which  the  author  states  in  a  note,  said  to  have 
been  taken  from  the  Syriac,  that  his  name  (Job) 
was  at  first  "Jobab,"  and  again  writes,  "Job 
otherwise  called  Jobab." 

We  have  also  an  old  copy,  in  good  preserva- 
tion, of  "  Biblia  Sacra,"  in  three  languages,— the 
"Graece,"  "Latine"  and  "Germanice,"  printed 
in  Hamburg,  Anno  Domini  MDXCVl.  (1^96) 
which  says,  "Job is  said  to  have  lived  in  the  land 
of  Uz,  which  is  on  the  confines  of  Idumea  and 
Arabia,  and  formerly  his  name  was  'Jobab.' 
The  learned  Dr.  Adam  Clark,  in  his  commentary, 
makes  practically  the  same  statement  as  the 
above. 


The  Testimony  of  the  Book  of  Job  127 

Another  important  statement  we  have,  through 
the  favor  of  the  Librarian  of  the  Lenox  library  of 
New  York,  who  writes  that  the  Septuagint  Bi- 
ble, m  the  original,  and  also  in  its  English  trans- 
lation, states  in  a  note,  "This  man.  Job,  is  de- 
scribed in  the  Syriac  book,  as  living  in  the  land 
of  Ausis,  on  the  borders  of  Idumea  and  Arabia, 
and  his  name  before  was  Jobab." 

These  several  statements,  and  a  number  of 
others  by  various  commentators,  appear  to  de- 
rive ail  their  information  from  the  Septuagint 
version  of  the  Scriptures;  and  the  note  there 
mentioned  points  to  Jobab,  a  king  of  the  Edom- 
ites,  son  of  Zerah,  descended  from  Esau  (see 
Genesis  xxxvi.  3^,  34)  as  being  the  Jobab  oV  Job 
of  Scripture. 

Just  here,  we  believe,  is  where  the  blunder  has 
been  made,  and  where  students  of  the  Scriptures 
have  been  led  astray.    This  Jobab  of  the  line  of 
Esau,  the  idolatrous  and  corrupt  Edomites,  bears 
no  sort  of  resemblance  to  Job  of  the  Scriptures, 
either  m  length  of  days,  nor  the  age  in  which  he 
lived,  nor  in  character  or  surroundings  that  are  at 
all  descriptive  of  the  persons  contemporary  with 
the  Patriarch  Job,  or  the  times  in  which  he  lived 
In  the  Jobab  of  Esau,  there  is  no  analogy  in  anv 
respect  to  the  Job  of  Scripture. 

37'  Where  was  the  Land  of  U^  Where  Job 
Uved?— But  there  is  one  fact  brought  out  in  this 
old  version  of  the  Scriptures  that  is  important 
and  should  have  definite  attention,  and  that  is:— 
this  so-called  Septuagint,  being  a  Greek  version 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


11 : 


of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  was  made  by  seventy 
learned  men  appointed  thereto  about  270  years 
before  Christ,  which  version  has  a  higher  reputa- 
tion than  any  other,  and  was  frequently  quoted 
by  Christ  Himself.  This  acknowledged  and  au- 
thorized book  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures  has,  at 
the  end  of  the  book  of  Job,  written  at  the  time, 
this  note:— "This  man  is  described  in  the  Syriac 
book  as  living  in  the  land  of  Ausis,  on  the  bor- 
ders of  Idumea  and  Arabia,  and  his  name  before 
was  Jobab." 

If  the  name  of  the  Job  of  the  Scriptures  was 
formerly  Jobab,  which  the  above  statements 
prove,  then  there  is  no  reason  to  believe  that  the 
real  Job  was  a  descendant  of  Esau,  but  the  best 
of  evidence  that  he  was  the  Jobab  of  Joktan,  and 
grandson  of  Eber,  as  before  stated. 

''There  was  a  man  in  the  land  of  Uz  whose 
name  was  Job."  (Job  i.  i.)  h  has  been  a  ques- 
tion for  1,000  years  and  more,  where  was  the 
land  of  Uz  in  which  Job  lived?  Uz  was 
the  son  of  Aram,  who  was  the  son  of  Shem, 
who  was  the  son  of  Noah.  The  land  where  Uz 
lived  was  doubtless  the  land  of  Uz.  In  what 
part  of  Western  Asia  did  it  lie  ?  Commentators 
have  been  at  a  loss  to  locate  the  land.  Diodati, 
assisted  by  many  learned  men,  published,  in 
1657,  in  two  large  volumes,  his  "  Annotations 
of  the  Bible."  In  the  preface  to  the  book  of 
Job,  it  reads,  "Though  our  maps  cannot  show 
us  what  Uz  was,  or  where  situated,  yet  cannot 
this  Scripture  of  Job  be  rejected." 


The  Testimony  of  the  Book  of  Job  129 

The  name  of  Uz  given  to  the  land  passed  awav 
comparatively  early,  and  was  forgotten  by  suc- 
ceedmg  generations.     Even  Moses,  in  his  dav 
does  not  use  it  calling  the  land  of  Uz,  Edom,  o^ 
the  land  of  the  Edomites,  children  of  Esau     This 
IS  another  incidental  proof  which  cannot  be  de- 
nied, that  Job  lived  long  before  Moses. 
A  few  years  since,   while  reading  again  in 
Lamentations,"  we  learned  unexpectedly  where 
the  land  of  Uz  was  situated,  and  that  beyond 
doubt.    It  IS  found  in  Lamentations  iv.  21  as  fol- 
lows :---'' Rejoice  and  be  glad,   O  daughter  of 
fcdom  that  dwellest  in  the  land  of  Uz  " 

The  Genevan  Version,  a  copy  of'  which  we 
have  printed  in  ,560,  has  precisely  the  same 
translation  of  the  verse.  Another  old  version 
has  It  translated  thus  :^- Be  joyful  and  glad,  O 
daughter  of  Edom,  who  dwellest  in  the  country 

?l .  f:  ,  T  "^^  ^^^^  ^^'^  t^  ^^  evident  proof 
that  the  land  of  Uz  was  afterward,  even  before 
Moses  day,  called  Edom,  from  Esau. 

It  IS  seldom  that  the  Bible  goes  out  of  its  way 
to  gratify  curiosity,  but  here  it  would  seem  that 
the  Prophet  Jeremiah  was  led  by  the  Spirit  to 
record  the  fact  that  the  land  of  Edom  was  for- 
merly  the  land  of  Uz. 

In  the  days  of  the  old  patriarchs,  before  Abra^ 
lam,  the  land  of  Uz  was  well  known ;  and  that 
was  the  time  when  Jobab,  son  of  Joktan,  lived: 
and  he,  doubtless,  was  the  Job  of  Scripture. 

It  IS  not  certainly  known  who  wrote  the  book 
of  Job,  and  when  and  how  it  came  into  the  pos- 


If  ii 


128 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


9 ' 


of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  was  made  by  seventy 
learned  men  appointed  thereto  about  270  years 
before  Christ,  which  version  has  a  higher  reputa- 
tion than  any  other,  and  was  frequently  quoted 
by  Christ  Himself.  This  acknowledged  and  au- 
thorized book  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures  has,  at 
the  end  of  the  book  of  Job,  written  at  the  time, 
this  note:— *•  This  man  is  described  in  the  Syriac 
book  as  hving  in  the  land  of  Ausis,  on  the  bor- 
ders of  Idumea  and  Arabia,  and  his  name  before 
was  Jobab." 

If  the  name  of  the  Job  of  the  Scriptures  was 
formerly  Jobab,  which  the  above  statements 
prove,  then  there  is  no  reason  to  believe  that  the 
real  Job  was  a  descendant  of  Esau,  but  the  best 
of  evidence  that  he  was  the  Jobab  of  Joktan,  and 
grandson  of  Eber,  as  before  stated. 

''There  was  a  man  in  the  land  of  Uz  whose 
name  was  Job."  (Job  i.  i.)  It  has  been  a  ques- 
tion for  1,000  years  and  more,  where  was  the 
land  of  Uz  in  which  Job  lived?  Uz  was 
the  son  of  Aram,  who  was  the  son  of  Shem, 
who  was  the  son  of  Noah.  The  land  where  Uz 
lived  was  doubtless  the  land  of  Uz.  In  what 
part  of  Western  Asia  did  it  lie  ?  Commentators 
have  been  at  a  loss  to  locate  the  land.  Diodati, 
assisted  by  many  learned  men,  published,  in 
1657,  in  two  large  volumes,  his  "  Annotations 
of  the  Bible."  In  the  preface  to  the  book  of 
Job,  it  reads,  "Though  our  maps  cannot  show 
us  what  Uz  was,  or  where  situated,  yet  cannot 
this  Scripture  of  Job  be  rejected," 


The  Testimony  of  the  Book  of  Job  129 

The  name  of  Uz  given  to  the  land  passed  awav 
comparatively  early,  and  was  forgotten  by  suc- 
ceedmg  generations.     Even  Moses,  in  his  dav 
does  not  use  it  calling  the  land  of  Uz,  Edom,  o^ 
the  land  of  the  Edomites,  children  of  Esau     This 
IS  another  incidental  proof  which  cannot  be  de- 
nied, that  Job  lived  long  before  Moses. 
A  few  years  since,   while  reading  again  in 
Lamentations,"  we  learned  unexpectedly  where 
the  land  of  Uz  was  situated,  and  that  beyond 
doubt.     It  IS  found  in  Lamentations  iv.  21  as  fol- 
lows:~- Rejoice  and  be  glad,   O  daughter  of 
fcdom  that  dwellest  in  the  land  of  Uz." 

The  Genevan  Version,  a  copy  of'  which  we 
have  pnnted  in  1560,  has  precisely  the  same 
transition  of  the  verse.  Another  old  version 
has  It  translated  thus:~.-Be  joyful  and  glad,  O 
daughter  of  Edom,  who  dwellest  in  the  country 

.K  ;t  ,  T  "^^  ^^^^  th^s  to  be  evident  proof 
that  the  land  of  Uz  was  afterward,  even  before 
Moses  day,  called  Edom,  from  Esau 

It  is  seldom  that  the  Bible  goes  out  of  its  way 
to  gratify  curiosity,  but  here  it  would  seem  that 
the  Prophet  Jeremiah  was  led  by  the  Spirit  to 
record  the  fact  that  the  land  of  Edom  was  for- 
merly the  land  of  Uz. 

In  the  days  of  the  old  patriarchs,  before  Abra- 
ham, the  land  of  Uz  was  well  known;  and  that 
was  the  time  when  Jobab,  son  of  Joktan,  lived: 
and  he,  doubtless,  was  the  Job  of  Scripture 

It  is  not  certainly  known  who  wrote  the'book 
Of  Job,  and  when  and  how  it  came  into  the  pos- 


130         The  Earth  and  the  World 

session  of  the  Israelites,  though  many  learned 
commentators  have  inquired  into  the  matter,  and 
some  have  named  eminent  persons  as  being  its 
author,  stating  reasons  for  their  opinions. 

}8,  Who  Wrote  the  Book  of  Job  ?— With  the 
exception,  perhaps,  of  the  first  chapter  and  part 
of  the  last,  w^e  believe  that  Job  himself  wrote  the 
book.  He  lived  long  after  the  trial,  and  had  suf- 
ficient time  to  do  it.  He  best  knew  all  the  cir- 
cumstances, and  had  a  vivid  recollection  of  the 
same.  He  was  truthful,  and  had  the  ability  to 
do  it,  as  is  manifested  by  the  force  and  strength 
of  his  arguments  in  defence  of  his  integrity,  and 
the  ways  of  God  with  man. 

It  has  hitherto  been  a  favorite,  and  perhaps  the 
most  plausible  theory,  that  the  book  of  Job  was 
the  first  brought  to  the  knowledge  of  the  Israel- 
ites by  Moses,  who  found  it  in  Midian,  east  of 
the  Red  Sea,  during  his  exile  of  forty  years  from 
Egypt ;  but  this  is  a  mere  supposition,  not  sus- 
tained by  any  proof.  The  land  of  Uz  was  far  north 
of  Midian,  and  Jobab  of  Joktan  flourished  400  years 
or  more  before  Moses;  so  it  is  not  at  all  probable 
that  Moses  found  the  book  in  Midian.  For  many 
years  we  have  had  the  conviction  that  Melchize- 
dec,  that  mysterious  and  wonderful  man,  had 
the  book  of  Job  in  his  possession,  and  presented 
it  first  to  the  Patriarch  Abraham. 

By  an  incursion  of  some  petty  kings  into  the 
land  of  Canaan,  the  king  of  Sodom  and  others, 
including  Lot  and  his  family,  were  carried  away 
captives.    (See  Genesis,  chapter  xiv.)    Abraham, 


III 


The  Testimony  of  the  Book  of  Job  131 

on  hearing  of  the  affair,  gathered  318  of  his  trained 
servants  and  pursued  the  enemy  and  delivered 
Lot,  his  family,  and  others.     For  this  he  received 
the  thanks  of  the  rescued.     "And  Melchizedec, 
kmg  of  Salem,   priest  of  the  Most  High  God' 
brought  forth  bread  and  wine;"  symbols  of  the 
Christian  faith.     -And  he  blessed  him  and  said 
'  msstd  be  Abram  of  the  Most  High  God,  pos- 
sessor of  heaven  and  earth.    And  blessed  be  the 
Most    High    God  which    hath   delivered  thine 
enemies  into  thine  hands/" 

This  ought  not  to  be  considered  any  mere 
formal  blessing  on  the  part  of  Melchizedec,  no 
mere  ''thank  you,  friend  Abram,  for  risking  your 
life  and  the  lives  of  your  servants,  and  the  self- 
denying  efforts  you  have  made  to  deliver  this 
people,  their  lives  and  property ;— very  kind  of 
you  to  do  all  this."    It  was  far  more.    Abraham 
was  a  man  chosen  of  God  to  be  head  of  the 
church,  the  children  of  faith;  and  through  whom 
He  was  to  accomplish  great  purposes.    God  had 
a  great  work  for  him  to  do,  and  Abraham  must 
be  prepared  for  that  work.     Melchizedec  was  a 
''priest  of  the  Most  High  God,"  and  he  had  his 
part  to  perform.     He  ''brought  forth  "the  ele- 
ments of  the  "bread"  and  the  "wine,"  and  he 
and    Abraham    had  sweet  converse  and  com- 
munion together,  no  few  hours  or  days,  perhaps 
seven  at  least,   in  that  age  of  deliberation,  so 
manifest  to  any  one  reading  the  book  of  Job. 

39'     Who   Introduced  It  to  the  Patriarchal 
Church  ?— Melchizedec,  (the  prototype  of  Christ, 


'I 


il 


I 

il 


132         The  Earth  and  the  World 

as  St.  Paul  writes  in  Hebrews)  doubtless  had  this 
book  of  Job,  containing  its  many  important  and 
valuable  truths,  to  present  to  Abraham  to  con- 
firm and  establish  him  in  the  faith.  The  book 
may  have  been  revised  by  Melchizedec  himself. 
He  may  have  written  the  first  two  chapters,  and 
the  last  one.  He  may  even  have  had  one  of  the 
fair  daughters  of  Job  for  his  mother.  Doubtless 
David  and  the  old  prophets,  also  Paul,  knew  more 
of  Melchizedec  than  the  Scripture  records  would 
lead  us  to  infer. 

Job's  patience  was  greater  than  that  of  any 
other  man  who  ever  lived;  but  greater  than  his 
patience  was  his  faith.  All  the  trials  that  Satan 
brought  to  bear  upon  him  did  not  shake  his 
faith.  He  never  distrusted  his  God.  Job  said, 
"Though  He  slay  me,  yet  will  1  trust  in  Him." 
He  declared,  *M  know  that  my  Redeemer  liveth, 
and  I  shall  see  Him  for  myself  and  not  another." 

The  perusal  of  the  book  of  Job  by  Abraham,  in 
the  many  years  of  his  long  life,  reading  the  argu- 
ments, pro  and  con,  as  advanced  by  Job  and  his 
friends,  and  contemplating  the  beginning  and 
end  of  Job's  trial,  and  the  address  of  the  Al- 
mighty Himself  to  Job,  must  have  greatly 
strengthened  Abraham's  faith. 

In  the  days  of  sore  trial  of  prophets,  priests 
and  believers,  before  and  after  Christ,  the  trial  of 
Job's  faith  and  patience  has  ever  been  to  them 
like  a  foundation  rock,  imparting  faith  and  cour- 
age to  endure  to  the  end. 

Was  not  the  hand  of  God  in  the  work  of  de- 


,.i 


The  Testimoriy  of*  the  Book  of  Job  133 

veloping  the  character  of  Job,  and  the  giving  of 
the  history  of  his  trial  to  his  people,  intended  as 
an  example  of  faith  and  patience  to  His  people  in 
all  future  generations  ?  When  the  great  trial  of 
Abraham's  life  came,  and  he  was  commanded  to 
slay  his  only  son,  Isaac,  he  was  enabled  like  Job 
to  say,  ''Though  He  slay  me,  yet  will  I  trust 
Him."  The  Lord  Jehovah  never  ceases  to  care 
for  His  Redeemed. 

As  Abraham  possessed  the  book  of  Job,  as  we 
believe,  he  doubtless  made  copies  of  the  same  for 
the  benefit  of  his  children  and  grandchildren,  and 
even  for  presents  to  important  personages. 

Abraham  was  a  man  of  wealth  and  culture. 
He  had  his  flocks  and  herds,  his  gold  and  silver. 
In  his  fight  with  King  Chedorlaomer  and  others, 
he  brought  out  the  ''318  servants  born  in  his 
own  house";  which,  old  commentators  state, 
implies  that  he  must  have  had  at  least  1,500 
servants  in  his  household.  Abraham  looked 
well  after  his  affairs  and  accounts,  and  undoubt- 
edly had  the  ability  to  write. 

Flavius  Josephus,  in  his  history  of  the  Jews, 
writes,  ''Abraham  conferred  with  the  Egyp- 
tians," .  .  .  "  and  he  was  admired  by  them 
in  these  conferences  as  a  very  wise  man,  and  one 
of  great  sagacity,  when  he  discoursed  on  any 
subject  he  undertook;  and  this  not  only  in  under- 
standing it,  but  in  persuading  other  men  also  to 
assent  to  him.  He  communicated  to  them 
arithmetic,  and  delivered  to  them  the  science  of 
astronomy." 


Ill 


Ill 


If 


liiifi 


134         The  Earth  and  the  World 

Abraham,  in  his  contest  with  the  kings,  and  in 
rescuing  the  prisoners  and  their  property,  did  it 
all  at  his  own  risk  and  expense,  dechning  to  take 
the  least  thing  for  compensation  when  it  was 
urged  upon  him  for  his  good  work.  This  shows 
his  honorable  spirit,  and  that  he  was  a  gentle- 
man; the  first  recorded  in  history.  His  son  Isaac, 
a  quiet  gentleman  and  model  husband,  doubtless 
also  practiced  the  art  of  writing,  and,  in  his  years 
of  leisure,  probably  made  copies  of  the  book  of 
Job  for  his  sons  Jacob,  Esau  and  others.  Esau, 
naturally  disinclined  to  Job  and  his  ideas,  sided 
with  the  views  of  his  so-called  friends,  and  for 
that  reason  called  his  firstborn  son  Eliphas,  after 
Job's  principal  opponent. 

40.  Esau  Settled  in  the  Land  of  (7^,  and 
Afterward  it  was  Called  Edom,—Es'du  also  in 
his  effort  to  get  away  from  Jacob,  moved  into  the 
land  of  Uz,  and  took  possession  of  it  for  himself 
and  his  posterity;  and  afterward  Uz  was  called 
Edom.  As  a  matter  of  course  it  was  very  natural 
that  many  of  the  old  names  in  the  book  of  Job, 
and  once  familiar  in  the  land  of  Uz,  would  be  re- 
peated, as  they  were,  even  that  of  Jobab,  after- 
ward one  of  the  kings  of  the  Edomites. 

The  book  of  Job  has  always  been  a  source  of 
inspiration  to  the  old  patriarchs,  prophets,  priests 
and  kings.  The  revelation  it  contains  of  God 
and  His  ways,  has  strengthened  the  souls  of  His 
people.  Moses,  David,  Solomon  and  others  have 
drawn  lessons  from  the  book. 

Many  of  the  facts  concerning  Job,  Melchizedec, 


The  Testimony  of  the  Book  of  Job  135 

and  others,  were  doubtless  once  well  known  to 
the  Israelites,  but  like  thousands  of  other  facts 
relating  to  well-known  kings,  recorded  at  the 
time,  as  stated  in  the  books  of  the  kings,  are  now 
all  lost  to  the  world. 

Our  readers  must  pardon  us  for  this  long 
digression  from  the  work  of  creation,  that  we 
might  consider  facts  concerning  the  book  of  Job. 
As  the  facts  stated  in  that  book  relating  to  the 
foundation  of  the  earth  are  the  corner-stone  of 
our  theory,  so  far  as  it  relates  to  revealed  truth, 
of  the  beginning  and  the  formation  of  the  earth'; 
it  devolved  upon  us  to  establish  the  truth  of  the 
reality  of  the  person  of  Job  and  his  history  beyond 
reasonable  doubt,  especially  as,  in  these  days, 
many  people  profess  to  believe  Job  to  be  a  ficti- 
tious character. 


.1 

'i 

I 


tHE    PROCESSES    EMPLOYED    IN    THE    FORMATION    OF 

THE  EARTH 

4'-  IVhat  Were  the  Processes  Probably  Em- 
ployed by  the  Creator  in  the  Formation  of  the 
Earth?— The  next  important  question  is,  what 
were  the  processes  probably  employed  by  the 
Creator  in  the  formation  of  the  earth  ? 

The  theory  we  hold  is  that,  so  far  as  the 
material  of  the  earth  is  concerned,  it  was,  at  its 
beginning,  atomic  in  its  nature  and  character* 
and  that  also,  in  the  subsequent  development  or 
building  up  of  the  earth,  the  material  was  de- 
livered, not  in  any  solid  form,  or  combination  of 
varied  classes  of  atoms,  but  in  its  atomic  form. 
Also,  that  the  nature  or  class  of  atoms  used  at 
any  particular  period  in  the  history  of  the  forma- 
tion  of  the  earth,  from  its  beginning  to  its  end, 
were  definite  in  their  nature  and  character;  being 
such,  with  their  necessary  combinations,  as  were 
predetermined  by  the  Creator  Himself,  after  the 
same  manner  as  skilled  architects  now  decide, 
determine,  and  adopt,  in  any  important  building 
they  may  be  erecting,  viz:— describing  and  de- 
fining all  the  materials,  and  when,  where,  and 
how  they  are  to  be  used  and  applied. 
42.     Were  the  Comets  Employed  in  Delivering 

136 


i    \ 


"S>.\ 


The  Formation  of  the  Earth        137 

Material  for  the  Formation  of  the  Earth  ?--The 
next  question  is,  how  were  these  atomic  materials 
brought  and  delivered  to  the  place  where  the  earth 
was  being  formed  ?  The  great  and  wise  Creator 
who  provides  the  way  as  well  as  the  means,' 
certainly  had  a  definite  plan  for  performing  the 
work.  ^ 

After  considering  the  matter  now  and  then  for 
years,  we  have  come  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
Creator  has  used,  and  is  still  using,  that  class  of 
celestial    bodies  well  known  to  exist  in  very 
great  numbers,  and  which  are  constantly  moving 
through  space  in  our  solar  system,  called  the 
Comets.     They  exist  in  great  variety  as  well  as 
in  great  numbers,  differing  in  size  of  nucleus  or 
head,  in  their  train,  in  their  appearance,  in  their 
substance,   or    atomic    or  gaseous   material,   in 
velocity  of  movement,  in  form  of  their  orbits 
about  the  sun,  and  in  many  other  ways.     The 
nucleus  of  one  comet  may  have  an  affinity  for 
oxygen,  another  for  hydrogen,  another  for  carbon 
and  other  gaseous  or  definite  atomic  materials. 

The  great  comet  called  "Donati's  Comet" 
which  appeared  in  1858,— at  that  time  the  won- 
der of  the  heavens,— had  a  train  said  to  have 
been  over  50,000,000  miles  long,  and  many 
millions  wide;  and  this  train  was  declared,  by 
those  competent  to  judge,  to  be  composed  prin- 
cipally of  hydrogen  gas. 

Experts  in  this  branch  of  the  science  of  as- 
tronomy, by  the  use  of  the  spectrum,  have 
decided  that  the  majority  of  the  comets  of  late 


II 


11 


1  * 

-it 


mi 


138         The  Earth  and  the  World 

years  are  composed  of  carbonic  gas.  While 
comets  are  believed  to  be  obedient  to  the  laws  of 
gravitation,  yet  they  are  very  erratic  in  their 
courses,  and  mysterious  in  their  nature  and 
service.  Whenever  they  have  made  their  ap- 
pearance in  ages  past,  they  have  been  the  dread 
of  mankind;  but,  so  far,  it  is  not  on  record 
that  they  have  hurt  or  damaged  our  planet  in  the 
least. 

The  angels  in  charge  have  had  them  well  in 
hand.  Astronomical  works  state  that  there  are 
nearly  10,000  comets  registered  as  having  made 
their  appearances,  the  majority  of  which,  as  far 
as  it  is  known,  have  never  returned. 

Kepler  states  that  comets  may  be  numbered  by 
the  million,  and  other  astronomers  agree  with 
him  in  this  matter.  Some  comets  fly  from  one 
sun  to  another,  in  all  directions;  ever  keeping 
their  tails  or  trains  away  from  the  sun  as  they 
approach  or  fly  away  from  that  body.  **  These 
mysterious  bodies  are  the  couriers  of  the  sky," 
celestial  transports,  and  the  messenger  cars  of  the 
universe,  that  perhaps,  among  other  uses,  do 
service  as  transports  for  angels  or  spirits  from 
one  system  to  another.  Comets  certainly  were 
not  made  in  vain ;  but  doubtless  for  some  good 
object,  for  that  is  the  end  and  purpose  of  all 
God's  works. 

The  comets  may  be,  as  we  believe  and  have 
before  stated,  the  world-building  cars  of  the 
Almighty,  transporting  and  delivering  the  desired 
atomic  material  when  and  where  needed  in  the 


The  Formation  of  the  Earth        139 

process  of  the  formation  of  any  planet-world  or 
other  celestial  body. 

Some  of  them  have  been,  and  even  now  may 
be,  employed,  as  we  might  say,  as  the  scavengers 
of  our  solar  system ;  each  one  attracting  and  gath- 
ering up  all  the  stray  elements  found  floating  in 
space,  that  have  been  thrown  off  or  parted  from 
some  of  the  celestial  bodies  passing  through  space ; 
some  comets  having  a  special  affinity  for  one 
atomic  or  gaseous  element,  and  others  for  some 
other  particular  element.  That  some  such  stray 
elements  do  exist,  as  are  represented  by  the 
shooting  stars,  showers  of  meteors  and  star-dust, 
which  the  earth,  in  its  annual  course  about  the 
sun,  is  known  to  pass  through,  is  evident. 

Flammarion,  in  his  *' Popular  Astronomy," 
states  on  page  74,  "that  the  shooting  stars 
which  continually  fall  on  our  earth  are  more 
than  100,000,000,000  per  annum."  This  state- 
ment must  be  exaggerated;  if  true,  it  would  at 
least  affect  our  eyesight.  All  the  planets  and 
their  satellites,  besides  the  great  sun,  doubtless 
hourly  part  with  a  large  quantity  of  diffused 
atomic  or  gaseous  materials. 

The  hydrogen  gas  of  our  earth,  the  lightest  of 
all  gases,  that  is  rising  continually  to  the  upper 
and  outer  regions  of  the  atmosphere,  and  on 
which  gravitation  has  little  or  insufficient  in- 
fluence to  counteract  the  rapid  rotation  of  the 
earth,  floats  away  from  it  into  space  and  is  after- 
ward gathered  by  some  of  the  comets  having  a 
special  affinity  for  that  gas. 


ii 


140         The  Earth  and  the  World 

Under  these  cireumstances,  and  in  such  a  con- 
dition of  things,  it  appears  that  the  comets  per- 
form a  useful  and  necessary  work  by  gathering 
all  floating  derelicts  or  fragments  of  elements 
lost  in  space,  and  by  this  means  clarify  the  solar 
system. 

43.  The  Comets  best  Adapted  for  the  Service. 
— The  skilled  architect,  when  called  to  design 
and  erect  a  large  building  for  art,  literature,  leg- 
islative or  other  public  purposes,  aims  first  to 
have  it  perfectly  adapted  to  meet  all  purposes 
and  requirements  for  which  it  is  intended;  that 
its  foundation  shall  be  sure;  that  all  the  materials 
selected  and  used  in  every  part  of  the  structure, 
from  its  foundation  to  its  topstone,  shall  be  not 
only  substantial  and  suitable  in  every  respect,  but 
such  as  shall  add  beauty,  dignity  and  character 
to  the  completed  building;  thus  earning  for  him- 
self not  only  renown,  but  the  gratitude  of  the 
public  he  has  nobly  served. 

If  an  architect,  endowed  with  wisdom  and 
power,  was  called  upon  to  construct  a  world 
after  the  model  of  our  earth,  what  could  he  desire 
more,  or  find  better  adapted  to  his  purpose,  to 
enable  him  to  accomplish  perfectly  the  work  he 
had  in  hand,  than  the  service  of  the  "flying 
comets"— "the  celestial  transports"  to  bring 
him  the  desired  materials  from  near  or  far,  and 
deliver  the  same  just  when  and  where  desired  in 
automatic  fashion  ? 

44.  The  Orderly  Way  in  Which  Earth's  Strata 
are  Laid  Bears  Evidence  of  the  Service  of  Comets. 


The  Formation  of  the  Earth        141 

—The  various  strata  of  the  earth,  and  the  orderly 
manner  in  which  geologists  find  the  strata  laid  in 
Its  formation,  prove  that  the  material  was  de- 
posited in  some  such  regular  and  orderly  man- 
ner. We  may  rest  assured  that  the  body  of  the 
earth  is  no  heterogeneous  mass  of  material,  or 
conglomeration  of  the  elements  thrown  off  from 
some  other  body.  It  is  plain  that  no  such  depo- 
sition of  material  could  have  been  made  on  the 
earth  under  or  by  the  revolutionary  process  of 
the  Laplace  Nebular  Hypothesis. 

Admitting  that  the  comets  were  used  in  the 
process  of  building  up  the  earth,  and  that,  in  that 
service,  they  were  operating  under  natural  laws. 
It  is  conceded  that  their  services  were  not  per- 
formed under  any  general  law,  but  were  made 
by  special  act  and  superintendence  to  accomplish 
the  end  first  designed.     This  is  where  the  ma- 
jority of  the  scientists  of  this  day  will  object  and 
deny,  who  believe  only  in  known  and  general 
natural  laws,  and  will  not  admit  of  any  special 
acts  of  the  Almighty  or  His  appointed  agents  in 
any  creative  or  other  work  that  has  been  per- 
formed. 

4y.  The  Earth  Formed  by  the  Special  Acts  of 
the  Almighty  as  well  as  His  General  Laws.— We 
hold  to  the  doctrine  that  the  world  in  its  creation, 
many  ages  since,  from  its  beginning  and  during 
all  its  physical  history,  and  also  since  man  has 
occupied  it,  has  at  all  times  been  subject,  not 
only  to  the  general  laws  of  the  Almighty,  but 
also  to  the  special  decrees,  acts  or  appointments 


14^         The  Earth  and  the  World 


i 


made  and  executed  by  Him  at  various  times,  or 
by  His  agents  as  directed  by  Him.  '*  He  treasures 
up  His  wise  designs,  and  works  His  sovereign 
will." 

Our  world  is  a  progressive  one:  so  also  is  the 
universe.  It  is  not  expected  that  the  Almighty 
would  make  or  declare  all  laws  at  once,  or  at 
any  one  period,  to  suit  all  coming  exigencies.  A 
physical  change  may  yet  come  over  all  things,  as 
predicted.  But  principles  are  different  from 
physical  laws :  while  the  latter  may  change,  prin- 
ciples do  not,  for  they  are  eternal. 

But  in  this  matter  of  the  manner  of  the  ways 
and  means  used  by  the  Great  Creator  in  the  for- 
mation of  the  earth,  the  question  whether  the 
Almighty  used  the  comets  or  similar  methods  for 
accomplishing  the  great  work,  or  whether  He 
created  the  material  there  and  then  on  the  spot 
as  the  work  progressed,  or  by  some  other  pro- 
ceedings to  us  unknown,  is  not,  in  our  inquiry 
and  investigation,  a  vital  or  important  question. 
Although  we  believe  in  it  as  stated,  we  do  not 
build  upon  it.  *' God's  ways  are  past  finding 
out."  His  resources  are  beyond  the  comprehen- 
sion of  finite  minds. 

That  the  earth  had  a  beginning  is  not  to  be 
questioned.  That  it  had  also  a  predetermined, 
definite  and  orderly  beginning,  we  believe  must 
be  evident  to  those  who  will  consider  the  matter, 
observe  what  was  done,  and  admit  that  God  was 
its  "Maker." 

The  science  of  astronomy  gives  us  only  a  com- 


The  Formation  of  the  Earth        143 

paratiyely  faint  idea  of  the  extent  of  the  universe. 
It  is  infinite;  far  beyond  our  comprehension,  in 
every  respect.  The  telescopes  of  this  century 
have  brought  to  light  millions  of  stars  that  are 
not  visible  to  the  naked  eye.  These  stars  are 
known  to  be  suns,  like  the  one  that  rules  our 
solar  system,  having  in  all  probability  planet 
worlds  revolving  about  them  like  our  own 
sun. 

In  view  of  such  an  infinite  number  of  worlds 
in  this  great  universe,  we  naturally  get  the  idea 
that  their  creation  must  be  a  matter  of  common 
occurrence  on  the  part  of  the  Creator,  and  of  no 
special  importance  or  significance;  and  that  there- 
fore our  earth  must  be  included  in  the  same  list, 
and  its  creation  held  to  be,  by  intelligent  men,  of 
no  particular  importance.  So  far  as  nature  teaches 
us,  this  idea  would  be  correct,  and  it  is  held  so  to 
be  by  many  an  astronomer,  and  the  scientific 
world  generally. 

46,  The  Definite  Importance  of  Our  Earth  in 
its  Creation, — The  Scriptures,  however,  give  an 
entirely  different  impression,  and  from  what  they 
teach,  we  are  led  to  believe  that  the  creation  of 
our  earth  was  one  of  the  important  events  in  the 
history  of  the  universe. 

At  a  period  in  the  history  of  the  universe,  ap- 
pointed by  the  Almighty,  He  prepared  to  lay  the 
foundation  of  the  earth,  to  make  a  beginning  of 
the  creation  of  a  new  world  in  which,  at  a  time 
appointed  and  known  to  Him,  important  and 
controlling  events  would  transpire  that  in  the 


144         The  Earth  and  the  World 


ages  to  come  would  enhance  His  own  glory,  and 
in  a  greater  or  less  measure  advance  and  confirm 
the  peace,  security  and  felicity  of  all  His  intelli- 
gent creatures,  not  only  in  our  world  but  in  all 
other  worlds. 

'*  Known  unto  God  are  all  His  works  from  the 
beginning  of  the  world." 

In  view  of  the  far-reaching  and  eternal  impor- 
tance of  the  events  that  were  to  be,  and  that  have 
since  transpired  on  the  earth,  one  would  reason- 
ably expect  that  the  beginning  of  its  creation 
would  be  noted  by  some  definite  recognition  or 
marked  ceremony  of  the  great  event;  and  this 
was  truly  the  case,  as  we  learn  from  the  state- 
ment of  the  event  and  the  circumstances  con- 
nected with  it,  found  recorded  in  the  book  of 
Job,  chapter  xxxviii.,  from  first  to  seventh  verse 
inclusive,  which  we  here  repeat  as  follows  : 

I. — "Then  the  Lord  answered  Job  out  of  the 
whirlwind  and  said," 

2. — "Who  is  this  that  darkeneth  counsel  by 
words  without  knowledge  ? " 

3.—"  Gird  up  now  thy  loins  like  a  man;  for  I 
will  demand  of  thee,  and  answer  Me." 

4.—"  Where  wast  thou  when  1  laid  the  foun- 
dations of  the  earth;  declare,  if  thou  hast  under- 
standing." 

5.— "Who  hath  laid  the  measures  thereof,  if 
thou  knowest?  Or  who  hath  stretched  the  line 
upon  it  ?  " 

6. — "Whereupon  are  the  foundations  thereof 
fastened  ?  Or  who  laid  the  corner-stone  thereof; " 


The  Formation  of  the  Earth        145 

7.—"  When  the  morning  stars  sang  together 
and  all  the  sons  of  God  shouted  for  joy  ?" 

This  brief  statement  of  events  by  the  Lord 
Jehovah  to  His  servant  Job,  makes  it  evident  that 
there  was  a  definite  and  marked  ceremony  at  the 
beginning  of  the  creation  of  the  world,  known 
to  the  angelic  host,  in  which  ceremony  they  had 
an  honorable  and  joyful  part  to  perform,  "when 
the  morning  stars  sang  together  and  all  the  sons 
of  God  shouted  for  joy." 

From  this  declaration  we  have  reason  to  believe 
that  the  beginning  of  the  creation  of  the  world, 
so  far  from  being  an  ordinary  event  in  the 
works  of  God,  was,  from  the  circumstances  at- 
tending it,  and  the  important  fact  known  to  God, 
that  the  world  would  be,  as  it  has  been  and  even 
now  is,  a  conspicuous  theatre  of  events  of  uni- 
versal importance,  by  and  in  which  are  developed 
and  manifested  the  glorious  attributes,  the  wis- 
dom and  counsel  of  God  in  His  moral  govern- 
ment of  the  universe.  Also  that,  in  the  fullness 
of  time,  or  the  ages  to  come,  might  be  made 
known  to  all  intelligent  beings,  the  intent  of  the 
Almighty,  to  unify,  perfect,  establish  and  bless 
in  and  through  one,  that  is  His  Eternal  Son,  all 
intelligent  beings  in  the  universe. 

The  scientist,  analyst,  or  chemist  examines, 
discovers,  tries  and  tests  the  nature  and  character 
of  the  elements  that  are  brought  to  him  for  in- 
vestigation; and  determines  their  varied  proper- 
ties, uses  and  value;  all  of  which  necessary  and 
important  work  is  performed  in  his  small  labora- 


I 


146         The  Earth  and  the  World 

tory,  though  his  work  may  be  of  world-wide 
importance  and  benefit  to  man. 

So  it  would  appear,  from  the  testimony  of  the 
Scriptures  and  the  history  of  man  on  the  earth, 
that  there  has  been  developed  on  this  little  planet, 
our  world,  a  purpose  of  the  Almighty  to  try, 
test,  make  known  and  establish,  the  wise, 
righteous  and  holy  principles  of  His  divine  na- 
ture and  government,  for  His  own  glory  and  the 
benefit  of  the  human  race,  as  well  as  for  the 
confirmation  of  the  fidelity,  peace  and  happiness 
of  all  intelligent  creatures  in  the  wide  universe. 

47,  ^.  The  Laying  the  Foundation  and  Cor- 
ner-stone of  the  Earth  Was  an  Imposing  Cere- 
mony, The  Honorable  Service  Appointed  For 
the  Angels. — The  oldest  event  relating  to  the  his- 
tory of  the  worid  is  that  of  laying  its  foundation 
and  corner-stone,  the  first  record  of  which  to- 
gether with  the  ceremony  attending  the  event,  is 
found  in  the  thirty-eighth  chapter  of  the  ancient 
book  of  Job. 

The  Almighty,  in  His  address  to  Job,  demanded 
of  him  to  declare  *'  Where  wast  thou  when  I  laid 
the  foundations  of  the  earth  ?  Who  determined 
the  measures  thereof?  Or  who  stretched  the 
line  upon  it  ?  Whereupon  were  the  foundations 
thereof  fastened  ?  Or  who  laid  the  corner-stone 
thereof,  when  the  morning  stars  sang  together, 
and  all  the  sons  of  God  shouted  for  joy  ?  " 

Just  what  was  the  process  or  manner  of  laying 
the  foundation  or  the  materials  used,  none  but 
God  and  the  angels  know.    That  no  man  in  this 


The  Formation  of  the  Earth        147 

life  will  ever  know,  we  infer  from  the  declara- 
tion God  made  to  the  Prophet  Jeremiah  thus  re- 
corded, "Thus  saith  the  Lord,  If  Heaven  above 
can  be  measured  and  the  foundations  of  the 
earth  searched  out  beneath,  I  will  also  cast  off  all 
the  seed  of  Israel  for  all  that  they  have  done, 
saith  the  Lord."  That  the  proceedings  and  cere- 
mony brought  into  service  on  this  most  august 
occasion  were  appropriate,  orderly,  grand  and 
magnificent  beyond  our  conception,  must  be  evi- 
dent; for  God  and  His  angels  were  the  holy  per- 
sons engaged  in  the  important  service. 

At  the  grand  scene  there  were  doubtless  angelic 
representatives  from  the  various  principalities 
and  powers  of  God's  universal  kingdom.  Angels 
and  archangels,  the  cherubim  and  seraphim  were 
there,  in  all  their  beauty  and  glory;  taking  part 
with  joy  in  the  new  work  God  was  pleased  to 
inaugurate. 

The  regular  and  constant  interposition  of 
angels,  endowed  with  wisdom  and  power,  in 
performing  the  work  God  had  given  them  to  do, 
and  in  the  maintenance  of  His  government,  is  a 
doctrine  abundantly  sustained  by  Scripture.  In 
the  book  of  Revelation  it  appears  that  all,  or 
nearly  all,  of  God's  governmental  acts  are  in 
charge  of  the  angels,  or  are  superintended  by 
them. 

If,  in  the  divine  economy  of  God's  govern- 
ment, He  created  spiritual  beings,  and  endowed 
them  with  great  wisdom,  power  and  rectitude; 
of  which  there  is  abundant  evidence  in  Scripture, 


148 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


and  no  reason  to  doubt  the  same;  it  is  only 
reasonable  to  suppose  that  He  would  use  the 
abilities  thus  conferred  upon  them  in  His  creative 
works,  and  in  the  orderly  maintenance  of  all  the 
celestial  bodies  in  the  heavens.  They  are  also 
His  ministers  to  do  His  will,  to  establish  His 
kingdom  and  authority,  to  execute  His  decrees, 
to  administer  His  laws,  and  in  the  bestowal  of 
His  gifts.  God  has  created  them  for  good  and 
wise  purposes.  Why  should  He  not  use  these. 
His  most  faithful  servants,  in  His  glorious  works, 
conferring  on  them  complete  happiness,  glory 
and  honor? 

The  Lord  Jehovah  demanded  from  Job  an 
answer  to  these  questions:  (see  Job,  chapter 
xxxviii.)  "  Who  determined  the  measure  thereof, 
if  thou  knowest?  Or  who  hath  stretched  the 
line  upon  it  ?  Whereupon  were  the  foundations 
thereof  fastened  ?  "  We  infer  that  the  measure 
of  the  earth,  its  size  and  appointments  were  all 
determined  from  the  beginning.  Doubtless  the 
angels  of  God  '*that  excel  in  strength,  that  do 
His  pleasure,  hearkening  unto  the  voice  of  His 
word,"  at  His  command  stretched  the  line  from 
pole  to  pole,  laid  the  corner-stone,  and  estab- 
lished the  foundations  of  the  earth,  so  that  they 
cannot  be  moved. 

What  these  foundations  were,  and  how  estab- 
lished, no  man  knows.  Most  assuredly  the  work 
was  perfect:  nothing  was  left  undone  that  should 
have  been  done,  for  the  workmen  were  without 
fault. 


The  Formation  of  the  Earth        149 

4(9.  The  Probable  Process  of  the  Formation  of 
the  Earth,  Occupying  an  Age  or  Ages.—^\itx\ 
the  foundations  were  laid,  we  may  reasonably 
infer  that  the  earth  began  to  be  formed,  to  grow 
and  increase  in  size  from  age  to  age.  The  mate- 
rial forming  the  body  was  added  to  it  when  pre- 
sented. The  earth  or  its  nucleus  revolving  rap- 
idly, receives  and  appropriates  the  material  as 
the  fast  revolving  spool  takes  the  yarn  from  the 
skein  held  by  the  retaining  shaft,  that  also  turn- 
ing. The  nucleus  of  the  earth  turning  rapidly 
would  absorb  the  atomic  material  forming  the 
train  of  the  comet  for  which  it  had  an  affmity, 
the  material  effect  of  which  would  be  to  compel 
the  comet  also  to  revolve  about  the  earth's  nu- 
cleus, drawing  it  nearer  and  nearer  until  the  end 
of  the  yarn,  or  the  atomic  material  of  the  comet's 
train  was  exhausted. 

The  spool  or  ball  taking  the  yarn  after  this 
fashion,  has  it  distributed  equally  on  all  sides, 
not  lopsided,  or  one  side  being  heavier  than  the 
other.  So,  therefore,  the  atomic  material  from 
the  various  comets'  trains  in  succession  being  fed 
on  the  revolving  nucleus  of  the  earth,  as  we  have 
indicated,  the  growing  earth  would  be  built  up 
gradually  and  uniformly  on  all  sides,  being  like 
the  well-balanced  wheel  in  the  clock,  in  the  en- 
gine, or  wheels  and  shafts  in  perfected  machinery. 
We  cannot  conceive  of  a  more  practical  or  per- 
fect way  of  forming  or  building  up  a  body  like 
our  earth  than  on  the  plan  of  procedure  here 
named. 


I 


150        The  Earth  and  the  World 

To  say  the  least,  it  was  an  orderly  proceeding; 
allowing  the  Creator  full  opportunity  to  take  or 
deliver  at  the  proper  time,  the  right  material  as 
the  work  was  progressing,  coherent  atoms  ad- 
hering compactly  with  materials  previously  de- 
posited. 

After  such  a  process  as  this,  in  all  probability 
the  earth  was  gradually  formed  and  built  up  to 
within,  say,  eight  or  ten  miles  of  its  present 
surface. 

That  the  atomic  material  was  cohesive  in  its 
nature  and  compactly  laid,  is  evident  from  the 
specific  gravity  of  the  earth,  which  is  about  six 
times  greater  than  that  of  water,  which  is  much 
heavier  than  the  present  surface  of  the  earth  as 
far  down  as  man  has  been  able  to  test  its  specific 
gravity,  for  the  known  rocks  on  the  surface  of 
the  earth  do  not  average  more  than  three  times 
that  of  the  water. 

The  period  of  time  occupied  by  the  Creator  in 
reaching  that  distance  from  the  earth's  centre,  no 
man  knows.  To  attempt  to  name  the  ages  that 
passed  would  be  mere  guess  work;  for  man  has 
no  data  on  which  to  form  an  opinion. 

The  deepest  hole  man  has  been  able  to  dig  or 
bore  in  the  earth  below  its  surface,  we  learn,  is 
less  than  a  mile  and  a  half. 

The  mountains  that  have  been  forced  up  above 
the  surface  of  the  earth,  tell  the  story  of  what  is 
below  far  better  than  anything  else  the  world 
can  exhibit  to  those  who  live  upon  it. 

$0.     The  Creator  had  Definite  Designs  in  the 


The  Formation  of  the  Earth        151 

Formation  of  the  Earth.^From  what  we  are  able 
to  learn  from  nature  about  us,  below  and  above 
us,  we  reason  that  God  has  a  design  and  purpose 
in  all  His  plans,  which  purpose  is  being  gradu- 
ally developed  in  all  His  works. 

We  are  not  able  to  perceive  any  reason  why 
there  may  not  be  or  have  been,  practically,  a  uni- 
formity of  procedure,  and  perhaps  a  similarity  in 
the  material  used,  from  the  foundation  of  the 
earth  to  within  a  comparatively  few  miles  of  its 
surface. 

But  after  observing  and  considering  the  face 
of  the  earth,  as  it  is  known  to  exist,  the  varied 
conditions  of  its  material,  as  well  as  the  variety 
and  classes  of  its  simple  elements,  the  changes 
they  have  undergone,  the  plan  of  its  distribu- 
tion, whether  of  solids  or  fluids,  we  notice  that 
there  was  or  must  have  been  a  necessity  for  a 
change,  not  only  in  the  distribution  of  the  mate- 
rial, but  an  increase  in  the  variety  of  the  nature 
of  its  atomic  elements,  so  that  now  diversity,  and 
not  uniformity,  must  have  been  the  rule;  and  that 
everywhere  there  must  have  been  a  certain  adap- 
tation of  material  things  to  time,  place,  condition 
and  circumstances,  to  meet  the  requirements  of 
the  predetermined  plans  of  the  Creator. 

When  the  formation  of  the  body  of  the  earth 
was  nearing  its  completion,  it  is  to  be  supposed 
that  the  all-wise  Creator  would  now  specifically 
prepare  it  for  the  grand  end  He  had  in  view  from 
the  beginning  of  its  creation;  that  it  should  be 
richly  endowed  with  all  the  necessary  materials 


isa        The  Earth  and  the  World 

required  in  all  future  times  to  meet  the  wants 
and  add  to  the  comfort  and  happiness  of  all  who 
were  to  occupy  it,  together  with  all  the  facilities 
required  to  utilize  all  the  elements  bestowed. 

Therefore,  whatever  additions  were  called  for 
and  were  now  to  be  made  to  the  earth's  surface, 
must  be  definite  in  their  character  and  suitable 
for  the  purposes  to  be  accomplished. 

The  period  had  arrived  in  the  formation  of  the 
earth  when  it  was  necessary  to  plan  or  provide 
for  the  face  of  the  habitable  globe.  God,  who 
so  fashioned  the  head  and  face  of  man  that  no 
artist  will  venture  on,  nor  even  suggest,  an  im- 
provement, has  also  fashioned  the  face  of  the 
earth  in  accordance  with  His  wise  designs. 


XI 


THE  AQUEOUS  AGE 

5/.  Importance  of  the  Law  of  Affinity,— \n 
the  arrangement  of  the  continents,  islands,  ranges 
of  mountains,  valleys,  plains,  beds  of  the  oceans, 
seas,  and  lakes,  and  the  channels  cut  out  of  the 
earth  for  the  rivers,  is  manifested  by  the  Creator 
a  definite  and  wise  plan  to  perfect  the  earth 
and  make  it  habitable  and  comfortable  in  the 
highest  degree  for  man  who  was  to  occupy  it. 

Six  to  ten  miles,  more  or  less,  below  its  present 
surface  the  earth,  may  be  said  to  be  the  primitive, 
unchanged  and  solid  foundation  of  the  earth! 
What  was  formed  above  these  lines  may  be 
called  the  ''crust  of  the  earth." 
By  what  process  were  the  continents  formed  ? 
According  to  our  theory,  the  earth  was  built 
up  by  successive  additions  of  selected  material 
delivered  to  it,  and  for  which  there  was  a  natural 
affmity.     Now  that  the  continents  were  to  be 
built  up  high  above  the  oceans'  beds,  there  was  a 
necessity  that  the  material  forming  the  continents 
should  be  delivered  to  those  parts  of  the  earth 
appointed  to  receive  it,  and  not  on  other  portions 
where  it  was  not  wanted ;  the  world  itself  afford- 
ing proof  that  this  was  done.     Here  again  do  we 
see  the  utility,  if  not  the  necessity,  in  the  world 

»S3 


154         The  Earth  and  the  World 

and  universe  of  the  great  principle  of  affinity, 
and  vice  versa,  in  materials. 

As  we  have  before  intimated,  affmity  is  a  law 
of  the  universe.  The  poet  writes,  "Order  is 
Heaven's  first  law."  Does  not  affinity  precede 
order,  and  order  in  many  respects  agrees  with, 
and  is  maintained  by,  natural  affinity;  or,  in  other 
words,  mutual  attraction. 

If  the  skilled  artisan  or  chemist,  in  electro- 
plating and  other  similar  processes,  cover  the 
parts  not  intended  to  be  plated,  or  treated  with  a 
protecting  material,  so  that  the  electro-plating 
solution  is  deposited  only  where  desired,  why 
may  not  the  Almighty  in  His  works  take  advan- 
tage of  the  methods  found  so  useful  by  His  crea- 
tures, and  thus  provide  that  new  material  for  the 
earth  shall  be  added  only  where  designed. 

But  besides  the  process  here  named  of  building 
up  the  continents  above  the  present  level  of  the 
oceans,  doubtless  there  were  many  other  effective 
methods  and  processes  in  operation  during  the 
long  periods  in  which  the  earth  was  passing 
through  the  several  important  stages  of  its  his- 
tory, wherein  were  developed  and  prepared  ma- 
terials of  inestimable  value  to  those  who  were  to 
live  upon  the  earth ;  a  fact  now  abundantly  made 
manifest. 

Man  at  this  age  of  the  worid  is  not  competent, 
or  has  not  the  evidence  at  hand  to  enable  him  to 
decide  what  means  the  Almighty  used  to  build  up 
the  worid.  We  draw  our  conclusions  from  what 
we  observe  and  learn  from  His  works  and  ways. 


The  Aqueous  Age  155 

52.     The   Relative  Proportion  of  Land  and 
Water  on  the  Surface  of  the  Earth. ^In  reference 
to  the  relative  quantity  of  water  and  land  on  the 
globe,  we  make  a  few  extracts  from  the  writings 
of  Professor  Dana,  the  well-known  author  of 
standard  works  on  Geology  and  Mineralogy,  etc. : 
''There  is  nearly  three  times  as  much  water  sur- 
face as  land  surface,  the  relation  of  water  to 
land-area  being  2^  to  i.     The  average  depth  of 
the  sea  is  13,000  feet,  the  average  elevation  of  the 
land  being  1,000  feet.    The  ocean  then  is  thirteen 
times  as  deep  as  the  land  is  high,  and  has  a  sur- 
face area  of  2^  times  as  large  as  that  of  the 
land.    If  we  assume  that  the  ocean  beds,  at  some 
former  time,  formed  continents,  a  depression  of 
14,000  feet  would  have  been  necessary  to  bring 
about  the  present  condition  of  the  earth.    Like- 
wise, had  the  continents  formed  the  sea-bottom, 
an  elevation  of    14,000  feet  would  have  been 
necessary  to  bring  them  up  to  the  present  height, 
but  no  known  geological  agents  are  able  to  per- 
form such  work." 

We  do  not  at  all  believe  in  the  molten  condi- 
tion of  the  earth,  nor  in  its  consequent  theory  of 
contraction  in  cooling,  one  of  the  effects  of  which 
is  claimed  to  be  the  elevation  of  the  mountains. 

The  surface  of  our  planet  exhibits  a  great 
variety  of  materials,  in  fact,  all  the  known  simple 
elements,  together  with  the  endless  variety  of 
combinations  that  constitute  the  body  of  the 
earth  as  far  down  as  man  has  been  able  to  inves- 
tigate. 


156         The  Earth  and  the  World 


So  far,  "The  deepest  hole  that  has  been  bored 
into  the  earth  on  record,"  as  stated  lately  in  a 
scientific  publication,  "  was  one  of  6,571  feet  be- 
low the  surface  of  the  soil,  made  at  Parnschwitz, 
in  upper  Silesia."  "The  previous  record  for 
depth,"  says  the  Scientific  American,  "was  the 
5,753  foot  hole  drilled  some  years  ago  near  Leip- 
sig.  The  later  hole  was  made  in  search  of  coal 
measures,  many  separate  seams  were  penetrated, 
some  of  considerable  thickness."  The  paper 
states,  at  some  length,  the  great  difficulty  experi- 
enced in  boring  down  to  the  first  level  mentioned, 
finally  leaving  the  heavy  steel  tools  used  below, 
lost  beyond  recovery. 

3J,     The  Definite  Character  of  the  Atomic  Ele- 
ments Forming  the  Surface  of  the  Earth  May  be 
Ascertained, — Whatever  may  have  been  the  defi- 
nite atomic  materials  deposited  in  the  early  stages 
of  the  formation  of  the  earth,  whether  few  or 
many,  it  is  evident  that  after  the  final  completion 
of  the  earth  up  to,  say,  six  to  ten  miles  below  its 
present  surface,  there  must  have  been  delivered 
upon  it  all  the  simple  elements  known  to  exist, 
and  they  were  delivered,  or  caused  to  be  deliv- 
ered, by  the  Creator  in  such  proportions  and  at 
such  places  as  finally  to  produce,  by  the  operation 
of  the  causes  set  to  work,  the  effects  and  results 
that  now  exist,  or  have  existed,  at  or  near  the 
surface  of  the  earth.    Geological  facts  prove  that 
the  various  strata  of  rocks  or  elements  on  the 
face  of  the  earth  were  laid  in  order  as  designed. 
Emerson  writes :    "For  the  world  was  built  in 


The  Aqueous  Age  157 

order,  and  the  stones  march  in  tune."    Yet  not- 
withstanding the  orderly  deposition  of  the  vari- 
ous strata  of  material,   there  have  since  been 
causes  at  work  of  immense  and  irresistible  pro- 
portions, that  have  broken  up  the  face  of  the 
earth;  and,  even  for  miles  down,  the  various 
strata  of  rock  or  materials  have  been  turned  up 
at  all  angles,  even  perpendicular,  and  folded  over 
The  causes  were  not  only  mechanical  action,  but 
also  chemical  and  electrical  action,  with  all  the 
varied  and  tremendous  results  that  those  forces 
imply  or  can  produce,  in  any  and  every  direction 
New  materials  and  combinations  of  materials  be- 
yond our  comprehension  have  been  irresistibly 
formed  by  the  operation  of  these  united  forces 
of  nature. 

54'     The  Element  Electricity  Considered,— ^t- 
fore  proceeding  further  in  relating  some  of  the 
possible  processes  in  the  earth's  formation    it 
may  be  well  to  call  attention  to  that  wonderful 
mysterious,  all-pervading,  and  all-powerful  ele- 
ment, Electricity;  that  subtle,  inscrutable  element 
of  which  It  may  be  said  that  no  one  knows 
wherein  its  power  lies,  nor  the  extent  of  its  in- 
fluence, nor  can  we  comprehend  the  rapidity  of 
its  movements  nor  realize  that  we  all  live  in  its 
presence,  and  are  indebted  probably  to  its  in- 
fluence for  our  very  life. 

During  all  the  centuries  previous  to  the  nine- 
teenth, electricity  in  its  various  manifestations 
has  been  the  dread  of  mankind;  but  in  this 
century,  particularly  in  the  latter  part  of  it,  our 


i 


158         The  Earth  and  the  World 

investigators  have  so  far  mastered  it  that  they 
have  made  it  to  be  their  ''servant  of  all  work." 

We  will  not  say  that  electricity  did  not  have 
some  work  to  do  in  the  formation  of  the  earth, 
from  its  very  foundation,  but  as  it  was  not  ap- 
parent, we  have  not  mentioned  it.  But,  during 
the  period  when  the  surface  of  the  earth  was  be- 
ing definitely  formed,  built  up,  and  supplied  with 
requisite  material,  the  period  we  are  now  con- 
sidering and  endeavoring  to  explain,  it  must  be 
apparent  to  the  geologist,  the  chemist,  and  all 
students  of  nature,  that  electricity  and  its  in- 
fluence must  have  pervaded  the  elements  in  the 
past  as  it  does  at  the  present. 

The  various  elements  of  the  earth  at  this  forma- 
tive period,  would,  by  their  movements,  condi- 
tions, forced  and  rapid  changes,  often  in  large 
masses,  causing  much  friction  and  consequent 
heat  and  other  effects,  develop  and  generate  an 
inconceivable  degree  of  electricity,  producing 
many  of  the  conditions  known  to  exist,  or  that 
have  existed. 

But  this  element,  electricity,  and  its  sister, 
magnetism,  like  all  other  elements  God  has  made, 
are  subject  to  law;  and,  like  water,  they  have 
special  and  definite  laws  controlling  them. 

The  Almighty  in  creating  man,  so  fearfully 
and  wonderfully  made,  placed  under  his  skin,  at 
a  safe  distance  from  the  surface,  the  arteries 
carrying  the  largest  portion  of  the  blood;  and 
then,  the  innumerable  veins,  decreasing  in  size  as 
they  neared   the  outer  surface,  all  filled   with 


The  Aqueous  Age  159 

the  precious  life-giving  fluid,  ever  flowing  on, 
whether  man  was  awake  or  asleep,  making  and 
preserving  him  a  living  creature  through  scores 
of  years.     In  the  same  manner  this  useful,  im- 
portant, and  wonderful  element,  electricity,  now 
coming  into  prominence  in  respect  to  its  value 
and  service  to  man,  is,  like  light  and  heat,  gen- 
erated in  the  sun,  and  flows  from  that  body  to 
the  earth ;  and  so  pervades  the  atmosphere  and 
the  earth  that  it  cannot  be  exhausted,  any  more 
than  we  can  exhaust  the  air;  yet  its  peculiar  na- 
ture is  such  that  conduits  are  required  for  its  serv- 
ice, as  streams  and  rivers  are  needed  to  distribute 
the  rains  that  fall  upon  the  earth. 

It  is  not  reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  Creator, 
who  is  a  God  of  law  and  order,  would  leave  this 
important  and  all-powerful  element  in  a  disor- 
ganized condition,  not  subject  to  orderiy  control. 
Although  the  earth  is  a  good  conductor,  giving 
and  taking  these  elements  from  the  skies,  yet  we 
believe  there  may  be  a  few  miles  below  the  sur- 
face, less  than  ten,  a  complete  and  established 
system  of  electric  conduits  and  conductors,  large 
and  small,  running  from  pole  to  pole,  through 
which  electric  currents  are  continually  passing, 
being  replenished  from  that  vast  electric  body,' 
the  sun.    Some  reasons  in  support  of  this  opinion 
we  will  state  later. 

55.  Electricity s  Brother  Magnetism.^ln  re- 
gard to  magnetism,  what  appears  to  be  a  fact 
and  law  in  respect  to  that  element,  we  quote 
from  a  work  on  electricity.     **  Let  it  be  under- 


i6o         The  Earth  and  the  World 


stood  that  a  wire  or  any  conductor  having  a  cur- 
rent of  electricity  passing  through  it,  has  lines  of 
magnetic  force,  passing  one  way  around  it;  and 
the  number  is  in  direct  ratio  to  the  quantity  of 
the  current  passing  through  the  wire." 

This  being  an  ascertained  fact,  is  it  not  prob- 
able that  the  magnetic  currents  passing  around 
the  earth,  at  right  angles  to  the  electric  current 
that  passes  continually  from  the  North  to  the 
South  Pole,  is  the  strong  and  steady  force  that 
turns  the  earth  on  its  axis,  giving  to  it  its  diurnal 
motion  ? 

The  more  this  element  of  electricity  is  investi- 
gated, together  with  work  it  has  done,  and  is  do- 
ing, the  more  evident  is  it  that  this  subtle  and 
all-pervading  element  is  the  powerful  influence 
that  animates,  energizes,  and  quickens  all  nature, 
giving  to  the  world  life,  without  which,  it  would 
be  as  dead  as  a  man  whose  blood  had  ceased  to 
circulate  through  his  veins  and  arteries. 

In  the  imponderable  elements  of  electricity  and 
magnetism,  the  inscrutable  wisdom,  energy  and 
power  of  the  Almighty  are  evidently  manifested. 
Electricity,  instantaneous  in  its  movements,  pass- 
ing through  space  without  observation,  and  pos- 
sessing irresistible  power,  may  be  classed  as  an 
element  of  *' divine  energy,"  operating  in  our 
solar  system  and  probably  in  the  universe. 

5^.  The  Element  IVater  ;  When  and  How  In- 
troduced on  the  Earth,  and  some  of  its  Effects 
and  Results.— It  may  have  been  noticed,  perhaps, 
that,  so  far,  in  stating  the  various  elements  and 


The  Aqueous  Age 


i6i 


processes  used  in  the  formation  of  the  earth,  we 
have  not  mentioned  water,  that  important  and 
valuable  element  which  covers  nearly  three- 
fourths  of  the  globe.  Some  of  the  leading  at- 
tributes of  water  we  have  already  described 
when  writing  about  that  element. 

We  have  purposely  refrained  from  naming  that 
element  in  the  building-up  process  of  the  earth, 
for  we  do  not  believe,  as  some  hold  and  state  in 
their  world-building  plans,  that  both  fire  and 
water  were  existing,  as  prevailing  and  active  ele- 
ments, from  the  very  beginning  of  the  world. 

In  considering  the  matter,  we  have  not  been 
able  to  perceive  any  reason   why  the  Creator 
should  introduce '  water  on    the    earth   until  it 
should  be  required  to  do  its  own  special  and  im- 
portant work.    The  peculiar  nature  and  attributes 
of  water,  being  such  as  they  are,  we  can  per- 
ceive many  reasons  why  the  introduction  of  that 
wonderful  element,  among  the  other  elements 
entering  into  the  formation  of  the  earth  before 
the  time  appointed,  would  have  interfered  with, 
and  prevented,  the  proper  and  wise  development 
of  the  earth  as  we  know  it  has  been  developed. 
The  Creator  had  definite  ends  to  accomplish,  and 
in  His  wisdom,  He  would  use  the  right  means 
for  carrying  them  into  effect. 

As  the  experienced  architect  would  not  plaster 
nor  attempt  to  finish  the  interior  walls  of  the 
mansion  he  was  building  until  it  was  properly 
covered  with  a  roof  to  protect  his  work  from  the 
destructive  elements,  so  the  great  Architect  would 


1  '  t 


■ 

r,i.i 

i 


•  ' 


162         The  Earth  and  the  World 

not  flood  the  earth  with  water  before  He  had 
made  preparation  for  it,  and  would  then  use  it  to 
perfect  and  accomplish  His  wise  designs. 

As  we  have  already  stated,  the  earth  had  ar- 
rived at  that  period  in  its  formation  when  the 
various  simple  elements  now  existing  on  its  sur- 
face were  mainly  deposited  in  the  manner  we 
have  indicated,  and  at  such  places  as  would  best 
serve  the  plans  of  the  Creator. 

However  solid  and  compact  the  earlier  deposi- 
tions of  materials  may  have  been,  now  it  is  prob- 
able that  they  were  made  more  porous,  sponge- 
like and  pervious  than  before,  so  that  water 
would  enter,  percolate,  and  pass  through  it, 
wholly  dissolving  some  elemelhts,  holding  them 
in  solution,  or  precipitating  them  under  certain 
chemical  conditions,  and  with  very  many  of  the 
simple  elements  forming  a  chemical  combination, 
and  so  altering  their  nature,  as  practically  to 
make  a  new  material. 

Ft  is  probable  that  the  beds  of  the  oceans  and 
seas  were  once  filled,  or  partly  so,  with  material 
that  was  afterward  dissolved  by  that  universal 
dissolvent  water,  and  were  either  washed  away, 
or  entered  into  combination  with  hundreds  of 
other  elements,  or  rather  combinations  of  simple 
elements. 

When  this  period  had  arrived  for  water  to  be 
formed  and  precipitated  on  the  earth,  it  is  reason- 
able to  suppose  that  the  earth's  surface,  at  least, 
was  supplied  with  the  leading  gases  now  largely 
prevailing,    such  as  chlorine,   carbon,   nitrogen 


The  Aqueous  Age 


163 


and  oxygen,  in  a  free  state,  and  also  in  combina- 
tion with  other  elements.  Especially  was  the 
earth  well  oxygenated,  or,  in  other  words,  that 
important  gas  prevailed  extensively. 

Then  the  Creator  caused  one  of  His  comets  to 
deliver  to  the  earth  its  train  of  hydrogen  gas; 
perhaps  just  such  a  comet  as  the  one  known  as 
"  Donati's,"  which  appeared  in  1858  and  attracted 
marked  attention  the  world  over,  it  being  the 
grandest  visitor  the  world  had  had  in  this  the 
nineteenth  century.  That  comet,  in  the  summer 
of  1858,  stretched  across  the  heavens,  its  train  be- 
ing nearly  100,000,000  miles  long,  and  several 
millions  wide,  composed  almost  wholly  of  hy- 
drogen gas,  as  experts  declared  it  to  be,  and  as  it 
now  believed  to  be  true.  There  was  in  the  train 
of  that  comet,  doubtless,  a  sufficient  quantity  of 
hydrogen  gas,  when  combined  with  the  oxygen 
already  on  the  earth,  to  make  the  oceans  of  water 
that  cover  the  earth. 

With  some  such  a  deliverance  of  hydrogen  on 
the  oxygenated  earth,  our  world  was  blessed 
with  water,  that  divine  element  without  which 
there  could  be  no  life,  organic  or  inorganic.  Its 
value  cannot  be  estimated.  Its  singular  adapta- 
tion to  all  known  wants  cannot  be  compre- 
hended. Among  the  elements,  its  equal  is  not  to 
be  found  on  the  earth,  and  perhaps,  not  in  the 
universe.  By  the  simple  union  of  hydrogen  and 
oxygen  water  is  formed,  and  now  it  is  precipi- 
tated everywhere,  all  over  the  face  of  the  globe, 
percolating  through  this  and  that  element,  find- 


i64         The  Earth  and  the  World 

ing  and  pushing  its  way  everywhere  with  avidity 
into  this  and  that  material. 

As  in  seasons  of  great  drought  the  thirsty  earth 
absorbs  a  large  quantity  of  water  before  it  is  sat- 
isfied, so  especially  in  its  first  deposition  a  large 
quantity  of  the  fluid  would  be  speedily  appro- 
priated.    With  what  rapidity  the  continued  com- 
binations of  the  gases,   hydrogen  and  oxygen 
were  combined  with  each  other,  is  mere  conjec- 
ture, and  so  also,  the  particular  process  by  which 
it  was  accomplished.    But  that  there  was  a  com- 
bination  of  these  two  gases,   no  chemist  will 
deny.     That  it  was  instantaneous  in  large  bodies, 
is  not  probable,  for  the  Almighty  in  His  creative 
works,  does  not  manifest  haste.    The  union  of 
the  gases  and  the  formation  of  water  doubtless 
proceeded  as  fast  as  the  work  it  was  required  to 
do  was  being  accomplished,  and  no  faster.    This 
appears  to  be  the  way  of  the  Almighty  in  the 
affairs  of  the  world. 

When  the  great  work  which  water  has  accom- 
plished in  thousands  of  ways,  as  manifested  by 
its  effects  on  the  earth,  is  considered,  the  grand 
results  are  beyond  comprehension. 

We  do  not  say  here  that  all  the  water  now  on 
the  earth  was  formed  at  one  period  of  time,  for 
we  believe  that  in  that  work  there  were  at  least 
several  distinct  periods,  such  as  the  Creator  in 
this  building-up  process  of  the  world  knew  to  be 
best. 

When  water  made  its  first  advent  and  was 
precipitated  on  the  earth,  its  material  then  being 


The  Aqueous  Age 


165 


I 


more  or  less  porous,  and  in  proper  condition  to 
receive  the  new  element,  it  must  be  evident  from 
our  knowledge  of  the  simple  material  elements 
of  the  earth,  that  there  must  have  been  not  only 
a  mutual  attraction  between  the  water  and  other 
materials,  but  in  many  cases,  an  uncontrollable 
attraction,  violent  in  effect,  and  resulting  in  some 
new  material  unlike  either  of  the  others. 

The  advent  of  water  on  the  dry  material  earth 
made  many  changes,  vast  in  their  nature,  and  so 
great  in  their  number  and  variety,  that  no  one 
now  can  realize  what  was  accomplished. 

Every  atom  of  material  that  came  in  contact 
with  water,  either  in  the  condition  of  moisture, 
steam,  or  drops  of  the  liquid,  would,  in  absorb- 
ing the  same,  or  by  chemical  union  with  it,  cause 
an  expansion  in  the  material,  and  would  increase 
its  bulk  to  such  a  degree  that  the  aggregation  of 
the  infinite  number  of  atoms  would,  as  they 
slowly  absorbed  the  fluid,  cause  an  irresistible 
pressure  to  be  exerted  in  every  direction.  But 
the  power  of  this  pressure  would  manifest  itself 
most  clearly  in  the  direction  of  the  least  resist- 
ance; and  that,  in  this  instance,  would  be  found 
on  the  upper  or  outer  side  of  the  earth.  Irregular 
elevations  and  ranges  of  elevations,  large  and 
small,  would  thus  be  made  and  seen  over  the 
face  of  the  globe. 

To  repeat:  The  first  deposition  of  water  being 
at  the  same  time  over  the  earth,  and  the  element 
being  received  by  the  atomic  material  in  the  form 
of   moisture,   steam,   drops,   or   running   fluid. 


1 66         The  Earth  and  the  World 

would  be  absorbed  by  the  same,  and  every  atom 
increasing  its  dimensions,  would  potently  assert 
its  right  to  more  room.  The  consequent  result 
would  be  the  expansion  of  all  the  material  ele- 
ments, which,  by  their  irresistible  force  and 
power,  would  raise  and  break  up  the  earth's 
strata  as  easily  as  do  the  small  pieces  of  wood 
which,  driven  into  the  cracks  or  holes  of  the 
rocks,  by  their  expansive  power,  when  moistened, 
split  the  hard  rock. 

^7,  How  Were  the  Mountains  Raised?— On 
the  same  principle,  and  practically  in  the  same 
manner,  by  the  expansion  of  the  earth's  mate- 
rials as  they  absorbed  the  water,  were  the  ridges 
and  elevations  of  the  earth  made,  and  the 
mountains  formed.  It  was  doubtless  at  this  par- 
ticular period  in  the  history  of  the  world,  that  the 
lofty  mountains  were  imperceptibly  raised  and 
established  for  all  time. 

In  this  great  upheaval,  the  face  of  the  earth 
would  be  more  or  less  broken  up  in  an  irregular 
manner,  in  small  elevations  or  hillocks,  and  in 
mountain  ranges  more  or  less  extensive,  with 
millions  of  indentations,  connected  and  discon- 
nected, but  so  arranged  as  not  to  give  the  water 
free  course  to  run  off  in  streams  and  rivers,  as 
now  known  on  the  earth. 

But  sometimes,  and  in  some  places,  there  would 
be  exceptions  to  this  rule  of  general  expansion 
of  the  earth's  material.  That  is,  it  would  be 
limited  to  sections,  if  such  there  were,  where  the 
atomic  material  had  no  affinity  for  water.     Also, 


The  Aqueous  Age 


167 


water  would,  in  some  sections  of  the  earth,  come 
in  contact  with  some  well-known  elements  that 
would  be  readily  dissolved,  especially  if  in  a 
heated  condition  and  held  in  solution,  and  carried 
or  washed  away,  as  one  would  perceive  it  might 
be.  Again  it  might  come  in  contact  with  some 
other  chemical  agent  that  would  cause  it,  the 
water,  to  precipitate  its  solution  of  salts  in  an  en- 
tirely different  location.  This  is  one  way  in 
which  some  elements,  held  in  solution  by  water, 
might  be  moved  from  one  place  to  another,  and 
the  earth  would,  in  this  way,  receive  fertilizing 
salts  and  various  other  solutions  that  would,  in 
the  end,  tend  to  enrich  and  fertilize  the  land,  and 
the  better  prepare  it  for  the  carboniferous  age, 
and  the  other  important  periods  that  followed. 

5^.  Illustration  of  the  Fact.Somt  years  ago, 
in  the  month  of  March,  we  visited  **The  Glades" 
in  Hall  County,  Northern  Georgia,  below  the 
Blue  Ridge  Mountains.  The  elevation  of  "The 
Glades"  being  about  1,500  feet,  its  temperature 
at  certain  seasons  often  falls  rapidly  in  the  latter 
part  of  the  day,  and  at  night  becomes  extremely 
cold.  At  the  time  mentioned,  it  had  been  rain- 
ing, more  or  less,  for  two  days.  The  soil  was 
well  saturated  with  water,  and  the  night  in  ques- 
tion was  cold.  In  the  morning  as  we  walked 
out,  a  grand  sight  met  our  view.  The  sun  was 
shining  brightly  in  the  valley  and  on  the  hills, 
which  were  covered  with  millions  of  tiny  icicles, 
from  two  to  five  inches  high,  glistening  in  the 
rays  of  the  sun  like  so  many  jewels. 


i68         The  Earth  and  the  World 

The  reason  of  this  phenomenon,  as  is  known, 
was,  the  ground  being  saturated  with  water,  the 
sudden  cold  atmosphere  caused  the  ground,  in- 
cluding the  water,  to  freeze;  and,  in  freezing,  it 
expanded  according  to  its  nature,  and  the  water, 
in  expanding,  had  to  find  room  for  itself.  It 
could  not  force  itself  downward,  for  the  soil  al- 
ready had  all  it  could  hold;  therefore,  taking  the 
course  of  least  resistance,  it  was  forced  upward, 
and  just  as  fast  as  the  water  was  congealed,  the 
tiny  icicles  would  form  and  grow  upward.  These 
are  indisputable  facts  relating  to  this  singular 
phenomenon  of  nature,  which  is  well  known  in 
many  other  sections  also. 

The  point  to  which  we  call  particular  attention 
here  is,  that  it  was  the  swelling  or  expansion  of 
the  earth's  materials  that  drove  those  materials 
upward;  and  that,  so  far,  no  contraction  of 
earth's  materials  can  be  shown. 

Now  we  will  take  note  of  the  next  process  of 
nature  that  followed :— Before  eleven  a.  m.  the 
warm  rays  of  the  sun  had  caused  all  the  icicles  to 
disappear,  and  a  breeze  springing  up,  the  ground 
began  to  dry  rapidly,  and  by  three  p.  m.  there 
was  little  or  no  sign  of  moisture,  but  instead,  the 
earth  showed  numerous  little  cracks  where  the 
drying  process  had  been  goirtg  on.     The  high 
drying  winds  continued  through  the  next  day, 
and  for  several  days,  which  is  not  uncommon  in 
that  section;  the  effect  of  which  was  to  make  all 
the  little  cracks  in  the  ground  larger,  also  to  in- 
crease their  number;  and  as  one  walked  along 


ill 


The  Aqueous  Age  169 

the  roads,  especially  where  the  clayey  soil  pre- 
vailed, cracks  that  had  become  what  might  be 
called  *' fissures,"  now  showed  themselves.  In 
critically  examining  the  grass,  it  would  be  noticed 
that  the  ground  had  apparently  settled  away 
from  the  roots,  from  one-quarter  to  one-half  an 
inch.  These  items  named  are  well  known  to  ob- 
servers of  the  open  country.  It  is  a  common  ob- 
servation, that  dried  up  ponds  are  not  only  full  of 
fissures,  but  that  the  bottom  has  also  settled 
down.  The  longer  the  drought,  the  wider  and 
the  more  numerous  are  the  fissures. 

Professor  Dana  in  his  Geology  holds  to  the 
theory  that  "the  continents  were  made  from  the 
beginning."  He  also  states  that  ''the  average 
elevation  of  land  above  water  level  is  1,000  feet, 
and  the  average  depth  of  the  ocean  is  13,000  feet,'' 
and  expresses  the  opinion  that  *'no  contraction 
of  the  earth  could  have  produced  such  extraordi- 
nary results." 

When  the  formation  of  water  and  its  deposi- 
tion on  the  earth  was  made,  the  surface  of  the 
earth  being  in  regular  form,  except  such  portions 
as  may  have  been  designed  by  the  Creator  as 
basins  of  oceans  and  seas,  the  water  when  de- 
posited covered  the  whole  face  of  the  globe. 
Then,  as  the  earth  absorbed  its  portion  of  the 
element,  its  whole  surface  was  gradually  raised, 
but  not  equally  so,  as  the  mountain  ranges  prove! 
The  quantity  of  water  that  was  absorbed  and 
converted  in  this  great  work,  one  way  and  an- 
other, and  now  counted  as  the  solid  earth,  was 


170         The  Earth  atid  the  World 

vast,  perhaps  equalling  one-fourth,  if  not  one- 
third  of  the  whole  quantity  of  water  deposited. 

The  upheaval  of  the  earth's  surface  which  we 
have  attempted  to  describe,  is  not  the  result  of 
fire,  or  a  molten  condition  of  the  earth,  and  con- 
sequent shrinking  in  cooling,  as  many  scientists 
and  geologists  claim;  but  we  hold  that  the  legit- 
imate result  of  the  swelling  power  of  water  when 
appropriated  by  the  atomic  elements  of  the  ma- 
terial earth. 

The  theory  which  we  advance  and  seek  to 
maintain  is  that  the  elevations  of  the  earth's  sur- 
face are  due  to  the  expansion  of  its  material  ele- 
ments by  their  absorption  of  water,  and  there- 
fore, it  is  not  due  to  any  contraction  of  the 
earth's  materials,  as  many  geologists  and  scien- 
tists affirm. 

Let  the  scientists  and  doubters  test  the  truth  of 
this  theory  by  practical  experiments,  on  a  large 
or  small  scale,  as  best  they  can,  and  see  if  they 
can  demonstrate  their  own  theories  to  be  true. 

We  know  they  can  take  an  inflated  rubber 
bag,  tie  a  band  about  its  centre,  and  thus  cause 
the  extremities  to  bulge  out,  but  they  cannot  do 
anything  of  this  sort  with  our  earth,  for  it  is 
wholly  a  disintegrated  mass  of  material  without 
binding  force,  which,  when  it  contracts  by  cool- 
ing from  a  high  degree  of  heat,  or  from  drying 
up  from  any  excess  of  moisture  settles  down  in 
every  direction  and  without  power  to  throw  or 
force  up  anything,  leaving  also  many  consequent 
fissures,  and  leaving  the  rocks  in  a  laminated  con- 


The  Aqueous  Age 


171 


dition,  or  in  cubes,  according  as  the  law  of  their 
nature. 

59.  Changes  and  Results  Effected  on  the  Earth 
When  Water  was  First  Introduced. — We  have 
briefly  and  imperfectly  stated  some  of  the  results 
of  water  in  its  first  union  and  combination  with 
the  dry  material  earth.  We  will  endeavor  now 
to  mention  a  few  of  the  effects  and  results  of  its 
chemical  union  with  the  many  and  varied  simple 
elements  found  on  the  earth.  This  will  be  done 
briefly,  for  it  would  take  volumes  to  go  into  de- 
tail. 

None  but  an  expert  or  practical  chemist  can 
have  any  idea  of  the  vast  number  of  changes 
that  must  have  taken  place  when  water  first 
came  into  contact  with  the  new  elementary  ma- 
terials of  the  earth. 

There  were  changes  varied  in  their  nature  and 
character,  as  the  material  differed,  and  also  in 
their  effects  and  permanent  results.  There  were 
changes  divergent  in  their  nature  and  radical  in 
their  results,  changes  slowly  or  quickly  made, 
active,  violent  or  explosive;  all  tending  to  ad- 
vance rapidly  the  natural  expansive  and  uplifting 
power  of  the  elements  in  their  combinations  with 
the  new  element  water. 

In  the  changes  effected  by  the  chemical  action 
of  water,  there  were  formed  and  liberated  many 
of  the  leading  and  important  gases,  which  were 
then  set  in  active  operation,  doing  the  work  as- 
signed to  them  according  to  their  nature. 

There    were    changes    effected    making    that 


m         The  Earth  and  the  World 

which  was  sweet,  bitter,  salutary,  deleterious 
and  destructive,  soft,  hard  and  vice  versa;  the 
water  at  one  time  holding  one  material  in  solu- 
tion, then  dropping  it  and  taking  up  another  it 
liked  better.  Water  unites  discordant  materials 
firmly  together,  as  orthoclase,  feldspar,  mica  and 
quartz,  in  granite  and  gneiss,  and  in  many  other 
such  instances. 

To  mention  particularly  the  changes  which 
water  has  effected  and  the  work  it  has  done,  in 
and  on  this  earth,  is  more  than  man  is  able  to 
accomplish  or  comprehend.  Scientific  publica- 
tions state  '*that  heat  and  water  combined  have 
great  power  in  changing  the  form  and  appear- 
ance of  rocks; "  also  that  "  these  effects  on  other 
elements  are  great." 

6b.  The  ''Aqueous  Age."  Some  of  its  Im- 
portant Results  Considered,— During  this  long 
aqueous  age,  the  primitive  character  of  the  rocks 
must  have  been  changed,  and  perhaps  radically 
so;  and  they  probably  obtained  during  this  period 
their  present  varied  character  and  condition. 
Also  during  this  age,  and  the  succeeding  one,  the 
present  character  and  condition  of  minerals  were 
formed  and  developed,  including  the  various 
classes  of  pyrites  in  which  sulphur  and  other 
elements  are  stored,  and  manganese,  containing 
oxygen,  and  very  many  other  such  items,  all 
being  the  resultant  effects  of  the  combination 
of  different  materials  with  water  under  great 
heat  and  pressure  and  other  varying  circum- 
stances. 


The  Aqueous  Age 


173 


In  view  of  the  many  elements  engaged,  includ- 
ing the  generation  and  disengagement  of  the 
gases,  explosive  and  otherwise,  their  consump- 
tion must  have  produced  a  burning  heat,  cover- 
ing, at  times,  the  greater  part  of  the  earth's  sur- 
face. Also,  in  view  of  the  well-known  radical 
changes  that  must  have  been  made  in  the  ele- 
ments, evidence  of  which  the  earth  affords  in  the 
many  complex  rocks,  both  igneous  and  aqueous, 
in  minerals  fused,  and  other  combinations  of  ma- 
terials that  must  have  been  effected  under  a  high 
degree  of  heat  and  great  pressure,  and  of  the  in- 
tense heat  generated  by  electrical  currents,  it  is 
evident  that  during  this  aqueous  age  of  the  earth, 
there  must  have  been  a  degree  of  heat  generated 
equal  to  any  the  earth  has  ever  received.  But 
while  the  degree  of  heat  was  sufficient  to  fully 
account  for  all  the  evidence  of  heat  the  earth  can 
exhibit  in  past  ages,  it  was  not  sufficient  to  con- 
sume the  elements  nor  destroy  nor  impair  their 
intrinsic  value. 

Considering  the  introduction  of  water  on  the 
earth,  we  hold  the  opinion  that  the  resultant  ef- 
fect of  that  introduction  of  the  element  was  fully 
sufficient  to  create  and  produce  an  intense  degree 
of  heat,  mechanical,  chemical  and  electrical,  long 
continued  and  equal  in  intensity  to  any  volcanic 
fire;  and  also  that  the  heat  herein  named,  rea- 
sonably accounts  for  all  the  evidence  of  fire 
which  the  earth  exhibits  during  past  ages,  and 
therefore  it  is  not  necessary  to  adopt  the  theory, 
held  by  many  scientists  of  this  day,  that  this 


174         The  Earth  and  the  World 

world  of  ours  was  once  a  burning  mass  or  ball 
of  fire,  and  that,  after  long  ages,  the  outer  crust 
has  so  cooled  down  that  it  has  become  a  suitable 
dwelling-place  for  man. 

This  theory  we  consider  to  be  untenable  and 
absurd;  and  the  very  idea  of  it  greatly  militates 
against  the  wisdom  of  the  Creator.  The  carbon- 
iferous state  of  the  earth,  the  condition  of  the 
rocks,  and  all  of  the  earth's  material,  as  far  as 
man  has  been  able  to  penetrate  beneath  its  sur- 
face, emphatically  deny  any  such  supposed  ig- 
neous condition  of  the  earth. 

The  work  of  creating  the  world,  it  is  not 
necessary  to  say,  was  very  great.  It  had  to  pass 
through  many  operations,  each  of  which  was 
doubtless  long  continued.  The  Creator,  though 
quick  as  thought  in  many  of  His  acts,  does  not 
haste,  nor  even  appear  to  regard  the  lapse  of 
time,  in  the  building  of  a  world.  He  has  no 
interest  to  pay  on  capital. 

6/.  The  Natural  Appearance  of  the  Earth  at 
the  Close  of  This  Period.-— It  may  be  well,  here 
to  make  a  mental  survey  of  the  earth,  and  to 
notice  and  consider  its  condition  after  the  element 
water  had  about  completed  its  work  of  decom- 
position, disintegration  and  combination  with 
other  elements.  To  the  beholder,  the  face  of 
the  earth  in  places  would  appear  very  much 
broken  up,  partly  like  a  field  ploughed  and 
roughly  exposed,  with  many  little  hills,  and 
others  larger,  also  numerous  mountain-tops 
on  every  side,   as  when  one,  standing  on  the 


The  Aqueous  Age 


175 


> 


i 


summit  of  Mount  Washington  and  looking  out 
in  every  direction,  beholds  hundreds  of  mountain- 
tops. 

Besides  the  open  seas,  the  beholder  would  dis- 
cover numerous  ponds  of  water  and  small  lakes, 
appearing,  perhaps,  not  unlike  each  other,  as  is 
seen  in  a  few  counties  in  the  State  of  Indiana,  in 
which  it  is  stated,  that  there  are  a  thousand  or 
more  ponds  and  small  lakes. 

If  the  investigator  will  take  his  glass  and 
examine  critically  the  material  earth  as  it  lies 
before  him,  he  will  notice  that  the  strata  of  the 
earth  are  laminated  and  broken  up  in  all  sorts  and 
sizes  of  pieces  and  at  all  angles,  irregular  lots 
lying  in  heaps,  so  that  one  could  not  well  walk 
over  them.  He  will  not  notice,  or  see,  any  large 
round  stones,  rocks  or  boulders,  on  the  earth. 
Nor  will  he  see  any  of  the  smaller  sized  round 
stones  used  for  paving  so  very  common  all  over 
the  earth.  He  will  not  be  able  to  discover  any 
of  the  beds  of  gravel,  large  or  small,  now  found 
in  all  parts  of  the  earth.  Neither  will  he  come 
across  the  tens  of  thousands  of  acres  of  sand, 
washed  and  unwashed;  nor  any  deep  beds  of 
quicksand,  every  grain  of  which  has  not  only 
been  polished,  but  has  been  a  polisher  in  the  vast 
mechanical  processes  of  the  Almighty.  The  in- 
vestigator will  not  notice  any  of  these  things,  for 
as  yet,  no  such  work  had  been  done  on  the  earth 
as  would  produce  them.  Neither  will  he  notice 
any  such  appearance  of  dirt,  loam  and  soil,  as  the 
fields  of  our  earth  now  exhibit,  for  as  yet  these 


176         The  Earth  and  the  World 


elements  had  not  been  reduced,  mixed  nor  pre- 
pared for  use. 

As  before  stated,  the  face  of  the  earth,  at  the 
close  of  the  Aqueous  Age,  was  in  an  uneven 
condition ;  its  regular  strata  were  broken  up,  and 
everywhere  were  scattered  hillocks,  hills,  moun- 
tains, uneven  indentations,  pools  and  bodies  of 
water. 

To  the  eye  of  mortal  man,  this  would  be  a  dis- 
turbed, unsatisfactory,  and  dreary  state  of  affairs. 
What  shall  or  can  be  done  to  give  the  earth  a 
suitable  appearance,  and  make  it  a  fit  habitation 
for  man,  as  it  is  now  known  to  be?  Glaciers 
could  not  do  the  work  required,  even  if  they  had, 
at  this  period,  been  caused  to  exist. 


xn 


THE  MODIFYING  INFLUENCES  OF  THE  MOON 

62.  The  Probable  Course  of  Procedure 
Adopted  by  the  Creator  in  Preparing  the  Earth 
for  lis  Next  Change.-— "What  will  the  Creator 
now  do  ?  What  procedure  will  He  now  adopt 
to  prepare  the  earth  and  adapt  it  for  the  purpose 
and  service  He  designed  for  it  from  the  begin- 
ning? 

From  what  we  have  been  able  to  learn  has 
been  done,  and  how  it  was  accomplished,  which 
work  is  now  open  to  the  eyes  of  all  observers, 
we  believe  the  Almighty  used  our  satellite,  the 
moon,  to  do  the  great  and  important  work  of 
modifying,  grinding  and  levelling  the  face  of  our 
planet,  the  earth,  this  great  work  commencing  at 
or  about  this  period  of  its  history. 

The  moon  is  old,  but  how  old,  no  man  knows, 
but  it  is  not  probable  that  she  is  as  old  as  our 
earth.  Beyond  all  doubt  she  was  created  to  be 
of  service  in  many  particulars  to  our  planets,  to 
which  she  is  an  appendage.  She  is  the  earth's 
hand-maiden.  Her  service  in  the  past,  in  many 
directions,  is  beyond  our  estimation.  We  could 
not  even  now  get  along  without  our  moon.  The 
earth  is  dependent  on  her. 
The  moon,  by  its  specific  gravity,  its  nearness 

'77 


178         The  Earth  and  the  World 

to  the  earth,  and  therefore,  its  consequent  great 
power  of  attraction,  ever  attracting  the  material 
earth,  which  power  is  made  apparent  to  us  by 
her  influence  on  the  movable  materials,  especially 
on  the  waters  of  the  ocean  in  the  daily  rising  and 
falling  of  the  tides.     Her  power  to  move  the 
waters  and  raise  the  ocean-tides  is  extraordinary, 
and,  to   many  observers,   unaccountable.    The 
reason  why  the  tides  rose  and  fell  every  day,  was 
unknown  to  the  ancients.    They  called  it  ''the 
grave  of  curiosity."    The  practical  scientist  will, 
on  investigation,  decide  that  the  only  practical 
way  known  to  us  of  modifying  the  face  of  the 
earth,  moving  large  bodies  of  its  material  from 
one  place  to  another,  smoothing  down  the  rough 
places,  grinding  hard  materials  by  attrition  and 
erosion,  separating  the  elements  and  levelling  the 
surface  of  the  earth,  was  by  the  adequate  use  of 
water,  the  most  efficient  element  for  that  pur- 
pose found  on  the  globe;  and  the  moon  alone 
possessed  the  power  requisite  for  this  work. 

At  times  the  water  would  be  moving  with 
great  velocity,  especially  in  places  more  or  less 
confined.  At  other  times  it  moved  quietly  along, 
like  the  gentle  river,  giving  the  materials  it  car- 
ried opportunity  to  settle  and  be  deposited,  as 
when  forming  a  plain,  or  large,  level  surface. 
So  also  the  water,  by  its  action,  its  power,  and 
its  solvent  qualities,  has,  in  many  cases,  deepened 
its  own  bed,  and  sometimes  made  it  altogether. 

63.     The   Power   of  Water   in    Motwn.'-As 
stated,  water  in  motion  has  great  power  over  other 


Modifying  Influences  of  the  Moon  179 

material  elements  of  the  earth.  On  this  point, 
quoting  from  a  geological  publication:— -''The 
transportating  power  of  water  is  amazing:  it  is 
increased  by  the  fact  that  the  substance  immersed 
in  water  loses  in  weight,  so  that  if  the  specific 
gravity  of  a  substance  is  less  than  that  of  water, 
it  will  be  floated.  The  specific  gravity  of  rocks 
is  about  two  and  a  half,  so  they  lose  nearly  one 
half  their  weight  in  water. 

"The  transportating  power  varies  directly  as 
the  sixth  part  of  the  velocity.  This  explains  the 
destructive  effects  of  floods.  A  stream  flowing 
twenty  miles  an  hour,  will  carry  one  million 
times  as  much  as  a  stream  flowing  two  miles  an 
hour.  A  slight  check  in  velocity  will  cause  a 
stream  to  throw  down  a  large  part  of  the  ma- 
terial carried  by  it." 

64.  The  Power  of  the  Moon  Employed  to 
Modify  the  Face  of  the  Earth.— On  the  basis  of 
the  facts  mentioned,  and  other  evidence,  we  hold 
that  the  Creator,  in  forming,  modifying  and 
changing  the  face  of  the  earth  in  preparation  for 
other  developments,  used  the  element  water  for 
that  purpose,  and  that  water  in  motion.  Also, 
to  give  that  water  adequate  motion  and  power, 
especially  the  oceans  of  it  then  on  this  earth.  He 
appointed  our  satellite,  the  moon,  to  do  the  work; 
which  by  its  specific  gravity,  under  the  known 
law  of  gravitation,  it  had  the  power  to  do. 

But  in  order  that  the  moon  should  be  able  to 
move  the  large  bodies  of  water  effectively,  and 
drag  them  around  the  earth  with  her,  it  was 


i8o         The  Earth  and  the  World 

necessary  that  her  orbit  should  be  much  nearer 
to  the  earth,  or  smaller  than  it  now  is;  probably 
not  over  150,000  miles,  instead  of  240,000,  as  at 
present 

Of  course  some  will  object  to  the  very  idea 
that  the  orbit  of  the  moon  was  ever  changed, 
but  if  not,  why  not  ?  If  the  Creator,  in  His  wis- 
dom, saw  best  to  do  it,  and  could  accomplish  His 
desired  end  by  doing  it,  what  law  was  there 
against  it  ?  The  moon  was  evidently  created  to 
do  service  for  the  earth  during  all  its  history,  and 
just  such  service  as  the  earth  at  any  special  time 
required.  There  was  a  time,  we  believe,  before 
the  Deluge,  when  the  orbit  of  the  moon  was 
much  larger  than  it  is  now.  If  there  was  a 
reason  or  cause  for  change  then,  why  not  at  this 
particular  period. 

There  is  no  moral  question  involved  in  the 
matter.    God  has  more  than  one  way  to  accom- 
plish a  purpose.    St.  Paul  writes:— '*  There  are 
diversities  in  operation,  diversities  in  ministra- 
tions, diversities  in  workings,  but  it  is  the  same 
God  who  maketh  all  things  in  all."    It  is,  and 
was,  one  of  those  physical  events  that  are  ever 
taking  place  in  God's  universal  domain.     As  the 
smith  puts  the  iron  in  and  out  of  the  fire,  and  into 
the  water,  and  uses  his  heavy  hammers  to  bend 
and  shape  the  heated  metal  as  required,  so  the 
Almighty  used  the  moon,  which,  by  its  specific 
gravity  and  nearness  to  the  earth,  possessed  a 
tremendous  power  in  attracting  the  elements  of 
the  earth ;  and  this  power  was  especially  made 


Modifying  Influences  of  the  Moon  181 

manifest  on  the  water,  moving  that  element  as 
the  earth  turned  on  its  axis,  or  as  she  moved 
around  the  world. 

There  are  indisputable  evidences  that  there  was 
an  age,  long  continued,  when  the  mighty  waters 
of  the  deep  rolled  over  and  washed  the  earth's 
surface  continuously,  moving  large  quantities  of 
earthy  material,  forming  hills,  valleys  and  plains, 
all  above  sea-level.  The  waters  dashed  against 
the  sides  and  even  over  the  mountains  in  their 
impetuous  career,  ever  impelled  by  some  unseen 
influence  they  had  to  obey.  Geologists  maintain 
that  **all  the  land  on  the  globe  gives  evidence 
that  it  was  once  under  water." 

Let  the  investigator  dig  deep  on  the  plains,  or 
in  the  valleys,  or  through  the  great  hills  as  well  as 
the  small  ones,  and  he  will  find  everywhere  a 
mixture  of  earths  and  clays,  of  sand  and  gravel, 
coarse  and  fine,  a  conglomeration  of  all  earthly 
materials,  showing  everywhere  the  moving  and 
abrasive  power  of  water,  and  the  effects  of  its 
continued  and  rapid  motion,  driving  and  forcing 
along  in  its  pathway  the  commingled  mass  of 
material  it  held  in  solution,  or  which  lay  in  its 
course.    As  one  passes  over  the  land  in  the  rail- 
road cars,  he  will  notice,  in  the  cuts  through  the 
hills,  the  mixture  of  materials,  the  round  gravel 
and  cobble  stones  used  for  paving  streets,  and 
even  large  boulders,  often  high  up  in  the  hill;  all 
showing    not    square    and    angular   faces,    but 
rounded  and  smoothly  worn  by  the  action  and 
moving  power  of  water  continued  during  a  long 


i82         The  Earth  and  the  World 

period.  Doubtless  many  of  the  small  stones 
were  once  large  boulders  worn  down  by  con- 
tinued attrition  with  other  stones.  Their  posi- 
tion in  the  hills,  often  high  up,  shows  the  tre- 
mendous power,  depth,  and  force  of  the  water 
that  placed  them  there. 

On  many  elevated  plains  are  to  be  seen  large 
rocks  with  surfaces  rounded,  that  have  been 
rolled  over  and  over  by  water  in  rapid  motion. 

Water  has  been  the  means  not  only  of  trans- 
porting the  rocks  from  place  to  place,  but  has 
also  been  the  means  of  moving  large  bodies  of 
soil,  and  scattering  it  over  the  surface  of  the 
earth.  Geological  works  state  as  a  fact  that  **  All 
soil  is  derived  from  decomposition  of  rocks,  ex- 
cept the  alluvial  soil.  The  soil  is  not  always  a 
criterion  of  the  underlying  rocks,  because  a  great 
deal  of  the  soil  has  been  transported,  and  was 
not  formed  where  found." 

We  repeat  that,  during  this  age,  the  moon  was 
brought  into  service  to  do  the  special  work  of 
breaking  up  the  strata  more  perfectly,  of  modi- 
fying, levelling,  and  preparing  the  face  of  the 
earth  for  the  next  development  in  the  process  of 
its  formation  by  moving  and  dragging  large 
bodies  of  water  over  and  around  it;  the  result  of 
which  was,  by  attrition,  abrasion,  and  other 
effects,  to  pulverize,  grind  and  reduce  rocky 
elements  to  powder  and  the  varied  conditions  in 
which  they  now  exist. 

Now  these  prevailing  and  evident  effects  were, 
beyond  all  doubt,  produced  by  moving  bodies  of 


Modifying  Influences  of  the  Moon  183 

water.  No  other  adequate  cause  can  be  named 
that  would  have  produced  such  vast,  extensive 
and  surprising  results  the  world  over. 

65.  The  Work  Accomplished  was  not  the 
Work  of  Glaciers.— Of  late  years  glaciers  and 
their  effects  have  been  a  prominent  question 
among  scientists.  Glaciers  have  been  credited 
with  marks  on  rocks,  and  other  evidences  of 
their  existence,  which  we  believe  should  be 
credited  to  marks  made  by  the  rocky  material 
carried  by  the  rushing  waters  of  many  rivers,  as 
may  be  noticed  on  their  bottom  rocks. 

Glaciers,  if  they  move  at  all,  move  slowly. 
They  crush  and  grind,  but  do  not  move  anything 
over  and  over.  They  make  no  sand,  as  found  in 
the  rivers,  or  on  the  seashore;  nor  gravel,  nor 
round  stones,  great  or  small ;  nor  do  they  form 
any  mixtures  of  earthy  materials.  These  items 
are  all  the  results  of  moving  or  running  waters. 

Glaciers  there  are,  and  glaciers  there  have  been ; 
but  our  idea  of  the  period  and  the  manner  and 
character  of  their  formation  differs  materially 
from  the  opinion  generally  accepted  by  geolo- 
gists on  this  question.  In  due  time  we  intend 
to  state  when,  and  under  what  circumstances, 
glaciers  prevailed  over  a  great  part  of  the 
world. 

During  the  period  just  described,  when  the 
moon  as  the  instrument  of  the  Creator,  com- 
pleted its  great  work  of  modifying  and  levelling 
the  face  of  the  earth,  it  was  prepared  for  the 
next  important  period  through  which  it  must 


i84         The  Earth  and  the  World 

pass  before  it  could  be  made  a  fit  and  habitable 
globe  for  intelligent  beings. 

The  period  now  closed,  may  have  continued 
50,000  years  or  more  in  duration.  We  state  a 
length  to  these  periods;  but  we  wish  to  have  it 
understood  that  we  have  no  basis  upon  which  to 
decide  their  approximate  lengths. 

66,  A  Period  When  Probably  the  Orbit  of  the 
Moon  was  Changed.'-'The  special  work  of  the 
moon  being  now  finished,  it  was  necessary  that 
her  power  to  move  the  fluid  elements  of  the 
earth,  as  she  had  done,  should  be  decreased  and 
limited,  in  order  that  the  growth  of  vegetable 
and  animal  life  designed  by  the  Creator  might  be 
introduced  on  the  earth  and  made  to  flourish  and 
thrive  without  hindrance. 

For  that  reason,  therefore,  the  orbit  of  the 
moon  was  doubtless  greatly  enlarged  by  the  Al- 
mighty, and  its  distance  from  the  earth  probably 
increased  to  about  300,000  miles  making  its  regu- 
lar circuit  around  the  earth  in  about  thirty  days, 
which  orbit  the  moon  may  have  retained  until 
special  work  was  again  required  of  her. 

The  moon,  in  this  position,  as  she  revolved 
about  the  earth,  would  have  a  moderate  influence 
only  over  the  elements,  and  not  the  controlling 
one,  as  before.  She  could  keep  the  waters  of 
the  ocean  in  gentle  motion,  but  could  not  drag 
them  out  of  their  beds  and  pull  them  over  the 
land.  Her  hard  work  was  done:  now  she  rests 
from  her  labors,  and  is  honored  as  the  gentle  and 
sober  *'  Queen  of  the  Night." 


I 


i 


XIII 


THE  CARBONIFEROUS  AGE 

67.  Arrival  of  the  Carboniferous  Age.  Some 
of  Its  Effects  and  Results,— Iht  period  had  now 
arrived  when  the  Creator  introduced  the  element 
of  life  on  the  earth.  He,  the  Lord  and  Giver  of 
all  life,  created  all  the  germs  of  life,  both  animal 
and  vegetable,  and  caused  them  to  exist,  grow 
and  increase,  on  the  land  and  in  the  waters,  in 
many  orders  and  classes,  in  endless  variety,  and 
in  great  abundance. 

Vegetable  and  animal  life  were  now  created 
and  caused  to  grow  with  special  ends  and  pur- 
poses in  view,  which  evidently,  as  we  judge 
from  the  great  and  important  results  and  im- 
mense benefits  the  inhabitants  of  the  world  now 
reap,  were  designed  and  created  to  store  the 
world  with  all  precious  and  useful  products  that 
might  and  would  be  required  to  preserve  and 
promote  the  comfort,  well-being,  and  happiness 
of  the  intelligent  beings  that,  in  the  ages  to  come, 
would  occupy  it. 

The  orders  and  classes  of  vegetable  and  ani- 
mal life,  including  every  form  of  life  known  then 
to  have  existed,  were  not  specially  formed  to  be 
used  then  and  there;  and  then,  the  object  of  their 
existence  to  be  considered  as  accomplished.    But 

185 


i 


I 


184         The  Earth  and  the  World 

pass  before  it  could  be  made  a  fit  and  habitable 
globe  for  intelligent  beings. 

The  period  now  closed,  may  have  continued 
50,000  years  or  more  in  duration.  We  state  a 
length  to  these  periods;  but  we  wish  to  have  it 
understood  that  we  have  no  basis  upon  which  to 
decide  th&ir  approximate  lengths. 

66.  A  Period  When  Probably  the  Orbit  of  the 
Moon  was  Changed,~-The  special  work  of  the 
moon  being  now  finished,  it  was  necessary  that 
her  power  to  move  the  fluid  elements  of  the 
earth,  as  she  had  done,  should  be  decreased  and 
limited,  in  order  that  the  growth  of  vegetable 
and  animal  life  designed  by  the  Creator  might  be 
introduced  on  the  earth  and  made  to  flourish  and 
thrive  without  hindrance. 

For  that  reason,  therefore,  the  orbit  of  the 
moon  was  doubtless  greatly  enlarged  by  the  Al- 
mighty, and  its  distance  from  the  earth  probably 
increased  to  about  300,000  miles  making  its  regu- 
lar circuit  around  the  earth  in  about  thirty  days, 
which  orbit  the  moon  may  have  retained  until 
special  work  was  again  required  of  her. 

The  moon,  in  this  position,  as  she  revolved 
about  the  earth,  would  have  a  moderate  influence 
only  over  the  elements,  and  not  the  controlling 
one,  as  before.  She  could  keep  the  waters  of 
the  ocean  in  gentle  motion,  but  could  not  drag 
them  out  of  their  beds  and  pull  them  over  the 
land.  Her  hard  work  was  done :  now  she  rests 
from  her  labors,  and  is  honored  as  the  gentle  and 
sober  *'  Queen  of  the  Night." 


I 


( 


r 


XIII 


THE  CARBONIFEROUS  AGE 

67.  Arrival  of  the  Carboniferous  Age.  Some 
of  Its  Effects  and  Results. — The  period  had  now 
arrived  when  the  Creator  introduced  the  element 
of  life  on  the  earth.  He,  the  Lord  and  Giver  of 
all  life,  created  all  the  germs  of  life,  both  animal 
and  vegetable,  and  caused  them  to  exist,  grow 
and  increase,  on  the  land  and  in  the  waters,  in 
many  orders  and  classes,  in  endless  variety,  and 
in  great  abundance. 

Vegetable  and  animal  life  were  now  created 
and  caused  to  grow  with  special  ends  and  pur- 
poses in  view,  which  evidently,  as  we  judge 
from  the  great  and  important  results  and  im- 
mense benefits  the  inhabitants  of  the  world  now 
reap,  were  designed  and  created  to  store  the 
world  with  all  precious  and  useful  products  that 
might  and  would  be  required  to  preserve  and 
promote  the  comfort,  well-being,  and  happiness 
of  the  intelligent  beings  that,  in  the  ages  to  come, 
would  occupy  it. 

The  orders  and  classes  of  vegetable  and  ani- 
mal life,  including  every  form  of  life  known  then 
to  have  existed,  were  not  specially  formed  to  be 
used  then  and  there;  and  then,  the  object  of  their 

existence  to  be  considered  as  accomplished.    But 

185 


r 


I 

r    « 


(.    f 


•^t 


i86         The  Earth  and  the  World 

rather,  they  were  created  for  the  use,  benefit,  and 
welfare  of  the  race  of  intelligent  beings  now  on 
the  earth,  and  those  that  shall,  in  future  ages 
occupy  it,  as  has  been  stated. 

When  that  particular  age  was  closed,  often 
called  the  *' Carboniferous  Age,"  it  closed  very 
generally  with  the  death  of  these  species  of  ani- 
mal and  vegetable  life,  but  not  with  the  extinc- 
tion of  all  their  remains,  of  which  abundant  evi- 
dence exists  to-day,  and  will  continue  to  do  so 
long  as  the  world  shall  last. 

We  state  further  that  as  these  various  grades  of 
animal  and  vegetable  life  were  created  for  the 
special  purpose  of  preparing  material  for  the  use 
of  future  generations,  it  is  not  reasonable  to  sup- 
pose that  they  were  of  the  finer,  more  delicate, 
or  more  noble  and  beautiful  orders  of  animal  and 
vegetable  life  now  in  being  on  the  earth.     There 
was  then  nothing  to  correspond  with  trees  bear- 
ing fruit,  as  apples,  peaches,  etc.,  or  plants  bloom- 
ing with  flowers,  as  the  rose,  lily,  etc.,  or  in  the 
animal  life,  as  our  pet  animals,  singing  birds,  etc. 
Besides,  the  then  condition  of  the  earth  was  not 
in  harmony  with  or  adapted  to  the  growth  or  sur- 
vival of  the  present  orders  of  vegetable  or  animal 
life.     As  that  age  required  carboniferous  mate- 
rials in  abundance,  it  was  provided  as,  bone, 
phosphate,  the  calcareous  shell,  lime,  coral,  and 
very  many  other  items  now  required  and  in  daily 
use,  but  too  numerous  to  be  mentioned. 

The  earth,  in  its  beds  of  phosphates  and  in 
other  items,  affords  abundant  evidence  that,  at 


The  Carboniferous  Age 


187 


one  time,  there  lived  on  it  very  large  animals 
with  heavy  bones  which  now  supply  us  with 
phosphate  material.  These  and  other  animals 
were  created  for  a  purpose,  and  were  caused  to 
multiply,  grow,  die,  and  leave  imperishable  re- 
mains. Many  of  the  animals  in  that  age,  like  the 
trees,  probably  had  painless  nerves  only. 

Doubtless  there  are  evolutionists  who  may  yet 
confidently  expect  to  find  the  bones  of  some  pre- 
historic animal  without  the  caudal  appendage. 
Let  them  not  despair,  but  dig  deep,  and  examine 
carefully,  for  who  can  tell  but  they  may  yet  find 
for  themselves  the  real  truth  of  the  matter  ? 

God's  wonderful  processes  of  growth,  of  the 
coral,  shell,  chalk,  and  other  materials,  wholly 
disposes  of  the  mythical  ** Nebular  Hypothesis" 
of  Laplace,  and  of  the  doctrines  of  the  evolu- 
tionist; for  the  elementary  materials  are  ever  dis- 
tinct, and  do  not  run  one  into  another. 

Atom  by  atom,  in  God's  laboratory,  the  pure 
and  costly  pearl  grows  slowly  between  the 
ignoble  shells.  By  the  operation  of  His  laws  of 
affinity.  He  alone  can  bring  the  pure  and  clean 
out  of  the  unclean. 

During  this  period  some  of  the  leading  gases, 
combined  and  uncombined,  must  have  prevailed 
and  been  more  intense,  active  and  controlling  than 
they  now  are  on  the  earth,  as  must  be  evident  to 
all  geological  students.  But  what  prevailed  then, 
was  best  adapted  to  that  age,  in  fact  was  neces- 
sary then,  when  many  of  these  gaseous  elements 
were  stored  away  for  the  use  of  succeeding  gen- 


1 88         The  Earth  and  the  World 


^ 


J, 


'  yi 


<  n 


erations;  as  oxygen  in  maganese,  carbon  in  coal, 
sulphur  in  pyrites,  and  many  other  such  items. 

During  that  age,  man,  and  many  other  animals, 
as  they  are  now  constituted,  could  not  have  ex- 
isted. Even  after  that  age  had  closed,  it  took  a 
long  period  for  the  elements  to  take  their  natural 
places,  in  respect  to  affinity  and  gravity.  Nox- 
ious gases  and  fluids  had  to  be  absorbed  or 
separated,  purified  and  settled,  before  it  would 
be  safe  to  introduce  man  on  the  earth,  evidence 
of  which  we  will  state  later. 

It  answers  our  end  and  purpose,  at  this  time, 
to  include  all  these  items  mentioned,  in  one  long 
age,  although  we  are  aware  that  the  geologist, 
exact  in  his  science,  might  arrange  them  definitely 
in  several  periods,  giving  some  a  precedence  over 
others. 

At  the  beginning  of  this  age,  doubtless  the 
earth  was  fully  prepared  by  the  Creator  for  any 
special  process  through  which  it  had  to  pass. 
The  gases  or  elements  then  most  prevalent  in  the 
atmosphere,  were  such  as  would  promote  vege- 
table and  animal  life,  and  were  not  detrimental  to 
them.    Also,   the  temperature  both  of  the  at- 
mosphere and  water  was   favorable,   warmed, 
perhaps,  by  chemical  action,  but  warmer  on  the 
average  than  it  is  in  this  age,  yet  not  too  hot  to 
destroy  the  germs  of  life,  vegetable  or  animal; 
just  such  a  condition  as  would  produce  rapid  in- 
crease and  growth.    These  conditions  being  so, 
the  Creator,  in  due  time,  made  the  germs,  planted 
them,  and  caused  the  living  growth  to  prevail 


The  Carboniferous  Age  189 

over  the  earth,  or  at  least  that  part  of  it  most 
favored  with  the  light,  heat,  and  invigorating 
electrical  influences  of  the  sun. 

68.  During  this  Age  the  Earth  did  not  Rotate 
on  Its  Axis  as  It  now  Does.—lht  important  ques- 
tion now  arises,  whether  the  earth,  at  this  period 
of  its  history,  had  any  diurnal  revolution  on  its 
axis. 

There  appears  to  be  no  reason  why  the  earth's 
orbit  about  the  sun  may  not  have  been  then,  as  it 
is  now.  But  there  are  important  reasons,  mak- 
ing it  evident  that  the  earth,  in  that  age,  had  no 
diurnal  revolution,  but  had  the  light  and  heat  of 
the  sun  on  one  side,  or  half  of  its  surface  at  a 
time,  for  thousands  of  years. 

It  used  to  be  thought  that  each  planet  turned  on 
its  axis,  or  had  diurnal  revolutions  similar  to  our 
earth.     But  of  late  years,  astronomers,  with  their 
more  perfect    instruments,    have    decided    that 
Mercury,  the  planet  nearest  the  sun,  does  not 
rotate ;  and  they  have  also,  within  a  few  years, 
decided  that  Venus,  like  Mercury,  always  pre- 
sents the  same  side  to  the  sun.    Therefore,  there 
is  no  reason  why  our  earth  may  not,  at  one 
period  of  its  history,  have  had  for  thousands  of 
years,  one  side  presented  to  the  sun,  while  the 
other  remained  in  the  darkness  of  night,  and  in 
the  icy  temperature  of  the  poles.     The  earth  it- 
self affords  abundant  evidence  of  the  fact  that 
this  was  so. 

Among  the  reasons  bearing  evidence  that  the 
earth  for  a  long  age  did  not  turn  on  its  axis,  is 


190         The  Earth  and  the  World 

the  fact  of  the  steady  and  uniform  growth  of  a 
stratum  of  coal  in  the  carboniferous  period  that 
was  thousands  of  years  in  its  formation,  and 
which  bears  no  evidence  nor  sign  of  seasons. 
Also  that,  so  far  as  the  Northern  Hemisphere  is 
concerned,  remains  of  vegetable  and  animal  life 
belonging  to,  or  such  as  thrive  best  in  the  Torrid 
Zone,  are  found  north  of  the  Temperate  Zone. 

In  Central  Europe,  there  are  large  and  deep  de- 
posits of  salts  and  potash  that  were  thousands  of 
years  in  forming,  which  could  only  have  been 
formed  in  a  tropical  climate,  when  the  earth  re- 
volved very  slowly,  say  approximately,  once  in 
about  12,000  to  15,000  years.  We  now  give  a 
published  description  of  those  salt  and  potash  de- 
posits. 

The  Stassfurt  salt  and  potash  deposits  had  their 
origin,  thousands  of  years  ago,  in  a  sea  or  ocean, 
the  waters  of  which  gradually  receded,  leaving 
near  the  coast,  lakes  which  still  retained  commu- 
nication with  the  great  ocean  by  means  of  small 
channels.  In  that  part  of  Europe  the  climate  was 
then  tropical,  and  the  waters  of  these  lakes 
rapidly  evaporated,  but  were  constantly  replen- 
ished through  these  small  channels  connecting 
them  with  the  main  body.  Decade  after  decade 
this  continued,  until  by  evaporation  and  crystalli- 
zation, the  various  salts  present  in  the  sea-water 
were  deposited  in  solid  form.  The  less  soluble 
material,  such  as  sulphate  of  lime  or  "  anhydrit," 
solidified  first  and  formed  the  lowest  stratum. 
Then  came    common  rock-salt  with  a  slowly 


The  Carboniferous  Age  191 

thickening  layer  which  ultimately  reached  3,000 
feet  and  is  estimated  to  have  been  13,000  years 
in  formation.  This  rock-salt  deposit  is  inter- 
spersed with  smaller  deposits  of  *' anhydrit," 
which  gradually  diminish  toward  the  top  and  are 
finally  replaced  by  mineral  *'polyhalit,"  which  is 
composed  of  sulphate  of  lime,  sulphate  of  pot- 
ash, and  sulphate  of  magnesia. 

Overlying  this  potash  region  is  a  layer  of  im- 
pervious clay  which  acts  as  a  water-tight  roof  to 
protect  and  preserve  the  very  soluble  potash  and 
magnesia  salts,  which,— had  it  not  been  for  the 
very  protection  of  this  overiying  stratum,— would 
have  been  long  ages  ago  washed  away  and  lost 
by  the  action  of  the  water  percolating  from 
above.  Above  this  clay  roof  is  a  stratum  of  vari- 
ous thickness  of  anhydrit,  (sulphate  of  lime),  and 
still  above  this  a  second  deposit  of  salt,  probably 
formed  under  more  recent  climatic  and  atmos- 
pheric influences  or  possibly  by  chemical 
changes  in  dissolving  and  subsequent  precipita- 
tion. This  salt  deposit  contains  ninety-eight  per 
cent,  (often  more)  of  pure  salt— a  degree  of  purity 
rarely  elsewhere  found.  Finally,  above  this  are 
strata  of  gypsum,  tenacious  clay,  sand  and  lime- 
stone, which  crop  out  at  the  surface. 

The  perpendicular  distance  from  the  lowest  to 
the  upper  surface  of  the  Stassfurt  salt  deposit  is 
about  5,000  feet  (a  little  less  than  a  mile),  while 
the  horizontal  extent  of  the  bed  is  from  the  Harz 
Mountains  to  the  Elbe  River  in  one  direction,  and 
from  the  City  of  Magdeburg  to  the  town  of 


ll 


192         The  Earth  and  the  World 

Bernburg  in  another.  "The  world's  principal 
supply  of  potash  salt  is  found  at  Stassfurt.  Ap- 
parently this  supply  is  inexhaustible." 

There  are  other  evidences  that  there  was  a  long 
period  when  the  earth  did  not  turn  on  its  axis, 
which  investigators  can  either  prove  or  disprove. 

Admitting  that  there  was  an  age  when  the 
earth  rotated  on  its  axis  about  once  in  twelve 
thousand  years,  what  would  in  all  probability  be 
the  result  ? 

First:— Observers  on  the  other  planets  (if  there 
were  any)  would  decide  that  the  earth  did  not 
turn  at  all.  Next,  the  earth,  turning  once  in 
12,000  years,  would  average  6,000  years  one 
side  facing  the  sun  and  the  other  6,000  years 
without  light  or  heat. 

That  side  of  the  earth  favored  with  the  light 
and  heat  of  the  sun,  would  have  a  long  and  un- 
interrupted period  favorable  for  an  enormous 
growth  of  vegetation,  supplying  sustenance  for 
all  animal  life;— life  on  the  land,  and  life  in  the 
water,  and  everything  would  conduce  to  an  in- 
crease of  production  of  the  classes  and  orders  of 
life  which  the  Creator  introduced.  Even  the 
heat,  in  a  great  part  of  what  is  now  the  Frigid 
Zone,  would  be  equal  to,  that  of  the  Torrid 
Zone. 

69,  How  and  When  Were  the  Glaciers 
Formed  ?— But  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  earth, 
deprived,  as  it  necessarily  must  have  been,  of 
light  and  heat,  all  would  be  a  dreary  winter,  bar- 
ren of  everything  except  ice.    Large  bodies  of 


The  Carboniferous  Age  193 


water  would  be  congealed  and  frozen  deep 
down,  forming  the  glaciers,  making  what  is 
known  as  the  ice  age,  or  the  glacial  period. 

The  earth  turning  slowly  from  west  to  east, 
exposing  to  the  light  and  heat  of  the  sun  one  or 
two  miles  of  new  surface  every  year,  would  have 
its  ice-barriers  and  glaciers  gradually  presented 
to  the  heat  of  the  sun  and  melted;  and  when  the 
water  was  sufficiently  deep,  floated  and  moved 
away  from  west  to  east,  pushing  and  carrying 
with  the  icebergs,  a  large  amount  of  debris,  or 
earthly  material;  scattering  it  over  the  land,  and 
covering  up  animal,  vegetable  and  all  other  de- 
posits that  happened  to  be  in  their  course,  di- 
verted more  or  less  by  large  obstructions  and 
mountain  ranges.  Geologists  can  conceive,  and 
in  a  measure  realize,  how  these  things  would  be, 
and  what  would  be  the  consequent  results. 

yo.  Coal  and  Other  Deposits,  How  Formed  ? 
— On  the  opposite  side  of  the  globe,  which  for 
6,000  years  or  more  had  been  favored  by  the 
uniform  and  constant  light  and  heat  of  the  sun, 
there  would  be,  during  those  favorable  years, 
a  regular  and  enormous  increase  of  animal  life  on 
the  land  and  in  the  water;  supplies  of  food  being 
also  provided  for  in  the  luxuriant  growth  of  all 
vegetable  material,  not  only  for  present  use,  but 
for  producing  and  storing  away  carboniferous 
and  other  materials  in  inexhaustible  deposits,  for 
use  in  the  coming  ages. 

In  this  age,  when  vegetable  and  animal  life 
predominated,  important  results  superinduced  by 


\\\ 


i 


194         The  Earth  and  the  World 

chemical  aid  electrical  action,   were  doubtless 
also  produced. 

The  earth,  in  its  slow  and  imperceptible  rota- 
tion, would  move  this  luxuriant  growth  of  vege- 
tation, one  or  two  miles  in  width  of  its  surface, 
every  year,  from  the  light  and  heat  of  the  sun 
into  the  ice-cold  darkness  of  a  winter's  night.  In 
a  comparatively  short  period,  the  tall  and  closely 
compacted  ferns,  pines  and  other  trees,  under 
the  extremely  low  temperature  that  surrounded 
them,  would  become  brittle,  and  fall  and  crum- 
ble like  icicles,  and  during  the  advancing  period 
of  the  earth's  rotation,  would  subsequently  be 
covered,  pressed  down,  and  formed  into  a  vein, 
or  stratum  of  carboniferous  material;  and,  in  due 
time,  and  under  favorable  circumstances,  become 
a  broad  vein,  seam,  or  stratum  of  coal,  of  greater 
or  less  depth.  This  may  be  an  outline  of  the 
manner  in  which  some  of  the  deposits  of  coal 
and  other  deposits  of  vegetable,  mineral,  and 
animal  matter  were  formed. 

There  is  in  Athens  County,  Ohio,  a  deposit  of 
bituminous  coal  lying  between  two  creeks.  Fed- 
eral Valley  and  Marietta  Run,  about  three  miles 
apart  A  few  years  since  we  had  occasion  to 
examine  the  mine.  The  seam,  or  stratum  of  coal 
was  about  eight  feet  in  thickness.  The  deposit 
appeared  to  be  perfectly  level  from  creek  to 
creek,  excepting  a  gentle  slope;  for  the  mine 
drained  itself,  being  above  the  level  of  the  water 
in  the  creeks.  The  writer  passed  through  it  from 
one  side  to  the  other  in  a  train  of  miners'  cars. 


The  Carboniferous  Age  195 

Now  and  then  there  were  specimens  of  coal  still 
retaining  marks  of  the  fern  or  some  woody  fibre 
from  which  it  was  originally  produced.  The  hill 
above  the  veins  is  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  and 
fifty  feet  higher.  Some  distance  below  this 
stratum  there  are  other  seams.  This  exhibit  is  a 
sample  of  many  other  mines  in  Ohio,  Pennsyl- 
vania, and  West  Virginia. 

The  rotation  of  the  earth  being  slow  and  im- 
perceptible, the  glaciers  and  icebergs  that  would 
be  formed,  would  receive  the  heat  of  the  sun 
first  on  their  easterly  side.  Their  movements, 
therefore,  would  necessarily  be  from  west  to  east, 
and  what  they  carried,  or  pushed  before  them, 
would  move  toward  the  east.  A  New  York 
architect  informed  the  writer  that,  in  making  ex- 
cavations for  a  building  in  the  city,  certain  stones 
had  been  found,  and  there  were  none  known  to 
be  like  them  this  side  of  Lake  Superior,  from 
which  place  these  stones  had  drifted  to  the  east. 

It  will  be  perceived  that  the  movement  of  the 
waters,  dragged  around  the  earth  by  the  attrac- 
tive power  of  the  moon,  are  just  the  reverse. 

The  earth,  turning  from  west  to  east,  observes 
the  moon  first  on  its  easterly  horizon,  pulling 
after  it  the  waters  of  the  Atlantic  and  Pacific. 
When  she  was  near  by,  or  had  her  orbit  nearer 
the  earth,  she  dragged  the  waters  of  the  Atlantic 
over  the  easterly  shore  and  land  of  New  England, 
washing  both.  The  great  body  of  water  rushing 
against  the  highlands  of  upper  Massachusetts,  the 
mountainous  region  of  New  Hampshire  and  Ver- 


I'll 


III' 


i 


194         The  Earth  and  the  World 

chemical  aid  electrical  action^  were  doubtless 
also  produced. 

The  earth,  in  its  slow  and  imperceptible  rota- 
tion, would  move  this  luxuriant  growth  of  vege- 
tation, one  or  two  miles  in  width  of  its  surface, 
every  year,  from  the  light  and  heat  of  the  sun 
into  the  ice-cold  darkness  of  a  winter's  night.  In 
a  comparatively  short  period,  the  tall  and  closely 
compacted  ferns,  pines  and  other  trees,  under 
the  extremely  low  temperature  that  surrounded 
them,  would  become  brittle,  and  fall  and  crum- 
ble like  icicles,  and  during  the  advancing  period 
of  the  earth's  rotation,  would  subsequently  be 
covered,  pressed  down,  and  formed  into  a  vein, 
or  stratum  of  carboniferous  material;  and,  in  due 
time,  and  under  favorable  circumstances,  become 
a  broad  vein,  seam,  or  stratum  of  coal,  of  greater 
or  less  depth.  This  may  be  an  outline  of  the 
manner  in  which  some  of  the  deposits  of  coal 
and  other  deposits  of  vegetable,  mineral,  and 
animal  matter  were  formed. 

There  is  in  Athens  County,  Ohio,  a  deposit  of 
bituminous  coal  lying  between  two  creeks.  Fed- 
eral Valley  and  Marietta  Run,  about  three  miles 
apart.  A  few  years  since  we  had  occasion  to 
examine  the  mine.  The  seam,  or  stratum  of  coal 
was  about  eight  feet  in  thickness.  The  deposit 
appeared  to  be  perfectly  level  from  creek  to 
creek,  excepting  a  gentle  slope;  for  the  mine 
drained  itself,  being  above  the  level  of  the  water 
in  the  creeks.  The  writer  passed  through  it  from 
one  side  to  the  other  in  a  train  of  miners'  cars. 


The  Carboniferous  Age  195 

Now  and  then  there  were  specimens  of  coal  still 
retaining  marks  of  the  fern  or  some  woody  fibre 
from  which  it  was  originally  produced.  The  hill 
above  the  veins  is  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  and 
fifty  feet  higher.  Some  distance  below  this 
stratum  there  are  other  seams.  This  exhibit  is  a 
sample  of  many  other  mines  in  Ohio,  Pennsyl- 
vania, and  West  Virginia. 

The  rotation  of  the  earth  being  slow  and  im- 
perceptible, the  glaciers  and  icebergs  that  would 
be  formed,  would  receive  the  heat  of  the  sun 
first  on  their  easterly  side.  Their  movements, 
therefore,  would  necessarily  be  from  west  to  east, 
and  what  they  carried,  or  pushed  before  them, 
would  move  toward  the  east.  A  New  York 
architect  informed  the  writer  that,  in  making  ex- 
cavations for  a  building  in  the  city,  certain  stones 
had  been  found,  and  there  were  none  known  to 
be  like  them  this  side  of  Lake  Superior,  from 
which  place  these  ston&s  had  drifted  to  the  east. 

It  will  be  perceived  that  the  movement  of  the 
waters,  dragged  around  the  earth  by  the  attrac- 
tive power  of  the  moon,  are  just  the  reverse. 

The  earth,  turning  from  west  to  east,  observes 
the  moon  first  on  its  easterly  horizon,  pulling 
after  it  the  waters  of  the  Atlantic  and  Pacific. 
When  she  was  near  by,  or  had  her  orbit  nearer 
the  earth,  she  dragged  the  waters  of  the  Atlantic 
over  the  easterly  shore  and  land  of  New  England, 
washing  both.  The  great  body  of  water  rushing 
against  the  highlands  of  upper  Massachusetts,  the 
mountainous  region  of  New  Hampshire  and  Ver- 


19^         The  Earth  and  the  World 

mont,  and  the  high  elevations  on  the  Hudson 
River,  would  be  turned  back  and  run  down  in  a 
southerly  direction,  forming  in  part,  the  channels 
of  that  river,  and  of  the  Connecticut  River; 
washing  the  whole  southern  border  of  the  state 
of  Connecticut,  and  cleaning  the  soil  and  sand 
from  its  shore,  as  in  many  places  appears  to  have 
been  done;  making  the  hundreds  or  more  of  in- 
lets, rocky  and  barren,  between  the  eastern  and 
western  part  of  the  state  bordering  on  the  Sound. 
The  counter  ocean  currents  would  drive  the  sand 
over  to  the  rocky  base  of  Long  Island,  forming 
the  greater  part  of  that  well-known  island;  a 
procedure  we  believe  to  have  been  a  fact. 

7/.  Counter  Effect  of  the  Action  of  the  Moon 
and  the  Glaciers, — While  the  moon  drew  the 
water  from  the  east  to  the  west,  the  effect  of 
which  would  be  to  move  rocks,  stones,  and  va- 
rious materials,  all  in  the  same  direction,  from 
east  to  west;  on  the  contrary,  the  effect  of  the 
glaciers,  during  the  age  in  which  they  prevailed 
would  be  to  move  solid  materials  from  the  west 
to  the  east;  for  the  eastern  border  of  the  glaciers 
would  receive  first  the  strong  and  continued  heat 
of  the  sun,  and  would  therefore  be  broken  up 
and  floated  away  to  the  ea«t,  the  only  direction 
in  which  they  could  move. 

John  Muir,  a  well-known  geologist  of  Califor- 
nia, a  writer  on  glaciers,  a  defender  of  the  theory 
of  **  erosions  by  glacial  action, '  exhibited  to  a 
correspondent  of  the  Boston  Transcript  certain 
sketches  he  had  made.     Quoting  from  the  cor- 


The  Carboniferous  Age 


J97 


respondent:  '*One  of  the  most  interesting  was 
upon  a  piece  of  wood,  which  he  said  had  been 
centuries  buried  beneath  the  now  fast-receding 
'Muir  Glacier';  it  was  about  ten  inches  broad 
and  three  feet  long.  Upon  this  unique  panel  he 
had  sketched  the  upstanding  stumps  of  the  time- 
old  forest  which  the  recession  of  the  ice  flood  has 
exposed.  Even  the  one  from  which  this  section 
had  been  broken,  he  pointed  out  to  me."  Here 
we  have  unexpected  evidence  in  proof  of  the 
theory  that  the  glaciers  moved  east,  carrying  or 
pushing  material  before  them,  or  pressing  it 
down  to  the  earth  and  covering  it  over  with 
debris. 

Professor  Dana,  in  his  "Manual  of  Geology," 
(P-  783)  gives  this  important  and  instructive 
record  of  facts  regarding  the  many  seams  of  coal, 
one  above  the  other,  found  in  Illinois. 

"A  section  of  the  coal  formation  of  Illinois, 
described  by  Worthen,  contains  sixteen  coal-beds, 
large  and  small,  separated  by  fragmental  beds  of 
lime-stone,  containing  abundant  remains  of  ma- 
rine life.  The  coal-beds  indicate  eras  of  emerged 
land;  the  marine  fossils,  intervening  eras  of  sub- 
mergence, and  their  number  shows  that  at  least 
sixteen  alternations  between  the  two  conditions 
there  took  place  in  the  carboniferous  period. 
Facts  make  it  certain  that  the  great  interior  sea  of 
the  Continent  communicated  at  that  time  freely 
with  the  ocean  of  the  south.  The  same  region 
thus  went  up  and  down,  changing  the  dry  land 
outline  and  the  sea  depths,  and  the  changes  went 


198         The  Earth  and  the  World 

on  with  extreme  slowness,  for  coal-beds,  as  well 
as  the  much  thicker  marine  beds,  were  slow  in 
accumulating.  Facts  of  similar  import  are  af- 
forded by  all  the  successive  formations,  from  the 
primordial  upward,  and  alike  on  all  the  conti- 
nents.'* 

It  will  be  noticed  that  Professor  Dana  mentions 
that  the  primary  cause  of  the  formation  of  these 
sixteen  separate  and  distinct  coal-beds,  with  the 
alternate  formation  of  sixteen  beds  containing 
abundant  remains  of  marine  life,  or  fossils,  was 
the  rising  and  falling  of  the  earth's  surface. 
"The  same  region  thus  went  up  and  down, 
changing  the  dry  land  outline  and  the  sea  depths, 
alternately." 

This  idea  of  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  solid 
earth,  each  movement  being  alternately  followed 
by  the  inflowing  of  the  sea,  is  unnatural  and  im- 
probable, and  cannot  be  proved  as  a  fact,  nor 
stand  the  test  of  sound  reason.  The  earth  is 
something  more  substantial  than  a  great  ship  on 
the  billows,  rising  and  falling  with  the  waves. 

We  hold  that  the  facts  here  related  prove  con- 
clusively that  there  was  a  period  when  the  earth 
did  not  rotate  on  its  axis  as  it  now  does,  and 
then  probably  did  not  make' one  complete  revo- 
lution oftener  than  once  in  12,000  to  15,000  years, 
as  before  stated. 

The  reasons  advanced  to  show  that  there  was 
a  long  period  when  the  earth  did  not  rotate  on 
its  axis,  as  it  now  does,  we  believe  to  be  con- 
clusive, and  that  they  best  account  for  many 


The  Carboniferous  Age  199 


known  geological  facts;  while  the  fact  that  some 
of  the  planets  do  not  rotate  also  sustains  the 
theory. 

As  we  have  before  expressed  the  opinion  that 
the  Creator  used  our  satellite,  the  moon,  or  the 
inherent  power  she  possessed  by  reason  of  her 
specific  gravity,  to  move  large  bodies  of  water 
over  the  surface  of  the  earth,  to  accomplish  cer- 
tain purposes  in  the  way  of  moving  or  mixing 
the  earth's  materials,  levelling  and  modifying  the 
face  of  the  earth ;  this  raises  the  question  whether 
or  not  the  Creator  again  called  the  moon  into 
service  after,  or  at  the  close  of,  the  so-called  car- 
boniferous period,  and  glacial  age.  The  power 
of  the  moon  may  have  been  employed  after  each 
complete  revolution  of  the  earth  to  cover  up  each 
successive  new  stratum  of  carboniferous  material. 
From  our  point  of  reasoning,  it  would  seem  that 
there  was  a  necessity  for  such  additional  work; 
and  if  there  was  a  necessity,  why  should  not 
the  Creator  use,  or  direct  to  be  used,  the  means 
ready  at  hand  to  accomplish  the  desired  end  ? 

In  our  opinion  this  work  was  required  to  be 
done  after  the  carboniferous  period;  and  the 
moon,  which,  during  that  long  period,  had  been 
300,000  miles  away,  more  or  less,  had  its  orbit 
made  one-half  or  nearly  that,  in  diameter,  and 
therefore,  in  its  revolution  about  the  earth,  would 
draw  large  bodies  of  water,  or  water  sufficient  to 
modify  and  level  off  the  land,  and  at  the  same 
time  to  open  up  and  form,  by  its  effects,  many  of 
the  well-known  water-courses  or  rivers,  great 


/' 


11 


II 


ioo         The  Earth  and  the  World 

and  small,  that  run  in  all  directions  over  the  face 
of  the  earth;  and  without  which  the  world 
would  still  be  an  uninhabitable  globe. 

Can  any  one  conceive  of  a  more  effectual  way 
of  moving  large  bodies  of  earthy  material,  and 
doing  the  work  named,  than  by  the  use  of  large 
bodies  of  water  in  motion. 

If  the  Creator  did  not  use  this  means,  why  not; 
especially  as  there  was  a  necessity  for  His  doing 
it,  as  well  as  a  desirable  end  to  be  accomplished 
by  having  it  done.  There  was  no  law  against  it. 
The  Scriptures  state  that,  with  the  Creator,  there 
are  great  "diversities  of  operations"  but  always 
"the  same  spirit,"  to  accomplish  His  purposes. 
It  is  also  recorded  of  the  heavens,  that  "as  a 
vesture  shalt  Thou  fold  them  up,  and  they  shall 
be  changed." 

In  considering  the  matter  of  the  coal  that  lies: 
hidden  below  the  surface  of  the  earth,  it  must 
appear  evident  to  every  intelligent  observer,  from 
known  facts,  that  all  the  coal  measures,  the  many 
strata  of  coal  found  at  various  depths  below  the 
surface,  are  of  a  vegetable  origin:  that  at  one 
period,  or  more  likely  several  distinct  periods, 
there  were  luxuriant  growths  of  vegetation,  rank 
in  their  character,  differing  probably  in  many  re- 
spects from  anything  now  growing  on  the  earth, 
as  the  rich  pines  of  the  South,  producing  the 
pitch,  tar  and  turpentine,  differ  from  the  white 
pines  of  the  North :  also  that  there  are  evidences 
that  this  rank  growth  of  vegetation  was  continu- 
ous for  a  long  period,  without  interruption  ot 


The  Carboniferous  Age  201 

seasons,  as  summer  and  winter:  At  the  end  of 
a  period— time  not  determined— a  distinct  change 
came  over  the  scene,— the  whole  growth  of  vege- 
tation was  levelled  to  the  earth  where  it  had 
grown;  and  this  growth  was  covered  with  an 
earthy  debris  and  held,  more  or  less,  at  the  time, 
in  a  watery  solution.  This  stratum  of  vegetable 
matter  afterward  passed  through  a  process  of 
decomposition  under  pressure.  Heat  was  gener- 
ated, chemical  action  took  place,  and  other  con- 
ditions not  known,  changing  under  the  pressure 
the  character  and  appearance  of  the  stratum  or 
vegetation,  resulting,  after  a  period,  in  the  vari- 
ous coal  measures  the  earth  exhibits.  It  also  ap- 
pears to  be  a  fact  of  which  the  earth  gives  proof, 
that  this  growth  of  vegetation  was  repeated  until 
there  was  another  complete  cessation  of  growth, 
caused  by  the  same  obstructing  procedure,  fol- 
lowed by  another  stratum  of  coal  to  be  stored 
away  for  future  requirements.  This  coal-making 
process  was  repeated  a  number  of  times  during 
the  carboniferous  age. 

It  is  also  evident  that  while  this  coal-making 
process  was  being  carried  on,  other  important 
operations  were  being  accomplished.  All  over 
the  earth  there  was  an  orderly  development  of 
many  products,  as  the  deposition  of  various  salts, 
lime,  chalk,  coral,  asphalt,  bone,  phosphates, 
calcareous  and  silicious  materials,  and  very  many 
other  items  well  known  to  geologists  and  other 
investigators. 

Coal  is  a  product  of  vegetation  produced  prob- 


1 


1 


V 


202         The  Earth  and  the  World 

ably  in  the  manner  described.  Petroleum,  an- 
other of  Nature's  products  found  below  tlie  sur- 
face, is  believed  to  be  a  product  of  coal  by  a 
process  of  distillation,  abounding  generally  as  it 
does  in  the  coal  regions.  "Coal  and  petroleum 
are  products  of  the  organic  world."  Some  geol- 
ogists and  chemists,  who  have  critically  examined 
the  nature  of  petroleum,  express  the  opinion  that 
both  vegetable  and  animal  substances  have  con- 
tributed to  the  supply,  and  have  tended  to  vary 
the  character  of  petroleum. 

J2,  During  the  Carboniferous  Age  Animal  as 
Well  as  Vegetable  Life  Prevailed.— During  the 
carboniferous  age  when  there  was  such  an 
enormous  growth  of  vegetation,  doubtless  at  the 
same  time  while  there  was  this  abundant  supply 
of  food  suitable  for  all  animal  life,  especially  of 
the  coarse  and  large  species,  in  the  water  as  well 
as  on  the  land;  there  was  this  abundant  and 
necessary  supply  of  animal  material  combining 
with  the  vegetable  in  part  to  produce  the  pe- 
troleum, as  well  as  the  bone  phosphates,  and 
other  resultant  valuable  materials  found  in  the 
earth. 

One  writer  states,  '*  Petroleum  produced  or 
preceded  the  natural  gas,  and  not  the  gas  the  pe- 
troleum." ''Where  gas  is,  petroleum  ought  to 
be  found." 

While  all  vegetable  and  animal  life  may  be 
properly  classed  as  creations,  including  their  sub- 
sequent increase  and  growth  in  their  several  lines 
as  created,  yet  there  are  other  material  products 


The  Carboniferous  Age 


203 


\ 


of  these  creations,  such  as  coal,  petroleum, 
natural  reservoirs  of  gas,  the  bone  phosphates, 
coral,  diamond,  pearls,  and  many  chemical  and 
mineral  combinations  and  other  items,  that  might 
more  properly  be  considered  as  manufactured 
products  of  the  Creator,  produced  in  His  labora- 
tory by  processes  He  had  devised,  and  which 
even  now  in  many  items  are  not  as  yet  wholly 
discontinued. 

During  this  long  carboniferous  age,  the  planet- 
building  comets  before  mentioned,  were  doubt- 
less supplying  the  earth  with  such  additional 
material  for  the  work,  when  and  where  required, 
such  as  carbon,  oxygen,  nitrogen,  hydrogen  and 
other  gases,  all  atomic  materials  from  the  Crea- 
tor's reservoirs. 

The  sun  through  all  periods  supplied  the  earth 
with  light,  heat,  and  the  electro-magnetic  energy 
required;  though  for  a  long  period  its  energetic 
influence  may  have  been  thrown  only  on  one- 
half  of  the  surface  of  the  earth  at  a  time. 


in 


XIV 

* 

THE  MODIFICATION  OF  THE  EARTH'S  SURFACE 

73.  Additional  Proof  that  Large  Masses  of 
Earthy  Material  were  at  Different  Periods  Drifted 
by  Large  Moving  Bodies  of  Water.— \n  support  of 
our  position  on  some  points  mentioned  above  we 
give  a  few  extracts  from  Henry  Howe's  **  His- 
torical Collections  of  the  State  of  Ohio,"  pub- 
lished in  1898;  section  on  geology  of  that  state. 

**  The  geological  structure  of  Ohio  is  as  simple 
as  that  of  almost  any  other  40,000  square  miles  of 
the  earth's  surface.  All  of  its  strata,  except  a 
small  portion  of  the  coal  measures,  were  de- 
posited in  the  waters  of  an  ancient  arm  of  the 
sea.  Its  most  fossiliferous  limestones,  as  the 
coniferous  for  example,  stand  for  clear  waters  of 
tropical  warmth.  Its  conglomerates  and  sand- 
stones required  strong  currents  for  their  trans- 
portation from  distant  shores. 

"Over  the  various  bedded  rocks  of  at  least 
two-thirds  of  Ohio,  are  spread,  in  varying  thick- 
ness, the  deposits  of  the  'Glacial  Drift,'  the 
most  characteristic  and  important  of  which  is  the 
bowlder  clay.  This  frequently  contains,  in  its 
lower  portions,  large  accumulations  of  vegetable 
matter,  the  remains  of  coniferous  forests  that  oc- 
cupied the  country  before  the  advent  of  the  drift 
or   at  some  interglacial  stage  of  its  duration. 

204 


Modification  of  the  Earth's  Surface  205 


Peat  bogs  are  sometimes  found  buried  in  like 
manner,  in  or  under  the  bowlder  clay.  The  de- 
posits of  latest  age  in  this  great  series  consists  of 
stratified  clays,  sand  and  gravels.  The  bowlder 
clay,  or  till,  is  filled  with  bowlders  of  northern 
origin,  derived  from  the  highlands  of  Canada  and 
intervening  districts.  Some  of  them  contain 
2,000  cubic  feet  above  the  ground.  They  can  in 
many  cases  be  referred  to  particular  localities,  and 
sometimes  to  particular  ledges,  from  a  score  of 
miles  to  400  miles  distant.  The  stratified  drift 
contains  vast  accumulations  of  sand  and  clay,  all 
of  great  economic  value. 

"The  two  divisions,  the  *  Conglomerate '  and 
the  'Coal  Measures,'  can  properly  be  considered 
under  one  head,  inasmuch  as  they  have  common 
sources  of  value.  Their  thickness  is  not  less  than 
1,300  feet,  and  they  cover  more  than  10,000 
square  miles  of  the  surface  of  Ohio." 

The  work  in  question  contains  a  number  of 
other  facts  which  substantially  agree  with  the 
above.  The  statement  of  the  movement  of  the 
rocks  from  Canada  to  Ohio,  accords  with  that  of 
the  New  York  architect,  that  in  the  excavations 
made  in  the  city  limits,  stones  had  been  found 
which  were  not  known  this  side  of  Lake  Su- 
perior. 

These  strata  and  beds  of  conglomerates  men- 
tioned in  the  geological  formations  of  the  State  of 
Ohio,  covering  many  thousand  square  miles,  are 
composed,  as  the  observer  will  notice,  of  an  ir- 
regular mixture  of  sand,   gravel,    pebbles  and 


I 


I 


206         The  Earth  and  the  World 

cobbles  of  all  sizes.  A  mixture  of  various  colors 
and  materials  all  combined  and  pressed  together, 
is  a  common  rock  strata  named  the  conglomer- 
ates. Upon  examination  the  observer  will  find 
that  the  materials,  the  sand,  gravel,  pebbles  and 
cobbles,  all  have  rounded  surfaces,  and,  in  ap- 
pearance, are  like  the  water- worn  gravel,  pebbles 
and  cobbles  of  the  seashore  and  the  watery  beds 
of  our  fast  running  rivers. 

The  intelligent  observer  will  be  convinced  of 
the  fact  that  these  conglomerates,  found  so  ex- 
tensively over  the  earth,  bear  indubitable  evidence 
that  they  are  all  the  resultant  effects  of  the  action 
of  water;  not  of  water  moving  slowly  along,  but 
of  water  in  rapid  motion;  large  bodies  of  it  mov- 
ing with  such  irresistible  force  as  to  move  large 
rocks  as  well  as  small  stones,  rolling  all  over  and 
over  incessantly,  grinding  them  down,  polishing 
and  pulverizing  all  material,  as  the  earth  shows  it 
was  and  must  have  been  done. 

The  intelligent  reasoner  realizes  from  the  vast 
effects  everywhere  manifest,  that  the  materials 
were  carried  by  moving  bodies  of  water,  com- 
bined probably,  at  some  period,  with  glacial  ice. 

According  to  the  law  of  gravity,  all  material 
being  subject  to  its  power,  as  is  well  known,  the 
element  of  water  would  naturally  lie  inert  in  its 
bed  as  the  ocean's  waters  now  do,  and  could  not 
be  moved  out  of  it  unless  some  superior  power 
or  force  moved  it  out;  and  then  the  extent  and 
force  of  its  movement  would  depend  on  the  ex- 
tent of  the  power  exerted  on  it. 


Modification  of  the  Earth's  Surface  207 


The  earth  bears  abundant  evidence  that  the 
oceans  of  waters  have  been,  time  and  again, 
moved  over  it  swiftly,  as  it  were,  with  great 
force  moving  large  bodies  of  material  from  place 
to  place,  piling  it  up  here  and  there,  even  forcing 
great  bowlders  (as  they  are  sometimes  found) 
high  up  in  the  hills,  and  as  water  has  no  inherent 
power  to  move  itself,  (except  to  take  a  lower 
level)  therefore  some  power  independent  of  it 
must  have  been  called  into  service  to  compel  that 
element  to  do  the  work  that  has  been  done. 

74  The  Moon  by  Moving  the  Waters  was  the 
Effective  Power  that  Modified  the  Face  of  the 
Earth. — The  question  arises,  do  we  know  of  any 
element  of  power  which  if  it  had  been  called 
into  service,  could  have  compelled  water  to  do 
its  bidding.  We  answer,  yes ;  there  is  our  satel- 
lite the  moon,  the  *' Maidservant  of  the  earth," 
that  could  easily  have  performed  all  the  work 
that  has  been  done  in  the  past  ages ;  the  extent 
of  her  power  depending  on  the  distance  she  may 
have  been  from  the  earth  while  revolving  about 
it.  What  has  been  accomplished,  we  hold  is  the 
result  of  her  power  in  accordance  to  the  law  of 
gravitation  when  revolving  about  the  earth.  Even 
now,  at  her  distance  of  240,000  miles,  she  is  doing 
a  great  work  for  us  in  her  influence  over  our  at- 
mosphere, and  her  power  over  the  waters,  as 
manifested  in  the  tides  of  the  ocean. 

It  would  appear  from  facts  exhibited  by  the 
earth,  that,  at  different  periods  in  its  history,  it 
has  passed  through  at  least  two  distinct  condi- 


i\ 


^'i 


t 


t 


208         The  Earth  and  the  World 

tions  in  the  process  of  its  formation,  but  how 
often  repeated,  we  do  not  profess  to  say.  After 
the  earth  was,  or  while  it  was  being  prepared  for 
man,  the  first  condition  would  be  a  comparative 
state  of  rest,  when  the  earth  made  but  one  com- 
plete revolution  on  its  axis  in  probably  not  less 
than  12,000  years,  during  which  time  there  was  a 
luxuriant  growth  of  vegetation,  great  increase  of 
animal  life,  for  the  purpose  of  supplying  the 
earth  with  phosphates  and  other  materials,  also 
during  this  period  of  rest  there  were  large  de- 
posits of  various  salts,  lime,  chalk,  coal,  forma- 
tions of  metals,  and  many  other  items  known  to 
practical  geologists,  as  previously  stated. 

During  this  condition  of  rest,  growth  and  in- 
crease of  important  material  on  the  earth,  it 
would  be  inconsistent  with  the  progress  of  this 
creative  work  to  have  the  moon  revolving  near 
it,  disturbing  and  destroying  the  elements  being 
prepared  for  the  use  of  man.  So,  therefore,  the 
power  of  the  moon  to  modify  and  disturb  the 
face  of  the  earth  was,  we  believe,  held  in  abey- 
ance until  the  time  arrived  for  the  moon  again  to 
do  her  necessary  work. 

If,  in  the  process  of  forming  the  world,  it  was 
the  Creator's  plan  to  do  the  work  named,  is 
there  any  reason  why  He  should  not  direct  the 
orbit  of  the  moon  to  be  made  130,000  or  200,000 
miles  from  the  earth,  instead  of  its  present  dis- 
tance; or  so  made  as  required  to  accomplish  the 
desired  end?  There  was  no  law  against  it. 
Whether  the  moon  was  put  to  service  as  indi- 


Modification  of  the  Earth's  Surface  209 

cated,  or  not,  is  not  a  question  of  morals,  but  of 
utility;  not  a  question  of  unchangeable  law,  con- 
dition, or  proceeding,  but  one  of  expediency  that 
underlies  some  of  God's  ways,  as  well  as  those 
of  men.  Expediency  is  observable  in  Divine 
economy  as  well  as  in  human. 

The  doctrine  we  hold  is  that  the  Creator,  in 
forming  the  earth  and  world,  used  at  times 
special  means  and  forms  of  procedure  to  accom- 
plish desired  ends,  after  the  same  manner,  and 
for  the  same  practical  reasons,  that  He  endowed 
the  element  water  with  special  laws  to  control 
and  adapt  it  for  various  purposes,  ends  and  uses, 
as  necessity  required.  (Note  the  special  laws 
named  in  Chapter  xi.) 

These  special  acts  on  the  part  of  the  Creator  in 
the  formation  of  the  earth,  and  the  endowment 
of  the  world,  are  allied  to  the  doctrine  known  to 
theologians  as  **The  special  acts  of  God's  Provi- 
dence in  the  work  of  redeeming  man." 


I.I       t  Li 
I,       I 


XV 


THE  ACTION  OF  WATER  FURTHER  CONSIDERED 

7^.    A  Topical  Survey  of  all  Sections  of  the 
United  States  Exhibits  the  Effect  of  Moving  Waters 
in  the  Past. — Some  years  ago,  the  writer  was  in- 
terested   in    a  hydraulic  mining    enterprise    in 
Northern  Georgia,  where  a  ditch  or  conduit  for 
conveying  water  to  the  mines  was  constructed 
along  the  top  of  the  hills  and  the  high  ground,  in 
length  some  six  miles  or  more.     In  going  over 
the  route  we  noticed  a  number  of  valleys  starting 
out  from  the  ridge  land,  and  the  impression  was 
received  that,  by  closing  up  some  of  the  valleys 
below  by  small  embankments,  which  seemed 
practicable,  a  number  of  fair-sized  ponds  might 
be  formed,  suitable  for  raising  fish  for  the  benefit 
of  the  people  of  the  country,— the  use  of  the 
water  for  mining  being  required  only  during  the 
day.    The  superintendent  was  directed,  from  the 
New  York  office,  to  close  up  some  of  the  valleys 
by  small  dams  or  embankments  where    most 
practicable,  and  fill  with  water  from  the  conduit 
higher  up.    Word  came  back  that  while  the  val- 
leys starting  out  from  the  ridges  were  all  narrow, 
they  soon  began  to  spread  out  wide  and  dis- 
charge their  waters  into  the  river.    New  ponds 
could  not  be  formed  unless  it  was  by  the  streams 
whose  banks  nature  had  already  adapted  for  that 

aio 


Action  of  Water  Further  Considered  211 

purpose.  The  elevation  of  the  river,  the  Chatta- 
hoochee, at  that  particular  place,  was  about  1,300 
feet  above  the  sea,  it  being  one  of  the  highest 
rivers  in  the  United  States. 

On  considering  the  matter  we  realized  that  the 
moon  had  done  her  work  there  as  well  as  in 
other  parts  of  the  world,  preserving  only  such 
natural  basis  as  may  have  been  designed.  Ex- 
cepting the  Great  Lakes,  whose  waters  fill  natural 
basins  formed  by  the  Creator,  there  is  not  a  lake, 
worthy  of  the  name,  to  be  found  in  all  the  states 
south  of  Lake  Erie,  down  to  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

If  the  moon  had  not,  by  its  power  or  control 
of  the  waters,  dragged  them  over  the  states,  re- 
moving all  obstructions,  opening  up  the  water 
ways,  channels  and  rivers,  giving  them  free 
course  and  so  modifying  the  face  of  the  ground 
that  all  the  waters  would  naturally  find  their  way 
through  the  small  creeks,  channels  and  rivers  to 
the  sea,  then,  there  would  necessarily  have  been 
scattered  over  the  land,  thousands  of  marshes, 
swamps,  quagmires,  ponds  and  small  lakes, 
tending  not  only  to  depreciate  the  value  of  the 
land,  but  making  large  sections  of  the  country  a 
fruitful  source  of  malaria  and  other  noxious  dis- 
eases. 

The  moon  in  her  day  has  had  a  great  work  to 
do  for  the  earth ;  and  she  has  done  it  most  effec- 
tually. She  ought  to  be  greatly  appreciated  for 
her  past  labors,  and  honored  for  the  benefits  the 
earth  now  daily  receives  by  the  faithful  perform- 
ance of  her  work. 


If  I 


J«ti 


212         the  Earth  and  the  World 

There  was  a  time  when  a  privileged  spectator, 
standing  where  he  could  behold  the  mad  rush  of 
the  waters  to  and  fro  over  the  face  of  the  earth, 
regardless  of  consequences,  not  caring  for  aught, 
but  seemingly  beyond  control,  might,  in  his  sur- 
prise and  astonishment,  have  asked  the  moving 
waters,  why  they  were  in  such  haste  to  spread 
and  cover  the  land,  not  regarding  the  rocks  or 
impediments  in  their  way,  undermining  the  hills, 
filling  the  low  places  and  the  valleys,  levelling 
the  face  of  the  earth  and  depositing  over  all  the 
plains  the  materials  which  they  were  carrying. 

He  might  say  "  O  waters,  emblem  of  life  and 
death  to  all  animated  nature,  why  are  ye  so 
troubled,  ever  in  a  state  of  unrest,  changing, 
pushing  and  driving  all  before  you,  this  way  to- 
day, and  to-morrow  returning;  undoing  what 
you  have  done,  never  at  rest,  but  disturbing  the 
very  earth  that  has  found  you  a  bed  in  which 
you  might  quietly  abide  ?    Yet  unceasingly  you 
are  dashing  against  rocks  and  mountain-sides, 
and  rushing  through  gorges  in  mad  haste;  and 
in  your  impetuosity,  and  by  invincible  pressure, 
compelling  stones  and  even  rocks  to  obey  your 
authoritative  command  to  move  on,  and  ever  on." 
There  was  a  time,  as  the  Scriptures  state  (see 
Job  xxxviii.  8-n),  when  God  limited  the  sway 
of  the  great  ocean  of  waters,  when  He  declared 
and  asked  His  servant  Job,  '*Who  shut  up  the 
sea  with  doors,  when  it  brake  forth  as  if  it  had 
issued  out  of  the  womb :  When  I  made  the  cloud 
the  garment  thereof,  and  thick  darkness  a  swad- 


Action  of  Water  Further  Considered  213 

dling  band  for  it,  and  brake  up  for  it  my  decreed 
place,  and  set  bars  and  doors  and  said.  Hitherto 
shalt  thou  come  but  no  further;  and  here  shall 
thy  proud  waves  be  stayed."  By  that  decree  the 
proud  waves  of  the  ocean  of  waters  were  stayed 
in  their  course  and  the  sea  and  the  earth  had  rest. 

y6.  Utility  and  Value  to  the  World  of  the 
Arrangement  of  the  Continents^  Points  of  Land, 
Islands,  Oceans,  Seas,  Lakes  and  Rivers  Over 
the  Face  of  the  Earth. — In  investigating  the  ques- 
tions involved  in  the  formation  of  the  earth  and 
the  world,  we  shall  find  its  physical  geography 
to  be  worthy  of  our  careful  consideration. 

It  is  well  to  inquire  into  the  general  arrange- 
ment of  the  continents,  the  location  of  the  large 
islands,  the  direction  and  extent  of  the  mountain 
ranges,  the  valleys  and  the  plains,  and  observe 
their  average  elevation  above  the  waters;  also 
the  extent,  size  and  location  of  the  ocean-beds, 
the  seas  and  the  basins  of  the  lakes,  and  the 
channels  cut  out  of  the  earth  for  the  rivers;  and 
notice  whether  they  are  all  the  results  of  a  defi- 
nite plan  and  design  on  the  part  of  a  wise  Crea- 
tor, or  whether  they  are  the  effects  of  some  hap- 
hazard chance  results,  produced  after  the  plan  of 
Laplace's  Nebular  Hypothesis,  or  by  any  other 
work  of  chance. 

That  these  arrangements  and  conditions  are 
the  result  of  any  chance  procedure,  we  do  not 
consider  worthy  the  thought  of  any  sensible  man. 

Suppose,  for  instance,  that  the  lines  of  the 
great  Continents  America,  Europe,  Africa  and 


I  n 

I 


214        The  Earth  and  the  World 

Asia,  or  that  the  Eastern  and  Western  Hemis- 
pheres of  the  globe  encircled  the  earth  from  east 
to  west  instead  of  their  present  lines  north  and 
south,  allowing  free  scope  for  the  waters  of  the 
Atlantic  and  Pacific  Oceans  to  move  around  the 
earth  near  the  lines  of  the  equator,  as  they  now 
have  to  move  from  pole  to  pole,  would  not  the 
evident  result  be  a  continuous  current  of  a  large 
body  of  water  moving  around  the  earth's  surface 
near  the  equator,  which  current  would  be  accel- 
erated, both  by  the  centrifugal  force  caused  by 
the  revolution  of  the  earth  near  the  equator,  at 
the  rate  of  1,000  miles  per  hour,  and  also  by  the 
gravity  attraction  of  the  moon  revolving  about 
the  earth. 

Such  a  current  would  be  irresistible.  At  any 
rate  it  would  be  hard  to  contend  with,  when 
necessary  to  sail  against  it ;  and  would  also,  in 
many  ways,  be  destructive  in  its  effects.  These 
boundary  lines  of  the  continents,  and  these  ar- 
rangements over  the  world  of  waters  of  the 
oceans,  are  all  evidences  of  the  wisdom  and 
goodness  of  the  Creator. 

There  are  a  number  of  other  reasons  manifest- 
ing wise  design  on  the  part  of  the  Creator,  some 
of  which  we  will  mention  later.  The  equalizing 
of  the  temperature  of  the  atmosphere  and  the 
water  over  the  globe,  and  their  various  changes, 
are  all-important  and  necessary  for  the  comfort 
and  well-being  of  man  and  beast.  The  develop- 
ment and  increase  of  production  of  vegetable  as 
well  as  animal  life  are  all  part  of  the  effects 


Action  of  Water  Further  Considered  215 

and  results  of  the  present  arrangements  of  the 
oceans,  continents  and  mountain  ranges  of  the 
earth. 

jj.  Why  the  Unequal  Diameter  of  the  Earth 
at  the  Equator  and  the  Poles?— V^t  will  now 
examine  the  important  question,  why  the  un- 
equal diameter  of  the  earth  at  the  equator  and 
the  poles,  and  the  cause  for  the  same,  to  which 
we  have  before  alluded. 

It  is  admitted  by  astronomers  that  our  earth, 
and  also  some  of  the  other  planets,  especially 
Jupiter,  are  flattened  more  or  less  at  their  poles. 
The  question  we  now  ask  is,  whether  this  in- 
equality was  caused  by  design,  to  accomplish  a 
purpose  or  an  important  end;  or  whether  it  was 
wholly  without  design  and  only  the  chance  result 
of  centrifugal  force. 

Camille  Flammarion,  the  author  of  the  **  Popu- 
lar Astronomy,'*  adopts  Laplace's  theory,  the 
**  Nebular  Hypothesis,"  and  states  that  the  planets 
being  flattened  at  their  poles  is  certain  evidence 
of  the  truth  of  that  theory. 

Quoting  Flammarion:  **Let  us  imagine  then 
an  immense  gaseous  mass  placed  in  space.  At- 
traction is  a  force  inherent  in  every  atom  of  mat- 
ter. The  denser  portion  of  this  mass  will  in- 
sensibly attract  toward  it  the  other  parts,  and 
in  the  slow  fall  of  the  more  distant  molecules 
toward  the  more  attractive  region,  a  gentle  motion 
is  produced,  incompletely  directed  toward  the 
centre,  and  soon  involving  the  whole  mass  in  the 
same  motion  of  rotation.    In  turning  it  becomes 


If 


2i6         The  Earth  and  the  World 

flattened  at  the  poles  and  gradually  takes  the 
form  of  an  immense  lens-shaped  mass  of  gas." 

In  other  parts  of  his  "Astronomy"  the  au- 
thor reiterates  the  statement  that  as  some  of  the 
planets  are  flattened  at  their  poles,  it  is  evidence 
of  the  truth  of  Laplace's  ''Nebular  Hypothesis." 
These  reasons,  the  same  as  those  advanced  by 
Laplace,  as  cause  for  the  lesser  diameter  of  the 
earth  at  the  poles,  still  continue  to  be  the  favor- 
ite theory  with  many  writers    on  astronomy. 
Suppose  an  experiment  is  tried.     Procure  a  hol- 
low globe,  from  fifteen  to  eighteen  inches  in 
diameter,  glass,  or  partly  so,  so  as  to  be  able  to 
observe  the  results.    Have  it  so  arranged  and  ad- 
justed that  it  can  be  turned  rapidly  on  its  axis, 
then  fill  it  half  or  nearly  two-thirds  full  of  water,' 
close  up  aperture,  then  turn  rapidly  and  it  will  be 
found  that  the  water  is  filling  all  the  outer  cir- 
cumference of  the  globe,  leaving  the  poles  bare, 
and  if  the  globe  is  turned  very  fast  the  water 
will  not  only  leave  the  poles  bare,  but  the  axis  of 
the  globe  itself  will  be  free  from  water.    If  in 
this  particular,  the  earth  in  its  formation  was 
subject  to  the  control  of  centrifugal  forces  alone, 
its  shape,  instead  of  being  convex  at  the  poles  as 
it  now  is,  would  be  concave. 

Laplace's  theory,  if  it  proves  anything,  proves 
too  much.  According  to  his  view,  the  great 
nebular  mass,  in  order  to  throw  off  a  world,  had 
to  turn  on  its  axis  with  very  great  rapidity. 
Camille  Flammarion  admits  this  when  he  asks 
the  question  (see  ''  Popular  Astronomy,"  p.  72,) 


Action  of  Water  Further  Considered  217 


'*  Will  the  sun  ever  give  birth  to  a  new  world  ? 
This  is  not  probable.  For  this  purpose  it  would 
be  necessary  that  its  rotation  should  be  enor- 
mously accelerated:  it  should  be  219  times  more 
rapid."  According  to  their  theory,  the  sun  itself 
ought  to  have  a  much  greater  equatorial  than 
polar  diameter,  but  instead  of  that,  the  diameters 
of  both  are  the  same:  it  is  a  perfect  sphere:  as- 
tronomers state  that  no  difference  can  be  per- 
ceived. 

The  planet  Jupiter  shows,  in  proportion,  much 
greater  inequality  in  its  equatorial  and  polar  di- 
ameters than  does  our  earth.  The  equatorial  di- 
ameter of  Jupiter  is  about  87,500  miles,  while  its 
polar  diameter  is  only  about  82,500  miles.  It 
turns  on  its  axis  in  a  very  short  time,  its  day  be- 
ing only  ten  hours.  The  speed  of  Jupiter  at  the 
equator  is  about  twenty-seven  times  greater  than 
our  earth.  All  these  differences  in  the  size, 
weight,  and  rapidity  of  movements  of  the  several 
planets,  were  doubtless  made  by  the  Creator,  and 
adjusted  so  perfectly  as  to  meet  every  require- 
ment of  the  conditions  of  the  several  planets. 

Admitting  it  to  be  a  fact,  as  the  astronomers 
state,  and  which  we  accept  as  a  truth,  that  there 
is  an  inequality  in  the  diameter  of  the  earth  at  the 
equator  and  at  the  poles,  we  reason  that  this  was 
not  only  known  by  the  wise  Creator,  but  was 
specially  designed  by  Him  for  a  good  cause,  and 
to  accomplish  wise  and  beneficent  ends. 

We  find  on  examination  that  one  design  and 
object  of  the  particular  and  measured  inequality 


i  'i 


ti  ] 


n 


'! 


2i8        The  Earth  and  the  World 

of  the  equatorial  and  polar  diameters  of  the  earth, 
was  evidently  to  regulate  and  equalize,  to  a  cer- 
tain degree,  the  temperature  of  both  air  and  wa- 
ter the  wide  world  over ;  together  with  other 
beneficial  results  tending  to  advance  the  comfort 
and  welfare  of  the  human  race  and  of  everything 
that  has  breath  or  life  in  the  world. 

The  question  is,  by  what  means  are  these  grand 
results  accomplished,  or  how  are  the  changes  ef- 
fected ?    We  answer,  by  the  simple  operation  of 
two  forces  of  nature:— specific  gravity  on  the  one 
part,  and  centrifugal  force  on  the  other,— aided 
by  the  ocean  of  waters  that  convey  the  heat,  to- 
gether with  the  designed  conformation  of  the 
continents  and  mountain  ranges  that  direct  the 
currents.    We  find  that  the  earth,  in  its  diurnal 
revolution  at  the  equator,  as  is  well  known, 
passes  through  space  at  the  rate  of  i, coo  miles 
per  hour,  while  at  the  poles  it  is  practically  at  a 
standstill;  or  say  loo  miles  per  hour  when  dis- 
tant from  the  poles  about  i,ooo  miles.    The  nat- 
ural tendency  and  effect  of  this  rapid  motion  is 
to  cause  all  material  to  move  toward  the  equator. 
This  effect  is  made  manifest  by  the  movement  of 
the  air  and  the  water,  especially  the  latter,  to- 
ward the  equator;  and  the  water  would  continue 
to  be,  as  it  were,  piled  up  there,  were  it  not  for 
the  force  of  another  natural  law,  ''specific  grav- 
ity." 

Gravity  is  a  constituent  attribute  of  matter  that 
so  far  counteracts  centrifugal  force  as  to  influence 
and  compel  the  water  to  return  to  the  poles  as 


Action  of  Water  Further  Considered  219 


naturally  as  if  it  were  running  down  hill,  which, 
practically,  it  is  doing;  for  evidence  of  which, 
notice  the  Gulf  Stream  passing  through  the  Atlan- 
tic Ocean  to  the  northeast;  and,  in  the  Pacific, 
the  stream  of  water  that  washes  the  western 
coast  of  North  America,  raising  greatly  the  tem- 
perature of  that  coast,  even  up  to  the  high  lati- 
tudes. 

The  natural  law,  the  cause  and  effect  control- 
ling this  important  matter,  is  in  substance  stated 
in  scientific  works  thus:  **  Weight  of  a  material 
is  downward  pressure  due  to  gravity,  diminished 
by  the  centrifugal  force  due  to  the  earth's  rota- 
tion. The  weight  of  any  body  is  increased  about 
jh  hy  removal  from  the  equator  to  the  poles. 
The  force  of  gravity  at  the  earth's  surface  in- 
creases northward  or  southward  from  the  equator 
toward  the  poles." 

It  has  been  ascertained  that  the  equatorial  di- 
ameter of  the  earth  is  about  twenty-eight  to  thirty 
miles  greater  than  its  polar  diameter.  According 
to  natural  laws,  this  inequality  in  the  diameters 
was  required  in  order  that  the  increased  gravity 
at  the  poles  should  exactly  counterbalance  the 
centrifugal  force  of  the  movable  elements  at  the 

equator. 

This  interchange  of  the  elements,  especially  of 
water  from  the  poles  of  the  earth  to  the  equator, 
and  back  from  the  equator  to  the  poles,— which 
interchange  is  not  always  perceived— was  neces- 
sary in  order  to  keep  the  requisite  movement  of 
the  air  and  water  encircling  the  earth,  in  a  con- 


'*!  '  i 


n 


220         The  Earth  and  the  World 

dition  to  make  a  proper  distribution  of  its  heat, 
and  maintain  that  wonderful  equalization  of 
temperature  the  world  over,  known  and  appre- 
ciated by  all  intelligent  men. 

The  water  warmed  in  the  Torrid  Zone,  was  in- 
fluenced to  proceed  to  the  Temperate  and  Frigid 
Zones,  distributing  its  heat  to  the  colder  regions 
on  its  way;  melting  the  ice,  and  driving  away 
the  freezing  atmosphere,  giving  renewed  life  to 
the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms  in  all  these 
cold  regions;  modifying  the  climate  of  England 
and  all  Northwestern  Europe,  away  up  to  the 
Arctic  Seas,  thereby  making  the  climate  of  those 
northern  regions  not  only  comfortable,  but  de- 
lightful. 

So  also,  in  the  wide  Pacific  Ocean,  there  are 
many  interchanging  currents  that  equalize  the 
temperature  of  that  hemisphere;  how  many,  and 
where,  we  do  not  profess  to  know.  But  there  is 
one  well  known  to  the  people  in  the  western 
part  of  the  United  States,  and  that  is  the  one 
running  up  the  western  coast  of  North  America, 
that  modifies  the  temperature  of  that  coast,  mak- 
ing it  comfortable,  during  part  of  the  year,  even 
in  the  high  latitude  of  Alaska. 

If  there  are  currents  of  water  ever  passing  from 
south  to  the  north,  it  is  evident  that  there  must 
be  currents  from  the  north  to  the  south  restoring 
the  equilibrium.  The  currents  tending  to  the 
south  are  not  so  apparent,  nor  so  well  known. 
The  icebergs  of  the  North  float  away  to  the 
South,  and  it  is  said  to  be  in  evidence  that  there 


Action  of  Water  Further  Considered  221 


are  cold  undercurrents  of  the  ocean  passing  from 
the  poles  to  the  equator,  particularly  in  the  upper 
latitudes.  It  is  also  in  evidence  that  the  cool  cur- 
rents of  the  sea  do  so  temper  the  hot  atmosphere 
of  the  Torrid  Zone  that  it  is  kept  in  compara- 
tively comfortable  condition,  so  that,  in  many  of 
the  West  India  Islands,  the  summer  heat  does  not 
exceed  that  of  the  city  of  New  York. 

In  this  distribution  of  the  heat,  and  equalization 
of  the  temperature  of  the  world,  water  is  found 
to  be  most  wonderfully  adapted  for  this  work. 
It  may  be  well  to  remember  some  of  its  attributes 
as  mentioned,  when  reading  about  that  element, 
in  the  earlier  sections  of  this  work. 

Take  another  view  of  this  question.  Suppose 
the  Earth  was  a  perfect  sphere,  its  diameter  at  the 
poles  equal  to  that  of  the  equator;  and  there  was 
a  full  supply  of  water  sufficient  to  cover  the  polar 
extremities  of  the  earth,  as  they  are  now  sup- 
posed to  be ;  and  that  the  earth  revolved  on  its 
axis  at  its  present  velocity,  which  at  the  equator 
is  1,000  miles  per  hour;  the  effect,  according  to 
the  law  of  centrifugal  force,  would  be  to  draw 
this  extra  amount  of  water,  required  to  cover  this 
large  addition  made  to  the  earth's  surface,  and 
pile  the  water  up  in  the  equatorial  regions, 
drowning  out  the  present  cities,  and  even  cover- 
ing some  of  the  mountains. 

Or,  suppose  the  diameter  of  the  earth  was 
everywhere  equal,  and  that  the  supply  of  water 
was  as  it  is  now,  and  no  more;  the  centrifugal 
force  would  distribute  and  keep  the  supply  of 


'I    II 


222        The  Earth  and  the  World 

water  as  it  is  now,  but  the  polar  extremities 
would  be  without  water,  and  the  earth  would  be 
sailing  around  the  sun  *'  under  bare  poles." 

Besides,  these  poles  being  deprived  of  the 
warm  currents  of  water  from  the  equator,  would 
be,  and  continue  to  be,  in  an  icy  cold  condi- 
tion, a  nuisance  and  a  detriment  to  the  inhabit- 
ants of  the  world  at  large. 

Unbelievers  might  say,  in  such  a  case,  that  the 
Creator  had  made  a  blunder.  For  these  and 
other  reasons,  we  therefore  maintain  that  the  un- 
equal diameter  of  the  earth  at  its  equator  and 
poles  manifests  a  perfect  design  on  the  part  of 
the  Creator,  and  is  an  evidence  of  His  wisdom 
and  goodness. 

The  sum  of  the  matter  would  therefore  appear 
to  be,  that  the  result  of  the  unequal  equatorial 
and  Polar  diameters  of  the  earth,  is  the  unequal 
specific  gravity  of  its  materials  at  the  equator  and 
the  poles. 

The  consequent  effect  of  this,  together  with  an 
extensive  dissimilar  degree  of  heat  at  those  places, 
is  a  constant  interchange  of  the  movable  ele- 
ments of  the  earth  between  the  poles  and  the 
equator,  the  value  of  which,  to  all  animate  and  in- 
animate nature,  cannot  be  estimated.  Who  will 
say  that  all  this  is  due  to  chance,  and  not  to 
careful  design  ? 

There  is  a  greater  difference  between  the  equa- 
torial and  polar  diameters  of  the  planet  Jupiter, 
than  that  of  any  of  the  other  planets  belonging  to 
our  solar  system.    This  planet,  as  is  known,  is 


Action  of  Water  Further  Considered  223 

the  largest  in  our  system.  It  is  about  1,200  times 
larger  than  our  earth.  Its  rotation  on  its  axis  at 
the  equator  is  about  25,000  miles  per  hour,  turn- 
ing as  fast,  then,  in  one  hour,  as  our  earth  does  in 
twenty-four.  Such  great  rapidity  of  its  rotation 
would  evidently  require  the  great  difference  that 
exists  in  the  equatorial  and  polar  diameters  to 
counterbalance  the  centrifugal  force  manifested 
at  the  equator,  in  order  to  preserve  all  the  ele- 
ments in  their  state  and  place,  as  designed  by  the 
Maker  of  the  planets.  Doubtless  all  the  condi- 
tions required  to  preserve  the  equilibrium,  and 
perfect  every  interest  of  the  planet  Jupiter  under 
all  circumstances,  has  been  abundantly  provided 
for  by  its  Creator. 

The  Scriptures  state  that  **  God  Himself  formed 
the  earth  and  made  it,"  and  they  also  give  many 
graphic  descriptions  of  His  handiwork,  but  such  a 
statement  as  the  following  recorded  in  Isa.  xl.  12, 
we  once  considered  rather  a  hyperbolic  statement, 
but  now  find  the  record  was,  and  is,  absolutely 
true.  '*Who  hath  measured  the  waters  in  the 
hollow  of  His  hand,  and  meted  out  the  heavens 
with  the  span,  and  comprehended  the  dust  of 
the  earth  in  a  measure,  and  weighed  the  moun- 
tains in  scales,  and  the  hills  in  the  balance?" 
The  grand  and  orderly  result  of  the  earth  in  its 
course  year  by  year  about  the  sun,  and  the  exact 
time  in  which  it  is  performed,  and  also  in  its 
daily  revolution  on  its  axis  ;  the  regularity  of  the 
seasons,  and  all  its  movements,  prove  the  truth 
of  the  Scripture  statement. 


222         The  Earth  and  the  World 


water  as  it  is  now,  but  the  polar  extremities 
would  be  without  water,  and  the  earth  would  be 
sailing  around  the  sun  "under  bare  poles." 

Besides,  these  poles  being  deprived  of  the 
warm  currents  of  water  from  the  equator,  would 
be,  and  continue  to  be,  in  an  icy  cold  condi- 
tion, a  nuisance  and  a  detriment  to  the  inhabit- 
ants of  the  world  at  large. 

Unbelievers  might  say,  in  such  a  case,  that  the 
Creator  had  made  a  blunder.  For  these  and 
other  reasons,  we  therefore  maintain  that  the  un- 
equal diameter  of  the  earth  at  its  equator  and 
poles  manifests  a  perfect  design  on  the  part  of 
the  Creator,  and  is  an  evidence  of  His  wisdom 
and  goodness. 

The  sum  of  the  matter  would  therefore  appear 
to  be,  that  the  result  of  the  unequal  equatorial 
and  Polar  diameters  of  the  earth,  is  the  unequal 
specific  gravity  of  its  materials  at  the  equator  and 
the  poles. 

The  consequent  effect  of  this,  together  with  an 
extensive  dissimilar  degree  of  heat  at  those  places, 
is  a  constant  interchange  of  the  movable  ele- 
ments of  the  earth  between  the  poles  and  the 
equator,  the  value  of  which,  to  all  animate  and  in- 
animate nature,  cannot  be  estimated.  Who  will 
say  that  all  this  is  due  to  chance,  and  not  to 
careful  design  ? 

There  is  a  greater  difference  between  the  equa- 
torial and  polar  diameters  of  the  planet  Jupiter, 
than  that  of  any  of  the  other  planets  belonging  to 
our  solar  system.    This  planet,  as  is  known,  is 


Action  of  Water  Further  Considered  223 

the  largest  in  our  system.  It  is  about  1,200  times 
larger  than  our  earth.  Its  rotation*  on  its  axis  at 
the  equator  is  about  25,000  miles  per  hour,  turn- 
ing as  fast,  then,  in  one  hour,  as  our  earth  does  in 
twenty-four.  Such  great  rapidity  of  its  rotation 
would  evidently  require  the  great  difference  that 
exists  in  the  equatorial  and  polar  diameters  to 
counterbalance  the  centrifugal  force  manifested 
at  the  equator,  in  order  to  preserve  all  the  ele- 
ments in  their  state  and  place,  as  designed  by  the 
Maker  of  the  planets.  Doubtless  all  the  condi- 
tions required  to  preserve  the  equilibrium,  and 
perfect  every  interest  of  the  planet  Jupiter  under 
all  circumstances,  has  been  abundantly  provided 
for  by  its  Creator. 

The  Scriptures  state  that  **  God  Himself  formed 
the  earth  and  made  it,"  and  they  also  give  many 
graphic  descriptions  of  His  handiwork,  but  such  a 
statement  as  the  following  recorded  in  Isa.  xl.  12, 
we  once  considered  rather  a  hyperbolic  statement, 
but  now  find  the  record  was,  and  is,  absolutely 
true.  '*Who  hath  measured  the  waters  in  the 
hollow  of  His  hand,  and  meted  out  the  heavens 
with  the  span,  and  comprehended  the  dust  of 
the  earth  in  a  measure,  and  weighed  the  moun- 
tains in  scales,  and  the  hills  in  the  balance?" 
The  grand  and  orderly  result  of  the  earth  in  its 
course  year  by  year  about  the  sun,  and  the  exact 
time  in  which  it  is  performed,  and  also  in  its 
daily  revolution  on  its  axis  ;  the  regularity  of  the 
seasons,  and  all  its  movements,  prove  the  truth 
of  the  Scripture  statement. 


XVI 

CHEMICAL  CHANGES  IN  EARTH'S  MATERIAL 

78.    Evidence  of  Great  Chemical  Changes  in 
Earth's  Material.— A  score  of  years  ago,  while 
visiting  the  work  of  some  miners  digging  up  the 
gravel  and  washing  the  same  in  a  sluice-box  to 
gather  the  gold  it  contained,  1  noticed  that  they 
did  not  dig  below  a  certain  level  of  what  appeared 
a  greyish  earth  or  clay.    I  inquired  why  they  did 
not  go  deeper  and  perhaps  come  to  more  of  the 
gold-bearing  earth.     They  replied  that  they  were 
down  to  the  slate,  or  rotten  granite,  as  they  called 
it,  and  that  there  was  no  gravel  below.     I  replied 
that  that  was  only  a  mixture  of  greyish  earth  or 
clay,  and  they  were  told  to  go  down  deeper, 
some  four  or  five  feet  at  least,  and  see  if  there 
was  not  more  gravel.     At  my  direction  they  dug 
down,  and,  after  a  while,  noticing  the  condition 
and  realizing  in  a  measure  the  situation  and  the 
facts,  they  were  directed  to  go  on  and  mine  as 
they  thought    best ;    they  informing   me   that 
"that  condition  was  common  in  this  country." 
Turning   aside,    I    contemplated   with    surprise 
what  powerful  agents  the  Creator  must  have 
employed  during  a  long  period,  by  which  miles 
of  ''flinty  rocks"  were  made  as  soft  as  "miry 
clay." 

In  considering  that  matter  some  years  after- 

224 


I 


V 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth's  Material  225 

ward,  it  appeared  to  me  to  be  a  fact  that  the 
beds  of  gravel  lying  spread  over  the  ground  in 
that  condition,  were  the  result,  and  bore  the 
effects  of  water  in  motion;  running  and  breaking 
up  the  quartz,  making  the  water-worn  gravel, 
and  depositing  it  over  the  surface  of  the  then 
undecomposed  rocks. 

This  being  so  it  would  naturally  follow  that  the 
rock  over  which  the  water  ran,  and  over  which 
the  gravel  was  deposited,  was,  and  must  then 
have  been,  in  its  hard  undecomposed,  condition, 
otherwise  the  gravel  would  have  been  mixed 
with  the  soft  material;  but  as  there  was  a  distinct 
line  of  separation  of  the  materials,  it  is  evident 
that  the  rock  basis  was  decomposed  after,  and 
not  before,  the  deposit  of  the  gravel. 

It  might  be  well  for  geologists  to  inquire  into 
this  matter,  as  it  may  assist  them  in  fixing  the 
comparative  date  of  some  of  nature's  operations; 
especially  when   gold  was  deposited  in  some 

sections. 

As  this  incident  relative  to  the  decomposed 
granite  occurred  nearly  twenty  years  ago,  I 
thought  best  to  confirm  my  impressions,  and  so 
wrote  to  Mr.  Charles  R.  demons,  who  for  many 
years  has  had  charge  of  the  property,  and  the 
folowing  is  his  letter  in  reply. 

«  The  Glades,  Hall  Co.,  Ga.,  July  6th,  1898. 
"  A.  G.  Jennings,  Esq., 
"  Dear  Sir  : 

"  In  regard  to  your  question  on  gravel,  would  state  that 
in  the  Glade  Branch,  Stockeneter,  and  in  every  branch  on  the 


226         The  Earth  and  the  World 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth's  Material  227 


Glade  properties  where  gold  has  been  washed,  under  the  gravel 
is  found  decomposed  granite  or  gneiss,  which  is  found  from  five 
to  fifty  feet  and  more  below  the  surface  soil.  In  the  Glade 
Branch  it  is  more  than  fifty  feet.  In  the  Stockeneter  and  Dry 
Hollow  and  Still  House  Branch,  it  is  from  five  to  ten  feet,  im- 
mediately on  the  granite,  etc.,  rests  the  gold  gravel.  The 
granite  and  gneiss  is  decomposed  in  many  places  fifty  feet  more 
or  less.     It  then  becomes  hard  and  continues  so. 

"  I  think  you  are  right  concerning  the  gravel  deposits.  They 
must  have  been  deposited  by  the  action  of  running  water  on 
solid  granite  or  gneiss  foundations,  and  therefore  the  decompo- 
sition of  those  rocks,  as  you  say,  must  have  occurred  afterward. 
The  round  water-worn  gravel  confirms  the  action  of  water  in 
some  way.  That  the  foundation  rocks  were  firm  and  solid  is 
evidenced  from  the  fact  that  the  gravel  rests  upon  them,  and  is 
not  imbedded  in  them.  Had  the  foundation  been  in  a  state  of 
decomposition  at  the  time  the  gravel  was  deposited,  a  con- 
glomeration of  granite  and  quartz  gravel  would  have  been  the 
result.  But  there  is  no  such  conglomeration,  but  a  distinct 
line  marks  where  the  gravel  ends  and  the  decomposed  granite 
begins.* 


t* 


Mr.  demons  is  an  intelligent  English  gentle- 
man of  high  reputation.  During  the  Sepoy  war 
in  India  about  1855,  ^^  ^^s  in  the  employment 
of  the  East  India  Company,  and  a  Governor  of 
one  of  the  Provinces  of  India.  On  the  transfer 
of  the  power  and  interest  of  the  East  India  Com- 
pany to  the  British  Government,  he  came  to 
America. 

79.  Local  Evidence  of  Great  Age  of  The 
Glades,  Hall  County ,  Ga, — In  our  investigations 
we  have  not  paid  particular  attention  to  the  differ- 
ent geological  ages,  as  they  have  been  described 
more  or  less  distinctly  by  geologists  and  recorded 


I;!: 


in  their  works  ;  not  considering  it  important  in 
this  work  to  regard  those  periods,  but  noticing 
that  Dr.  Dana  and  other  geologists  in  their  pub- 
lications state  that  the  earliest  age  of  the  earth,  of 
which  there  are  marked  geological  manifestations, 
is  what  has  been  named  the  "Archaean  Age" 
and  by  others  the  '*  Azoic  Age,"  and  not  expect- 
ing ever  to  see  any  evidence  in  nature  of  the  so- 
called  far-off  age,  the  writer  paid  little  or  no  at- 
tention to  these  items;  but  noticing  more  par- 
ticularly in  Dr.  Dana's  works  that  granite,  gneiss, 
graphite,  the  diamond,  and  some  other  materials, 
were  all  evidences  of  the  remote  period  called 
the  "Archaean  Age,"  we  realized  then  that  all 
the  evidences  of  the  so-called  "Archaean  Age" 
of  the  earth, — were  in  that  ten  square  miles  of 
earth  of  the  Glade  property  ;  that  they  contained 
the  oldest  known  elements  on  the  globe,  though 
we  do  not  believe  at  all  that  they  are  the  foun- 
dation materials  of  the  earth. 

We  note  some  of  the  items  as  follows:  There 
is  one  small  stream  of  water  that  falls  over  a 
rock  100  feet  high,  then  runs  through  the  prop- 
erty some  four  miles,  discharging  its  water 
into  the  Chattahoochee  River,  which  at  that 
point  is  some  twelve  hundred  feet  above  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico,  into  which  its  water  flows. 
Another  small  stream  on  the  property  falls  over 
rocks  some  sixty  feet  high.  The  mass  of  rocks 
over  which  these  streams  fall  were  believed  to  be 
granite,  but  geologists  and  experts  in  New  York 
say  the  rock  is  gneiss,  one  of  the  primitive  rocks 


228         The  Earth  and  the  World 

as  supposed.  In  washing  the  gravel  on  the 
property  for  gold,  a  few  diamonds  have  been 
found.  On  one  part  of  the  property  the  itacolu- 
mite,  or  flexible  sandstone  abounds.  The 
graphite  is  also  found  on  part  of  the  property  in 
various  conditions:  also  manganese  of  good 
quality,  and  lately  it  is  found  in  a  decomposed 
condition,  making  the  umber  or  fine  dark  mineral 
paint.  Yellow  ochre  also  abounds.  In  one 
place  the  yellow  ochre  can  be  seen  in  the  form 
of  the  original  vein  of  iron  ore,  which  has  been 
wholly  or  partly  decomposed:  also  quartz, 
crystals,  and  garnets.  In  washing  for  gold,  the 
monosite  appears.  There  are  fine  clays,  fire- 
clays, kaolin,  materials  for  pottery  or  porcelain 
ware,  and  other  minerals  in  small  quantities  not 
mentioned. 

If  some  of  these  items  are  evidences  of  the 
"Archaean  Age,"  then  The  Glades  may  claim  to 
be  very,  very  old  in  years,  and  have  witnessed, 
during  the  long  ages,  the  many  changes  through 
which  our  earth  has  passed.^ 

'Some  twenty  years  or  more  ago,  The  Glades  and  its  imme- 
diate vicinity  was  visited,  and  its  physical  character  and  sur- 
roundings examined  and  noted  by  Prof.  H.  Carvell  Lewis,  then 
a  young  geologist,  who  afterward  attained  a  high  position  in  his 
profession,  and  was  loved  and  honored  by  those  who  knew  him. 

In  the  Spring  of  1888,  on  the  eve  of  visiting  Europe,  in 
pursuance  of  his  geological  researches,  Prof.  Lewis  again 
visited  The  Glades  to  examine  more  particularly  its  geological 
surroundings  and  to  verify  certain  evidences  of  the  matrix  of 
the  diamond  and  other  items.  He  soon  left  for  England  where 
after  a  short  and  severe  illness  he  died. 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth's  Material  ^29 

80,  Electricity,  Some  Idea  of  its  Nature,  Power 
and  Effects,— E\tcXnc\\y  is  in  many  respects  the 
most  mysterious  and  wonderful  element  that 
prevails  in  our  solar  system;  and,  in  all  proba- 
bility, in  the  universe.  This  mysterious  element, 
though  unseen  and  imponderable,  is  ubiquitous, 
moving  with  the  velocity  of  light,  possessing 
great  energy  and  power,  and  doing  work  that 
cannot  be  measured,  realized  or  understood. 
This  element,  or  force,  when  in  an  accumulated 
condition,  and  not  under  control,  is  destructive 
of  life  and  property,  like  a  flood  of  waters  break- 
ing away  suddenly  from  its  confining  banks  or 
pouring  down  from  the  heavens  above.  This 
singular  element  does,  in  some  respects,  resemble 
the  Spirit,  and  manifest  the  power  of  the  Most 
High.  There  is  no  place  where  it  is  not  found; 
but  everywhere  there  is  evidence  of  its  presence 
and  the  work  it  has  performed. 

Almost  every  day  of  late,  there  has  been  some 
new  development  of  its  power,  and  of  the  va- 
rious uses  and  purposes  to  which  it  may  be  ap- 
plied. To  very  many  it  would  appear  that 
electricity  was  a  new  force  discovered  in  this 
generation.  When  we  consider  its  rapid  devel- 
opment, and  its  applied  uses  in  many  arts  and 
industries  of  the  day,  one  is  astonished  at  the 
grand  results  achieved  and  the  immense  value  of 
electricity  to  the  world.  This  unique  element  is 
subject  to  singular  though  exact  laws,  peculiarly 
adapted  to  its  nature,  and  also  to  its  apparent 
freedom  from  many  other  natural  laws.    It  mani- 


230         The  Earth  and  the  World 

fests  the  inscrutable  wisdom  and  power  of  the 
Almighty. 

The  nature,  extent  and  limitation  of  the  laws 
that  govern  it  have  now  been  pretty  well  as- 
certained, and  are  quite  well  understood  by  the 
electricians.  As  the  railway  car  requires  the  iron 
track  on  which  to  move,  so  this  element  requires 
the  conducting  wire  in  many  of  its  operations, 
through  which,  or  by  means  of  which,  it  does  its 
work  or  tells  its  story. 

This  wonderful  element  moves  through  its 
conductors  with  inconceivable  velocity,  doing  its 
work  according  to  its  potency.  While  air,  gas, 
steam,  or  water,  in  passing  through  their  con- 
ducting pipes,  agitate,  and  if  not  securely  fas- 
tened, move  them;  electricity,  unlike  any  of  these 
other  elements,  passes  through  its  conductors 
instantaneously  without  apparent  agitation,  or 
without  giving  sensible  information  of  its  pas- 
sage. In  some  of  these  respects,  and  in  many 
others,  we  have  no  knowledge  of  any  element 
like  it  in  the  universe. 

Electricity  is  undoubtedly  the  energetic  power, 
or  working  element,  of  our  solar  system.  Like 
heat  and  light  it  is  generated  in  the  sun,  and 
thrown  off  by  it;  and  the  earth,  requiring  its 
life-giving  influence,  attracts  this  element  to  it- 
self; and,  doubtless,  a  large  portion  of  the  ele- 
ments named  are  brought  to  the  earth  in  lines 
converging  with  it,  and  thereby  much  is  saved 
that  otherwise  would  be  lost  in  space. 
Electricity,  we  believe,  is  the  influence  that  en- 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth's  Material  231 

ergizes  all  living  things  on  the  earth,  animal  and 
vegetable;  the  life-giving  influences  of  the  light 
and  heat  that  emanate  from  the  sun,  producing, 
doubtless,  other  effects  besides  those  that  have 
been  observed. 

For  a  long  time  we  have  held  the  opinion  that 
the  particular  degree  of  electricity  in  the  atmos- 
phere had  some  part  or  connection  with  the  de- 
gree of  heat,  humidity,  cold,  or  moisture  regis- 
tered in  the  atmosphere;  and  we  have  therefore 
hoped  that  the  Government  observatories  would 
be  directed  to  prepare  appliances  for  measuring 
and  recording,  from  day  to  day,  the  amount  of 
electricity  in  the  atmosphere,  as  they  do  the  tem- 
perature, humidity  or  pressure. 

Some  time  since  in  talking  with  a  friend  over 
the  long  distance  telephone,  the  question  and  an- 
swer from  the  familiar  voice  followed  each  other 
instantaneously.     According    to   the   old    rule, 
sound  travelled  through  the  atmosphere  about 
1,100  feet  per  second.     But  over  the  telephone, 
question  and  answer  were  immediate;  the  sound 
travelling  when  driven  through  the  conductor  by 
the  electric  current,  instantaneously,  or  as  fast  as 
light  comes  to  us  from  the  sun.     It  is  evident 
that  it  was  the  current  of  electricity  that  trans- 
mitted the  sound  through  the  telephone  wires. 
If  the  force  or  energy  of  electricity  transmits  or 
carries  sound  in  its  instantaneous  movements, 
why  may  not  this  force,  that  proceeds  from  the 
sun,  also  carry  light  and  heat  ?    We  say,  why 
may  it  not  be  the  force  that  transmits  to  the  earth 


232         The  Earth  and  the  World 

and  to  all  other  bodies  in  the  universe  these  other 
imponderable  elements.  What  element  is  so  well 
qualified,  constituted,  fitted,  or  capable'of  doing 
this  work,  as  the  mysterious  force  of  electricity  ? 
We  do  not  hold  to  the  wave  theory  for  the 
transmission  of  light  and  heat  from  the  sun. 
When  one,  standing  in  an  open  country  place, 
notices  the  sun  is  hidden  from  view  by  a  far  dis- 
tant cloud,  he  notices  also  that  the  instant  the 
cloud  passes  and  the  light  of  the  sun  breaks  upon 
his  sight,  that  instant  his  face  feels  its  warmth. 

It  might  be  said  of  sound  that  it  is  an  effect, 
while  light  and  heat  are  conditions,  and  the  force 
of  electricity  has  control  of  all  three;  but  as  for 
gravity,  that  is  a  quality  or  attribute.  It  stands 
alone:  it  is  independent. 

That  electricity  everywhere  prevades  this  earth, 
and  cannot  by  any  means  be  exhausted,  any 
more  than  the  ocean  can  be  exhausted  of  its 
waters,  is  evident.  Also  that,  in  some  manner, 
electricity  enters  largely  and  continuously  in  the 
operations  of  nature  in  a  far  greater  degree  than 
man  can  realize,  must  be  evident. 

This  inscrutable  power,  or  force,  is  under  the 
control  of,  and  subject  to,  the  perfect  laws  its 
Creator  has  made  for  it.  As  previously  stated, 
we  believe  the  God  of  order  has  provided  for  this 
elementary  force,  and  for  the  control  and  wise 
distribution  of  its  power  and  influence,  a  system 
of  conduits  or  conductors,  large  and  small, 
adapted  to  the  work  required  to  be  performed* 
and  that  these  conduits  are  below  the  surface  of 


1 


? 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth*s  Material  233 

the  earth,  as  the  arteries  and  veins  of  man  are 
below  the  skin ;  placed  there  both  for  protection, 
and  to  promote  their  beneficial  use.  There  is  a 
perfect  arterial  system  of  electricity.  The  intelli- 
gent observer  of  our  day  is  assured  that  the  Crea- 
tor has  made  every  provision  necessary  to  perfect 
the  system,  and  increase  the  utility,  of  this  won- 
derful element  which  heretofore,  has  been  prac- 
tically unknown. 

Electrical  energy  and  influence  is,  we  believe, 
manifested  in  small  things,  in  quiet  and  imper- 
ceptible ways,  as  well  as  when,  generated  in  the 
thundercloud,  it  passes  down  to  the  earth,  cleav- 
ing the  atmosphere  with  its  flaming  stroke  and 
crashing  report. 

It  ajso  performs  some  very  fine  work,  such  as 
making  the  fog  and  the  rain  clouds  to  float  in  the 
air  and  sky  above  us,  by  making  the  tiny  cells, 
vacuum  cells,  or  cells  free  from  atmospheric  air, 
which  give  them  their  buoyancy,  and  cause  them 
to  float  in  the  sky. 

Elihu,  in  his  argument  with  Job  (see  Job  xxxvii. 
16)  asked  him  and  said,  *'Dost  thou  know  the 
balancings  of  the  clouds  ?"  Of  course  Elihu  did 
not  know;  as  for  Job,  he  was  not,  just  then,  in- 
terested. 

Doubtless  the  cloud-forming  cells  are  vacuum 
cells,  free  from  air,  without  power  to  transmit 
light  and  heat,  and  so  constituted  that  the  cells 
may  even  run  into  each  other  before  the  rain  de- 
scends, without  destroying  their  vacuity.  When 
they  are  in  a  body,  or  when  there  is  a  cloud  of 


234         The  Earth  and  the  World 

them,  they  are,  as  is  known,  impervious  to  the 
light  and  heat  of  the  sun. 

Concerning  the  earthquakes,  which  occasion- 
ally happen,  and  in  past  ages  have  prevailed  over 
the  earth,  we  believe,  and  have  long  held  to  the 
theory,   that  they  were  primarily  due    to    the 
agency  and  irresistible  power  of  electricity.  When 
electricity  is  accumulated  under  the  surface  of 
the  earth  and  its  free  discharge  or  its  circulation 
is  suddenly  interrupted,  then  of  course  some- 
thing must  happen,   some  change  will  come; 
there  will  be  a  shaking  up,  a  catastrophe,  the 
extent  and  importance  of  which  will  depend  not 
only  on  the  strength  of  the  current  severed,  but 
upon  its  free  connection  with  other  currents,  con- 
ductors or  conduits  arranged  around  the  globe. 
A  very  short  time  is  required  for  the  electric  cur- 
rents to  fly  around  the  world.     If  the  supply  is 
continued  and  the  current  strong,  then  there  will 
be  not  only  great  perturbation,  but  heat  will  be 
generated  and  accumulated.     Great  heat  will  con- 
sume anything  combustible.    The  greatest  heat 
that  is  known  is  electrical  heat;  and  it  will  melt 
anything  that  can  be  melted.    This  electric  fire 
will  continue  to  burn,  consume,  melt  and  de- 
stroy, even  in  confined  places  deep  down  in  the 
earth,  where  fire,  requiring  air,  oxygen,  or  any 
one  of  the  gases,   will  not  burn;    and  where 
chemical  materials  will  not  consume.    The  irre- 
pressible fire  fed  by  the  electric  current  is  the 
only  one  that  accounts  for  ail  the  volcanoes  now 
on  the  earth,  or  that  ever  have  been :  for  their 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth's  Material  235 

eruptions  in  the  past,  for  the  tremendous  flow  of 
lava,  melted  minerals,  rocks,  and  everything 
whose  natural  condition  has  been  changed  by  the 
intense  heat  of  the  disturbed  and  broken  cur- 
rents. 

Earthquakes,  it  is  generally  understood,  pre- 
cede the  volcano.     A  *' fault,"  as  geologists  call 
it,  or  a  slip  or  break  in  the  earth's  strata,  may 
occur  from  various  causes;  and  if  this  occurs  at 
a  point  where  there  are  one  or  more  strong  and 
established    currents    of   electricity    below   the 
earth's  surface — a  few  miles  more  or  less — the 
severing  or  breaking  of  the  currents  by  reason  of 
such  fault  or  slip  in  the  strata,  or  the  sundering 
the  current  from  any  other  cause,  known  or  un- 
known, would  create  an  immediate  disturbance 
in  the  neighborhood  of  the  breakage,  by  the  un- 
usual discharge  of  an  enormous  quantity  of  elec- 
tricity at  a  high  tension;  and  there  being  at  the 
point  no  conductor  adequate  to  carry  off  the  ex- 
tra supply  of  electricity ;  that  element,  not  being 
disposed  to  lie  quiet  like  water  or  other  elements, 
would  instantly  begin  to  assert  itself,   and  to 
shake  the  earth.    There  is,  we  may  say,  first  a 
perturbation,  a  rumbling,  and  a  shaking  more  or 
less  violent,  depending  on  the  quantity  of  elec- 
tricity thus  irregularly  let  loose. 

There  was  a  period,  during  the  geological  for- 
mation of  the  earth,  when  doubtless  the  element 
had  great  sway,  and  did  much  in  the  formation, 
arrangement,  and  breaking  up  of  the  strata  of  the 
earth ;  during  which  period  earthquakes  and  vol- 


n^        The  Earth  and  the  World 

canoes  must  have  prevailed.    The  earth  bears 
evidence  that  there  was  a  period  when  many 
great  and  destructive  volcanoes  were  in  active 
operation.      The  comparatively    few  volcanoes 
now  scattered  over  the  earth  may  be,  and  prob- 
ably are,  utilized  by  the  Creator  as  safety-valves 
to  regulate  the  supply  of  electricity  circulating 
through  the  earth,  preventing  destructive  earth- 
quakes and  other  catastrophes,  as  the  steam  vent, 
or  safety-valve,  prevents  explosions  of  the  boiler. 
8i.    Nature's  Safeguards  Provided  by  the  Cre- 
ator.^\n  the  economic  procedure  of  the  Almighty 
there  will  ever  be  found,  in  all  departments  of 
His  handiwork,    checks  and  safeguards  against 
destructive  effects  of  the  elements.     These  have 
been  interposed  for  the  security  and  welfare  of 
all  that  may  be  concerned,  and  immunity  from 
danger  secured.     Notwithstanding  the  innumer- 
able flashes  of  lightning  and  heavy  discharges  of 
electricity  from  the  heavens  to  the  earth,  it  will 
be  noticed  how  seldom  there  is  loss  of  life  or  any 
injury  suffered. 

But  more  than  this.  It  would  appear  that  in 
His  wisdom.  He  has  endowed  nature—if  we  may 
so  express  it— with  a  certain  instinctive  degree 
of  self-preservation  and  power  of  recovery  from 
mishaps,  wounds,  injuries,  or  loss  of  strength  or 
vitality;  so  that  the  person,  being,  or  animal,  or 
even  vegetable  and  material  things,  are  soon  re- 
stored to  their  normal  condition;  the  truth  of 
which  statement  may  be  readily  ascertained. 
In  all  parts  of  the  earth,  on  the  land  and  in  all 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth*s  Material  237 

waters,  there  may  be  discovered  material  laws 
adapted  for  the  well-being  of  everything  that  is 
created. 

In  the  early  part  of  this  century,  a  physician 
living  and  practicing  in  one  of  the  New  England 
states,  promulgated  the  theory,  and  put  it  in 
practice,  that  it  was  a  law  of  nature  that  she 
would  do  the  best  that  could  be  done  to  restore 
to  their  normal  condition  any  persons  wounded 
or  diseased;  the  success  of  nature's  work  de- 
pending quite  largely  on  the  nature  of  the  trouble, 
and  on  the  condition,  treatment,  and  circum- 
stances surrounding  the  suffering  one.  Nature 
would  do  the  best  that  could  be  done  to  repair 
the  injury,  and  restore  health;  requiring  on  her 
part,  rest  of  mind,  rest  on  the  back,  quiet,  pure 
air  and  water,  simple  nourishment,  freedom  from 
care,  etc.,  and  then  promising  that  health  would 
soon  be  restored,  unless  there  was  some  organic 
trouble.  If  a  person  was  wounded,  had  a  limb 
broken,  finger  nails  torn  off,  it  was  claimed  that, 
if  bound  up  or  cared  for,  nature  soon  heals  the 
wounds,  knits  together  the  severed  bones,  re- 
places the  torn  off  na'ls  with  new  ones,  thus  do- 
ing, in  these  and  mary  other  respects,  what  man 
with  all  his  wisdom,  skill  and  power  is  unable  to 
perform. 

These  conditions  aad  results  may  be  observed, 
not  only  in  animal  but  in  vegetable  life,  as  the 
grafting  of  trees  and  other  items  prove.  Observe 
the  vine,  how  it  feels  around  for  support  and 
clings  to  the  barren  wall.    These,  and  similar 


238         The  Earth  and  the  World 

matters,  are  known  to  all  observers  of  nature's 
ways. 

This  rule  of  nature,  this  salutary  provision  or- 
dained by  the  Creator,  will  also  be  found  to  be 
a  rule  in  operation  in  controlling  electrical  pro- 
cedure and  the  interests  connected  therewith: 
that  is,  suppose  one  established  current  of  elec- 
tricity is,  from  some  such  cause  as  displacement 
in  the  earth's  strata,  broken,  severed,  or  sepa- 
rated, and  the  current  continues  to  flow;  imme- 
diately perturbations  of  the  earth  ensue  and  will 
continue  till  the  connection  is  restored.  The  lost 
ends  seek,  and  soon  find  each  other,  make  new 
connections  and  thus  restore  and  maintain  the 
regular  flow  as  it  was  before  the  mishap  occurred. 
An  instance  of  this  procedure  took  place  Au- 
gust 31,  1886. 

82'8j.  Lessons  Gathered  from  the  Great 
Earthquake  at  Charleston,  S.  C— On  the  even- 
ing of  that  day,  about  ten  o'clock,  while  con- 
versing with  my  son  in  one  of  the  upper  rooms 
of  my  residence.  No.  313  Clinton  Avenue,  Brook- 
lyn, N.  Y.,  he  suddenly  called  my  attention  to 
the  irregular  movement  of  the  pendulum  of  the 
clock:  the  next  moment  the  distinct  vibrations 
of  the  house  made  us  realize  that  we  were  in  the 
midst  of  an  earthquake.  The  vibrations  were  so 
severe  that  the  clock  was  stopped,  as  were  two 
others  standing  on  different  mantels  running  east 
and  west,  the  pendulums  swinging  in  the  same 
directions. 

The  next  morning  we  learned  that  the  tremor 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth's  Material  239 

of  the  earthquake  had  been  felt  over  the  greater 
part  of  the  United  States,  but  that  at  Charleston, 
and  in  its  neighborhood,  the  vibrations  were 
severe,  and  very  destructive  to  life  and  property 
in  that  city;  and  the  occurrence  has  ever  since 
been  known  as  the  "Charleston  Earthquake  of 
1886,"  the  exact  time  of  its  occurrence  being 
August  31,  9:51  p.  M. 

The  greatest  destruction  of  life  and  property 
occurred  in  less  than  thirty  seconds.  In  that 
brief  time  over  6,000  buildings  were  wrecked  or 
badly  damaged,  and  not  a  single  plastered  in- 
terior in  the  city  is  said  to  have  escaped  unin- 
jured. Ninety-two  lives  were  lost,  and  hundreds 
were  injured.  The  loss  in  money  is  estimated 
at  over  $5,000,000.  Hundreds  of  buildings  that 
were  either  wrecked  or  badly  injured  have  been 
photographed,  and  they  form  an  interesting  and 
instructive  sight,  though  a  very  sad  one.  The 
history  of  the  event  is  worth  considering,  though 
we  have  no  room  for  details.  The  people  were 
panic-stricken;  the  greater  part  fearing  sudden 
death.  Shocks,  but  not  so  severe,  were  felt  for 
several  days  afterward;  but  finally  the  earth 
was  at  rest,  and  peace  and  confidence  were  re- 
stored. 

The  shocks  were  from  the  northwest  to  the 
southeast.  Some  witnesses  state  that  *' the  ground 
began  to  undulate  like  the  sea,  accompanied  by 
an  awful  roaring  sound,  and,  in  some  places,  by 
loud  detonations  like  the  firing  of  artillery.  When 
the  shock  was  in  progress,  the  terrible  din  which 


240         The  Earth  and  the  World 


accompanied   it   arose   unmistakably  from   the 
bowels  of  the  earth." 

Captain  Jervey,  a  well-known  and  intelligent 
observer,  states  that  *'the  waves  or  vibrations  of 
the  earth  were  not  in  long  rollers,  but  had  rather 
the  appearance  of  ground  swells  in  deep  water." 
Buildings  and  blocks  were  moved  as  whole,  mak- 
ing it  manifest  that  the  operating  force  was  not 
near  the  surface  of  the  earth  but  deep  down. 

The  centre  of  the  disturbance,  where  the  shock 
was  the  severest,  appeared  to  have  been  at  Sum- 
merville,  a  village  a  short  distance  northwest  of 
Charleston.  At  that  place  chimneys  were  thrown 
down,  and  houses  flung  from  their  foundations. 
In  that  neighborhood  great  fissures  were  made  in 
the  earth,  and  geysers  were  formed.  A  photo- 
graph of  one  of  these  geysers  gives  a  clear  idea 
of  their  appearance.  Water,  mud  and  sand  were 
ejected  from  them  in  various  quantities,  the  mud 
and  sand  remaining  after  the  water  had  subsided. 
The  width  of  a  large  fissure,  at  Cainboy,  was  re- 
ported to  be  fifteen  feet.  The  report  states  fur- 
ther that  "the  electrical  condition  was  highly 
disturbed." 

The  severe  vibrations  of  the  earth  and  the  de- 
structive work  of  the  earthquake,  were  over  in 
less  than  half  a  minute;  and  in  that  time  the 
severed  artery,  or  broken  current  of  electricity, 
reestablished  its  connection;  and  in  a  few  days 
it  must  have  been  complete,  for  then  all  rum- 
blings had  ceased. 

The  writer  was  very  familiar  with  Charleston 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth's  Material  241 

and  its  surroundings,  having  spent  a  portion  of 
his  business  life  in  that  city,  in  the  forties  and 
fifties  of  this  century,  and  erected  for  business 
purposes  one  of  the  storehouses  on  Hayne  Street, 
which  was  among  those  injured. 

As  nearly  as  we  have  been  able  to  ascertain, 
immediately,  or  within  a  few  moments  after  the 
earthquake  at  Charleston,  we  felt  its  tremors  in 
Brooklyn,  600  miles  away;  and  the  vibrations 
were  felt  northwest  to  the  Mississippi  River,  and 
further  south  in  Georgia.     In  a  few  days  we 
learned  from  Mr.  demons,  at  The  Glades,  Hall 
County,  Ga.,  that  the  vibrations  there  were  quite 
severe.     All  the  facts  relating  to  this  noted  shak- 
ing of  the  earth,  disprove  the  theory  held  by 
many  scientists  that  it  was  caused  by  an  internal 
wave  of  molten  material  in  the  bowels  of  the 
earth;  that  a  great  movement  of  this  molten 
matter  in  the  form  of  a  wave—like  the  waves  of 
the  ocean— rushing  against  the  so-called  '*  crust 
of  the  earth  "  caused  it  to  vibrate  violently,  and 
shake  down  in  a  twinkling  the  buildings  of  a 
great  city. 

In  considering  this  theory  we  remark  that 
those  who  hold  to  the  molten  condition  of  the 
interior  of  the  earth  maintain  that  all  material 
there,  in  whatever  condition  it  may  be,  is  and 
must  necessarily  be,  under  an  intense  pressure. 
That  being  so,  how  then  could  it  be  possible  for 
any  wave  of  molten  matter  of  any  size  to  be 
formed?  The  internal  pressure  would  prevent 
the  formation  of  any  wave,  for  one  requisite  of 


242        The  Earth  and  the  World 

its  formation  is  an  open  space  corresponding  to 
the  open  space  given  to  the  ocean  for  the  for- 
mation and  movement  of  its  great  waves;  be- 
sides, there  must  be  another  element  to  operate 
on  the  material  and  drive  it,  as  the  waters  of  the 
ocean  are  driven  by  the  force  of  the  wind,  the 
continued  pressure  of  which  produces  the  waves 
of  the  sea.    Under  the  conditions  named  no  wave 
could  be  formed  in  the  interior  of  the  earth,  any 
more  than  one  could  make  a  wave  in  a  hogshead 
of  water,  filled  and  bunged  up.    Then  again,  a 
wave  moves  in  one  direction  only;  but  this  so- 
called  earthquake  wave  of  Charleston  moved  in 
every  direction,   east   to   the   ocean,   south    to 
Georgia,  also  west  and  north. 

Also  consider  for  a  moment  the  immense 
velocity  of  the  earthquake,  its  rapid  vibrations, 
and  how  quickly  it  made  itself  known  over  the 
land.  There  is  no  ponderable  nor  imponderable 
material  or  element  on  the  earth,  or  even  in  the 
universe,  known  to  man,  that  could  have  travelled 
in  the  time  and  put  forth  the  inconceivable  power 
exerted  and  manifested  by  that  earthquake,  but 
the  one  inscrutable  element,  electricity,  that  everv- 
where  pervades  our  solar  system. 

More  than  forty  years  ago,  there  stood  in  the 
city  of  New  York,  where  the  ** Times  Building" 
now  stands,  a  church  known  as  the  Brick 
Church.  It  was  sold  and  torn  down  to  make 
room  for  buildings  for  business  purposes.  The 
brick  walls  were  difficult  to  break  or  tear  down; 
and  when  they  came  to  attack  the  steeple,  more 


Chemical  Changes  in  Earth^s  Material  243 

than  one  hundred  feet  high,  the  architect  decided 
that  It  would  be  easier  and  less  dangerous  to  throw 
it  down,  rather  than  tear  it  down  brick  by  brick. 
He  therefore  planned  to  tear  out  the  brick  at  the 
street  level,  taking  out  the  brick  and  making  an 
openmg  about  four  feet  high,  and  inserting  pieces 
of  timber.    This  work  was  done  for  a  little  more 
than  half  the  diameter  of  the  steeple,  and  on  the 
inner  side,  as  it  was  planned  to  throw  it  inwards. 
When  that  work  was  done,  charcoal  and  other 
combustibles  were  placed  about  the  wooden  sup- 
ports, and  set  on  fire,  burning  equally  on  the 
three  sides.    When  the  fire  had  destroyed  the 
strength  of  the  supports,  the  massive  steeple, 
weighing  hundreds  of  tons,  began  to  lean,  then 
fell  inward  with  a  tremendous  crash,  making  the 
surrounding  earth  apparently  tremble.     As  we 
had  a  desire  to  witness  the  event,  we  took  our 
stand  near  the  City  Hall,  saw  it  fall,  heard  the 
crash,  and,  about  three  or  four  seconds  later 
sensibly  felt  the  jar  made  by  the  sudden  and 
heavy  impact  of  the  material  on  the  earth. 

The  point  we  would  note  here  is,  that  any 
sudden  and  heavy  blow  made  on  or  against  the 
material  earth,  would  be  comparatively  slow  in 
communicating  the  knowledge  and  effect  of  that 
blow,  to  the  other  parts  of  the  earth,  near  or 
remote.  If,  according  to  the  old  rule,  sound 
travels  about  1,100  feet  per  second,  a  sensible 
knowledge  of  the  shaking  of  the  earth  at 
Charleston,  600  hundred  miles  away,  if  com- 
municated by  means  of  the  natural  earth  only. 


'"n 


H4        The  Earth  and  the  World 

must  have  taken  over  one  hour  and  a-half  to 
have  made  itself  known  in  Brooklyn,  instead  of 
the  almost  instantaneous  knowledge  of  the  fact 
of  which  we  have  abundant  proof,  making Jt 
evident  that  it  was  electricity  that  conveyed  the 
intelligence  with  electric  speed  and  power,  and 
not  any  so-called  internal  wave  under  the  crust  of 
the  earth. 

The  dynamo,  or  electric  apparatus,  gathering 
the  electric  fluid  from  the  atmosphere,  proves 
that  electricity  everywhere  pervades  the  atmos- 
phere; and,  although  it  may  not  be  called  a  part 
of  it,  yet  it  is  an  accompanying  element,  just  as 
aqueous  vapor  is  everywhere  found  in  the  atmos- 
phere, though  not  a  constituent  part  of  it 
Electricity  pervades  the  air  in  a  diluted  con- 
dition, we  might  say,  and  is  not  perceived  by  us 
any  more  than  we  perceive  either  one  of  the  two 
gases  that  form  the  atmosphere. 


XVII 

THE  GREAT  DELUGE 

84,     The  Great  Deluge.    Proof  of  the  Fact, 
and  Brief  Account  of  //.—There  has  been  grow- 
ing up  among  scientists  and  others  of  this  gener- 
ation, a  spirit  of  unbelief  in  one  great  event 
recorded  in  the  Scriptures,  namely,  that  of  the 
general  deluge,  by  which  the  entire  human  race 
with  the  exception  of  the  family  of  Noah,  are 
said  to  have  been  destroyed  for  their  wickedness. 
We  read.  Genesis  vi.  4,  5,  n:— -God  saw  that 
the  wickedness  of  man  was  great  in  the  earth, 
and  that  every  imagination  of  his  heart  was  only 
evil    continually.     The  earth  also  was  corrupt 
before    God,   and    the    earth    was    filled    with 
violence." 

13th:— *' And  God  said  unto  Noah,  An  end  of 
all  flesh  is  come  before  Me,  for  the  earth  is  filled 
with  cruelty  through  them;  and  behold,  I  will 
destroy  them  with  the  earth." 

14th:— '*  Make  thee  an  ark  of  pine  trees;  thou 
Shalt  make  cabins  in  the  ark,  and  shalt  pitch  it 
within  and  without  with  pitch."  (Genevan  Ver- 
sion.) 

Gen.  vii.  11,  12:— ''And  in  the  six  hundredth 
year  of  Noah's  life,  in  the  second  month,  the 
seventh  day  of  the  month,  in  the  same  day  were 
all  the  fountains  of  the  great  deep  broken  up,  and 

245 


246         The  Earth  and  the  World 

the  windows  of  heaven  were  opened."  "And 
the  rain  was  upon  the  earth  forty  days  and  forty 
nights." 

Gen.  viii.  3:— "And  the  waters  returned  from 
above  the  earth,  going  and  returning,  and  after 
the  end  of  the  one  hundred-and-fiftieth  day,  the 
waters  abated." 

The  Genevan  version  of  the  Scripture  further 
records  that  "The  waters  waxed  strong,  and 
were  increased  exceedingly  upon  the  earth,  and 
the  ark  went  above  the  waters,  and  all  the  high 
mountains  that  are  under  the  whole  heaven  were 
covered.  Then  all  flesh  perished  that  moved 
upon  the  earth,  both  fowl  and  cattle  and  beast 
and  everything  in  whose  nostrils  was  the  spirit 
of  life  and  breath,  whatsoever  they  were  in  the 
dry  land,  they  died." 

The  account  of  the  great  flood  brought  by  God 
upon  the  earth  in  the  days  of  Noah,  and  the  rea- 
sons why,  are  given  in  the  sixth,  seventh,  eighth 
and  ninth  chapters  of  Genesis.  The  account  is 
very  simple,  plain  and  definite,  and  bears  on  its 
face  the  evidence  of  its  truthfulness. 

This  great  and  awful  judgment  on  the  old 
world  is  spoken  of.  and  referred  to,  many  times 
in  the  Scriptures  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments. 
Let  those  inclined  to  disbelieve  the  scriptural 
statement  remember  that  Jesus  Christ  has  also 
testified  to  the  truth  of  the  record  of  the  great 
flood.  Christ  says,  (Matthew  xxiv.  3S,  39)  "As 
in  the  days  that  were  before  the  flood,  they  were 
eating  and  drinking,  marrying  and  giving  in  mar- 


The  Great  Deluge 


247 


riage,  until  the  day  that  Noah  entered  into  the 
ark,  and  knew  not  until  the  flood  came  and  took 
them  all  away;  so  shall  also  the  coming  of  the 
Son  of  Man  be." 

Jesus  Christ  is  "  the  true  and  faithful  witness." 
His  testimony  cannot  be  ignored  nor  denied. 
The  world  itself,  aside  from  the  Scriptures,  con- 
tains evidences  of  the  fact  of  the  great  Deluge. 
The  Flood  left  no  vestige  of  the  hundreds  of 
millions  who  lived  on  the  earth  before  it  came 
and  swept  them  away;  nor  is  there  any  trace  of 
their  works  to  show  that  they  ever  inhabited  the 
world,  though  they  lived  in  it  for  more  than  six- 
teen centuries;  thus  making  manifest  God's  de- 
termination to  sweep  even  the  remembrance  of 
these  generations  from  the  earth.     Since  that 
event,  the  history  and  distinctive  marks  of  the 
leading  families,  tribes,  or  nations  inhabiting  the 
world,  can  be  traced  back  to  Noah  and  his  sons. 
The  history  of  no  family  or  nation  on  the  earth 
goes  beyond  Noah.    Genesis  x.  32  says,  "The 
nations  were  divided  in  the  earth  after  the  Flood." 
The  scripture  records  of  the  descendants  of  Noah 
after  the  Flood,  are  facts  verified  in  history.    The 
earth  itself  bears  testimony  that  a  great  flood  has 
washed  over  it.     The  old  nations  of  the  world 
have  traditions  and  memorials  of  the  great  fact, 
the  truth  of  which  is  verified  beyond  question.* 

' "  It  is  reported  that  Pere  Scheil  has  made  a  discovery  of  a 
clay  tablet.  To  be  sure  the  record  on  the  tablet  does  not 
amount  to  much,  it  is  such  a  fragmentary  bit ;  but  it  is  large 
enough  to  make  sure  that  the  tablet  contained  the  story  of  the 


H8         The  Earth  and  the  World 

The  patriarch  Noah,  having  been  dishonored 
by  his  grandson  Canaan,  who  not  being  reproved 
by  his  father  Ham,  according  to  the  opinion  of 
expositors  of  the  Bible,  the  inspired  Noah  being 
aware  of  what  had  taken  place,  uttered  the  fol- 
lowing prophecy.    Genesis  ix.  26,  27 :    "  And  he 
(Noah)  said,  Blessed  be  the  Lord  God  of  Shem  • 
and  Canaan  shall  be  his  servant.    God  shall  en- 
large Japheth  and  he  shall  dwell  in  the  tents  of 
Shem  "  (shall  come  into  all  his  privileges  and 
blessings)  -and  Canaan  shall  be  his  servant." 

The  Rev.  Dr.  John  Brown,  a  learned  Scotch 
Uivine  of  the  eighteenth  century,  a  linguist  fa- 
miliar with  the  ancient  and  modern  languages  of 
the  world,  and  with  all  ancient  as  well  as  modern 
histories  of  the  nations,  author  of  a  complete 
chronology  of  the  Scriptures,  and  of  the  edition 
known  as  "  Brown's  Bible,"  which  is  in  high  re- 
pute  in  commenting  on  this  remarkable  prophecv 
of  Noah,  writes  as  follows : 

"These  predictions  are  greatly  extensive;  al- 
most every  prediction  in  Scripture  relative  to  the 

Deluge ;  and,  most  fortunately,  the  most  important  part  of  all 
IS  preserved,  the  colophon,  with  the  date. 

"It  is  dated  in  the  reign  of  Ammi-zaduga,  king  of  Babylon, 
(and  we  know  that  he  reigned  about  2140  b.  c).  That  is  we 
have  here  a  precious  bit  of  clay  on  which  was  written  a  i^et- 
ical  story  of  the  Deluge,  five  centuries  before  Moses,  and  about 
the  time  of  Isaac  or  Jacob.  That  is  enough  to  make  the  dis- 
covery  memorable.  We  learn  positively  that  the  story  of  the 
Deluge  was  familiar  to  the  common  people  of  Babylonia,  and 

n!w  v'w  V    '^"  ^'  ^''°"  ^y"*  *°  P^^^i^-"    (From  the 
«ew  York  Independent,  May,  1898.) 


The  Great  Deluge  249 

Egyptians,  Canaanites,  Tyrians  and  Zedonians  is 
comprehended  in  this  repeated  curse  of  Canaan. 
Almost  every  prediction  relative  to  the  Assyrians, 
Chaldeans,   Persians  and  Arabs,  and  especially 
what  relates  to  the  Jewish  nation  and  Jesus  Christ, 
is  included  in  the  blessing  of  Shem.    Almost 
every  prediction  relative  to  the  Greeks,  Romans, 
Goths,  Tartars  and  Turks,  and  especially  what 
relates  to  the  Gospel  Church  among  the  Gentiles, 
is  contained  in  the  blessing  of  Japheth.    The  ful- 
fillment of  these  predictions  is  no  less  remark- 
able.   Much  of  the  Scripture  of  the  Old  and  New 
Testaments,  much  of  the  history  of  nations,  is 
no  more  than  an  account  of  it." 

After  this  Dr.  Brown  proceeds  to  enlarge,  and 
state  many  historical  facts  known  to  the  learned, 
in  proof  of  the  complete  fulfillment  of  the  short, 
yet  comprehensive  prophecy  uttered  by  the  Patri- 
arch Noah,  making  it  evident  that  the  history  of 
no  family,  tribe  or  nation  on  the  earth  dates  back 
earlier  than  Noah,  who  is  the  father  of  the  human 
race  now  living  on  the  earth. 

Here  is  what  we  call  an  incidental,  yet  com- 
plete, historical  proof  of  the  Scripture  narrative 
of  the  Deluge.  Let  unbelievers  disprove  these 
historical  facts,  or  else  hereafter  forever  hold  their 
peace. 

8^.  Interesting  Inferences.  —There  are  circum- 
stances connected  with  the  Deluge  about  which 
it  may  be  well  to  inquire,  although  they  do  not 
contravene  the  fact  itself.  For  instance,  we  read : 
(Genesis  ii.  5,  6)   -  The  Lord  God  had  not  caused 


I 


aso         The  Earth  and  the  World 

it  to  rain  upon  the  earth.    But  there  went  up  a 
mist  from  the  earth  and  watered  the  whole  face 
of  the  ground."    The  sterility  of  the  ground  and 
the  labor  required  to  raise  food-supplies  men- 
tioned by  Lamech  (Genesis  v.  29)  would  imply 
that  no  rain  nor  anything  more  than  the  mist  fell 
on  the  earth  until  the  Flood  came.    Additional 
proof  of  this  view  of  the  earth's  condition  at 
that  penod  is  found,  or  inferred,  from  the  rain- 
bow  God  gave  as  a  sign,  and  which  was  first 
seen   after   the   Flood.    (See   Gen.    ix.    8-17.) 
And  I  will  establish  My  covenant  with  you, 
neither  shall  all  flesh  be  cut  off  any  more  by  the 
waters  of  a  flood,  neither  shall  there  any  more  be 
a  flood  to  destroy  the  earth.    And  God  said,  This 
IS  the  token  of  the  covenant  which  I  make  be- 
tween Me  and  you  and  every  living  thing  that  is 
with  you,  for  perpetual  generations.    1  do  set  My 
bow  in  the  clouds,  and  it  shall  be  for  a  token  of 
a  covenant  between  Me  and  the  earth.    And  it 
shall  come  to  pass  when  I  bring  a  cloud  over  the 
earth  that  a  bow  shall  be  seen  in  the  cloud."    The 
sun  requires  the  rain-cloud  on  which  to  form  his 
bow  of  beautiful  colors. 

From  these  facts  it  seems  evident  that  there  is 
a  marked  difference  between  the  atmospherical 
phenomena  of  the  present  day,  and  what  appears 
to  have  been  previous  to  the  Deluge. 

In  the  Mosaic  record,  in  the  first  chapter  of 
Genesis,  it  will  be  noticed  that  no  reasons  are 
mentioned  as  to  the  causes  or  purposes  for  which 
the  sun  and  moon  were  created.    The  purpose 


The  Great  Deluge 


251 


which  seems  to  have  been  the  most  apparent  is 
named,  and  nothing  more;  as  the  sun,  "the 
greater  light  to  rule  the  day,"  and  the  moon, 
''the  lesser  light  to  rule  the  night,"  etc.  Nothing 
is  said  of  the  heat  and  other  life-giving  influences 
of  the  sun,  without  which  this  globe  of  ours 
would  be  a  dead  world;  so  also  the  moon  is 
mentioned  as  "the  lesser  light  to  rule  the  night," 
as  if  that  were  the  only  object  of  its  creation. 

We  know  that  the  moon,  from  its  close  prox- 
imity to  the  earth,  has  far  greater  power  of  at- 
traction on  the  atmosphere  and  the  water  of  the 
earth  than  the  sun.  The  influence  and  power  of 
the  moon  in  this  direction  are  so  necessary  and 
beneficial  that  it  would  seem  that  the  world  could 
better  do  without  its  light  than  its  influence  on 
the  elements.  Were  it  not  for  the  power  of  the 
moon  on  the  atmosphere  and  the  water,  as  mani- 
fested in  the  great  ocean  tides,  our  oceans,  bays 
and  harbors  would  be  like  stagnant  lakes  and 
ponds.  Our  atmosphere  would  have  less  capac- 
ity to  retain  moisture,  would  be  less  invigorating, 
and  would  lack  also  other  advantages. 

86.  Was  the  Moon  an  Important  Factor  in  the 
Destructive  Work  of  the  Deluge?  Scriptural 
Proof  that  It  was,—\n  view  of  the  facts  stated, 
and  the  condition  of  the  earth  at  the  time,  it  may 
be  well  to  inquire  if,  in  bringing  about  the  Flood, 
it  is  not  probable  that  the  Almighty  caused  the 
orbit  of  the  moon  to  be  changed,  either  directly, 
or  by  secondary  means,  such  as  the  near  ap- 
proach of  some  comet  or  other  heavenly  body, 


252         The  Earth  and  the  World 

drawing  or  forcing  the  moon  out  of  its  regular 
orbit  and  making  it  revolve  nearer  the  earth  than 
before;  the  moon  making  then  thirteen  revolu- 
tions about  the  earth  in  a  year,  as  it  now  does 
instead  of,  probably,  twelve  previously.      The 
immediate  effect  of  such  a  change  would  be  to 
give  the  moon  an  irregular  or  oscillating  move- 
ment, at  least  during  its  first  revolution  about  the 
earth.    The  effect  of  its  near  approach  and  irreg- 
ular movement,  would  be  an  increased  power  to 
attract  the  earth;  and  its  effects  would  be  felt 
and  perceived  mainly  on  the  elements,  greatly 
disturbing  them,  causing  besides,  the  floods  of 
rain,  the  fountains  of  the  great  deep  to  be  moved 
or  broken  up,  and  deluging  the  earth,  washing 
over  hills  and  breaking  over  mountain-tops,  mak- 
ing great  havoc  with  everything  on  the  face  of 
the  earth.    The  Scripture  record,  in  some  ver- 
sions, speaks  of  the  waters  -going  and  return- 
ing  ;  plainly  describing  the  tidal   movements 
of  the  waters  caused  by  the  attraction  of  the 
moon. 

The  effect  on  the  earth,  of  the  nearer  approach 
of  the  moon  to  it,  is  to  give  it  greater  influence 
or  power  over  the  water  and  atmosphere  of  the 
earth,  as  is  manifested  in  our  ocean  tides  and  the 
rain-storms  which  now  prevail,  and  which  were 
unknown  before  the  Flood. 

In  view  of  the  fact  that  rain  continues  to  de- 
scend upon  the  earth  in  its  season,  watering  and 
greatly  enriching  it,  making  sure  abundant  har- 
vest  returns,  besides  other  innumerable  blessings; 


The  Great  Deluge 


253 


is  there  not  good  reason  to  believe  that  in  the 
change  made  which  brought  on  the  Flood,  the 
inhabitants  of  the  new  world  are  more  blessed 
in  many  respects  than  were  the  people  who  lived 
before  the  Deluge  ? 

For  many  years  we  have  held  the  theory  that 
our  moon  was  an  important  factor  in  the  work, 
and  was  used  by  the  Creator  to  accomplish  this 
end,  and  thus  advance  the  welfare  of  the  coming 
generations. 

We  were  well  aware  that  King  James'  version 
of  the  Bible  gave  no  hint  of  any  singular  move- 
ment of  the  waters,  save  that  the  rains  descended 
and  the  fountains  of  the  deep  were  broken  up; 
and  thought  it  useless  to  look  further  in  other 
translations  for  evidence  in  support  of  our  theory; 
but  lately  it  occurred  to  us  to  note  the  rendering 
of  the  text  on  this  point  as  found  in  some  of  the 
old  Bibles  in  our  possession,  and  we  were  sur- 
prised to  find  that  their  versions  supported  our 
theory  of  the  deluge. 

We  offer  the  following  evidence  of  the  fact: 
The  Genevan  version  of  the  English  Bible,  quarto 
edition,  and  well  known  to  all  students  of  the 
Bible,  printed  1560,  translates  the  third  verse  of 
the  eighth  chapter  of  Genesis  as  follows:  "And 
the  waters  returned  from  above  the  earth,  going 
and  returning." 

The  old  English  Bible  known  as  *'the  Bishop's 
Bible,"  printed  by  Christopher  Barker,  London, 
1585,  in  the  reign  of  Queen  Elizabeth,  black  letter, 
large  folio  edition,  (interesting  and  valuable  in 


254         The  Earth  and  the  World 

many  respects)  thus  renders  this  same  verse: 
"And  the  waters  from  the  earth  returned;  going 
and  coming  againe,  and  after  the  end  of  one 
hundred  and  fiftie  dayes  the  waters  were 
abated."* 

From  a  copy  of  the  Biblia  Sacra,  published  in 
Hamburg,  Anno  Domini  MDXCVI.  (1596)  (the 
Old  Testament  only  in  three  volumes)  Folio, 
printed  in  parallel  columes,  in  three  versions,  the 
''Grece,  Latine,  &  Germanice,"  we  quote  as  fol- 
lows: 

"  Et  reversae  sunt  aqua  de  terra,  eundo,  et  red- 
eundo,  decreveruntq ;  aquae  in  fine  centum  quin- 
quaginta  dierum." 

(Translation)  ''And  reversed  are  the  waters 
of  the  earth,  going  and  coming  (flowing  to 
and  flowing  from).  The  waters  decreased  at  the 
end  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  days." 

Those  learned  in  the  old  Latin  can  translate  for 
themselves. 

Dodati's  "Annotations  upon  all  the  Books," 
and  most  of  the  verses  of  the  Bible;  a  woric  of 
many  learned  men,  published  in  London,  1657, 
two  large  folio  volumes,  comments  thus  on  the 
second  and  third  verses  of  the  eighth  chapter  of 
Genesis :—" Fountains    of    the    deep."     ''To 

» A  copy  of  the  "  Bible,  Old  Testament  and  New  translated 
out  of  the  original  tongues  by  His  Majesty's  special  command." 
«  Printed  by  Thomas  and  John  Buck,  (printers  to  the  University 
of  Cambridge)  Anno  Domini  MDCXXIX.  (1629)  renders  the 
verse  the  same  as  King  James*  version ;  but  the  marginal  read- 
ing •  Hebrew,' « in  going  and  returning.' " 


The  Great  Deluge 


255 


make  the  flood  there  was  as  it  were  a  secret 
conspiracy^  and  concurrence  of  waters  under 
ground,  with  the  rivers  and  seas  above,  betwixt 
these  there  is  such  a  commerce  and  communion 
that  from  the  sea,  the  rivers  run,  and  so  they 
make  their  return  again." 

Third  Verse :—'*  Returned  continually."  Heb., 
"going  and  returning." 

''That  is  with  all  speed  returning  and  recoiling 
to  their  proper  place  and  channels  from  whence 
they  were  gathered  to  make  up  the  flood;  which 
showeth  their  readiness  to  obey  the  command  of 
the  Creator." 

"Text  and  margin."  "So  it  sometimes 
maketh  a  flood  to  swell  larger  and  sometimes 
(and  that  usually)  it  dryeth  up  small  waters  and 
lesseneth  or  abateth  the  depth  of  great  ones." 

The  testimony  of  these  several  versions  of  the 
Scriptures  well  known  and  of  high  repute,  all 
favor  the  idea,  if  they  do  not  absolutely  declare 
that  there  was  a  tidal  movement  of  the  waters  of 
the  flood  a  "going  and  returning"  of  the  same, 
though  they  did  not  know  then,  the  why  and 
wherefore  of  this  "recoiling"  movement  of  the 
waters  they  recorded.  Those  learned  in  the 
Greek  and  Hebrew  can  ascertain  for  themselves 
the  truth  of  these  statements. 

The  most  improbable  item  in  the  account  of 
the  deluge  contained  in  King  James'  Version,  we 
used  to  consider  was  the  great  height  that  the 

»  They  did  not  know  the  moon  was  at  the  head  of  that  so- 
called  conspiracy. 


256         The  Earth  and  the  World 


inf 


waters  rose,  rising  as  mentioned  above  the  tops 
of  the  mountains,  which  of  course  carries  the 
impression    that    the  valleys  and  oceans  were 
filled  up  to  that  level.     If  so,  how  w^as  the  sur- 
plus finally  disposed  of  ?    Years  ago,  we  came  to 
the  conclusion  that  our  moon  was  the  principal 
factor  in  the  moving  of  the  waters  of  the  deluge, 
and  cause  of  all  of  its  vast  destructive  effects,' 
breaking  up  the  fountains  of  the  great  deep, 
dashing  and  dragging  the  waters  over  the  high 
mountains,  as  mentioned  in  the  Scriptures.    We 
did  not  then  expect  to  find  anything  in  Scriptures 
that  would  favor  the  theory,  and  it  is  only  within 
a  few  years  in  looking  this  matter  up,  we  unex- 
pectedly found  the  evidence  here  given.     This 
evidence,  we  hold  is  conclusive  of  the  fact  that 
there  was,  besides  the  heavy  rain,  a  great  tidal 
movement  of  the  waters  for  about  forty  days, 
that  was  destructive  in  its  effects.     Admitting 
these  facts,  we  see  no  physical  reason  why  the 
truth  of  the  Scripture  story  of  the  deluge  should 
not  be  accepted. 

Bj,  Condition  of  the  World  Before  the  Flood, 
—The  condition  of  the  world  and  the  history  of 
mankind  at  the  time  of  the  Deluge  and  before  it, 
as  recorded  in  the  Scriptures,  is  very  short,  and 
not  easily  comprehended.  From  the  few  facts 
given  and  the  evident  state  of  affairs  that  existed, 
we  must  reason  out  the  state  and  condition  of 
mankind  and  the  world  at  the  time. 

The  earth  itself,  before  it  was  broken  up,  and 
much  of  its  surface  changed,  or  destroyed  by  the 


The  Great  Deluge  257 

great  flood  of  waters,  was  doubtless  very  beau- 
tiful; with  many  an  enchanting  and  delightful 
landscape  that  pleased  the  eye,  and  filled  earth- 
born  hearts  with  longing  desires;  an  earthly 
paradise,  just  as  it  came  from  the  hand  of  its 
Creator  when  He  delivered  it  over  to  the  first 
man  to  possess  and  control. 

We  learn  from  the  record  that  in  the  early  his- 
tory of  man,  there  were  in  that  period  two  fami- 
lies or  classes  distinct  in  character  from  each 
other,  yet  living  together  in  the  habitable  portion 
of  the  earth ;  one  family,  in  its  line,  acknowledg- 
ing God  and  His  authority,  aiming  to  do  His 
will,  obey  and  please  Him;  the  other  family,  in 
its  line,  did  not  care  for  God.  acknowledge  His 
claims,  nor  seek  to  please  and  obey  Him;  but 
sought,  rather,  to  gratify  its  own  will  and  pleas- 
ure in  this  life,  regardless  of  the  future. 

It  is  not  probable  that  this  distinct  line  of  dif- 
ference prevailed  for  any  great  length  of  time. 
In  fact,  the  record  proves  that  it  did  not,  for  the 
two  families  soon  began  to  intermarry.  Doubt- 
less there  were  many  internal  conflicts  as  to 
'*  whether  truth  and  principle  should  control,  or 
love  have  sway;  "probably  ending  in  love  having 
its  way.  Self-interest,  worldly  interest,  and  the 
gratification  of  present  desires,  were  the  motives 
that  tended  to  rule  the  race;  for  Man,  in  matters 
of  this  world,  is  ever  the  same. 

The  lines  of  both  families,  running  down  the 
centuries,  necessarily  mixed  together  in  many 
transactions  and  events;  for  they  were  together 


<-. 


J 


f 


258        The  Earth  and  the  World 

in  the  world,  and  could  not  be  taken  out  of  it, 
nor  be  "kept  from  the  evil." 

It  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  both  lines  were 
alike  affable,  sociable,  intelligent  and  entertaining. 
The  daughters  of  the  world, ~f air,  attractive  and 
enchanting— began  to  win  the  sons  of  faith,  who 
were  unable  to  resist  their  charms.  Intermar- 
riage of  the  lines  began  and  was  continued,  until, 
in  the  thousand  years  or  more  that  followed,  all 
traces  of  difference  practically  disappeared. 

It  is  not  probable  that  intercourse  between  the 
families,  with  their  discordant  opinions,  ran 
along  smoothly  for  any  length  of  time.  On  the 
contrary,  differences  of  opinion  would  lead  to 
conflicts  more  or  less  severe  and  extended.  The 
weak  would  have  to  give  away  to  the  strong; 
the  few,  surrender  to  the  many. 

During  the  long  centuries,  there  was  many  a 
wearisome  conflict  between  individuals  and  com- 
munities.  There  was  many  a  martyr  to  the  cause 
of  truth  and  right;  and  many  a  community  of 
persecuted  ones  had  to  leave  their  homes  for  dis- 
tant places,  where  they  hoped  to  abide  in  peace. 
It  was  an  age  when  self-interest,  falsehood  and 
wrong,  triumphed  over  truth  and  right.    Equity 
and  justice  were  trampled  to  the  earth.     Unbe- 
lief, and  hatred  of  truth  and  right,  so  prevailed, 
that  in  the  thousand  years  or  more,  the  whole 
world  became  as  one  family  in  sentiment,  feeling 
and  belief.    The  whole  race  preferred  to  please 
themselves,  rather  than  God,  their  Maker.    God 
was  practically  shut  out  of  the  world  He  had 


The  Great  Deluge 


259 


created;  and  out  of  the  hearts  of  men  and 
women.  His  offspring.  The  world  was  bright 
and  beautiful,  life  was  long  and  had  many  at- 
tractions; and  the  race  of  men  and  women  that 
then  lived  determined  to  possess  and  enjoy  all 
they  could  get  out  of  the  world. 

It  is  not  reasonable  to  believe  that  the  race  of 
mankind  living  before  the  Deluge  was  ignorant, 
unlearned,   or  at  all  like  savages.    It  is  more 
probable  that  they  were  well  advanced  in  knowl- 
edge, in  the  arts,  and  in  many  of  the  so-called 
sciences.     For  900  years  they  had  Adam,  who 
was   taught   of  God,   and  who  had    sufficient 
wisdom  to   give  good  and   correct  names  to 
all  animate  and  inanimate  things;  and  to  teach 
his  children    knowledge.    They    also    had    the 
patriarchs,  who  taught  by  precept  and  example. 
The  world  had  then  but  one  language  to  wrestle 
with;    probably   the    Hebrew.    The   Scriptures 
state  that  "man  sought  out  many  inventions," 
"that  they  built   cities,"  that   "Jubal,   one  of 
Cain's  descendants,  was  the  father  of  all  such  as 
handle  the  harp  and  organ;"  and  "that  another 
of  his  descendants  was  an  instructor  of  every 
artificer  in  brass  and  iron."    We  hold  that  men 
of  that  day  were  well  advanced  in  science  and 
the  practical  arts.     Even  Satan,  as  far  as  permit- 
ted, would  advance  his  children  in  all  worldly 
wisdom. 

King  Solomon  wrote,  as  recorded,  "There  is 
no  new  thing  under  the  sun,  and  is  there  any- 
thing whereof  it  may  be  said,  '  See,  this  is  new  ? 


ml 


260         The  Earth  and  the  World 

It  hath  been  already  of  old  time  which  was  be- 
fore us.'" 

From  a  worldly  point  of  view,  the  men  of  that 
age  were  not  fools;  doubtless  many  were  men 
of  ability,  worldly  wisdom  and  prudence. 

The  Scriptures  state  that  "there  were  giants  in 
the  earth  in  those  days; '.'  giants  in  mind  as  well 
as  body;  also  that  "  when  the  sons  of  God  came 
in  unto  the  daughters  of  men,  they  bare  children 
to   them,  and   the  sons   became  mighty  men, 
which  were  of  old,  men  of  renown;"— men  of 
famous  deeds,   of   great    performances.     Their 
deeds  and  names,  however,  are  now  lost  to  the 
world.     Able  writers  of  this  day  might  picture 
vividly  some  of  their  characters  and  deeds.  They 
were  mighty  men,  celebrated,  probably,  in  every 
branch  of  human  industry  and  life.     There  were 
men  doubtless  skilled  in  the  art  of  war,  a  favorite 
pastime  for  the  period;  for  proud,  ambitious, 
selfish  and  tyrannical  men  prevailed  and  held 
sway;  men  as  generals,  more  noted  and  success- 
ful in  their  careers  than  Caesar  or  Napoleon,  who 
led  large  armies  and  gained  great  battles. 

Before  the  advent  of  the  Flood,  there  must 
have  existed  on  the  earth  a  population  of  many 
hundred  millions  of  people.  Doubtless  many  of 
these  antediluvians  were  possessed  with  the  spirit 
of  enterprise  and  discovery,  were  skilled  in  the 
art  and  practice  of  navigation,  sending  out  their 
vessels,  large  and  small,  over  the  seas  and  oceans; 
planting  colonies  in  the  islands,  and  on  conti- 
nental shores;  going  even  as  far  as  Central  Amer- 


The  Great  Deluge 


261 


ica,  during  the  1,600  years  which  that  growing 
multitude  occupied  the  earth. 

When  we  consider  the  progress  the  world  has 
made  since  the  beginning  of  the  sixteenth  century, 
and  especially  during  this  nineteenth  century,  we 
ought  to  be  willing  to  admit  that  the  antedilu- 
vians may  have  accomplished  far  more  than  we 
have  ever  given  them  credit  for  doing.  It  pleased 
the  Almighty  to  destroy,  not  only  the  whole  race, 
but  also  all  their  works.  The  destructive  force 
of  the  Flood  was  so  complete  that  the  "places 
that  once  knew  them,  knew  them  no  more." 

It  is  recorded  that  "  God  saw  that  the  wicked- 
ness of  man  was  great  in  the  earth.  The  earth 
was  corrupt;  for  all  flesh  had  corrupted  His  way 
upon  the  earth.  The  earth  was  filled  with  vio- 
lence." 

The  devil  had  mankind  well  in  hand,  and  his 
principles  of  evil  were  thoroughly  worked  out 
in  this  period  of  wickedness,  corruption  and  vio- 
lence; which  are  elements  that  he  well  knows 
how  to  manipulate. 

During  the  centuries  of  corruption,  violence, 
wrong-doing  and  persecution  that  prevailed,  the 
good,  wise  and  prudent  would,  when  possible, 
to  escape  tyranny,  persecution  and  the  sword, 
flee  away,  hiding  themselves  in  the  caves  and 
dens  and  other  secret  places;  and  so  became 
what  are  known  as  the  "  cave-dwellers  of  the 
earth." 

During  the  100  years  in  which  Noah  was  em- 
ployed in  building  the  Ark,  the  race,  with  com- 


i 


262         The  Earth  and  the  World 

paratively  few  exceptions,  regarded  him  as  a 
weak,  simple-minded,  credulous  old  man;  and 
his  building,  a  work  of  folly.     The  unbelievers 
maintained  that  such  an  event  as  a  flood  great 
enough  to  drown  and  destroy  all  the  living  on 
the  earth,  was  an  unheard  of  thing,  without  rea- 
son, and  simply  impossible.    Noah's  work  was 
ridiculed,  and  his  craft  laughed  at;  men  declaring 
that  the  thousand  vessels  that  they  had  built,  and 
which  then  traversed  the  seas,  would  stand  any 
storm  that  might  come,  and  that  they  would 
much  rather  trust  their  lives  in  the  vessels  they 
had  made,  than  in  Noah's  unwieldy  craft,  which 
was  without  masts,  rigging,  sails  or  rudder. 


XVIII 


THE  SUN 


88,  The  Sun,  A  Brief  Description, — In  stat- 
ing our  views  of  the  varied  processes  employed 
by  the  Creator  during  the  many  long  periods  in 
which  the  earth  was  being  formed  or  built  up,  it 
was  not  at  first  our  intention  to  make  any  partic- 
ular mention  of  the  other  bodies  forming  our 
solar  system;  but  as  our  sun  was  in  existence 
before  the  earth,  and  is  now  the  head  and  centre 
of  the  system,  controls  all  its  members,  and  sup- 
plies all  with  heat,  light  and  electrical  power,  and 
probably  with  many  other  blessings  not  per- 
ceived; and  as  our  earth  is  dependent  on  it  for 
all  these  things,  even  for  its  very  existence,  it  is 
necessary  for  the  proper  completion  of  our  work 
to  state  some  of  the  items  wherein  we  are  de- 
pendent on,  and  interested  in,  that  great  lumi- 
nary, the  bright  *'Orb  of  Day." 

For  a  full  description  of  the  sun,  what  it  is  and 
what  it  is  doing  for  the  solar  system  it  controls, 
we  refer  our  readers  to  the  current  astronomical 
works,  which  state  numerous  facts  and  interest- 
ing items  in  full  detail.  For  our  present  purpose, 
it  is  necessary  to  give  a  few  important  facts 
only,  relative  to  that  great  globe,  as  we  find  them 
in  the  works  of  the  astronomers. 

The  distance  of  the  earth  from  the  sun  is  92,- 

263 


264         The  Earth  and  the  World 

900,000  miles,  and  it  revolves  about  it  in  365 
days     The  diameter  of  the  sun  is  865,000  miles 
and  the  circumference,  about  2.600,000  miles.   In 

r/n  '?,  .r"'^"^'  ''  *'  "•'""^  700  times  greater 
than  all  the  planets,  including  their  satellites  It 
IS  about  1,300,000  times  larger  than  the  earth 
though  Its  density  is  not  one-tenth  that  of  the 
earth.  Its  density  is  also  much  less  than  that  of 
any  other  member  of  the  system.  The  sun  ro- 
tates on  Its  axis  once  in  about  twenty-five  days 
and  twelve  hours. 

The  earth,  at  the  equator,  moves  through  space 
1. 000  miles  per  hour;  while  the  sun,  at  its  equa- 
hour'""^^''  t'"'0"«h  space  over  4,000  miles  per 

The  sun  is  a  perfect  globe,  its  equatorial  and 
polar  diameters  being  the  same,  though,  accord- 
ing to  Laplace's  "Nebular  Hypothesis.'  it  ought 
to  be  greatly  flattened  at  the  poles. 

Experts  with  the  spectroscope  state  that  the  sun 
gives  no  evidence  that  oxygen  and  nitrogen  form 
a  part  of  that  great  luminary.     So  far.  it  seems 
practically  impossible  to  ascertain  the  nature  of 
the  elements  that  enter  into  the  material  compo- 
sition of  the  sun;  though,  from  the  grand  effects 
the  sun  displays,  and  the  work  it  accomplishes. 
It  IS  evident  that  the  elements  employed,  in  their 
simplicity,  power  and  effectiveness,  manifest  the 
wisdom  of  the  Creator. 

All  the  planets  revolve  about  the  sun  in  the 
same  direction,  and  on  the  same  plane;  which  is 
precisely  that  on  which  the  sun  turns  on  itself 


1 he   Sun 


265 


The  planets  nearest  the  sun,  as  is  well  known,  re- 
volve about  it  in  much  less  time  than  those 
farther  away;  but  they  also  travel  much  faster  in 
their  courses;  as  for  instance.  Mercury,  nearest 
the  sun,  travels  ten  times  faster  about  it  than 
Neptune,  the  planet  furthest  away. 

The  sun  controls  the  earth  in  its  movements 
about  itself,  and  also  imparts  to  it  the  light,  heat, 
electricity,  and  all  other  life-gving  influences  it  en- 
joys. The  weight  or  specific  gravity  of  any  ma- 
terial on  the  sun  is  far  greater  than  it  is  on  our 
planet.  A  stone  weighing  one  pound  on  the 
earth,  weighs  twenty-seven  and  one-half  pounds 
on  the  sun,  and  only  three  ounces  on  the  moon. 

It  has  been  ascertained  that  light  takes  only 
eight  minutes  to  travel  from  the  sun  to  the  earth, 
and  heat  comes  with  it  in  the  same  time.     The 
quantity  and  degree  of  light  emitted  from  the  sun 
is  incalculable:  no  figures  can  convey  to  our 
minds  an  adequate  idea  of  the  amount.    In  in- 
tensity, it  far  exceeds  the  strongest  electric  light 
which  man  can  produce.    So  also  is  the  volume 
and  degree  of  the  heat  generated  in  the  sun  and 
thrown    olT   to    the  outermost  bounds  of  the 
system,  beyond  our  thought  or  comprehension. 
The  sun  throws  its  light  and  heat  straight  out 
from  its  surface  in  every  direction ;  also  its  posi- 
tive electricity,  for  which  the  negative  planets 
and  their  satellites  have  a  strong  affinity  and  at- 
tract the  inscrutable  fluid  in  straight  and  prob- 
ably also  in  converging  lines;  conveying  or  driv- 
ing in  its  train  the  light  and  heat  of  the  sun. 


I|i 


266         The  Earth  and  the  World 

The  Creator,  who  is  an  economical  Being,  and 
who  has  designed  and  measured  all  the  elements, 
their  place  and  work,  provides  and  secures  the 
greatest  benefit  that  may  be  derived  from  each, 
as  the  plants  and  flowers  naturally  turn  their 
leaves  and  faces  to  the  sun,  taking  in  their  full 
measure  of  its  light  and  heat. 

The  sun  is  called  by  some  astronomers  a 
"great  magnetic  body."  It  doubtless  is  the 
source  of  the  electricity  and  magnetism  that  per- 
vade our  earth  and  solar  system. 

8p.  Its  Spots  Determine  the  Period  of  its  Revo- 
lutions—Spots on  the  sun  are  known  to  exist; 
and  to  be  quite  numerous.  These  spots  differ  in 
size,  and  are  comparatively  small,  considering  the 
size  of  the  great  luminary.  These  spots  are 
known  to  change  in  size,  dividing  into  two  or 
more.  "The  spots  are  dark,  and  seem  to  be 
deep  down  or  in  a  cavity  of  the  sun's  surface. 
Sun  spots  disturb  the  magnetic  needle  on  the 
earth.  By  the  careful  observation  of  these  spots, 
proof  has  been  obtained  of  the  fact  and  time  of 
the  sun's  rotation  on  its  axis;  namely,  twenty- 
five  days  and  five  hours." 

Quoting  from  the  "Story  of  the  Heavens,"  by 
Sir  Robert  S.  Ball,  LL.  D.,  "the  visible  surface  of 
the  sun  is  not  a  solid  mass— is  not  even  a  liquid 
mass,— but  that  globe,  so  far  as  we  can  see, 
consists  of  matter  in  a  gaseous  or  vaporous  con- 
dition. It  would  appear  as  if  the  luminous  sur- 
face of  the  sun  were  composed  of  intensely 
bright  clouds  suspended  in  a  darker  atmosphere. 


The   Sun 


267 


During  a  total  eclipse,  mighty  prominences  of 
great  brilliancy  are  seen  to  leap  from  the  surface 
of  the  sun  upward  or  outward,  thousands,  even 
hundreds  of  thousands  of  miles,  with  great 
velocity,  estimated  sometimes  100  miles  and  over 
in  a  second,  most  wonderful  to  behold." 

Astronomers  give  abundant  evidence  that  the 
whole  surface  of  the  sun,  at  the  poles  as  well  as 
at  the  equator,  is  greatly  agitated  without  inter- 
mission by  great  eruptions,  violent  explosions  of 
great  magnitude,  enormous  masses  of  gaseous 
material  of  bright  light  thrown  up  vertically, 
sometimes  in  fantastic  shapes,  spikes  of  light 
thrown  outward  for  a  great  distance,  besides 
many  other  items  relating  to  the  sun,  which  we 
cannot  comprehend  and  which  we  would  not  be- 
lieve if  the  facts  were  not  demonstrated  by  the 
perfect  instruments  of  the  astronomers.  The 
wonderful  phenomena  that  the  sun  exhibits  are 
beyond  description,  and  must  have  an  adequate 
cause,  and  be  maintained  by  power  and  means 
that  are  inexhaustible. 

Elements  must  be  there  of  which  we  have  no 
definite  knowledge,  either  of  their  component 
materials,  or  of  the  combinations  they  make  in- 
stantly with  other  elements,  or  of  the  conditions 
by  which  they  may,  by  an  impulsive  force,  be 
violently  and  instantly  separated,  with  the  result- 
ant effect  of  a  tremendous  development  of  light, 
heat,  and  a  discharge  of  electrical  energy.  All 
the  elements  in  use  are  subject  to  law  and  orderly 
control. 


In  I 

I 


11 


If 


168         The  Earth  and  the  World 

go.  Probable  Procedure  of  the  Material  Ele^ 
ments  in  the  5««.— -The  material  elements  in  the 
sun,  producing  the  grand  effects  and  results 
known  to  all,  must  be  chemical  elements  of  well- 
defined  character,  probably  gaseous  in  their  na- 
ture, possessing  a  strong  affinity  for  other  ele- 
ments, forming  quick  or  instantaneous  combina- 
tions with  them,  and,  under  certain  conditions, 
probably  making  solids,  falling  down  from  the 
far  upper  or  outward  regions  ofthe  sun,  like  hail 
from  the  clouds  in  a  violent  electric  storm,  then 
sinking  deep  down  into  the  condensed  elastic 
gaseous  elements  of  the  sun,  until  it  reaches  an- 
other strata  of  a  different  character  that  violently 
repels  and  throws  it  back  far  out  from  the  sur- 
face, when  again  it  meets  with  conditions  that 
cause  it  to  explode  promptly  as  before,  develop- 
ing anew  the  condition  of  light  and  heat,  and 
generating  fresh  electrical  energy. 

This  supposed  line  of  procedure,  here  indefi- 
nitely marked  out,  goes  on,  and  is  going  on,  ap- 
parently forever,  following  the  lines  of  chemical 
and  electrical  operation.  Attrition,  combination, 
contraction,  disintegration,  expansion,  violent 
explosions,  ever  developing  the  conditions  of 
light  and  heat,  and  generating  the  electrical  energy 
that  prevails  everywhere  in  the  solar  system. 

The  same  material  or  chemical  agents  are  used 
over  and  over  again  continuously.  As  the  moist- 
ure, ever  being  drawn  up  by  the  sun,  comes  back 
to  the  earth  as  the  gentle  dew,  heavy  rain,  or 
destructive  hail,  so  likewise  the  material  elements 


The   Sun 


269 


in  the  sun,  carefully  and  wisely  prepared  by  the 
Creator,  ever  go  through  the  process  He  has  pre- 
pared, obeying  the  law  He  has  made,  to  serve 
Him  in  His  universe. 

Solomon  well  understood  the  matter  when  he 
wrote,  '*A11  the  rivers  run  into  the  sea,  yet  the 
sea  is  not  full ;  unto  the  place  from  whence  the 
rivers  come,  thither  they  return  again." 

Were  it  not  for  this  law  of  return  and  compen- 
sation, the  earth  would  soon  be  deprived  of  its 
rivers,  and  the  world  would  become  a  dreary 
waste.  If  God  hangs  a  lamp  in  the  skies  to 
light  up  the  heavens.  He  will  not  let  it  cease 
burning  for  lack  of  oil. 

gi.  The  Sun  an  Independent,  Self-sustaining 
Body.— In  our  thoughtful  investigations  for  years 
past,  of  the  nature  and  resources  of  our  sun,  the 
great  globe  that  controls  our  solar  system,  we 
have  concluded  that  that  body  was  designed  and 
made  by  the  Creator  to  be,  and  in  fact  it  is,  a 
self-sustaining  sun ;  that  it  has,  in  itself,  all  the 
elements  of  self-independency;  that  it  is  self- 
sufficient,  able  to  supply  bountifully  all  the  light, 
heat,  electric  and  other  life-giving  influences  that 
any  one  or  all  the  planets  together  require;  that 
the  Creator  has  supplied  it  with  all  the  peculiar 
materials  necessary  to  produce  the  effects  and 
accomplish  all  the  beneficent  work  it  is  doing. 
We  also  believe  that  He  has  also  made  wise  laws 
to  govern  and  control  it  in  all  respects,  in  its 
limitations  great  or  small;  that  in  the  exercise  or 
development  of  its  attributes,  it  shall  ever  be 


m 


270         The  Earth  and  the  World 

salutary,  steady,  and  so  uniform  that  the  countless 
millions  beholding  it  will  ever  trust  in  its  benign 
influence.  It  may  be  called  a  true  reflector  of  the 
wisdom  and  goodness  of  its  Creator. 

It  is  not  reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  all-wise 
and  infinitely  powerful  Creator  would  make  our 
sun,  and  the  infinite  number  of  suns  known  to 
be  in  the  universe,  to  do  the  important  work  we 
know  they  are,  and  ever  must  be  doing,  and  then 
suffer  them  to  be  subject  to  contingent  resources 
and  an  uncertain  supply  of  material,  and  thus  be 
liable  to  deteriorate,  and  gradually  burn  out,  at  a 
period  when  most  wanted.    No,  that  is  not  His 
way.     He  who  is  from  everlasting  to  everlasting, 
the  Unchangeable  One,  has  not  created  and  es- 
tablished His  universe  to  deteriorate  and  go  to 
pieces.     Changes  there  will  be,  as  He  has  de- 
clared; but  they  will  occur  at  the  time  and  in  the 
way  He  has  appointed.     If  the  sun  ever  ceases  to 
burn,  it  will  not  be  because  it  is  exhausted,  but 
because  its  Creator  has  determined  to  make  the 
change,  which,  when  it  comes,  will  do  so,  prob- 
ably, without  much  warning. 

92.  M  Flammarion's  Opinion  of  the  Sun. — 
Camille  Flammarion  of  France,  the  author  of  the 
'*  Popular  Astronomy  "  previously  referred  to,  is 
careful  not  to  mention  the  Almighty,  nor  at  any 
time  to  give  the  great  Creator  the  credit  of  doing 
anything  in  the  universe.  The  book  pleased  the 
French  people,  was  adopted  in  their  schools,  and 
we  understand  that  the  author  was  awarded  the 
sum  of  100,000  francs  for  it. 


The   Sun 


271 


M.  Flammarion  gives  a  number  of  reasons  or 
causes  for  the  heat  of  the  sun.  We  quote  from 
his  remarks,  on  page  298.  ''  And  how  is  this 
light  and  heat  kept  up  }  If  the  sun  were  com- 
posed of  massive  coal,  burning  in  pure  oxygen, 
it  would  not  burn  for  more  than  6,000  years 
without  being  entirely  consumed ;  it  would  then 
have  been  burned  out  since  the  beginning  of  his- 
toric times." 

This  statement  is  in  the  line  of  proof  that  the 
consumption  of  material  substance  would  not 
and  could  not  maintain  the  heat  of  the  sun.  He 
and  other  astronomical  writers  mention  the  fall 
of  comets  and  meteors  into  the  sun  as  material 
that  greatly  helps  to  maintain  its  eternal  fires.  It 
is  not  probable  that  all  the  comets,  meteors,  star- 
dust,  and  other  bodies  that  might  fall  into  the 
sun  for  100  years,  would  maintain  its  fires  for 
an  hour. 

M.  Flammarion  goes  on  to  say,  **  But  it  is  ab- 
solutely certain  that  it  will  become  extinct,  and 
that  terrestrial  life,  of  which  it  is  the  sole  source 
of  maintenance,  will  then  be  lulled  into  an  eternal 
sleep.  In  all  probability  the  sun  will  be  extinct 
before  20,000,000  years." 

What  does  he  know  about  it  ?  His  theory  is 
all  mere  guess  work.  The  change  will  doubtless 
come  as  predicted,  but  not  in  the  way  M.  Flam- 
marion expects.  His  immortal  spirit  will  be  in 
existence,  and  he  may  witness  the  grand  event; 
but  from  what  point  or  place  he  will  view  the 
great  catastrophe  it  is  hard  to  say. 


1 
n 


272        The  Earth  and  the  World 

As  we  have  already  stated,  we  hold  the  sun  to 
be  a  self-sustaining  globe,  provided  by  its  Crea- 
tor with  means  to  support  and  maintain  itself  in 
the  state  in  which  it  was  when  first  created ;  and 
that  all  its  materials  are  subject  to  laws  that  will 
ever  produce  comparative  uniformity  in  all  im- 
portant respects. 

pj.    Not  An  Atmospherical,  But  a  Vacuum 
Condition  Surrounding  the  Sun, — In  regard  to 
the  state  and  condition  of  its  surface,  it  is  prob- 
ably free  from  any  gas  or  air  possessing  weight, 
like  the  atmosphere  that  surrounds  our  earth,  for 
the  reason  that,  if  there  were  such  an  atmosphere 
or  resisting  fluid,  it  would  greatly  limit,  if  not 
prevent,  the  wonderful  phenomena  that  are  pro- 
duced and  reproduced  every  moment  all  over 
that  great  globe.     Here  on  the  earth,  if  we  fire  a 
ball  from  a  rifle  into  the  air,  the  resistance  of  the 
atmosphere  soon  stops  its  progress.     But  on  the 
sun,  burning  gas,  and  light  materials,  are  fired 
upward  and  outward  in  every  direction,  tens  and 
hundreds  of  thousands  of  miles,  without  ap- 
parent resistance  by  anything  like  our  atmos- 
phere.   There  are  other  reasons  that  might  be 
given  in  support  of  this  view,  viz:— that  there 
is  surrounding  the  sun  a  vacuum  condition,  an 
empty  space,  void  of  matter  or  anything  that 
would   float  or  sustain  matter,  or  that  would 
resist  the  free  outward  flow  of  all  ponderable  or 
imponderable  agents,  or  their  free  and  immediate 
return  to  the  body  of  the  sun  to  be  used  over  and 
over  again.    The  specific  gravity  of   the  sun. 


The   Sun 


273 


being  more  than  twenty  times  that  of  the  earth, 
would  bring  back  to  itself  any  material  that  was 
forcibly  thrown  out,  no  matter  how  light  it  might 
be.  Besides  this  vacuum,  or  rarified  condition, 
would  favor  all  electrical  phenomena,  according 
to  statements  made  lately  by  Tesla,  that  master 
in  electricity. 

94.  Why  Does  the  Sun  Turn  On  Its  Axis  ? — 
Leaving  these  and  some  other  matters  that  might 
be  considered,  we  would  mention  one  that  ought 
to  be  solved  if  possible,  and  that  is,  why  does  the 
sun  turn  on  its  axis,  and  by  what  means  is  its 
uniform  rotation  maintained? 

For  more  than  ten  generations  it  has  been  well 
known  that  our  earth  turned  on  its  axis,  and  that 
a  day  and  a  night  marked  the  time  it  took  for 
one  complete  revolution.  But  why  it  should 
turn,  and  what  was  the  power  that  maintained 
its  uniform  motion,  has  been,  and  is  even  now, 
more  or  less  of  a  mystery. 

Since  it  has  been  discovered  and  demonstrated 
that  our  sun  itself  rotates  on  its  axis  once  in  about 
twenty-fivje  days  and  five  hours,  the  questions 
arise,  why  and  by  what  power,  does  the  sun, 
that  great  globe  that  is  700  times  larger  and 
heavier  than  all  the  other  bodies  together,  in  the 
system  revolving  about  it,  turn  on  its  axis  and 
keep  up  its  uniform  motion  ? 

The  substance  of  the  answer  that  has  usually 
been  given  to  these  questions  is,  *'that  the  great 
Creator,  when  He  formed  these  bodies,  placed 
them    in   their  positions  and  gave  them  their 


w 


m\ 


ill 


274         The  Earth  and  the  World 

special  work  to  do,  issued  His  fiat  and  said, 
*  Let  them  rotate  upon  their  axes ' ;  and  said  to 
the  planets,  'Let  them  revolve  about  the  great 
sun  in  their  appointed  places  and  in  the  period 
fixed  for  them  to  finish  their  annual  courses.'" 
And  so  these  heavenly  bodies,  being  thus  duly 
started  on  their  courses,  and  operating  in  empty 
space,  where  there  are  no  resisting  elements,  do 
continue,  and  will  continue,  to  revolve  in  their 
courses  until  the  great  Creator  directs  a  change. 

All  this  sounds  very  well,  and  may  be  abso- 
lutely true  in  many  respects  for  aught  we  know, 
but  when  we  consider  that  it  must  take  an  in- 
calculable degree  of  power  or  force  to  keep  even 
our  inert  earth  rotating  at  the  equator  1,000  miles 
per  hour,  to  say  nothing  of  the  sun,  revolving  at 
its  equator  4,000  miles  per  hour,  and  when  we 
remember  that  it  is  a  natural  law  for  material 
bodies  to  lie  inert,  it  will  be  well  to  look  for 
some  other  cause  for  the  uniform  and  rapid 
movement  of  the  heavenly  bodies,  besides  the 
absolute  fiat  of  the  Almighty.  From  the  Scrip- 
tures, from  His  Providence,  and  from  all  His 
works  in  the  whole  realm  of  nature,  we  learn 
the  invariable  lesson  that  He  is  not  only  a  "  God 
of  ways,  but  also  of  means; "  and  that  wherever 
and  whenever  He  plans  a  way.  He  provides  the 
means,  though  the  means  may  not  always  be 
discerned  by  man. 

As  we  have,  from  time  to  time,  considered  the 
cause  and  power  that  kept  the  heavenly  bodies  in 
motion,  we  have  concluded  that,  for  our  earth  at 


The   Sun 


275 


least,  there  was  some  internal  arrangement  located 
probably  at  or  near  its  centre;  some  materials  or 
elements  of  power,  wisely  arranged  in  all  re- 
spects, and  endowed  with  power  and  means  of 
controlling  the  same,  as  the  springs  and  mechan- 
ism of  a  watch  regulate  its  movements.  We 
have  also  further  concluded  that  the  elements  of 
electricity  and  magnetism,  that  prevail  so  exten- 
sively over  the  earth,  are  the  powerful  elements 
which  give  that  body  its  rotary  motion,  that  give 
and  control  its  daily  revolution  with  perfect  pre- 
cision. The  combined  element,  electro-magnet- 
ism, is  now  doing  more  for  the  earth  than  man 
can  realize. 

But  when  we  contemplate  the  great  sun  that 
controls  all  the  bodies  that  revolve  about  him  and 
provides  for  all  the  members  of  the  great  family 
to  which  we  belong,  we  wonder  at  the  amount 
of  work  he  is  called  upon  to  perform,  and  the 
immense  power  he  must  exercise  to  accom- 
plish it. 

The  question  is,  wherein  lies  his  giant  strength  ? 
We  know  the  sun  is  sometimes  called  "  an  electric 
body,"  '*SL  great  magnetic  globe."  We  believe 
that  the  sun  supplies  our  earth  with  electricity,  as 
before  stated,  and  also  all  the  other  members  of 
the  system.  We  believe  also  that  this  all-per- 
vading and  powerful  element,  electricity,  or 
electro-magnetism,  is  the  power  in  action  that 
causes  the  sun  to  rotate  on  its  axis  and  maintain 
its  uniform  motion.  But  just  how  the  power 
was  applied,  we  are  not  able  to  decide. 


I 


i 


I 


276 


The  Earth  and  the  World 


95.  Electro-magnetic  Currents  Probably  Give 
Motion  and  Power  to  the  Sun. — We  learned,  a 
few  years  ago,  from  one  of  the  electrical  publica- 
tions, a  fact  or  law  relating  to  electric  and  mag- 
netic currents  that  had  not  previously  been  ap- 
parent to  us.  On  realizing  the  force  and  extent 
of  the  application  of  the  law  as  laid  down,  we 
were  more  than  ever  convinced  that  it  was  the 
electro-magnetic  currents  that  caused  the  sun  to 
rotate  on  itself,  and  maintain  its  uniform  motion 
age  after  age;  that  the  sun  might,  in  fact,  be 
truly  called  an  ''immense  dynamo." 

Quoting  from  a  work  published  by  the  Electric 
Publishing  Co.,  New  York,  the  law,  as  stated,  is 
as  follows :—"  Let  it  be  understood  that  a  wire 
or  any  conductor  having  a  current  of  electricity 
passing  through  it,  has  lines  of  magnetic  force 
passing  one  way  around  it,  and  the  number  is  in 
direct  ratio  to  the  quantity  of  current  passing 
through  the  wire.  This  magnetic  effect  is  strong- 
est close  to  the  wire  and  decreases  inversely  as 
the  square  of  the  distance." 

This  extract,  stating  definitely  an  ascertained 
fact,  shows  that  there  is  a  perfect  union  in  action 
of  the  two  elementary  forces,  electricity  and 
magnetism,  which,  in  their  combination,  form  a 
wonderful  system  for  the  development  and  use 
of  their  combined  energy.  It  is  a  most  singular 
procedure.  It  appears  to  be  like  a  mechanical 
contrivance,  the  electricity  being  the  shaft,  and 
the  magnetism  the  pulley,  to  which  is  attached 
the  belt  for  driving  the  machinery. 


The   Sun 


277 


g6.  Statement  of  Plain  Procedure, — Then  let 
us  consider  these  two  elements  as  being  located 
in  the  centre  of  the  sun,  the  electric  passing  from 
pole  to  pole  and  the  magnetic  currents  passing 
around  it,  as  described;  and  both  currents  being 
supplied  in  quantity  and  force  in  proportion  to 
the  magnitude  of  the  sun,  and  the  work  required 
of  him,  both  elements  combined,  operating  in 
the  fullness  of  their  strength,  yet  quietly,  un- 
noticed, "their voice  not  being  heard,"  free  from 
all  friction  or  disturbance,  turning  the  vast  globe, 
and  ever  maintaining  its  uniform  revolution  on 
its  axis  regardless  of  any  extra  effort  that  it 
might  at  times  be  called  upon  to  put  forth  in 
order  to  accomplish  perfectly  its  appointed  work. 
We  say  that  when  we  endeavor  to  realize  what 
is  done,  and  how,  we  are  lost  in  wonder  and 
admiration  at  the  simplicity  of  a  contrivance  so 
effective  in  its  operation,  and  which  manifests  so 
clearly  the  wisdom  of  the  Creator  who  designed 
and  perfected  the  plan. 

To  repeat :  * '  The  electric  current  passing  through 
the  centre  of  the  sun  has  lines  of  magnetic  force 
passing  one  way  around  it,  and  the  number  is  in 
direct  ratio  to  the  quantity  of  the  current  passing 
through  it."  "The  work  done  by  electricity  is 
done  by  the  magnetism  surrounding  the  passing 
current,  and  not  by  the  electricity  itself." 

The  electric  currents  passing  through  the  centre 
of  the  sun  from  pole  to  pole,  may  have  their  re- 
turn currents  at  or  near  the  outer  surface  of  the 
sun  300,000  miles  or  more  away  from  the  centre. 


27*         The  Earth  and  the  World 

In  their  return,  other  ends  may  be  accomplished 
in  their  dispersion  through  the  system. 

gj.  Electro-magnetic  Currents  Employed  Prob- 
ably to  Give  Rotary  Motion  to  the  Planets,— Our 
conclusions  of  the  ways  and  means  in  operation 
for  maintaining  the  sun's  rotation  we  believe  will 
bear  investigation. 

The  same  principle  and  means  we  also  hold  to 
be  in  operation  on  our  earth  and  the  planets  that 
rotate  on  their  axes.  Some  planets  that  do  not 
rotate  may  have  within  them  the  means  pro- 
vided, resting  in  a  dormant  condition  until  the 
time  arrives  for  their  use,  which,  as  we  have 
before  stated,  was  probably  the  condition  of  our 
earth  when  there  was  no  diurnal  revolution.  In 
this  condition  the  planet  Venus  is  now  probably 
abiding.  It  must  be  remembered  that  the  plan 
named  relates  only  to  the  diurnal  revolution  of 
the  bodies  named.  This  mode  of  procedure  is 
not  adapted  to  sustain  the  revolution  of  the 
planets  about  the  sun,  nor  satellites  about  their 
primaries.    That  is  an  entirely  different  matter. 

98.  What  Power  Gives  Motion  and  Maintains 
the  Planets  in  their  Orbits  About  the  Sun  ?— The 
important  question  therefore,  now  is,  what  power 
gives  and  maintains  the  planets  in  their  orbits 
about  the  sun?  Electric  and  magnetic  power 
will  not  do  this  work.  It  is  not  adapted  to  it. 
That  power  is  effective  only  when  near  by,  ac- 
cording to  the  law.  ''This  magnetic  effect  is 
strongest  close  to  the  wire,  and  decreases  in- 
versely as  the  square  of  the  distance.*' 


The   Sun 


279 


To  keep  the  planets  in  position  and  in  uniform 
motion,  according  to  the  laws  Kepler  has  laid 
down,  requires  a  power  or  force  under  law,  ever 
the  same  under  similar  circumstances  or  condi- 
tions. 

There  is  one  power  that  rules  in  the  world,  in 
our  solar  system  and  doubtless  in  the  universe, 
belonging  to  or  inherent  in  matter,  ever  con- 
stant, everywhere  asserting  itself,  that  cannot  be 
produced,  destroyed,  nor  its  sovereignty  ignored; 
and  that  is  gravity,  the  power  and  attraction  of 
gravitation. 

It  is  admitted  that  there  are  two  forces  control- 
ling or  operating  on  the  planets  in  their  circuit 
about  the  sun:  one,  the  centrifugal,  that  impels 
the  planet  to  fly  away  from  the  sun,  and  the 
other,  the  centripetal  (attraction  of  gravitation), 
that  causes  it  to  gravitate  to  the  sun  the  greater 
body.  These  two  forces,  as  is  well  known, 
equalize  each  other,  maintaining  the  planet  in  its 
appointed  orbit  while  swiftly  moving  about  the 
sun. 

This  is  one  of  the  great  wonders  of  the  starry 
heavens.  Imagine  the  earth,  for  instance,  flying 
in  space  around  the  sun  about  60,000  miles  per 
hour;  it  is  kept  from  flying  off  at  a  tangent  by 
the  attraction  of  gravitation,  and  from  falling  into 
the  sun  by  centrifugal  motion.  This  force  that 
holds  the  earth  to  the  sun  is  beyond  our  compre- 
hension. The  force  that  holds  the  moon  in  its 
orbit  about  the  earth  is  more  than  we  can  under- 
stand.    All  the  smiths  in  the  world  are  not  able 


280         The  Earth  and  the  World 

to  forge  chains  sufficiently  strong  to  hold  the 
moon  in  its  orbit,  even  if  they  could  be  fastened 
to  it,  the  force  of  gravitation  being  suspended. 

99'  The  Force  of  Gravity  of  the  Sun  is  the 
Power  that  Moves  the  Planets  in  their  Orbits; 
and  that,  too,  in  Periods  Proportionate  to  their 
Distance  from  the  Sw«.— After  long  consideration 
we  have  come  to  the  conclusion  that  it  is  the  in- 
herent power  of  gravitation,  with  which  the 
Creator  has  endowed  matter,  that  not  only  holds 
the  planets  from  flying  out  of  their  orbits,  but 
moves  and  maintains  them  in  their  regular  and 
uniform  courses  about  the  sun. 

If  this  is  so,  the  question  is,  how  is  it  accom- 
plished ?    In  this  matter  it  appears  that  heretofore 
we  have  given  or  allowed  gravity  but  one  duty  to 
perform ;  and  that  was  to  keep  the  planets  from 
flying  away  from  the  sun.    That  is,  gravity  was 
the  centripetal  force  that  just  equalled  the  centrifu- 
gal force;  and,  having  done  that,  its  work  was 
completed.     It  will  be  admitted  that  this  attrac- 
tion of  the  sun  for  the  planet  must  inevitably  be 
very  great;  and  that  this  attractive  power  of  the 
sun  is  and  does  act  as  a  positive  grip  on  the 
planets,  a  grip  which  it  will  not  release.    There 
is  no  chance  about  this  complex  work  of  gravity. 
The  forces  are  all  measured,  and  are,  in  their 
operation,  as  exact  as  any  mathematical  problem. 
This  force  of  gravity,  as  is  known,  is  all-pene- 
trating and  all-pervading:  every  part  of  the  sun 
lays  hold  of  every  part  of  the  planet,  and  moves 
it  along  with  its  effective  current.    It  is  an  attri- 


The   Sun 


bute  of  matter  unseen  and  unfelt,  yet  everywhere 
asserting  itself;  a  positive  power  unlike  any 
other.  The  sun,  700  times  larger  and  heavier 
than  all  the  planets  combined,  turning  on  its 
axis  in  the  strength  of  its  might,  carries  with 
itself  on  the  same  plane  and  in  the  same  direc- 
tion, all  the  planets  and  satellites  that  revolve 
about  it  in  our  solar  system. 

The  sun  does  not  move  the  planet  around  it  in 
the  same  time  it  takes  to  turn  itself,  as  if  there 
were  a  fixed  and  positive  pole  or  lever  connecting 
the  sun  with  the  planet.  There  is  what  might  be 
called  a  slippage  of  the  belt,  a  swift  passing  of 
the  sun's  attractive  current  over  every  atom  of  the 
planet,  exerting  its  due  influence,  moving  the 
planet  along  in  its  orbit,  just  as  a  breeze  striking 
the  sails  of  a  ship,  moves  it  through  the  waters ; 
but  it  is  apparent  to  every  observer  that  the  ship 
does  not  move  as  fast  as  the  wind.  If  the 
wind  is  blowing  twenty  miles  per  hour,  the  ves- 
sel does  well  to  make  ten.  The  nearer  a  planet 
is  to  the  sun,  the  stronger  is  the  sun's  hold  on  it, 
or  control  over  it;  and  therefore  the  period  of  the 
planet's  revolution  about  the  sun  must  be  less 
than  if  it  were  further  away,  gravity  ever  asserting 
its  due  power,  as  the  facts  of  astronomy  prove. 

Mercury,  the  planet  nearest  the  great  orb,  com- 
pletes its  circuit  in  eighty-eight  days:  Venus, 
the  next,  in  225  days:  next,  the  earth,  in  365 
days.  Neptune,  the  last  and  furthest  away,  be- 
ing over  2,700,000  miles  from  the  sun,  takes  165 
years  to  complete  its  orbit;  thus  making  it  evi- 


292        The  Earth  and  the  World 

dent  that  the  farther  away  a  planet  may  be  from 
the  sun,  the  less  power  it  has  to  move  it  in  its 
orbit.  The  fact  remains  that  all  the  planets  in 
their  movements  are  controlled  by  the  sun. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  the  satellites.  Each 
one  is  controlled  by  its  primary;  the  planet  to 
which  it  belongs.  We  believe  that,  for  the 
planets,  there  is  the  same  internal  arrangement  or 
plan  of  procedure  provided  that  prevails  on  the 
sun,  though  in  a  far  less  degree.  That  is,  our 
earth  is  under  the  influence  or  power  of  an  elec- 
tro-magnetic force  that  turns  it  on  its  axis;  and 
then  the  earth,  by  its  gravity,  or  attraction,  or 
gravitation,  holds  the  moon  in  its  control,  and 
moves  it  about  in  its  orbit  as  the  sun  moves  the 
earth. 

The  moon,  the  "maidservant"  of  the  earth, 
created  to  serve  it,  does  not  need  any  system  of 
diurnal  rotation,  for  the  Creator  has  not  seen  best 
to  provide  any. 

Jupiter,  the  largest  planet  in  the  system,  diam- 
eter about  87,000  miles,  rotates  on  its  axis  in 
about  ten  hours.  It  has  four  satellites;  one  re- 
volving about  it  in  forty-three  hours,  another  in 
eighty-five  hours,  another  in  seven  days  and  four 
hours,  and  the  fourth  in  sixteen  days  and  seven- 
teen hours.  These  satellites  are  comparatively 
small  and  are  near  the  great  planet.  The  attrac- 
tion of  gravitation,  therefore,  is  so  strong,  and 
has  such  control  over  them,  as  to  force  them  to 
make  their  revolution  about  their  primary  in  the 
short  time  named. 


The   Sun 


283 


The  planets  that  do  not,  or  are  not  known  to 
rotate  on  their  axes,  may  also  be  supplied  with 
the  electro-magnetic  apparatus  for  diurnal  revolu- 
tion which,  for  the  present,  may  be  held  in  abey- 
ance until  their  use  is  required  by  the  Creator, 
which,  as  we  have  before  stated,  we  believe  was 
the  case  with  our  earth  during  the  long  periods 
of  its  geological  formation. 

If  we  did  not  know  that  the  sun  turned  on  its 
axis,  we  could  not  say  that  it  influenced  the 
planets  in  their  annual  revolutions  about  it,  but 
in  this  day,  the  rotation  of  the  sun  on  its  axis  is 
an  ascertained  fact. 

700.  The  Sun  Requires  Great  Power  to  do  its 
Work.  It  is  an  Immense  ** Driving  Pulley,*' — It 
would  be  well  to  consider  for  a  moment  not  only 
the  very  great  power  required  to  keep  the  great 
globe  in  its  own  uniform  rotation,  but  the  extra 
power  it  must  put  forth  to  keep  all  the  planets 
revolving  about  it  in  their  regular  courses  and 
uniform  motions.  Some  idea  of  the  great  size  of 
the  sun  may  be  obtained  if  we  consider  the  cen- 
tre of  that  tremendous  globe  placed  where  our 
earth  now  is ;  and  then  remember  that  one-half 
of  its  diameter  will  fill  up  all  the  space  between 
our  earth  and  the  moon,  besides  extending  about 
200,000  miles  beyond  the  moon. 

It  would  appear  that  the  utility  of  the  sun's  ro- 
tation on  its  axis  has  hitherto  escaped  notice;  but 
when  this  fact  is  realized,  the  wisdom  of  the  Al- 
mighty in  designing  and  ordering  this  important 
procedure,  so  simple  and  so  effective,  must  be 


% 


H 


284         The  Earth  and  the  World 


apparent  to  all  intelligent  minds.  Our  sun  proves 
to  be  a  great  and  powerful  dynamo.  It  is  the 
immense  "driving  pulley"  of  the  solar  system, 
that  keeps  all  the  planets  in  motion. 

It  may  truly  be  said  of  our  sun,  that,  in  the  en- 
tire physical  universe  there  is  nothing  to  equal  it 
in  wisdom  of  design,  utility,  power  and  glory; 
and  that  therefore  it  may  be  accepted  as  God's 
master-work  of  creation. 


XIX 


THE  PLANET  MARS 


101,  Interesting  Items  Relating  to  the  Planet 
Mars. — But  here  comes  the  little  planet  Mars; 
and  we  must  not  pass  it  by,  for  at  this  late  day 
it  has  a  wonderful  story  to  tell.  From  the  as- 
tronomers we  learn  that  there  are  no  two  planets 
alike.  Perfect  uniformity  is  not  the  rule  for  the 
stars;  they  all  differ  in  glory;  as  among  a  hun- 
dred maidens  that  might  be  gathered  together, 
every  one  beautiful,  graceful  and  charming,  yet 
no  two  would  be  found  in  all  respects  alike. 

"  Mars  is  the  planet  nearest  to  the  earth  in  the 
outer  circle:  it  is  4,000  miles  in  diameter,  and  ro- 
tates on  its  axis  in  twenty-four  hours." 

We  quote  from  an  astronomical  work  describ- 
ing that  planet;  **  There  are  circumstances  which 
strongly  suggest  that  water  may  be  found  on  that 
globe.  At  the  poles  of  Mars  are  large  white 
regions,  and  it  has  been  surmised  that  they  are 
due  to  an  accumulation  of  ice  and  snow  on  the 
polar  regions  of  the  planet.  On  some  occasions, 
indeed,  an  ice  cap  on  Mars,  with  its  brilliancy  and 
its  sharply  defined  margin,  is  a  striking  picture  in 
the  telescopic  view  of  the  planet." 

We  have  never  given  any  credence  to  the  idea 

that  the  white  regions  seen  at  the  poles  of  the 

planet  were  due  to  their  being  capped  by  ice  or 

385 


H' 


a86         The  Earth  and  the  World 

snow;  for  these  elements  have  no  superior  ca- 
pacity to  reflect  light,  at  the  best,  more  than  a 
few  thousand  miles.  They  have  not  the  inherent 
light  possessed  by  electricity,  or  bodies  highly 
electrified,  that  may  be  seen  at  a  distance  of  50,- 
000,000  miles. 

We  have  always  held  that  the  light  or  white 
appearance  seen  at  the  poles  of  Mars  was  due  to 
some  electric  phenomenon,  similar  to  the  polar 
lights,  or  ''Aurora  Borealis,"  always  prevailing  in 
the  Arctic  regions  of  our  earth. 

The  most  probable  theory  of  the  "Aurora 
Borealis"  is  that  originally  given  by  Franklin, 
viz:— "that  it  was  due  to  electric  discharges  in 
the  upper  regions  of  the  air." 

But  in  recent  years  something  more  interesting 
has  been  discovered  relating  to  the  planet  Mars, 
which  has  been  the  subject  of  much  thought  and 
speculation.  Mars  had  heretofore  been  described 
in  the  books  as  one  of  the  planets  that  had  no 
moon  nor  satellite.  But  lately  it  has  been  defi- 
nitely ascertained  that  Mars  has  two  satellites; 
that  they  are  small;  and  that  Mars  hugs  them  so 
close  to  himself  that  it  has  been  a  difficult  matter 
to  find  them.  The  honor  of  having  discovered 
these  moons  belongs  to  Professor  Hall,  of  the 
Washington  Observatory,  Washington,  D.  C. 

The  discovery  was  the  result  of  a  diligent  and 
persevering  effort,  combined  with  a  perfect 
knowledge  of  the  situation,  and  just  what  was 
required  to  accomplish  a  determined  purpose. 
If  Mars  had  any  satellites,  Professor  Hall  was  re- 


The  Planet  Mars 


287 


solved  to  know  it;  and  he  found  them,  though 
they  were  small  and  close  to  the  planet  as  we 
have  said. 

The  larger  of  the  two  is  twenty-two  and  one- 
half  miles  in  diameter,  16,500  miles  distant  from 
the  planet,  and  revolves  about  it  in  thirty  hours 
and  eighteen  minutes,  about  six  hours  more  than 
Mars  takes  to  rotate  on  itself.  So  far  no  new 
rule  or  principle  appears  to  be  involved. 

But  the  small  satellite,  about  eighteen  miles  in 
diameter,  and  4,000  miles  away,  revolves  about 
the  planet  in  seven  hours  and  thirty-nine  minutes, 
flying  around  more  than  three  times  while  the 
planet  is  revolving  once. 

This  appears  to  be  something  new  in  nature. 
There  is  nothing  like  it  known  in  the  solar  sys- 
tem, where  a  satellite  revolves  about  a  primary 
in  less  time  than  the  planet  turns  on  its  own  axis. 
Can  this  new  course  of  procedure  be  accounted 
for;  and  if  so,  how  ?  There  is  one  way  in  which 
we  would  account  for  it»  and  if  true,  as  we  be- 
lieve, it  will  fully  explain  the  movements  of  the 
satellites  of  Mars ;  and  that  is,  that  the  planet  it- 
self is  a  large  dynamo,  though  small  in  compari- 
son to  the  sun;  and  that  this  is  so,  is  made  more 
apparent  by  the  fact  that  the  polar  lights  of  the 
planet  make  it  manifest  that  he  is  under  the  in- 
fluence and  power  of  electric  currents:  that  is, 
that  there  is  passing  through  the  centre  of  Mars 
a  current  of  electricity  which,  according  to  the 
electro-magnetic  law,  has  a  current  of  magnetic 
force  passing  one  way  around  it  in  direct  ratio  to 


I"  * 


288         The  Earth  and  the  World 

the  quantity  of  electric  current  through  the  wire 
or  centre  of  the  planet. 

As  this  magnetic  current  is  strongest  close  to 
the  wire  or  electric  current,  and  decreases  in- 
versely as  the  square  of  the  distance,  therefore 
these  satellites  of  Mars,  being  in  close  proximity 
to  it,  and  under  the  influence  of  this  magnetic 
force,  are  carried  around  it  faster  than  the  planet 
itself  rotates. 

If  the  satellites  were  30,000  to  50,000  miles 
away,  they  would  be  beyond  the  magnetic  force, 
and  would  then  revolve  steadily  about  the  planet, 
being  carried  around  it  by  the  power  or  attrac- 
tion of  gravitation  that  reaches  out  everywhere; 
revolving  on  the  same  plan  of  procedure  on 
which  our  moon  is  caused  to  revolve  about  our 
earth. 


XX 

CONCLUDING  REFLECTIONS 

roi.  A  Reminiscence.— \n  early  life,  the  writer, 
being  induced  to  leave  his  father's  home  in  old 
Fairfield,  Conn.,  came  to  the  city  of  New  York 
and  was  soon  employed  in  a  wholesale  dry 
goods  house  in  Cedar  Street,  making  his  home  in 
Brooklyn,  since  which  time  that  city  has  been  the 
place  of  his  residence,  and  also  that  of  his  family, 
since  he  has  had  one. 

Brooklyn,  as  is  well  known,  has  always  been 
practically  a   part  of  the  greater  city  of  New 
York,  separated  from  it  only  by  the  deep  river 
that  connects  the  waters  of  Long  Island  Sound 
with  the  ocean.    The  greater  part  of  the  residents 
of  Brooklyn  had  their  place  of  business  in  the  city 
of  New  York,  going  over  in  the  morning,  and 
returning  in  the  latter  part  of  the  day.    For  years 
they  were  transported  across  the  river  in  slowly- 
moving  ferry-boats;  but  of  late  years  the  ever- 
increasing  crowds  of  people  have  had,  in  addition 
to  the  ferries,  the  use  of  the  great  and  widely- 
known  Suspension  Bridge  that  now  connects  the 
two  cities. 

After  the  writer's  arrival  in  New  York,  it  was 
not  many  months  before  he  learned  that  the  city 
possessed  institutions  that  offered  to  young  men 
advantages  not  to  be  had  in  the  country.     The 

289 


I''lf' 


290         The  Earth  and  the  World 

one  that  particularly  attracted  his  attention,  and 
from  which  he  soon  began  to  reap  benefit,  was 
the  "Mercantile  Library,"  then  conveniently  lo- 
cated in  Clinton  Hall,  on  Nassau  and  Beekman 
Streets.  The  Library  was  well  stocked  with  in- 
teresting and  valuable  books;  and,  in  addition, 
had  a  reading  room  containing  books  of  refer- 
erence,  and  was  well  supplied  with  leading  liter- 
ary, scientific,  and  astronomical  magazines,  quar- 
terlies, reviews  and  other  periodicals,  principally 
English,  in  which  financial  and  many  other 
questions  of  the  day  were  discussed.  It  also  had 
several  Mechanical  Journals,  containing  descrip- 
tions of  the  new  inventions  and  discoveries  that 
were  being  made,  most  of  which  attracted  his 
attention.  Besides  the  above,  there  were  deliv- 
ered, during  the  season,  interesting  and  valuable 
lectures  by  men  of  learning  and  ability. 

The  writer  took  pleasure  in  investigating  the 
financial  questions  of  the  day,  and  also,  what  was 
new  in  astronomy. 

loj.  Theory  of  a  *' Central  Sun/'— At  that 
time  there  was,  in  one  of  the  magazines,  an  article 
maintaining  the  theory  of  what  is  known  as  the 
"Central  Sun."  Some  so-called  astronomers 
held  the  theory  that  the  fixed  stars,  as  they  were 
called,  were  suns,  which,  together  with  their 
supposed  planetary  systems,  revolved  about  one 
great  "Central  Sun";  maintaining,  because  of 
the  universal  law  of  gravitation,  that  of  necessity 
there  must  be  one  such  body  in  order  to  preserve 
the  equilibrium   and  orderly  movement  of  the 


Concluding  Reflections 


291 


celestial  bodies,  and  prevent  them  from  coming 
into  collision,  or  congregating  together. 

The  theory  was  simply  an  extension  of  the 
plan  of  our  own  solar  system;  our  sun  control- 
ling the  movements  of  all  the  bodies  revolving 
about  it,  keeping  them  in  their  places  and  thereby 
preventing  destructive  collisions,  etc. 

The  queston  whether  or  not  there  was  then  such 
a  great  controlling  body  in  the  universe,  engaged 
the  writer's  thoughts;  and,  after  a  definite  con- 
sideration of  the  theory,  he  concluded  that  there 
was  no  such  body,  for  reasons,  in  brief,  that  if 
there  were  such  a  central  sun,  it  could  not  be 
hid,  and  therefore  must  in  many  ways  be  made 
apparent  to  all  solar  systems  it  controlled;  as  our 
great  sun  is  visible  to  all  the  planets  and  other 
bodies  revolving  about  it.  Besides,  the  theory  as 
;a  whole  was  incongruous,  and  might  be  consid- 
ered a  disparagement  of  the  wisdom  of  the 
Creator. 

But  if  the  law  of  gravitation  is  held  to  be  a  uni- 
versal law,  as  it  is  now  believed  to  be,  then  the 
question  remains,  how  or  by  what  law  or  power 
are  the  solar  systems— infinite  in  number,  and 
observed  in  every  part  of  the  heavens— prevented 
from  coming  in  collision  with  one  another,  or 
being  finally  congregated  in  one  irretrievable 
mass? 

After  investigating  the  theory  for  our  own  sat- 
isfaction, and  weighing  the  matter  in  our  mind 
for  some  time,  studying  the  properties  of,  and 
experimenting   with   the  magnet,  noting   with 


292         The  Earth  and  the  World 

surprise  its  peculiar  property  of  the  positive,  or 
like  poles,  repelling  each  other,  while  attracting 
the  negative,  or  opposite  poles,  we  came  gradu- 
ally to  the  conclusion  that  the  fixed  stars  or  suns, 
so  numerous  in  the  heavens,  were  all  alike  en- 
dowed with  the  same  positive  magnetic  influ- 
ence,  or  with  some  such    repelling  power  in 
respect  to  each  other;  and  therefore  these  sys- 
tems would  naturally  repel  or  move  away  from 
each  other,  or,  in  other  words,  that  while  a  sun 
and  its  revolving  planets  were  kept  together  by 
mutual  attraction,  the  same  as  in  our  solar  sys- 
tem, all  other  suns,  with  their  systems,  would  be 
prevented  from  coming  in  contact  or  collision  by 
their  mutual  repulsion.     In  such  an  arrangement 
for  controlling  the  movements  of  the  celestial 
bodies,  the  power  and  wisdom  of  the  Creator 
seemed  to  us  to  be  manifestly  displayed. 

The  opinion  then  formed,  relative  to  the  central 
sun  theory,  the  writer  wrote  down  at  the  time  in 
a  book  which  he  kept  for  such  purposes,  making 
a  rough  diagram  showing  how  the  suns  or  sys- 
tems might  oscillate  or  change  positions  in  re- 
spect to  each  other,  yet  never  be  able  to  come 
into  contact;  for  the  force  of  repulsion  that  each 
one  had  for  the  others  would  increase  the  nearer 
they  approached  each  other,  and  that  increased 
force  would  drive  them  farther  away,  so  that  it 
would  be  impossible  for  suns  to  come  in  contact 
with  each  other.     This  view  of  the  forces  gov- 
erning the  solar  system  was  written  out  in  detail, 
in  March,  1839,  some  sixty  years  ago,  when  the 


Concluding  Reflections 


2^3 


writer  was  in  his  teens.  Since  then  the  matter 
has  now  and  then  been  reconsidered,  but  never 
has  he  found  reason  to  change  his  opinion. 

Some  years  ago  the  writer  thought  best  to  give 
to  the  public  his  view  of  the  true  meaning  of  the 
Mosaic  Record  of  "the  six  days  work  of  crea- 
tion," which  he  had  long  entertained.  To  that 
end  he  had  published,  anonymously,  a  small 
pamphlet  of  about  eight  pages,  mailing  several 
hundred  copies  to  different  persons  whom  he 
judged  would  be  interested  in  the  subject. 

The  writer  then  being  fully  occupied  with  his 
manufacturing  business,  it  was  not  convenient 
for  him  to  elaborate  or  explain;  so  his  views 
were  stated  in  the  form  of  a  short  proposition, 
the  first  page  of  which  is  here  given.  The  ques- 
tions and  views  thus  submitted  were  important, 
and  in  some  respects  new;  although  the  subject 
was  old,  and  was  ever  being  discussed  by  theo- 
logians and  others.  Over  100  copies  were  mailed 
to  professors  and  tutors  in  colleges,  under  the 
impression  that  some,  at  least,  would  take  up  the 
questions  submitted,  and  examine  into  the  truth 
and  merits  of  the  same.  But  there  was  no  re- 
sponse from  any  one.  Doubtless  they  reasoned 
that,  as  the  author  was  unknown,  it  was  not 
worth  their  while  to  examine  into  the  value  or 
truth  of  any  statements  presented. 

It  reminded  one  of  the  wager  made  by  an 
Englishman,  that  he  could  sell  British  sovereigns 
at  one  shilling  each,  and  so,  as  the  story  goes,  he 
took  his  place  at  the  prominent  end  of  London 


^94         The  Earth  and  the  World 

Bridge,  with  twenty  good  sovereigns,  offering  to 
sell  them  for  a  shilling  apiece,  but  at  the  end  of 
the  day  had  not  sold  any,  all  believing,  as  a  mat- 
ter of  course,  that  they  must  be  spurious. 

Herewith  is  the  first  page  of  the  pamphlet  in 
question. 

"Some  of  the  *Thats'  concerning  the  universe 
and  the  creation  of  the  world,  that  are  probably, 
if  not  absolutely,  true. 

"That  this  universe  in  which  we  exist  was 
created  by  a  Being  called  God. 

"That  this  Being  is  all-wise,  good  and  power- 
ful; and  that  no  limit  can  be  placed  on  any  of 
His  attributes. 

"  That  God  is  from  eternity,  and  has  eternity 
in  which  to  manifest  His  will  and  execute  His 
plans. 

"That  in  wisdom  and  by  His  power  God  de- 
signs and  executes  His  plans,  either  directly  and 
immediately,  or  by  adopting  means  to  accomplish 
and  perfect  the  end. 

"That  God  manifests  design  and  purpose  in 
all  His  works. 

"That  God  has  established  general  laws  to 
govern  the  universe  of  matter,  and  special  and 
particular  laws  for  all  its  various  orders  and 
classes. 

"That  these  laws,  in  their  limit,  continuance 
and  abeyance,  are  subject  to  His  will  and  con- 
trol. 

"That  God  may  have  placed  a  limit  on  the 


Concluding  Reflections  295 

universe,  and  the  influence  of  the  laws  that  gov- 
ern it,  saying,  *  Thus  far  shalt  thou  go  and  no 
further.' 

"That  the  habitable  universe  embraces  innu- 
merable systems,  composed  of  suns  with  their 
revolving  bodies  or  worlds;  similar  to  our  solar 
system." 

"That  the  two  forces,  attraction  and  repulsion, 
control  these  systems. 

"  That  while  a  system,  the  sun  and  its  revolv- 
ing bodies,  are  kept  together  by  mutual  attrac- 
tion, the  innumerable  systems  of  the  universe 
are  prevented  from  coming  in  contact  with  each 
other  by  their  laws  of  mutual  repulsion. 

"That  this  law  allows  the  systems  to  oscillate, 
move  among,  or  change  their  places  in  respect  to 
each  other,  without  danger  of  collision. 

"  That  this  world  was  not  made  by  chance, 
nor  formed  by  the  operation  of  laws  and  forces 
uncontrolled  by  intelligent  mind  and  will." 

"That  the  times,  ways  and  means  employed 
by  God  in  making  the  world  as  it  now  exists, 
are  as  yet  hid  from  the  knowledge  of  men." 

104.  Opinion  of  Rev,  E.  F,  Burr,  D.  D., 
LL.  D.,  on  Some  Scriptural  Points  Named,— 
Among  others,  a  copy  of  the  pamphlet  was 
mailed  to  Rev.  E.  F.  Burr,  D.  D.,  LL.  D.,  author 
of  "Stars  of  God,"  "Ecce  Coelum,"  and  many 
other  well-known  works,  and  here  is  his  letter 
in  reply,  to  which  we  call  the  attention  of  our 
readers,  and  with  it,  we  bring  this  work  to  a 
close. 


296         The  Earth  and  the  World 

"  Lyme,  Conn.,  Nov.  26,  1878. 
"  A.  G.  Jennings,  Esq., 

"  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 
••  My  dear  Sir  : 

"  I    thank   you  for  your  pamphlet  and  accompanying 
letter. 

"  For  some  time  I  have  stated  in  lectures,  and  elsewhere, 
that  the  whole  domain  of  geology  lies  between  the  first  and 
second  verses  of  Genesis,  first  chapter;  and  that  the  subsequent 
narrative  describes  the  several  steps  of  the  Divine  movement  in 
fitting  up  the  earth  for  the  human  dispensation.  This  allows 
us  to  consider  the  day  as  being  the  common  natural  day ;  and 
I  like  to  adhere  to  literal  sense  of  Scripture  as  far  as  possible. 

"  As  I  understand  your  pamphlet,  there  are  no  points  of  im- 
portance to  which  I  should  take  exception.  Perhaps  I  ought 
to  except  the  idea  of  repulsion,  as  coexisting  and  coextensive 
with  attraction  in  the  celestial  economy.  The  idea  is  worth 
thinking  about ;  though,  if  admitted,  it  would  compel  a  revisal 
of  no  small  part  of  our  science. 

"  I  ought  to  say  that  it  is  a  great  satisfaction  to  me  to  see 
Christian  business  men  interesting  themselves  in  standing  up 
against  the  unbelief  and  lax  theology  of  the  times. 

"  Very  truly  yours, 

(Signed.)         "  E.  F.  BuRR." 


ir 


THE  END 


y 
I. 


'^LUMPf 


T  -^ 


COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY 


c 


